A257 SM

A257/A269 SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
000836MIU
SERVICE MANUAL
A257/A269
A257/A269 SERVICE MANUAL
000836MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION. All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies. They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE A257 A269 COMPANY GESTETNER RICOH CS210 Aficio 6010 CS210e Aficio 6110 SAVIN SDC410 SDC410E
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. * 1 DATE 6/99 7/99 COMMENTS Original Printing Revised Pages
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OVERALL INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 MAJOR UNITS ................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 1-2 1.1.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ................................ 1-6 1.1.4 COPY PAPER SIZES....................................................................... 1-7 1.1.5 NOISE EMISSION............................................................................ 1-8 1.1.6 POWER CONSUMPTION ................................................................ 1-8 1.2 MECHANISM OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 1-9 1.2.1 IMAGE GENERATION PROCESS................................................... 1-9 1.2.2 MAJOR UNITS AND PAPER PATH ............................................... 1-11 1.3 PARTS LAYOUT ..................................................................................... 1-13 1.3.1 MAJOR UNIT LAYOUT DIAGRAM................................................. 1-13 1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 1-14 1.5 AIR FLOW ............................................................................................... 1-15 1.5.1 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 1 ................................................................... 1-15 1.5.2 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 2 ................................................................... 1-16 1.6 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT .............................................................. 1-17 1.6.1 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 1 .................................................. 1-17 1.6.2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 2 .................................................. 1-18 1.6.3 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 3 .................................................. 1-19 1.6.4 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 4 .................................................. 1-20 1.6.5 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 5 .................................................. 1-21 1.6.6 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 6 .................................................. 1-22 1.6.7 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 7 .................................................. 1-23 1.7 ELECTRICAL PARTS DESCRIPTIONS.................................................. 1-24
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 2-1
2.1 PROCESS CONTROL .............................................................................. 2-1 2.1.1 OVERVIEW ...................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ................................................................... 2-2 Overview............................................................................................... 2-2 Potential Control Timing ....................................................................... 2-2 2.1.3 PROCESS CONTROL CORRECTION .......................................... 2-4 What is process control ? .................................................................... 2-4 How is it done? ..................................................................................... 2-4 Process Control Correction Timing..................................................... 2-5 Relationship Between Process Control Correction, ACC, and Other Corrections .................................................................... 2-5
SM i A257/A269
2.1.4 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK OPERATION FLOW............. 2-6 Step 1: VSG Adjustment....................................................................... 2-7 Step 2: Generating ID Sensor Patch Patterns ...................................... 2-7 Step 3: Sensor Pattern Potential Detection .......................................... 2-8 Step 4: Sensor Pattern Density Detection ............................................ 2-9 Process................................................................................................. 2-9 Step 5: Toner Amount Calculation ...................................................... 2-11 Step 6: Development Potential Calculation......................................... 2-11 Step 7: Selecting the Optimum VD, VB, VL ........................................ 2-12 2.1.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL ......................................................... 2-13 Toner Supply Control Modes .............................................................. 2-13 TD Sensor Output............................................................................... 2-14 Toner Supply Calculation.................................................................... 2-14 Detecting VSP for Toner Supply Control ............................................ 2-14 Calculating the Amount of Toner on the Drum.................................... 2-15 Toner Near End/Toner End Detection ................................................ 2-15 2.2 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................ 2-17 2.2.1 MAJOR COMPONENTS ................................................................ 2-17 2.2.2 DRUM UNIT DRIVE ....................................................................... 2-18 Drum Drive ......................................................................................... 2-18 Cleaning Drive .................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT .............................................................. 2-19 2.2.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT CLEANER ............................................ 2-20 2.2.5 CLEANING MECHANISM .............................................................. 2-21 Cleaning ............................................................................................. 2-21 Lubricant Application .......................................................................... 2-21 2.2.6 PRE-CLEANING CORONA (PCC) ................................................. 2-21 2.2.7 QUENCHING.................................................................................. 2-22 2.2.8 CARRIER CATCHER ..................................................................... 2-22 2.3 SCANNER UNIT ..................................................................................... 2-23 2.3.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................... 2-23 2.3.2 SCANNER ...................................................................................... 2-24 2.3.3 SCANNER DRIVE .......................................................................... 2-25 2.3.4 COLOR CCD .................................................................................. 2-26 2.3.5 WHITE PLATE SCANNING............................................................ 2-27 2.3.6 SCANNER IPU ............................................................................... 2-27 2.3.7 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................ 2-28 2.3.8 OTHERS ........................................................................................ 2-30 Anti-condensation Heater ................................................................... 2-30 Fans.................................................................................................... 2-30 2.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................ 2-31 2.4.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................... 2-31 2.4.2 SCANNER SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM ...................................... 2-32 2.4.3 SCANNER FUNCTIONS ................................................................ 2-33 Photoelectric Conversion.................................................................... 2-33 Signal Processing (Analog ASIC) ....................................................... 2-33 A/D Conversion................................................................................... 2-33 Shading Compensation Circuit ........................................................... 2-34 D/A Conversion................................................................................... 2-35
A257/A269 ii SM
Scan Line Correction Circuit ............................................................... 2-35 2.4.4 IPU SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM.................................................. 2-36 2.4.5 IPU FUNCTIONS............................................................................ 2-37 Scanner Conversion and Picture Element Correction ...................... 2-37 ACS (Auto Color Selection) ................................................................ 2-39 Automatic Original Type Selection...................................................... 2-40 Image Separation ............................................................................... 2-41 Filtering and Color Conversion ........................................................... 2-42 Magnification Processing.................................................................... 2-46 Image Creation ................................................................................... 2-47 Gradation Processing ......................................................................... 2-49 Area Manipulation Functions .............................................................. 2-52 CPU .................................................................................................... 2-52 IPU Board Test ................................................................................... 2-52 2.5 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................ 2-53 2.5.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................... 2-53 2.5.2 LD UNIT ......................................................................................... 2-54 LD Safety Switch ................................................................................ 2-54 LD Unit Configuration ......................................................................... 2-55 Auto Power Control (APC) .................................................................. 2-56 2.5.3 LASER OPTICS SYSTEM.............................................................. 2-57 Cylindrical Lens .................................................................................. 2-57 Polygon Mirror .................................................................................... 2-57 f Lenses and the BTL....................................................................... 2-58 Laser Synchronization Mechanism ..................................................... 2-58 Laser Exposure Control ...................................................................... 2-59 Multibeam Laser Exposure ................................................................. 2-60 Laser Diode Control Board Functions................................................. 2-60 2.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................................................ 2-61 2.6.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................... 2-61 2.6.2 REVOLVER MECHANISM ............................................................. 2-62 Revolver Drive .................................................................................... 2-63 Revolver Home Position Detection ..................................................... 2-64 2.6.3 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM...................................................... 2-65 2.6.4 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE ................................................................ 2-66 2.6.5 DEVELOPER AGITATION ............................................................. 2-66 2.6.6 TONER AGITATION....................................................................... 2-67 2.6.7 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ................................................................... 2-67 2.6.8 TD SENSOR NONCONTACT COUPLER ...................................... 2-68 2.6.9 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM ..................................................... 2-69 2.6.10 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ............................................. 2-70 2.6.11 TONER CARTRIDGE SHUTTER LOCK PIN ............................... 2-70 2.6.12 INCORRECT TONER INSTALLATION PREVENTION ................ 2-70 2.6.13 TONER END SENSOR ................................................................ 2-71 2.6.14 TONER END RECOVERY ........................................................... 2-72 2.6.15 TONER LOOSENING................................................................... 2-73 2.6.16 REVOLVER LOCK MECHANISM ................................................ 2-74 2.7 TRANSFER BELT UNITS ....................................................................... 2-75 2.7.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................... 2-75
SM iii A257/A269
2.7.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT SECTION............................................. 2-76 Image Transfer Belt Drive Mechanism................................................ 2-76 Belt Tension Release Mechanism ...................................................... 2-77 Image Transfer Belt Bias .................................................................... 2-78 Belt Mark Sensor Mechanism ............................................................. 2-78 Belt Cleaning Mechanism ................................................................... 2-79 Cleaning Vacuum ............................................................................... 2-81 Toner Collection Mechanism .............................................................. 2-81 2.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER BELT SECTION ............................................ 2-82 Paper Transfer Unit Contact/Release Mechanism.............................. 2-82 Paper Transfer Belt Drive ................................................................... 2-82 Paper Transfer Belt Cleaning.............................................................. 2-83 Paper Transfer Bias............................................................................ 2-84 Paper Transfer Belt Discharge............................................................ 2-85 Paper Separation Mechanism............................................................. 2-85 2.8 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION SECTION .................................... 2-86 2.8.1 MAJOR COMPONENTS ................................................................ 2-86 Diagram .............................................................................................. 2-86 2.8.2 PAPER TRAY SECTION................................................................ 2-87 Paper Feed/Separation Mechanism ................................................... 2-87 Reverse Roller Release Mechanism................................................... 2-87 Paper Feed Operation ........................................................................ 2-87 Paper Lift Mechanism ......................................................................... 2-88 Paper End Detection........................................................................... 2-89 Paper Near End Detection.................................................................. 2-89 2.8.3 BY-PASS PAPER FEED SECTION ............................................... 2-90 By-pass Feed Table............................................................................ 2-90 By-pass Feed Unit .............................................................................. 2-90 By-pass Paper End Sensor ................................................................ 2-90 By-pass Pick-up Roller Pressure ........................................................ 2-91 By-pass Pick-up/Reverse Solenoid Timing Chart ............................... 2-92 2.8.4 PAPER FEED DRIVE..................................................................... 2-93 Tray Feed Unit Drive........................................................................... 2-93 Registration Roller Drive..................................................................... 2-93 By-pass Feed Unit Drive..................................................................... 2-93 2.9 TRANSPORT, FUSING, AND EXIT ........................................................ 2-94 2.9.1 MAJOR COMPONENTS ................................................................ 2-94 2.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM...................................................................... 2-95 2.9.3 FUSING OVERVIEW...................................................................... 2-96 2.9.4 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................... 2-97 2.9.5 FUSING PRESSURE ..................................................................... 2-97 2.9.6 OIL SUPPLY................................................................................... 2-98 2.9.7 CLEANING MECHANISM .............................................................. 2-98 2.9.8 PAPER EXIT AND PAPER INVERSION ........................................ 2-99 Paper Exit Mechanism........................................................................ 2-99 Junction Gate Mechanism .................................................................. 2-99 Paper Exit Cover................................................................................. 2-99 2.10 DUPLEX TRAY ................................................................................... 2-100 2.10.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 2-100
A257/A269 iv SM
2.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM.................................................................. 2-101 2.10.3 PAPER FEED INTO THE DUPLEX TRAY ................................. 2-102 Duplex Stacking................................................................................ 2-102 Paper Feed from the Duplex Tray..................................................... 2-102 Duplex Entrance to Duplex Tray ....................................................... 2-103 2.10.4 JOGGER MECHANISM ............................................................. 2-104 2.10.5 PAPER FEED FROM THE DUPLEX TRAY ............................... 2-105 Bottom Plate Lift Mechanism ............................................................ 2-105 2.10.6 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ............................................. 2-106 2.11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION............................................................... 2-107 2.11.1 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 2-107 2.11.2 NORMAL COPY MODE ............................................................. 2-108 Main Power Switch Off State ............................................................ 2-108 Power-off (Sleep) State .................................................................... 2-108 Copier Modes ................................................................................... 2-109 2.11.3 OPERATION PANEL.................................................................. 2-110 2.11.4 PRINTER CONTROLLER INTERFACE ..................................... 2-111
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.................................................. 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 DIMENSIONS................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 3-2 Environmental Requirements................................................................ 3-2 Minimum Space Requirements............................................................. 3-3 Power Requirements ............................................................................ 3-4 3.2 COPIER..................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ..................................................................... 3-5 3.2.2 PREPERATION................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.3 DEVELOPER INSTALLATION ....................................................... 3-10 3.2.4 LOADING TONER CARTRIDGES ................................................. 3-14 3.2.5 FUSING UNIT................................................................................. 3-16 3.2.6 DEFAULT SETTINGS AND OPERATION CHECKS...................... 3-17 3.2.7 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................................................................. 3-19 3.2.8 COUNTER DISPLAY SETTING ...................................................... 3-19 3.2.9 RESETTING THE ELECTRONIC TOTAL COUNTER.................... 3-19 3.2.10 PREPARATION FOR TRANSPORT ............................................ 3-20 3.3 PLATEN COVER (A749-01).................................................................... 3-21 3.3.1 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 3-21 3.4 ARDF (A663)........................................................................................... 3-22 3.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-22 3.4.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 3-23 3.5 SORTER STAPLER (A831) .................................................................... 3-24 3.5.1 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 3-24 3.6 LCT (A683).............................................................................................. 3-29 3.6.1 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 3-29
SM
A257/A269
Rev. 04/2000
3.7 LCT ADAPTER (A840) ........................................................................... 3-30 3.7.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 3-30 3.8 FILM PROJECTOR TABLE (A702-19) ................................................... 3-36 3.8.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 3-36 3.9 FILM PROJECTOR UNIT(A846) ............................................................ 3-38 3.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-38 3.9.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 3-39 3.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER .................................................................... 3-46 3.11 USER CODE SETTING ........................................................................ 3-47
SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 4-1
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES ........................................................ 4-1 4.1.1 HOW TO ENTER AN SP MODE...................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 SP MODE TYPES............................................................................ 4-3 4.1.3 SP MODE CHART ........................................................................... 4-3 4.1.4 SP4-301 APS OPERATION CHECK DETAILS ............................... 4-3 4.1.5 TEST PATTERN .............................................................................. 4-5 4.1.6 SP5-803 INPUT CHECK.................................................................. 4-6 4.1.7 SP5-804 OUTPUT CHECK.............................................................. 4-9 4.1.8 SP5-114-000 ACCOUNT COLOR MODE SETUP......................... 4-10 4.1.9 SP5-955 PRINTER INTERNAL PATTERN .................................... 4-11 4.2 USER TOOLS......................................................................................... 4-11 4.2.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS ................................................... 4-11 4.2.2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF USER TOOLS .............................. 4-12 4.3 TP/SW/LED/FUSE .................................................................................. 4-12 4.3.1 MAIN CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS .......................................... 4-12 4.3.2 LD MAIN CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS..................................... 4-13 4.3.3 I/O CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS .............................................. 4-13 4.3.4 FUSE SPECIFICATIONS............................................................... 4-19 4.3.5 LED/SW SPECIFICATIONS OF SCANNER IPU BOARD ............. 4-20 LED Specifications ............................................................................. 4-20 SW Specifications .............................................................................. 4-20 4.4 ROM HISTORY ....................................................................................... 4-21
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 5-1
5.1 PM PROCEDURES .................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 PM-RELATED COUNTERS............................................................. 5-1 SP7-803 (PM Counter Display) ............................................................ 5-1 5.1.2 REGULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW DIAGRAM ........ 5-4 5.2 REGULAR PM ITEMS .............................................................................. 5-7 5.2.1 REGULAR PM TABLE ..................................................................... 5-7 Peripherals ......................................................................................... 5-11
A257/A269
vi
SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 6-1
6.1 PM-RELATED COUNTERS ...................................................................... 6-1 6.2 SERVICE REMARKS ................................................................................ 6-1 6.3 COVERS AND FILTERS ........................................................................... 6-2 6.3.1 UPPER AND LOWER FRONT COVER ........................................... 6-2 6.3.2 RIGHT-SIDE FRONT COVER AND RIGHT EDGE COVER ............ 6-2 6.3.3 INNER COVERS .............................................................................. 6-3 6.3.4 REAR COVERS ............................................................................... 6-3 6.3.5 LEFT COVERS................................................................................. 6-4 6.3.6 EXPOSURE GLASS......................................................................... 6-4 6.3.7 OPERATION PANEL........................................................................ 6-5 6.3.8 USED TONER TANK ....................................................................... 6-5 6.3.9 CHARGE CORONA FILTER ............................................................ 6-6 6.3.10 DUST AND OZONE FILTERS........................................................ 6-6 6.3.11 SCANNER FILTER......................................................................... 6-7 6.3.12 REVOLVER FILTER....................................................................... 6-7 6.3.13 INNER COVER FILTER ................................................................. 6-8 6.3.14 FUSING UNIT FILTER ................................................................... 6-8 6.4 UNIT REMOVAL ....................................................................................... 6-9 6.4.1 REVOLVER/DRUM DRAWER ......................................................... 6-9 6.4.2 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL................................................................. 6-10 6.4.3 REINSTALLING THE REVOLVER/DRUM DRAWER .................... 6-11 6.4.4 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL .................................. 6-12 Reinstalling the Image Transfer Belt Unit ........................................... 6-13 6.4.5 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT REMOVAL ........................................... 6-14 6.4.6 REMOVING THE FUSING UNIT .................................................... 6-15 6.5 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................ 6-16 6.5.1 DRUM REPLACEMENT................................................................. 6-16 Post-replacement Procedure .............................................................. 6-17 6.5.2 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT............................................. 6-18 6.5.3 CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT............................................ 6-19 6.5.4 LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT ............................................... 6-19 6.5.5 BIAS ROLLER BLADE REPLACEMENT ....................................... 6-20 6.5.6 CHARGE GRID AND CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT............... 6-20 6.5.7 PCC REPLACEMENT .................................................................... 6-21 6.5.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................ 6-22 6.5.9 ID SENSOR REPLACEMENT ........................................................ 6-23 6.6 SCANNER UNIT ..................................................................................... 6-24 6.6.1 EXPOSURE LAMP REPLACEMENT ............................................. 6-24 6.6.2 SBU REPLACEMENT .................................................................... 6-25 6.6.3 OPENING THE SCANNER UNIT ................................................... 6-26 6.6.4 SCANNER IPU MAIN/SUB BOARD REPLACEMENT ................... 6-28 6.6.5 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT................................................ 6-29 6.6.6 APS AND H.P. SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................................... 6-32 6.7 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENT................................................................. 6-33
SM vii A257/A269
6.7.1 PRINTER ADJUSTMENT ............................................................ 6-33 Auto Color Calibration (ACC).............................................................. 6-33 KCMY Color Balance Adjustment ....................................................... 6-33 ACC Target Modification..................................................................... 6-36 6.7.2 MAIN SCAN POSITION DOT CORRECTION ................................ 6-37 6.8 LASER OPTICS SECTION ..................................................................... 6-40 6.8.1 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR REPLACEMENT ............................ 6-40 6.8.2 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR REPLACEMENT ............ 6-42 6.8.3 LD UNIT REPLACEMENT.............................................................. 6-42 LD Pitch Check and Adjustment] ........................................................ 6-43 6.8.4 SQUARENESS ADJUSTMENT...................................................... 6-47 6.8.5 LD CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT ....................................... 6-49 6.9 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................................................ 6-50 6.9.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT...................................................... 6-50 Developer Collection........................................................................... 6-50 6.9.2 DEVELOPER INSTALLATION ....................................................... 6-53 6.9.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REPLACEMENT ....................................... 6-58 6.9.4 TONER CATCH COVER CLEANING............................................. 6-59 6.9.5 REVOLVER MOTOR REPLACEMENT.......................................... 6-60 6.9.6 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT............................... 6-61 6.9.7 TD SENSOR NONCONTACT COUPLER REPLACEMENT .......... 6-62 Main Unit Element .............................................................................. 6-62 TD Sensor Interface (I/F) Board.......................................................... 6-63 6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION.............................................................. 6-65 6.10.1 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT ................................ 6-65 6.10.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT BLADE REPLACEMENT ................... 6-67 6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT LUBRICANT BAR AND LUBRICANT BRUSH REPLACEMENT ............................................................... 6-68 6.10.4 PAPER TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT ............................... 6-69 6.10.5 PAPER TRANSFER BELT BLADE/CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT .......................................................................... 6-69 6.10.6 BACK BRUSH REPLACEMENT .................................................. 6-70 6.10.7 PAPER TRANSFER BELT DISCHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT............................................................................. 6-70 6.10.8 PAPER DISCHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT ............ 6-71 6.11 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION SECTION .................................. 6-72 6.11.1 BY-PASS FEED TABLE REMOVAL............................................. 6-72 6.11.2 BY-PASS FEED PAPER WIDTH SENSOR REPLACEMENT...... 6-73 6.11.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................... 6-74 6.11.4 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT ................................ 6-74 6.11.5 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT................... 6-75 6.11.6 BY-PASS PAPER FEED UNIT REMOVAL................................... 6-75 6.11.7 BY-PASS PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION........................... 6-76 6.11.8 REGISTRATION SENSOR REPLACEMENT............................... 6-78 6.11.9 PAPER TRAY ROLLER REPLACEMENT.................................... 6-78 6.11.10 PAPER FEED UNIT AND PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT......................................................................... 6-79 6.11.11 COPY IMAGE AREA ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 6-80 6.12 PAPER TRANSPORT, FUSING, AND PAPER EXIT ............................ 6-83
A257/A269 viii SM
6.12.1 TRANSPORT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................... 6-83 6.12.2 FUSING UNIT TOP COVER REMOVAL ...................................... 6-83 6.12.3 OIL SUPPLY UNIT REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING................ 6-84 6.12.4 HOT ROLLER BLADE REPLACEMENT ...................................... 6-85 6.12.5 CLEANING THE CLEANING ROLLER SCRAPER ...................... 6-86 6.12.6 FUSING THERMOFUSE AND THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . 6-86 6.12.7 FUSING UNIT DISASSEMBLY .................................................... 6-87 6.12.8 FUSING LAMP REPLACEMENT ................................................. 6-88 6.12.9 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT................................................... 6-88 6.12.10 HOT ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER CLEANING....................... 6-89 6.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP/ROLLER REPLACEMENT........... 6-89 6.12.12 PRESSURE THERMOFUSE AND THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ........................................................................ 6-90 6.12.13 PRESSURE CLEANING ROLLER CLEANING .......................... 6-90 6.12.14 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT............................................. 6-91 6.12.15 CAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN USING A FUSING UNIT THAT HAS BEEN IN STOCK FOR A LONG PERIOD ............... 6-92 6.13 DUPLEX UNIT....................................................................................... 6-93 6.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL ........................................................... 6-93 6.13.2 SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT ................................... 6-93 6.13.3 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT................................................. 6-94 6.13.4 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................... 6-95 6.14 SYSTEM AND ELECTRONICS............................................................. 6-97 6.14.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE USING AN IC CARD................................ 6-97 Care of the IC Card............................................................................. 6-97 Upgrading the Main Control Board Software ...................................... 6-97 Upgrading the Scanner IPU Software................................................. 6-98 NV-RAM Uploading and Downloading.............................................. 6-101 Upload/download procedure ............................................................. 6-101 6.14.2 RAM CLEAR............................................................................... 6-102 RAM Clear Procedure....................................................................... 6-102 6.14.3 MAIN CONTROL BOARD .......................................................... 6-103 Main Control Board Replacement Procedure ................................... 6-103 6.14.4 COUNTERS ............................................................................... 6-104 About the Total Counter.................................................................... 6-104 Mechanical Counter.......................................................................... 6-104 NV-RAM Replacement Procedure .................................................... 6-105 6.14.5 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION ................................................. 6-106
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................. 7-1
7.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS ......................................... 7-1 7.1.1 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK RESULTS (SP3-975-00) ...... 7-1 7.1.2 DEVELOPER SETUP RESULTS (SP3-964-00)............................... 7-2 Developer Agitation (SP2-225) OPERATION FLOW......................... 7-3 7.1.3 TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION RESULTS (SP3-005-006) ............... 7-3 7.1.4 SELF-CHECK PROCESS CONTROL RELATED SCS .................... 7-4
SM ix A257/A269
SC385: Vsg Adjustment Error............................................................. 7-4 7.2 SC CODE TABLE...................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 DRUM LIGHT FATIGUE............................................................................. 7-5
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER A663

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 8-1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................... 8-2
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................ 8-2 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.................................................................. 8-3
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION................................... 8-4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................. 8-5

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM ........................................................... 8-5 SEPARATION AND PAPER FEED MECHANISM .................................... 8-6 FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..................................................... 8-7 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION................................................................... 8-8 PAPER TRANSPORT MECHANISM ........................................................ 8-9 THICK/THIN ORIGINAL MODES ............................................................ 8-10 ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM ..................................................... 8-11 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED MECHANISM ........................................ 8-12
TIMING CHARTS............................................................................. 8-13

5.1 A4 SIDEWAYS: 1 SIDED ORIGINAL ...................................................... 8-13 5.2 COMBINE 2 ORIGINAL MODE............................................................... 8-14 5.3 A4 SIDEWAYS: DUPLEX........................................................................ 8-15
SERVICE TABLES .......................................................................... 8-16

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 DIP SWITCHES ...................................................................................... 8-16 VARIABLE RESISTORS ......................................................................... 8-17 LED ......................................................................................................... 8-17 FUSE....................................................................................................... 8-17
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 8-18

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT..................................................... 8-18 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................ 8-19 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 8-20 ORIGINAL SET AND WIDTH SENSOR REPLACEMENT ...................... 8-21 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT .......................................... 8-22 7.5.1 ONE SIDED THIN ORIGINAL MODE............................................. 8-22 7.5.2 TWO SIDED ORIGINAL MODE ..................................................... 8-23 7.6 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION (DF POSITIONING) ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................ 8-24
A257/A269
SM
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION .............................................. 9-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 9-1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................... 9-2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT..................................................... 9-3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................... 9-4 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................ 9-5
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................. 9-6

2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM..................................................................... 9-6 2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM................ 9-7 Tray lifting conditions ............................................................................ 9-7 Tray lowering conditions ....................................................................... 9-7 2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM ............................................................. 9-8
SERVICE TABLES ............................................................................ 9-9

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 DIP SWITCHES ........................................................................................ 9-9 TEST POINTS........................................................................................... 9-9 SWITCHES ............................................................................................... 9-9 FUSES ...................................................................................................... 9-9
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 9-10

4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT........................................................................ 9-10 Tray Cover .......................................................................................... 9-10 Front Cover......................................................................................... 9-10 Rear Cover ......................................................................................... 9-10 Right Lower Cover .............................................................................. 9-10 Upper Cover ....................................................................................... 9-10 4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... 9-11 4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS ............. 9-11 Pick-up Roller ..................................................................................... 9-11 Paper Feed Roller............................................................................... 9-11 Separation Roller ................................................................................ 9-11 4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................... 9-12 Tray Lift Sensor .................................................................................. 9-12 Paper End Sensor .............................................................................. 9-12 4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT......................................................... 9-13 4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE ........................................................ 9-14
SORTER STAPLER A831

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ............................................ 10-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 10-1 1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT.......................................................................... 10-3 1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................ 10-3
SM xi A257/A269
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................. 10-4
DETAILED DESCRIPTION.............................................................. 10-5

2.1 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................ 10-5 2.1.1 NORMAL (PROOF MODE) AND SORT/STACK MODE ................ 10-5 Normal (Proof) Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Proof Tray) .................................................................... 10-5 Sort Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins).......................... 10-6 Stack Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins) ....................... 10-7 Reverse Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins)................... 10-8 2.1.2 STAPLE MODE .............................................................................. 10-9 2.2 TURN GATE SECTION......................................................................... 10-11 2.3 BIN DRIVE MECHANISM...................................................................... 10-12 2.4 BIN HOME POSITION........................................................................... 10-13 2.5 JOGGER SECTION .............................................................................. 10-14 2.6 BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION .................................................... 10-15 2.7 GRIP ASSEMBLY ................................................................................. 10-16 2.7.1 GRIP MOTOR ................................................................................ 10-7 2.7.2 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR ................................................................... 10-18 2.8 STAPLE UNIT ....................................................................................... 10-19 2.8.1 STAPLE UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM............................................ 10-19 2.8.2 STAPLER ..................................................................................... 10-20 Staple Prohibit Conditions ................................................................ 10-21 2.8.3 STAPLE UNIT PULLED-OUT MECHANISM ................................ 10-22
REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS..................................... 10-23

3.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL............................................................ 10-23 3.2 STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION.................................... 10-24 3.3 JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIOIN ............................ 10-25 Removal ........................................................................................... 10-25 Installation ........................................................................................ 10-25 3.4 BINS REMOVAL ................................................................................... 10-26 Removal ........................................................................................... 10-26 Installation ........................................................................................ 10-28 3.5 MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL..................................................................... 10-30 3.6 GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL............................................................... 10-31 3.7 UPPER GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL.................................................. 10-32 3.8 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR REMOVAL ......................................................... 10-33 3.9 HELICAL WHEELS REMOVAL............................................................. 10-34 Removal ........................................................................................... 10-34 Front Helical Wheel .......................................................................... 10-34 Rear Helical Wheel ........................................................................... 10-35 Installation ........................................................................................ 10-36 Rear Helical Wheel ........................................................................... 10-36 Front Helical Wheel .......................................................................... 10-37 Alignment of the 2 Helical Wheels .................................................... 10-38 3.10 GRIP MOTOR AND SENSORS REMOVAL........................................ 10-39 3.10.1 GRIP MOTOR/GRIP MOTOR HP SENSOR/GRIP SHIFT MOTOR HP SENSOR REMOVAL.................................. 10-39
A257/A269 xii SM
3.11 MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT ....................................... 10-40
SP MODE AND STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ................... 10-41

4.1 SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD) ................................... 10-41 4.1.1 DIP SWITCHES............................................................................ 10-41 DIP 1 (Mode) SP Mode..................................................................... 10-41 DIP 2 (Staple) Staple Position Adjustment (A) DIP 3 (Chuck) Staple Position Adjustment (B)...................................................... 10-41
FILM PROJECTOR UNIT A846

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................... 11-1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT AND DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................... 11-2 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS......................................................... 11-3
3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 11-3 3.2 SHADING ................................................................................................ 11-4 3.3 MIRROR UNIT ........................................................................................ 11-5
CONTROLLER INTERFACE A839

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................... 12-1
APPENDIX A
SC CODE TABLE.............................................................................................A-1
APPENDIX-B
SP MODE.........................................................................................................B-1
APPENDIX-C
POP-UP DISPLAYS ........................................................................................ C-1
SM
xiii
A257/A269
APPENDIX-D
TIMING CHARTS MAIN SWITCH ON .................................................................................... D-1 A4/LT SIZE:1C MODE(1 TO 2) ................................................................. D-2 A4/LT SIZE: FC MODE (1TO 4) ................................................................ D-3 A3/DLT: FC MODE.................................................................................... D-4 A4/LT: 1C,HALF SPEED MODE (1 TO 2) ................................................. D-5 A4/LT SIZE: FC HALF SPEED MODE (1 TO 2)........................................ D-6 BY-PASS FEED: NORMAL PAPER .......................................................... D-7 BY-PASS FEED: OHP (HALF SPEED) ..................................................... D-7 PAPER TRAY FEED:NORMAL PAPER.................................................... D-8
A257/A269
xiv
SM
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off. 4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period (the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed. 6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed. 2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified intervals. 3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. 2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. CAUTION MARKING:
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
SORTER STAPLER A831
FILM PROJECTOR UNIT A846
APPENDIX
TAB POSITION 8
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER A663
TAB POSITION 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB POSITION 6
TAB POSITION 5
TAB POSITION 4
SERVICE TABLES
TAB POSITION 3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
TAB POSITION 2
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
TAB POSITION 1
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MAJOR UNITS
A257 copier: Basic model A269 copier: Editing model
6 1
2 3
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Original tray (A430) FPU (A846) FPU table (A702-19) LCT (A683) + LCT adapter (A840-01) 20 bin sorter stapler (A831) ARDF (A663)
Other options Platen cover (A749-01) Controller interface (A839)
SM
1-1
A257/A269
Overall Information
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS

Type: Copy process: Number of scans: Pre-scan: Resolution: Gradations: Original types: Maximum original size: Original reference position: Maximum print area: Copy paper size: Console type Dry electrostatic transfer system 1 (image memory for A3/DLT full color copy is installed) Only when Auto Original Type mode is used Copy mode (read/write): 400 dpi/600 dpi Print mode (write): 600 dpi 256 gradations (8 bits) Sheet, book A3/11" x 17" Left rear corner 323 mm x 473 mm (12.7 x 18.6) First tray Maximum: Minimum: Other trays Maximum: Minimum: By-pass Maximum: Minimum: Auto/duplex Maximum: Minimum: A4 (S/L)/81/2" x 11" (S/L) A5 (S)/ 81/2" x 51/2" (S) A3/11" x 17" A5 (S)/ 81/2" x 51/2" (S) 13" x 19" (330 x 483 mm) Postcard (100 x 148 mm) A3/11" x 17" A5 (S)/ 81/2" x 51/2" (S)
Paper thickness:
Tray feed (including duplex): 64 to 105 g/m2, 17 to 28 lb. By-pass feed: 64 to 256 g/m2, 17 to 68 lb. Thick paper 1 (105 ~ 157 g/m2, 28 ~ 42 lb.) Thick paper 2 (157 ~ 256 g/m2, 42 ~ 68 lb.) Leading edge: 42 mm Left and right: 22 mm (4 mm or less in total) Trailing edge: 22 mm
Non-reproduction area:
A257/A269
1-2
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Copying speed (cpm):

Full color 10 5 4.5 2 8 5 10 5 C/M/ Y/K 40 20 7 3.5 31 15 35 20 B, G 13.5 7 5 2.5 8 5 13.5 7 R 10 5 4.5 2 8 5 10 5 K+M K+Y 13.5 7 5 2.5 8 5 13.5 7 K+C 10 5 4.5 2 8 4 10 5
Normal paper/ normal mode OHP/thick paper ARDF 1 to 1 Duplex feed
A4/81/2" x 11" or less A3/11" x 17" A4/81/2" x 11" or less A3/11" x 17" A4/81/2" x 11" or less A3/11" x 17" A4/81/2" x 11" or less A3/11" x 17"T
Warm-up time: First copy time (A4/81/2" x 11")
8 minutes and 30 seconds or less Normal Paper: Full color: 16.5 seconds or less K, C, M, Y: 8 seconds or less B, G: 14 seconds or less R: 16.5 seconds or less Thick paper/OHP: Full color: 29 seconds or less Tray: 500-sheet paper tray: 3 trays By-pass feed: 50 sheets Duplex tray: 50-sheets (30 sheets for A3/11" x 17" 20 sheets (Full color) Tray: FRR system (Stack height: 53 mm max.) By-pass feed: FRR system (Stack height: 6 mm max.) Duplex tray: Friction roller separation system
Paper feed capacity:
Paper feed system:
Reproduction Ratios:
81/2" x 11"LT/11" x 17"DLT version Enlargement 121, 129, 155, 200, 400% Full size 100% Reduction 25, 50, 65, 73, 78, 85, 93% Programmable 2 user ratios Zoom 25% to 400% in 1% steps
SM
1-3
A257/A269
Overall Information
SPECIFICATIONS
Number of continuous copies: Scanning system: Light source: Print system: Development system: Drum cleaning system: Image Transfer system: Fusing system: Dimensions:
1 to 999 sheets 3-line 1-chip CCD sensor (400 dpi/5,000 pixels) 1-halogen-lamp indirect lighting (frosted surface) Twin laser beam, 600 dpi 2-component magnetic brush Counter blade Belt transfer system Heat and pressure roller system with oil application
A269V155.WMF
A269V156.WMF
1. Copier 730 mm (W1) x 780 mm (D) x 980 mm (H1) (28.7 x 30.7 x 38.6) 2. Copier + Platen Cover + Paper Exit Tray + By-pass Tray 1,643 mm (W2) x 780 mm (D) x 1,045 mm (H2) (64.7 x 30.7 x 41.1)
A257/A269
1-4
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
A269V158.WMF
3. Copier + ARDF + LCT + Sorter Stapler + By-pass Tray 1,930 mm (W3) x 780 mm (D) x 1,110 mm (H3) (75.9 x 30.7 x 43.7) Weight: Power source: 240 kg (529.2 LBS.) 120 V, 60 Hz, 16 A (North America) 220 ~ 240 V, 50 Hz, 8 A (Europe, Mid-East) 220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 8 A (Asia)
SM
1-5
A257/A269
Overall Information
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Size (width x length) [mm] A3 (297 x 420) L B4 (257 x 364) L A4 (210 x 297) L A4 (297 x 210) S B5 (182 x 257) L B5 (257 x 182) S A5 (148 x 210) L A5 (210 x 148) S B6 (128 x 182) L B6 (182 x 128) S 11" x 17" (DLT) 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 8.5" x 14" (LG) 8.5" x 13" (F4) 8.25" x 13" 8" x 13"(F) 8.5" x 11" (LT) 11" x 8.5" (LT) 8" x 10.5" 8" x 10" 5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) 8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) A6 (105 x 148) L Platen Inch No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Metric Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No Inch No No Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No ARDF Metric Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No No
NOTE: In the above table "Inch" refers to versions of the machine that use nonmetric traditional paper sizes and "Metric" refers to versions that use ISO standard paper sizes.
A257/A269
1-6
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Size (width x length) [mm] A3 (297 x 420) L B4 (257 x 364) L A4 (210 x 297) L A4 (297 x 210) S B5 (182 x 257) L B5 (257 x 182) S A5 (148 x 210) L A5 (210 x 148) S B6 (128 x 182) L B6 (182 x 128) S 13" x 19" 12" x 18" 11" x 17" (DLT) 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 8.5" x 14" (LG) 8.5" x 13" (F4) 8.25" x 13" 8" x 13"(F) 8.5" x 11" (LT) 11" x 8.5" (LT) 8" x 10.5" 8" x 10" 5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) 8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) A6 (105 x 148) L
1st Tray No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No
2nd/3rd Tray Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
Duplex Tray Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
By-pass Tray Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: The by-pass sizes shown above are those that the machine can automatically detect. When by-pass feeding other sizes, the user should select "Custom Size" and input the length and width. (Length limitations = 5.8 ~ 19, Width limitations = 3.9 ~ 13).
SM
1-7
A257/A269
Overall Information
1.1.4 COPY PAPER SIZES
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.5 NOISE EMISSION

Stand-by mode Copy-mode average Copier Only 54 dB (A) 70 dB (A)
1.1.6 POWER CONSUMPTION

1. Maximum power consumption 1.75 kVA 2. Average power consumption
Sleep mode Stand-by mode Warm-up time Copying 0.015 kW 0.6 kW 1.7 kW 1.5 kW
A257/A269
1-8
SM
MECHANISM OVERVIEW
1.2.1 IMAGE GENERATION PROCESS

2 13 1 7 6
3 4 14 10 8
11
12
9
A269V101.WMF
1. Drum charge The charge corona applies a negative charge to the OPC drum and the grid ensures that this charge is even. 2. Laser exposure The laser beam emitted from the laser assembly is reflected by the polygon mirror and projected onto the drum through the f lens, drum mirror, and toner shield glass. The laser output varies in intensity to correspond to the image data, and this forms a latent image. 3. Development The latent image on the drum attracts the negatively charged toner. Toner is preferentially attracted to those places on the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge. (The development units for each color are included in the revolver unit.) 4. Image transfer to image transfer belt Positive charge applied to the back of the image transfer belt transfers the toner image on the OPC drum to the image transfer belt.
SM
1-9
A257/A269
Overall Information
1.2 MECHANISM OVERVIEW
MECHANISM OVERVIEW
5. PCC (Pre-cleaning corona) The PCC discharges the photoconductor drum and applies AC and negative DC discharges to reduce the charge holding the residual toner to the drum, thereby improving the efficiency of cleaning. 6. Drum cleaning The cleaning brush increases drum cleaning efficiency by applying lubricant to the OPC drum. The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the OPC drum. 7. Quenching After cleaning, the OPC is fully exposed to light from an array of red LEDs, quenching the residual charge on the OPC drum in preparation for the next copy cycle. 8. Image transfer to paper The negatively charged toner image is transferred to the paper by giving a positive charge to the back of the paper. 9. Image transfer belt cleaning and lubricant application The brush applies lubricant, which makes it easier for the counter blade to scrape excess toner off the transfer belt. The lubricant improves toner transfer ability and reduces the amount of the partial blanking image. 10. Paper Separation A combination of curvature separation and corona discharge separate the paper from the paper transfer belt. The pick-off plate provides mechanical assistance to the separation process. 11. Paper transfer belt discharging The belt discharge corona unit removes the charge on the paper transfer belt. 12. Paper transfer belt cleaning The paper transfer belt blade and brush always contact the paper transfer belt to clean the belt surface. 13. Drum potential sensor The electrical potential on the OPC drum is sensed by the drum potential sensor for process control. 14. ID sensor The ID sensor senses the density of the test patch patterns developed on the OPC drum.
A257/A269
1-10
SM
MECHANISM OVERVIEW
3 4 8 5
6
A269V102.WMF
1. Scanner 400 dpi, 10-bit scanning in both main and sub scan directions 3-line CCD with reduction optics Halogen exposure lamp 5-phase micro-stepper motor drive 2. Operation panel 10.4-inch (640 x 480) color LCD (8 bit) touch-panel 3. Laser exposure unit 2 laser diode multi-beam system Optics: 6-sided polygon mirror + 2 f lenses + barrel toroidal lens (BTL) Polygon motor (23,622 rpm) 600 dpi (8 bit) print density Modulation: power modulation + pulse width modulation
SM
1-11
A257/A269
Overall Information
1.2.2 MAJOR UNITS AND PAPER PATH
MECHANISM OVERVIEW
4. Drum unit Drum unit contains OPC drum, charge corona unit, and cleaning unit. Charge corona unit: Single scorotron charge Quenching lamp: LED Drive: Synchronized with the image transfer belt (timing belt + flywheel) Potential sensor and ID sensor included Cleaning unit: Blade, brush, lubricant, and pre-cleaning corona 5. Image transfer and belt drive Image transfer belt: Full time contact with the drum Image transfer: Bias/roller indirect application Paper transfer: Belt transfer Registration: Synchronization by the belt mark detection sensor Image transfer belt: Driven by the image transfer belt motor Paper transfer belt: Driven by the paper transfer motor Separation: Curvature separation + corona discharge Belt cleaning: Counter blade system Lubrication: Brush roller with lubricant bar 6. Paper feed/transport system Paper feed: 3 front loading 500-sheet trays + by-pass transport Transport: Transport belt + vacuum fan Duplexing: Duplex unit installed 7. Development and toner supply Development: Two-component magnetic brush development Development color switching: Revolver system Image density control: TD sensor + ID sensor + process control Toner supply: Cartridge type Toner supply unit: Front of development units (on the revolver) 8. Fusing and paper exit section Fusing: Silicone rubber roller fusing Oil application method: roller Cleaning: Roller cleaning for hot and pressure rollers OHP/thick paper speed selection
A257/A269
1-12
SM
PARTS LAYOUT
1.3.1 MAJOR UNIT LAYOUT DIAGRAM

1 29 28 27 26 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 25 24 18 19
23
22
21
20
A269V103.WMF
1. 1st scanner 2. Sensor board unit (SBU) 3. Drum mirror 4. Toner shield glass 5. 2nd scanner 6. Barrel toroidal lens (BTL) 7. Charge corona unit 8. 2nd f lens 9. 1st f lens 10. Polygon mirror 11. Drum cleaning unit 12. Pre-cleaning corona (PCC) 13. Image transfer unit 14. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 15. By-pass feed table
SM 1-13
16. Registration rollers 17. 1st paper tray 18. Duplex unit 19. 2nd/3rd paper trays 20. Paper transfer belt unit 21. Paper transfer belt cleaning unit 22. Belt discharge corona unit 23. Transport belt 24. Used toner tank 25. Pressure roller 26. Hot roller 27. Separation corona unit 28. Revolver (development units) 29. OPC drum
A257/A269
Overall Information
1.3 PARTS LAYOUT
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

4 3 2 5
6 7
A269V110.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4.
Fusing transport drive Revolver drive Drum drive Scanner drive
5. 6. 7. 8.
Drum peripheral drive Image transfer belt drive Registration drive Paper feed drive
A257/A269
1-14
SM
AIR FLOW
1.5.1 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 1

1 2
7 3
5
A269V111.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4.
Fusing fan (upper) Fusing fan (bottom) ID sensor fan Charge fan
5. Transport fan (rear) 6. Transport fan (front) 7. Development cooling fan
SM
1-15
A257/A269
Overall Information
1.5 AIR FLOW
AIR FLOW
1.5.2 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 2
4
A269V112.WMF
1. Optics cooling fan (front) 2. Optics cooling fan (rear)
3. IPU cooling fan 4. Exhaust fan
A257/A269
1-16
SM
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT
1.6.1 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 1

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 26 25 24 23
A269V104.WMF
27
19 20 21 22
1. Choke coil 2. Exposure lamp 3. Platen cover position sensor 4. Original length sensor 2 5. Optics anti-condensation heater 6. Original length sensor 1 7. By-pass paper end sensor 8. By-pass paper length sensor 9. By-pass paper width detection board 10. By-pass feed unit switch 11. By-pass feed clutch 12. Main by-pass pick-up solenoid 13. Registration sensor 14. By-pass table sensor 15. By-pass reverse roller solenoid 16. 1st/Duplex paper feed sensor 17. Vertical transport door switch 18. 2nd/3rd paper feed sensor
SM 1-17
19. 1st/2nd/3rd pick-up solenoid 20. 1st/2nd/3rd reverse roller solenoid 21. 1st/2nd/3rd upper limit sensor 22. 1st/2nd/3rd paper end sensor 23. Sub by-pass pick-up solenoid 24. Humidity sensor 25. Mechanical total counter 26. Paper transfer heater 27. Paper tray heaters (option) 28. Toner overflow sensor 29. Main switch 30. Paper exit door switch 2 31. Paper exit door switch 1 32. Front door switch 33. Original width sensor 34. CCD 35. Thermostat 36. Scanner H.P. sensor
A257/A269
Overall Information
1.6 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT
3 2 1
5 6 19 7
18
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
A269V105.WMF
1. Paper transfer belt shift clutch 2. Image transfer belt cleaning drive clutch 3. Image transfer belt cleaning shift clutch 4. Image transfer belt cleaning H.P. sensor 5. Development clutch 6. Toner supply clutch 7. 1st tray set switch 8. Duplex turn guide sensor 9. Junction gate solenoid 10. 2nd tray paper size switch
11. 3rd tray paper size switch 12. Circuit breaker 13. 2nd paper height sensor 14. 3rd paper height sensor 15. 1st paper height sensor 16. 3rd feed clutch 17. Paper feed drive clutch 18. 2nd tray feed clutch 19. 1st feed clutch
A257/A269
1-18
SM
5 4 3 2 1 22 21 20 19 9 10 11 18 13 17 16 15
A269V106.WMF
12 14
1. LD control board 2. Scanner motor drive board 3. LD drive board 4. Image detection unit 5. Polygon motor drive board 6. Operation panel board 7. Laser synchronizing detector board 8. Main scanner IPU board 9. Main control board 10. Sub scanner IPU board 11. High voltage supply board C/G/B 12. Revolver motor drive board
13. High voltage supply board Q1 14. High voltage supply board D 15. AC drive board 16. Power supply unit 17. High voltage supply board T1/PCC/BR 18. I/O control board 19. Interface board RDS/LCT 20. TD sensor interface board 1 21. Image transfer belt motor drive board 22. Lamp regulator
SM
1-19
A257/A269
Overall Information
1 18
2 3 4
17 5 16 15 14 13 12 8 11 10 9
A269V107.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Polygon motor Scanner motor Drum motor IPU cooling fan Development cooling fan Optics cooling fan Fusing fan (upper) Fusing fan (bottom) Fusing motor
10. Exhaust fan 11. Tray lift motor 12. Paper feed motor 13. Registration motor 14. Revolver motor 15. Image transfer belt motor 16. Drum peripheral component motor 17. ID sensor fan 18. Charge fan
A257/A269
1-20
SM
2 1 3 4
5 11 10
6 9 8
7
A269V108.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Toner cartridge set sensor TD sensor TD sensor interface board 2 Drum potential sensor/board Quenching lamp Belt mark detection sensor
7. ID sensor 8. Paper separation sensor 9. Wire cleaner motor 10. Toner end sensor 11. Revolver H.P. sensor
SM
1-21
A257/A269
Overall Information
5 4 3 2 1
7 8
10 14 11 13 12
A269V109.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Pressure roller fusing lamp Hot roller fusing lamp Pressure roller thermistor Hot roller thermistor Hot roller thermofuse Paper Exit sensor Pressure roller thermofuse Paper transfer belt motor
9. Paper transfer belt motor drive board 10. Paper transfer belt unit H.P. sensor 11. Transport fan 12. High voltage supply board T2 13. High voltage supply board Q2 14. Oil end sensor
A257/A269
1-22
SM
9 2
7 4 6
A269V154.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Duplex entrance sensor Duplex turn sensor Duplex paper end sensor Duplex feed motor Duplex side fence H.P. sensor
6. 7. 8. 9.
Side fence jogger motor End fence jogger motor Duplex control board Duplex end fence H.P. sensor
SM
1-23
A257/A269
Overall Information
ELECTRICAL PARTS DESCRIPTIONS
1.7 ELECTRICAL PARTS DESCRIPTIONS

Symbol Name Function Detects if the platen cover is opened or closed. Detects the scanner home position. Detects the length of originals. Detects the length of small size original. Detects the width of originals. Detects the revolver home position. Detects the presence of the toner cartridges. Detects the presence of toner in the cartridge. Detects the toner density in the development unit. P-to-P Location 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 2/2 H5 G5-H5 H7-H8 G7-G8 H7-H8 A3 A3 A2-A3 B11-C11 B11-C11 B11-C11 B11-C11 A4 A3 A7 G2 A4-A5 E4 A4 E2 D2 D11 F11 G11 A10 Index No. 1-3 1-36 1-6 1-4 1-33 5-11 5-1 5-10 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-4 5-7 1-24 5-5 2-4 6-10 1-14 1-8 1-7 1-21 1-21 1-21 2-15
SENSORS Platen Cover Position Sensor S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 S37 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning H.P. Sensor Paper Transfer Belt Unit H.P. Sensor By-pass Table Sensor Scanner H.P. Sensor Original Length Sensor 1 Original Length Sensor 2 Original Width Sensor Revolver H.P. Sensor Toner Cartridge Set Sensor Toner End Sensor Toner Density Sensor - Y Toner Density Sensor - K Toner Density Sensor - M Toner Density Sensor - C Drum Potential Sensor/Board ID Sensor Humidity Sensor Belt Mark Detection Sensor
Detects the drum surface potential. Detects the density of the sensor pattern 2/2 developed on the drum surface. Detects the humidity and temperature to 2/2 calculate absolute humidity. Detects the belt mark on the image transfer 2/2 belt for synchronizing the image of each color. Detects the ITB cleaning unit home position. 2/2 Detects the home position. 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
Detects if the by-pass table is opened or closed. By-pass Paper Length Sensor Detects whether or not paper on the bypass tray is longer than A4 (Letter). By-pass Paper End Sensor Detects whether or not there is paper on the by-pass tray. 1st Upper Limit Sensor Detects the upper limit (paper feed position). Not used 2nd Upper Limit Sensor 3rd Upper Limit Sensor 1st Paper Height Sensor Detects when the tray is nearly out of paper. Not used 2nd Paper Height Sensor 3rd Paper Height Sensor 1st Paper End Sensor Detects whether or not there is paper in the tray. Not used 2nd Paper End Sensor 3rd Paper End Sensor 1st Paper Feed Sensor 1. Detects the paper to control the feed timing of next sheet of paper. Duplex Paper Feed Sensor 2. Detects paper jams at the paper feed 2nd Paper Feed Sensor section. 3rd Paper Feed Sensor 3. When a copy is made, it also controls the stop timing of feed clutch and solenoid.
2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
2/2 A10-A11 2-13 2/2 A11 2-14 2/2 D11 1-22 2/2 F11 1-22 2/2 F11-G11 1-22 2/2 D2 1-16 2/2 D2 1-16 2/2 F2 1-18 2/2 F2 1-18
A257/A269
1-24
SM

Symbol S38 S39 S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 Paper Separation Sensor Paper Exit Sensor Duplex Turn Guide Sensor Duplex Entrance Sensor Duplex Turn Sensor Duplex Paper End Sensor Duplex Side Fence H.P. Sensor Duplex End Fence H.P. Sensor Oil End Sensor Toner Overflow Sensor Name Registration Sensor Function Detects the leading edge of paper to control start timing of the registration rollers. Also, detects paper jams in the registration area. Detects whether or not paper properly separates from the paper transfer belt. Detects paper jams at the exit section. Detects paper jams at the turn guide section. Detects a paper jams at the entrance of the duplex tray. Detects the trailing edge of paper to activate the jogger motor for jogging. Detects if there is paper in the duplex unit. Detects the side fence home position. Detects the end fence home position. Detects whether or not the oil tank is nearly empty. Detects whether or not the toner collection bottle is full. P-to-P Location 2/2 2/2 1/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 1/2 2/2 A5 A3 A1-B1 A10 E10 E10 E10 E9 E9 B1 A10 Index No. 1-13 5-8 6-6 2-8 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-5 7-9 6-14 1-28
SWITCHES SW1 Main Switch SW2 Front Door Switch 1 SW3 Front Door Switch 2 SW4 Front Door Switch 3 SW5 Front Door Switch 4 SW6 Front Door Switch 5 By-pass Feed Unit Switch SW7 SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 PCBs PCB1 PCB2 PCB3 PCB4 PCB5 PCB6 PCB7 PCB8 Main Scanner IPU Board Sub Scanner IPU Board Main Control Board
Turns the power to the copier on or off. Cuts the DC power to the I/O control board when the door is opened.
Cuts the DC power to the LD control board when the door is opened. Detects if the by-pass feed unit is opened or 2/2 not. Vertical Transport Door Switch Detects if the vertical transport door is 2/2 opened or not. 1st Tray Set Switch Detects if the paper tray is set or not. 2/2 Not used 2nd Tray Paper Size Switch Detects the size of paper in the paper tray. 2/2 3rd Tray Paper Size Switch 2/2 Paper Exit Door Switch 1 Detects if the exit door is opened or closed and cuts the DC power when the exit door is 2/2 opened. Paper Exit Door Switch 2 Detects if the exit door is opened or closed. 2/2
1/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 1/2 1/2
F1 A6 A7 A7 G11 G11 A6 E2-F2 A8-A9 A9 A9 A6 A6
1-29 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-10 1-17 2-7 2-10 2-11 1-31 1-30
PSU AC Drive Board Lamp Regulator Scanner Motor Drive Board CCD
Provides AC and DC power. Provides AC power to fusing lamps and heaters. Provides DC power to the exposure lamp. Controls the scanner motor. Converts the light reflected from the original into analog signals for the three basic colors (RGB). Converts RGB image signal from the CCD to a CMYK signal data and sends the signal to the LD control board. Controls the printer sequence.
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
C3-F2 C3-F2 H5 F5-G5 D7-D8 D6-G8 E6-G9 B8-D11
3-16 3-15 3-22 3-2 1-34 3-8 3-10 3-9
SM
1-25
A257/A269
Overall Information

Symbol PCB9 PCB10 LD Control Board PCB11 LD Drive Board PCB12 Polygon Motor Drive Board Laser Synchronizing Detector PCB13 Board PCB14 IDU (Image Detection Unit) High Voltage Supply Board PCB15 C/G/B PCB16 TD Sensor Interface Board 1 PCB17 TD Sensor Interface Board 2 PCB18 Revolver Motor Drive Board Image Transfer Belt Motor PCB19 Drive Board High Voltage Supply Board PCB20 T1/PCC/BR PCB21 PCB22 PCB23 PCB24 PCB25 PCB26 PCB27 PCB28 PCB29 Name I/O Control Board Function Interfaces the sensors, clutches, solenoids, and motors in the printer module with the main control board. Controls laser synchronization. Controls the LD output. Controls the polygon mirror motor. Detects the laser beam to control the start timing of main scan writing. Analyzes images for anti-counterfeiting. Provides power to the charge corona unit and development rollers. Provides power to the TD sensors and transmits the output data from the sensors to the main control board. Controls the revolver motor. Controls the image transfer belt motor. Provides power to the image transfer belt bias roller, PCC unit, and drum cleaning bias roller. Controls the paper transfer belt motor. P-to-P Location 1/2 2/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 2/2 1/2 1/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 A2-A11 C11-H1 F9-F11 D10 G11 G11 G8 B1-B2 B11 B11 D3-E3 F1-G2 B1 D5-E5 E4 E6-E7 E4 A9-A10 Index No. 3-18 3-1 3-3 3-5 3-7 3-4 3-11 3-20 5-3 3-12 3-21 3-17 6-9 6-12 3-13 6-13 3-14 3-6 3-17 1-9 7-9
Paper Transfer Belt Motor Drive Board High Voltage Supply Board T2 Provides power to the paper transfer belt bias roller. High Voltage Supply Board Q1 Provides power to the lubricant brush. High Voltage Supply Board Q2 Provides power to the paper transfer belt discharge corona unit. High Voltage Supply Board D Provides power to the paper separation corona unit. Operation Panel Board Used to operate the copier. Interface Board RDS/LCT Interfaces the sensors, clutches, solenoids, and motors in the LCT with the main control board. By-pass Paper Width Detects the width of paper. Detection Board Duplex Control Board Controls the duplex unit.
1/2 C11-D11 1/2 2/2 2/2 B6-C7 E2 D8-E10
MOTORS M1 Polygon Motor M2 Wire Cleaner Motor M3 Drum Motor Drum peripheral component M4 Motor M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 STM1 STM2 STM3 Image Transfer Belt Motor Paper Transfer Belt Motor 1st Tray Lift Motor Not used 2nd Tray Lift Motor 3rd Tray Lift Motor Paper Feed Motor Fusing Motor Scanner Motor Revolver Motor Registration Motor
Drives the polygon mirror. Drives the charge wire cleaner. Drives the drum. Drives the drum cleaning unit, toner supply unit, development unit, and image transfer belt cleaning unit. Drives the image transfer belt. Drives the paper transfer belt. Lifts the tray bottom plate up.
1/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
G11 A4 D5-E6 H2
4-1 5-9 4-3 4-16
2/2 F2 4-15 2/2 E5 6-8 2/2 D10-D11 4-11 2/2 F10-F11 4-11 2/2 G10-G11 4-11
Drives the paper feed mechanism for all trays. Drives the paper transport belts and fusing rollers. Drives the scanner. Drives the revolver unit. Drives the registration roller.
2/2 2/2 1/2 2/2 2/2
A8 A11 G4 E3 A6
4-12 4-9 4-2 4-14 4-13
A257/A269
1-26
SM

Symbol STM4 STM5 STM6 Name Duplex Feed Motor Side Fence Jogger Motor (Duplex) End Fence Jogger Motor (Duplex) Function Drives the paper feed rollers in the duplex unit. Drives the duplex side jogger fences. Drives the duplex end jogger fence. P-to-P Location 2/2 2/2 2/2 E8 E9 E9 Index No. 7-4 7-6 7-7
CLUTCHES Toner Supply Clutch CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 CL6 CL7 CL8 CL9 CL10 CL11
Transmits the drive to the toner supply mechanism. Development Clutch Transmits the drive to the development mechanism. Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Transmits the drive to the image transfer Drive Clutch belt cleaning unit. Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Shifts/releases the cleaning brush, cleaning Shift Clutch blade, and entrance seal against/from the image transfer belt. Paper transfer Belt Shift Clutch Shifts/releases the paper transfer belt against/from the image transfer belt. 1st Feed Clutch Transmits drive to the paper feed mechanism. Not used 2nd Feed Clutch 3rd Feed Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch Transmits drive to the by-pass feed mechanism. Paper Feed Drive Clutch Transmits drive to the paper feed mechanism.
2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
A5 A5 A5 A5 H2
2-6 2-5 2-2 2-3 2-1
2/2 D10-D11 2-19 2/2 F10-F11 2-18 2/2 G10-G11 2-16 2/2 2/2 E2 A8 1-11 2-17
SOLENOIDS SOL1 1st Pick-up Solenoid SOL2 Not used SOL3 2nd Pick-up Solenoid SOL4 3rd Pick-up Solenoid SOL5 1st Reverse Roller Solenoid SOL6 Not used SOL7 2nd Reverse Roller Solenoid SOL8 3rd Reverse Roller Solenoid Main By-pass Pick-up SOL9 Solenoid Sub By-pass Pick-up Solenoid SOL10 By-pass Reverse Roller SOL11 Solenoid SOL12 Junction Gate Solenoid
Lowers the pick-up roller onto paper.
2/2 D10-D11 1-19 2/2 F10-F11 1-19 2/2 G10-G11 1-19 2/2 D10-D11 1-20 2/2 F10-F11 1-20 2/2 G10-G11 1-20
Positions the reverse roller against the paper feed roller.
Lowers the pick-up roller onto paper.
2/2
D2 D2
1-12 1-23
Increases the pick-up roller pressure 2/2 depending on the copy mode selected to avoid paper misfeed. Increases the pressure of the reverse roller against the feed roller depending on the 2/2 copy mode selected to avoid paper misfeed. Raises the junction gate to feed paper into 2/2 the duplex unit.
E2 D3-E3
1-15 2-9
FAN MOTORS FAN1 IPU Cooling Fan FAN2 Optics Cooling Fan (Front) FAN3 Optics Cooling Fan (Rear) FAN4 Charge Fan FAN5 Development Cooling Fan FAN6 ID Sensor Fan FAN7 Transport Fan (Rear) FAN8 Transport Fan (Front)
Cools the scanner IPU board. Cools the scanner unit. Provides air flow to the charge corona unit. Cools the development section. Provides air flow to the ID sensor. Holds copy paper against the transport belts.
1/2 1/2 1/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
G5 G5 G5 A4 E6 A4 E4 E4
4-4 4-6 4-6 4-18 4-5 4-17 6-11 6-11
SM
1-27
A257/A269
Overall Information

Symbol Name Function Cools the fusing unit area. Blows air out of the copier. P-to-P Location 2/2 E6 2/2 E6 2/2 A11 Index No. 4-7 4-8 4-10
FAN9 Fusing Fan (Upper) FAN10 Fusing Fan (Bottom) FAN11 Exhaust fan LAMPS L1 L2 L3 L4 Exposure Lamp Quenching Lamp (QL) Hot Roller Fusing Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
Applies high intensity light to the original for exposure. Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum prior to the start of the copy cycle. Heats to the hot roller. Heats to the pressure roller.
1/2 2/2 1/2 1/2
H4 A4 C1 C1
1-2 5-5 6-2 6-1
HEATERS Optics Anti-condensation H1 Heater Paper Transfer Heater H2 H3 H4 Paper Tray Heater 1 (Option) Paper Tray Heater 2 (Option)
Prevents moisture from forming on the optics. Prevents moisture from forming around the paper transfer belt. Keeps paper dry on the paper feed trays.
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
E1 D1 D1 D1
1-5 1-26 1-27 1-27
THERMISTORS TH1 Hot Roller Thermistor Pressure Roller Thermistor TH2 THERMOFUSES TF1 Hot Roller Thermofuse TF2 Pressure Roller Thermofuse THERMOSTAT TS1 Thermostat COUNTERS Total Counter 1 (Upper) CO1 CO2 CO3 Total Counter 2 (Bottom) Key Counter (Option)
Monitors the temperature of the hot roller. Monitors the temperature of the pressure roller.
1/2 1/2
B1 B1
6-4 6-3
Protects against hot roller overheating. 1/2 Protects against pressure roller overheating. 1/2
B1 C1
6-5 6-7
Prevents the scanner unit from overheating.
1/2
H4
1-35
Indicates the total number of developments made by C, M, and Y. Indicates the total number of developments made by K. Indicates the total number of developments of any color.
2/2 2/2 2/2
A7 A7 A7
1-25 1-25
A257/A269
1-28
SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
PROCESS CONTROL
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
This copier provides the following three forms of process control: Potential control (done every process control self check) Toner supply control (done every copy) Process control gamma correction (done after every process control self check) The process control functions of this copier use the following sensors: A feedback measurement type drum potential sensor. ID sensor (a new type of sensor is used, known as a diffused reflection ID sensor). The ID sensor detects the amount of toner on the drum. Toner density (TD) sensor (non-contact communication with the copier)
Detailed Descriptions
LD
Pixel counting
Process control
Write ASIC
VG
VB
Photoconductive drum Revolver

ID sensor
Potential sensor
Potential calculation
TD sensor
Fuzzy logic
Development characteristics
Individual potential calculation
Toner supply calculation
Pointer table
Motor rotation time
VD
VB
VL
Toner supply motor
VG
VB
LD
A269D051.WMF
SM
2-1
A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL

Overview
Potential control is the process of controlling the development potential to maintain the density of the toner image on the drum. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and toner chargeability. The machine uses the image density (ID) sensor to measure drum reflectivity and the density of a standard sensor pattern. It uses the drum potential sensor to detect the potential on the standard sensor pattern (before the pattern is developed). These tests are done during the process control self check, which is done at specific times (such as after replacing the developer). The ID and drum potential sensor outputs are used to calculate the development potential. This is the difference between the development bias voltage and the voltage of areas of the drum that have been discharged by laser exposure at full power. If changes in this potential are not accounted for, the color balance will be poor. Depending on the development potential that is calculated, the machine uses a look-up table in memory (called a pointer table) to adjust the following: VD: Drum potential without exposure - to adjust this, the machine adjusts the charge corona grid voltage (VG) VL: Drum potential with the strongest exposure - to adjust this, the machine adjusts the laser diode input current (ILD) VB: Development bias Potential control controls the development potential so that the maximum amount of toner applied to the drum is kept constant. However, the medium (greyscale) range is ignored. To improve this situation, a new process called process control gamma correction is done after potential control. This process defines LD output for all 256 grades of the greyscale (development bias and charge corona grid potential are not affected).
Potential Control Timing

The machine carries out potential control using a procedure called the process control self check. Process control gamma correction (covered in section 2.1.3) is then done immediately after the process control self check. There are five types of process control self check, categorized according to their execution times. Process control takes approximately 3 minutes.
(1) Forced Process Control Self Check

After replacing the developer or drum, the technician must do the forced process control procedure (SP3-126).
A257/A269
2-2
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
(2) Initial Process Control Self Check

The initial process control starts automatically when the power is turned on (or when the machine returns to standby mode from sleep mode), but only if the hot roller in the fusing unit is less than 100 degrees centigrade. This process control is done only when SP3-125 (Set Potential Control Method) is set to "0 (Auto)."
(3) Interval Process Control Self Check

The copy interval process control starts automatically at the end of a copy job during which the total number of copies exceeds a preset value. The preset value can be defined using SP3-973 (Set Process Control Self Check Interval). The factory setting is 150 sheets. The maximum possible interval is 500 sheets. Using a shorter interval reduces the machines average copying speed. Setting the process control interval to 0 disables the interval process control.
(4) Timed Process Control Self Check

This process control self check is activated at a predetermined time interval (hours). This check is identical to the interval process control self check. This self check is initiated by entering a value (default to 6 hours) in SP3-972-00. The settable range is 0 to 240. Entering a value of 0 suppresses the execution of this self check. The timer is reset by the following conditions: At the finish of any other process control self-check At the finish of image processing (copying or printing) When the main switch or the operation switch is turned OFF/ON. When any door or cover is opened and closed. At the end of toner end recovery. NOTE: Just pressing operation panel keys does not reset the timer.
(5) ACC-Run-Time Process Control Self Check

A process control self check that is activated before the execution of ACC (auto color calibration). This check is identical to the interval process control self check. This process control self check is done when SP4-507 (ACC process control ON/OFF) is defaulted to 3 (Both Copy/Printer ACC). If a value of 0 is entered, this process control self check is not done.
SM
2-3
A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.3 PROCESS CONTROL CORRECTION

What is process control ?
After the process control, the proper values for VD, VB, VL have been defined for the maximum laser power. However, the medium (greyscale) range is ignored. To improve this situation, a new process called process control gamma correction is done after potential control. This process defines a suitable LD output for all 256 grades of the greyscale. Process control gamma correction takes about 30 seconds.
How is it done?
ID sensor output Target Actual Actual LD value
V S P range D
B C
A D
Input LD value
Target LD value
A269D556.WMF
Based on the maximum laser power just defined during the process control self check, the machine writes another 16-grade sensor pattern on the drum. NOTE: The 16-grade pattern for process control gamma is made by varying laser intensity based on the ILD value just determined during the process control self check. This is different from the 16-grade pattern made earlier, which is made using 16 fixed laser power levels. The ID sensor detects the density developed on these patterns and compares them with the target densities in ROM. The target densities and the actual densities can be plotted as shown in the diagram above left. NOTE: To make the curve of actual densities, the machine draws a curve (interpolates values) through the density points read from the 16-grade pattern made for process control gamma. From this, the machine determines how much to correct the LD power when attempting to write a certain density on the drum. In the example in the diagram, for a laser power of A, the machine expected an ID of B. However, the actual result was C. To get an ID of B, the machine has to use a laser power of D. The expected ID can be plotted against the actual ID as shown in the diagram above right; this is the process control gamma curve.
A257/A269
2-4
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Process control target is stored in the NV-RAM on the main control board. The CPU calculates the process control on the main board. The results of process control calculation go to the LD main control board to compensate the LD input data. The process control gamma obtained cannot be adjusted in SP mode. The machine automatically does process control gamma correction at the end of every process control self check.
Process Control Correction Timing
Relationship Between Process Control Correction, ACC, and Other Corrections

Process control correction adjust the amount of toner at all levels of the 16 gradation patterns to target characteristics and interpolates* between the 16 adjusted levels to optimize all of the 256 gradations. This correction is used to make the image characteristics in low ID areas closer to the target value. ACC encompasses the process range from scanning an image to image generation (including the scope of process control correction). Potential control The ultimate purpose of potential control is to adjust the maximum amount of toner attracted to the drum versus the development potential to a certain target value. *Interpolates To estimate values of (a function) between two known values.
SM
2-5
A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.4 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK OPERATION FLOW
Start
Adjust ID sensor V S G
Step 1
Generate patch patterns
Step 2
Sense with potential sensor
Step 3
Sense with ID sensor
Step 4
Calculate amount of toner
Step 5
Calculate development characteristics
Step 6
Determine optimum VD , V B , and V L from potential table
Step 7
End
A269D052.WMF
A257/A269
2-6
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 1: VSG Adjustment

The type of ID sensor used in this machine responds differently for black and color, so there are two VSG values, one for black toner and one for CMY toner. The type of ID sensor used in this machine is very sensitive, and outputs some voltage even if there is no light being reflected off the drum. This output is known as the offset. It is about 1 V for black and about 0.2 V for color. For more details on this sensor (known as a diffused reflection ID sensor), see Step 4: Sensor Pattern Density Detection. The ID sensor checks the bare drums reflectivity and the machine calibrates the output of the ID sensor as follows. This voltage is known as VSG: (1.8 + offset) 0.05 V This calibration compensates for the drums condition (due to ageing) and the ID sensor condition, such as toner on the surface of the drum or ID sensor. Note that VSG for black is less than half of that in previous models. This is due to the new type of ID sensor, which is described in a later section.
Step 2: Generating ID Sensor Patch Patterns

The machine makes a 16-grade pattern on the drum for each toner color. Each grade of the pattern is made by changing the LD power. At this stage, the patterns are not developed; they remain as latent images.
25
25 20
A269D054.WMF
SM
2-7
A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Potential Detection

Process
The drum potential sensor detects the potential on each grade of the 16-grade sensor pattern latent image, for each color, and the output is stored in memory.
Feedback Type Drum potential Sensor

d
[B]
Drum surface
[A]
V
Feedback circuit
d
A269D053.WMF
This copier uses a feedback drum potential sensor. The detector [A] detects the strength of electric fields emitted from the drum surface, which depend on the surface potential of the drum. The feedback circuit applies voltage to the probe [B] until the electric field strength is offset at the detector. The level of this voltage determines the magnitude of the potential on the drum surface and is presented as output. The major features of this measurement method are: Even if the distance [d] between the drum (1) and the drum potential sensor (2) fluctuates, the measurement of the drum surface potential is still accurate. The drum potential sensor does not have to be calibrated before the process control self check, so the calibration step required for previous models can be skipped. Residual voltage affected the calibration for the older type of sensor, so before process control self checks, the machine had to wait 10 minutes in standby mode for the residual voltage to disappear. For this new sensor, calibration is not needed, so the influence of residual voltage on the drum can be ignored.
A257/A269
2-8
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 4: Sensor Pattern Density Detection Process

The development rollers of the respective colors develop the sensor pattern latent images for K, Y, C, and M generated in Step (2). In Step (4), the ID sensor detects the densities of the 16 patch patterns for each color. This data goes to memory.
Diffused Reflection ID Sensor

Direct Reflection Type ID Sensor Drum Diffuse Reflection Type ID Sensor Drum
Toner
Toner
Detector
LED
Detector
LED
Diffuse Beams
This copier uses a diffused reflection ID sensor. In addition to the ray directly reflected from the drum, there are diffuse beams reflected at all angles from the toner on the drum. This sensor detects image density by receiving some of these diffuse beams, not by receiving the beam directly reflected from the toner. Using this type of sensor improves the measurement accuracy of the sensor pattern densities particularly for Y, C, and M toners.
Color (Y, C, M) toners

Direct Reflection Type ID Sensor Diffuse Reflection Type ID Sensor
VSP
VSP = (1) +(2) (2)
VSP
Vmin (1) M/A

A269D058.WMF
M/A
A269D059.WMF
(1): Component of light reflected from the drum (2): Component of light reflected from C, M, or Y toner
[Figure A] Relationship between the output of the normal reflection type ID sensor and the amount of toner on the drum for C, M, and Y toners SM 2-9
[Figure B] Relationship between the output of the diffused reflection ID sensor and the amount of toner on the drum for C, M, and Y toners A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
Figure A shows the relationship between the output of the normal reflection ID sensor and the amount of Y, C, or M toner attached to the drum. This shows that the ID sensor output (Vsp) results from not only the light reflected from the toner but also the component of light reflected from the drum. Therefore, high densities of colored toner (i.e., to the right of the minimum point in the VSP curve at Vmin) cannot be measured. The diffused reflection ID sensor, on the other hand, picks up little light that is reflected from the drum. Therefore, the relationship between the diffused reflection ID sensor output and the amount of toner attached to the drum is linear, as shown in Figure B. This means that high densities of colored toner can be measured accurately.
K Toner:
VSP [Figure C] Relationship between the output of the diffused reflection ID sensor and the amount of toner on the drum for K toner M/A
A269D060.WMF
Vmin
The ID sensor output for K toner tends to decrease as the density of toner on the drum increases. Therefore, the relationship between the ID sensor output and the amount of K toner on the drum is as shown in Figure C.
A257/A269
2-10
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 5: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the drum (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is calculated for each of the 16 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensor output value (Vsp) from each grade of the pattern.
The development potential (VDP) is the capability to attract toner to the drum and can be shown as: VB - VL VB: Development bias VL: Drum potential after full laser exposure See the figure on the right for two examples.
Amount of toner on the drum
When the development potential is smaller
When the development potential is larger

A269D061.WMF
The machine determines the relationship between the drum potential (measured in step 3) and the amount of toner on the drum (calculated in step 5) for each of the 16 grades. If plotted, these values would form a curve as shown in the illustration to the right. The CPU then calculates a straight line curve through these points. The angle formed by this line is known as the development gamma factor, or MA. The CPU then uses the gamma factor to calculate the development potential (VDP) that would be required to obtain the ideal toner density on an area of the drum exposed with full laser power under the machine's present conditions.
MAmax
Amount of toner
M A
MAmax = 0.7 mg/cm2 for each color
Vdp Vk Vkp
Development potential
A269D062.WMF
For Y, C, and M toners, the new type of ID sensor allows higher densities of toner to be measured accurately (refer to the descriptions in Step 4, Sensor Pattern density Detection). This permits the calculation of M/A at a higher accuracy than a normal reflection ID sensor, because the measurements at higher densities (M/A values) are more reliable.
SM
2-11
A257/A269
Step 6: Development Potential Calculation
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 7: Selecting the Optimum VD, VB, VL

The machine now adjusts VD, VB, and VL to try to bring the development potential VDP to the ideal value. To do this, it uses a pointer table. This is a look-up table in ROM of VDP against VD, VB, and VL. The machine takes the value of VDP calculated in the previous section, and looks for the value of VDP in the pointer table that is closest to this. The machine reads the values of VD, VB, and VL that are in this row of the pointer table. The machine will then use these values of VD, VB, and VL during copying until the next process control self check. These values are designed to bring the actual VDP to the optimum value for the machines current condition. VD: Drum potential without exposureto adjust this, the machine adjusts the charge corona grid voltage (VG) VL: Drum potential with the strongest exposureto adjust this, the machine adjusts the laser diode input current (ILD) VB: Development bias
A257/A269
2-12
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

This machine uses fuzzy logic to control the amount of toner supplied to the development unit so that the development capacity does not fluctuate due to toner consumption, toner supply, agitation, or extended periods of nonuse. This control is accomplished using the sensed data from the drum potential sensor, toner end sensor, ID sensor, and TD sensor. This copier starts toner supply control by keeping the toner density in the developer constant using the TD sensor. It then senses the amount of toner on the drum using the ID sensor pattern. The ID sensor sends the pattern data back to the toner supply control mechanism and the amount of toner on the drum surface (image density) then becomes the target. The TD sensor provides a stable base point for toner supply and thus avoids runaway feedback of toner supply. The basic input/output parameters that this copier uses during toner supply control are listed below. 1. Targets to be sensed 1) Density of the toner read by the TD sensor 2) Amount of toner attached to the drum sensed by the ID sensor 3) Pixel count 2. Component to be controlled Toner supply clutch on time
Toner Supply Control Modes

This copier controls the supply of toner in three modes. 1. Fuzzy logic Control Mode Default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, and pixel count are used in this mode. 2. Proportional Control Mode This mode is used when an ID sensor becomes faulty. Only the TD sensor is used to control toner supply. 3. Fixed Supply Mode This mode is used when both the TD sensor and ID sensor become faulty.
SM
2-13
A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
TD Sensor Output
The relationship between the TD sensor output Vt and the toner density in the developer is shown in the figure on the right. The target toner density of this copier is 5 WT%. The TD sensor output for this toner density is referred to as Vref. Vref of this copier is adjusted to 2.5 0.1 volts for a toner density of 5 WT% (brand-new developer) for each of the C, M, Y, and K toners. When developers are replaced, since TD sensor fluctuations can occur in such a case, it is necessary to initialize the TD sensor and adjust its gain using SP3-005-1 through SP3-005-5. Once the TD sensor is initialized, the toner density fluctuates according to toner supply control.
Relationship between toner density and TD sensor output

A269D063.WMF
Toner Supply Calculation

In the fuzzy logic control mode, the toner supply control mechanism of this copier determines the amount of toner to be supplied based on the density of the toner in the developer, as sensed through the TD sensor, and the pixel count. In this mode, the image density is kept constant by keeping the density of toner in the developer constant while accommodating to changes in the development conditions through the potential control mechanism. The amount of toner supplied is determined by the ON time of the toner supply clutch.
Detecting VSP for Toner Supply Control

The copier generates a VSP ID sensor pattern (right illustration) using a standard laser diode power. The copier generates this pattern between the K, C, M, and Y images, and then detects the density using the ID sensor. The result is known as VSP for toner supply control, or VSP (toner) to distinguish it from the other VSP, measured during potential control. This process is done every ten copies.
A269D065.WMF
25 mm
30 mm
A257/A269
2-14
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Calculating the Amount of Toner on the Drum

The target for the ID sensor pattern is 0.7 mg/cm2 for the C, M, and Y toners and 0.3 mg/cm2 for the K toner. For the procedure to calculate the amount of toner on the drum, see Step 4, Sensor Pattern Density Detection, and Step 5, Toner Amount Calculation in the section about potential control. (Sec 2.1.2)
Toner Near End/Toner End Detection

Introduction
This copier uses the toner end sensor located in the toner hopper to detect toner near end conditions for the K, Y, C, and M toners. A toner end condition, for each color, is detected following a toner near end condition by counting the number of pixels. (See Toner End Detection on the next page.)
Toner Near End Detection

This copier uses an optical reflection type toner end sensor to detect two conditionsthe high condition (5 V: no reflection/toner present) and the low condition (0 V: reflection detected/no toner). The copier samples the output from the toner end sensor at the development position for each toner color, for 160 samples at 4 ms intervals. A toner absent condition is flagged when more than 20 low sensor output conditions are detected out of 160 sampled conditions. The copier flags a toner near end condition when three consecutive toner absent conditions are detected for a toner color. Example 1: 3 full color copies, repeat mode 20 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the first copy sheet for K 25 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the second copy sheet for K 24 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the third copy sheet for K The K toner near end is indicated. (Add Toner:Black)
SM
2-15
A257/A269
PROCESS CONTROL
Example 2: 4 full color copies, repeat mode 20 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the first copy sheet for Y 19 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the second copy sheet for Y 21 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the third copy sheet for Y 25 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the fourth copy sheet for Y 21 sensor low conditions detected out of 160 sampled conditions while developing the fifth copy sheet for Y The Y toner near end is indicated. (Add Toner:Yellow)
Toner End Detection

After a toner near end is indicated, the toner end condition is reached when the IPU pixel counter counts up the equivalent of 10 A4 sheets of pixels (100% coverage) for that color. The machine can copy/print at least 10 sheets after the toner near end condition is signaled. There are two possible cases as follows: 1. The toner end condition occurs before 10 sheets are printed: In this case copying stops after 10 sheets are printed. This is true regardless of paper size. 2. Ten sheets (of any size) are printed before toner end occurs: In this case copying stops when the toner end condition occurs.
Toner End Recovery

The copier enters the recovery process in the following cases: 1. The front door is opened and a toner cartridge is removed or inserted. This is regarded as an ordinary replacement procedure for the toner cartridge. When the door is closed, the copier moves the next to-be-replaced color toner cartridge to the replacement position. Replace the toner cartridge. The copier starts toner end recovery processing after the toner cartridge is replaced and the front door is closed. NOTE: If recovery is needed for two colors, the copier proceeds with the next color if the door is opened or if the user specifies at the operation panel that the first color should be skipped. 2. If the copier is turned off and on, it assumes that toner cartridges for all colors have been replaced and starts toner end recovery processing for all colors.
A257/A269 2-16 SM
DRUM UNIT
2.2 DRUM UNIT

2.2.1 MAJOR COMPONENTS
1 2 3
Detailed Descriptions A257/A269
4 12 5 6 11 7 8
10 9
A269D201.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Charge corona unit Quenching lamp Cleaning blade Lubricant bar Bias roller blade Bias roller
7. Cleaning brush 8. Pre-cleaning corona (PCC) 9. Carrier catcher 10. ID sensor 11. OPC drum 12. Drum potential sensor
This drum unit of this copier is located on the right of the revolver/drum drawer. It can easily be removed by pulling out the drawer. The drum unit consists of the OPC drum, charge corona unit, quenching lamp, drum potential sensor, and cleaning unit. The cleaning unit is integrated in the drum unit because, since the cleaning unit is located in the top portion of the copier, toner would spill out of the opening if the drum unit were removed or installed by itself. The cleaning unit contains the cleaning blade, lubricant bar, and cleaning brush.
SM
2-17
DRUM UNIT
2.2.2 DRUM UNIT DRIVE

[A] [C]
[D]
[B]
A269D202.WMF
[G] [F]
[B]
[E] [H]
A269D203.WMF
Drum Drive
The drum motor [A] turns the OPC drum [B] via a timing belt [C]. Use of the timing belt reduces rotational fluctuations, thus stabilizing image quality (reduce uneven image). The motor has a built-in rotational speed control circuit. When the rated rotational speed is not achieved, the rotational speed control circuit generates a motor clock signal, which turns on SC440 (Drum Motor Error) and stops the copier. The drum is rotated in the reverse direction for 0.05 second (approx. 10 mm) to remove the toner at the tip of the drum cleaning blade at the end of the initial auto process control self check. The drum shaft is fitted with a large flywheel [D] to smooth the rotation and prevent banding of the image.
Cleaning Drive
The drum peripheral component motor [E] drives the cleaning unit (cleaning brush [F], bias roller [G], and toner collection coil [H]).
A257/A269
2-18
SM
DRUM UNIT
2.2.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT
A269D204.WMF
This copier uses a single wire scorotron system to charge the drum. The output of the charge high voltage power supply is -6 kV. A grid keeps the surface potential of the drum at 670 V (standard value). The grid bias voltage is corrected so that the surface potential remains constant by sensing the surface potential of the drum with the drum potential sensor. The exhaust fan at the rear of the copier, causes air to flow into the charge corona unit from front to rear sides. This helps prevent uneven charging.
SM
2-19
A257/A269
DRUM UNIT
Rev. 7/13/99
2.2.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT CLEANER

The copier is provided with a charge corona unit cleaner to prevent the charge corona wire and grid from becoming contaminated by toner and paper dust near the charge corona unit. Drive: Dc motor [A] located on the copier front, via screw rod [B]. Cleaning conditions: 1) When the main power switch is on and the surface temperature of the hot roller is less than 100C. 2) When forced using SP mode (SP2802).
[C]
[B]
Related SP modes: 1) SP2-802: Forced cleaning 2) SP2-803-001:Enable cleaning [C] [D] when main power switch/operation switch is turned on (default is ON) 3) SP2-803-002:Enable cleaning at [A] specified development cycle count A269D251.WMF (default is ON) 4) SP2-803-003: Enable cleaning at a specified time interval (hours). (Default is OFF) Cleaner pad: Dual-grid cleaner pad [C] and wire cleaner pads [D]. Home position: Copier front Cleaning path: Copier front Rear end point Copier front Only the charge corona grid is cleaned during the traverse from copier front to rear end (white arrow). Both the charge corona grid and wire are cleaned during the traverse from rear end point to copier front (black arrow). Position detection: No sensor is used. The I/O control board detects the current that is being supplied to the motor. It senses the sudden change in the current value which occurs when the cleaner reaches the end point. At the turnaround point, the motor is reversed. If no current rise is observed in 60 seconds after motor rotation starts, the I/O control board an open circuit or disconnected condition, stops the motor, and displays SC303.
A257/A269
2-20
SM
DRUM UNIT
2.2.5 CLEANING MECHANISM

Drum Cleaning
After toner is transferred to the OPC drum in the transfer process, the residual toner is removed from the drum by the drum cleaning brush [A] and blade [B]. The cleaning brush is a straight fiber brush (not looped) type. The cleaning bias system uses a rotating bias roller [C] and scraper blade [D]. The bias roller and the brush rotate opposite to each other at the point of contact. The cleaning blade is of the counter type. It is constantly held against the drum by a spring. [E] [C]
[B] [A] [D]

A269D205.WMF
Lubricant Application
Lubricant (Zinc stearate) is applied to the OPC drum via the cleaning brush. The lubricant bar [E] is held against the brush by the weight of the drum lubricant bar plus spring pressure. Lubricant is applied to improve the efficiency of cleaning and of image transfer.
2.2.6 PRE-CLEANING CORONA (PCC)

The PCC [A] discharges the photoconductor drum and applies AC and negative DC discharges to reduce the charge holding the residual toner to the drum, thereby improving the efficiency of cleaning.
[A]
A269D206.WMF
SM
2-21
A257/A269
DRUM UNIT
2.2.7 QUENCHING
This copier employs optical quenching using LEDs. The quenching lamp [A] turns on immediately when the Start key is pressed. The quenching lamp light is in the red range to protect the drum from optical fatigue. [A]
A269D207.WMF
2.2.8 CARRIER CATCHER

This copier has a magnet [A] installed below the ID sensor [B]. This magnet attracts carrier from the drum, and helps to prevent image anomalies such as fireflies.
[A]
[B]
A269D208.WMF
A257/A269
2-22
SM
SCANNER UNIT
2.3 SCANNER UNIT

2.3.1 OVERVIEW
[A] [C] [F] [D]
[B]
[E]
A269D001.WMF
An image of the original illuminated by the exposure lamp [A] (a halogen lamp) and is reflected onto a color CCD [B] (Charge Coupled Device) via the 1st [C], 2nd [D], and 3rd [E] mirrors, filter, and lens [F]. The filter removes infra-red from the light reflected off the original; this is particularly important for glossy photos with black areas, which can appear reddish in copies. For all copy modes except the Auto Original Type mode this machine makes a single scan. The CCD is a one-chip color CCD with RGB color filters. The scanning resolution is 400 dpi (5,000 pixels).
SM
2-23
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
2.3.2 SCANNER
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
A269D001.WMF
The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp [A], main and sub reflectors [B], and 1st mirror [C]. This model uses a halogen lamp with ten elements. The frosted surface of the exposure lamp ensures even exposure in the main scan direction. The exposure lamp is energized by a dc supply to avoid uneven light intensity caused by power fluctuations while the 1st scanner moves in the sub-scan direction. The sub reflector is shaped so that light will expose the original evenly. This reduces shadows on pasted originals. The 1st, 2nd [D], and 3rd [E] mirrors have glass on the reverse sides to increase their weight. This prevents the mirrors from vibrating. A thermoswitch in the 1st scanner protects against overheating. It will open at approximately 140C and cannot be reset.
A257/A269
2-24
SM
SCANNER UNIT
2.3.3 SCANNER DRIVE
[A]
[C]
[B]
A269D002.WMF
A five-phase stepper motor [A] drives the scanner. This motor drives the 1st [B] and 2nd [C] scanners via two scanner wires. The wires at the front side and the rear side are the same. In full size mode, the 1st scanner speed is 200 mm/s during scanning, and 1,200 mm/s when the scanner returns. The 2nd scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner.
Full Size Mode Reduction or Enlargement Mode Forwarding Speed 200 (mm/s) 200/M (mm/s) Returning Speed 1,200 (mm/s) 1,200 (mm/s)
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio M, which can vary from 0.25 to 4.0 (i.e., 200/M mm/s). The returning speed is always the same (1,200 mm/s). The image length is changed in the sub-scan direction by changing the scanner speed, and in the main scan direction by image processing on the scanner IPU board. For all copy modes except the Auto Original Type mode the machine makes a single scan.
SM
2-25
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
2.3.4 COLOR CCD
3 5000
9
A269D150.WMF
The color CCD converts light reflected from the original into three analog signals, one for each of the three basic colors Red, Green, and Blue. The signals are called the R, G, and B signals. A single scan generates a separate set of three signals (RGB). The CCD consists of three lines of 5000 elements at a resolution of 400 dpi (15.7 dots/mm). To make the R, G, and B signals, each line has a color separation filter (R, G, or B). The lines are spaced 4 pixels apart for full size magnification. To correct for the spacing, the R, G, and B signals must be synchronized. This is done by delaying the signals in memory buffers on the scanner IPU board (the Image Processing section contains more details). The CCD is mounted on the board with the lens block (the assembly is known as the SBU or Sensor Board Unit). Therefore, to replace the CCD, replace the SBU.
A257/A269
2-26
SM
SCANNER UNIT
2.3.5 WHITE PLATE SCANNING
[A] [B]
A269D851.WMF
There is a white plate [A] for auto shading, stuck on the exposure glass [B] underneath the left scale. When this white plate is scanned, the output from all the CCD elements in a line should in theory be equal, but actually it is not, for the following reasons: Variations in sensitivity between elements of the CCD Variations in characteristics of lens and mirror reflectivity Loss of brightness toward the ends of the exposure lamp To correct for this uneven output from the CCD elements, the light reflected from the white reference plate is scanned. This is known as auto shading. Auto shading is done every copy cycle at the scanner home position before starting the first scan.
2.3.6 SCANNER IPU

The scanner IPU processes the RGB signal received from the CCD board and has the following functions under the control of the main control board. 1. Controls exposure lamp on/off switching and voltage 2. Controls the speed of the scanner drive motor 3. Detects the original paper size 4. Controls on/off switching for the IPU cooling fan and optics cooling fans 5. Supplies the clock signals for the CCD board 6. Detects when the scanner is at home position
SM
2-27
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
2.3.7 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A] [B]
A269D003.WMF
[C]
There are three APS sensors (reflective photosensors) in the optics cavity for original size detection. The original width sensor [A] detects the original width, while the original length sensors [B] and [C] detect the original length. The original width sensor [A] and the original length sensor [B] have three internal beams. Each beam scans a different point of the exposure glass. The other original length sensor [C] uses only one beam. If the original or platen cover is present over the scanning point for a particular sensor, the beam is reflected, and each reflected beam activates a photoelectric device. The diagram on the next page shows where the sensing points are.
A257/A269
2-28
SM
SCANNER UNIT
Original Size A4/A3 LT/DLT Version Version (metric) (inch) A3 11" x 17" (11" x 15") B4 10" x 14" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" F4 (8" x 13") A4-S 11" x 81/2" A4-L 81/2" x 11" (8" x 10") B5-S B5-L A5-S 81/2" x 51/2" A5-L 51/2" x 81/2"
Setting Point
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0
1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 0
Display
160 163 164 165 38 166 14 142 44 172 Detailed Descriptions
L: Lengthwise S: Sideways 0: OFF, 1: ON : Dont care
A269D005.WMF
Y
Sensing Point From rear left corner X Y 376.23 276.23 351.83 206.68 321.78 182.28 198.00 113.00 136.00 161.50 140.00 200.00 136.00 238.50
SM
2-29
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
2.3.8 OTHERS
[C] [B]
[A]
A269D004.WMF
Anti-condensation Heater
There is an anti-condensation heater [A] on the right side of the SBU. It turns on when the main switch or operation switch is off, to prevent moisture from forming on the optics.
Fans
1. Optics Cooling Fans The optics cooling fans [B] are on the left side of the optics cavity. There fans draw air into the optics cavity to prevent the exposure lamp and optics cavity from overheating during copy cycles. They turn on at the same time as the exposure lamp, and they turn off 10 seconds after the exposure lamp turns off. 2. IPU Cooling The IPU cooling fan [C] is on the left rear side of the optics cavity. This fan moves air out of the optics cavity to keep the IPU from overheating. This fan is always on when the operation switch is on. Normally it turns at half-speed. However, it goes to full-speed when the exposure lamp turns on, and it returns to half speed 10 seconds after the exposure lamp turns off.
A257/A269
2-30
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

2.4.1 OVERVIEW
Scanner IPU Board
CCD Scanner
Scanner Section
IPU Section
PD LD
LD Drive Board
LD Main Control Board
Image Data
Main Control Board
LD Unit Printer
A269D066.WMF
The reflected light from the original enters the CCD via the mirrors and lens. The CCD board has a CCD chip that is provided with a filter for each of the R, G, and B colors. The reflected signal is converted to analog signals (photoelectric conversion) and sent to the scanner IPU board as image data. The scanner IPU board performs signal processing, A-to-D conversion, shading compensation, D-to-A conversion, line correction, and image processing on the image data. The image data is finally supplied to the printer section as digital signals (8 bits per pixel).
SM
2-31
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.4.2 SCANNER SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
R
Analog ASIC AD Converter
10bit
10bit
Field Memory
10bit
C
G
AGC
Analog ASIC
Ref
AD Converter
4 Mbit 10bit
Shading Circuit
CCD
C D
10bit
Field Memory
10bit
IPU Section
AGC B
Analog ASIC
Ref
AD Converter
2 Mbit 10bit 10bit
AGC
D/A Converter
Ref
CPU
A269D067.WMF
The RGB analog image signals from the CCD are combined and amplified by analog ASIC chips and converted to 10-bit digital signals by A/D converters. The digital signals undergo shading compensation and line correction before being sent to the IPU section.
A257/A269
2-32
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.4.3 SCANNER FUNCTIONS

Photoelectric Conversion
The color CCD converts the light reflected from the original into RGB analog signals (6.615 MHz for each signal: even-pixel and odd-pixel). Each CCD line has 5,000 pixels and the resolution is 400 dpi (15.7 pixels/mm).
Signal Processing (Analog ASIC)

This analog ASIC provides the following three analog signal processing functions:
(1) Signal Amplification Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified by operational amplifiers. (2) Signal Composition The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) are combined by the MPX before A/D conversion. (3) Feedback
The CPU on the scanner IPU board receives the feedback data for white level and black level from the shading circuits and feeds it to the ASICs through the D/A converter. The feedback data from the CPU are updated every time the main switch is turned on.
A/D Conversion
The A/D conversion block converts the analog signals (CCD output) to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digital signals.
SM
2-33
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Shading Compensation Circuit

(1) Shading compensation
Before scanning each original, the machine generates a reference white waveform (also known as "white shading data") by scanning 5 mm of the white reference plate [A] in the sub-scan direction (this equals 79 lines at 100% magnification).
The white shading data is calculated for each pixel across the main scan. To do A269D068.WMF this for a particular pixel, it takes the white levels for that pixel on each of the main scan lines taken from the white reference plate, and calculates a value from these. The white waveform is made by repeating this process for each pixel across the main scan. To improve image reproduction for high density areas, the machine also measures the black shading data. It does this by reading the black video level at the first 4 pixels of the CCD, which should be black because these pixels are masked off. The average of the 4 pixels is represented as the black shading data for one CCD scan line.
White Correction
1023
Black Correction 1 line
1 line
A269D069.WMF
The video signal for each pixel obtained during image scanning is corrected by the shading circuit as follows: (Data scanned for each pixel) - (Black correction data) (White correction data for each pixel) - (Black correction data) x 1023
The white shading data are updated before every scanning. The black shading data are updated every scan line. The white shading data corrects the image data for irregularities in the CCD and the optics across the main scan. The black
A257/A269
2-34
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
shading data corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine scans down the page.
D/A Conversion
The CPU monitors the digital feedback signals from the shading circuits and calculates correction factors. Then the D/A circuit converts the signals from the CPU into analog signals and feeds them back to the analog ASIC chips. The CPU feeds black shading data back to the AD converters as the reference black level. This is for done every CCD pixel to calibrate the black level, to avoid drifts in the signal with time.
Scan Line Correction Circuit

B 5 lines Reduction B 3 lines Full Size B 4 lines 1 2 3 4 5 6 G 3 lines G 4 lines 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 R R G 5 lines R
Enlargement
A269D070.WMF
The three CCD lines providing the RGB signals are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full size magnification is used. To compensate for this discrepancy, the line correction circuits synchronize the output timing of the RGB signals to the IPU section by storing the scan data for each line in memory. The discrepancy between RGB video signals changes depending on the magnification ratio. The correction data for different magnifications is calculated as follows: B: Standard (No correction) G: (4 lines) x (Magnification ratio) R: (8 lines) x (Magnification ratio) If this calculation does not result in an integer, the correction data is set to the closest integer, but further correction is needed (refer to Picture Element Correction).
SM
2-35
A257/A269
A257/A269
Separation & ACS Field Memory Filter & Color calibration Color calibration 2 Magnification Image Creation Magnification Gradation processing Picture Element Correction Field Memory DRAM DRAM DRAM DRAM
IMAGE PROCESSING
DRAM
Shading
Field Memory
2.4.4 IPU SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
2-36
Area processing Area processing Area processing Area processing
This copier holds RGB color image data in 96 MB of DRAM memory so that a full-color copy can be generated in a single scan. Th e image in this memory is also used in the continuous copy mode.
A269D071.WMF
In single color mode, this memory can be used to enable image rotation.
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.4.5 IPU FUNCTIONS

Scanner Conversion and Picture Element Correction
Scanner Conversion (RGB Conversion)
0 Dark Light Dark
A269D072.WMF
1023
255
1023 Light
A269D073.WMF
The RGB video signals from the CCD (10-bit signal) are sent to the IPU section. These signals are proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1). However, the IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in figure 2 by using a gamma () correction table in order to improve the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion, which is done later in the image process. The same table is used for R, G, and B signals. The scanner gamma () correction inverts the video signals and converts the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit as outlined in the following table:
Dark (Black) Scanner Input (RBG) After Correction (RGB) Color Conversion Printer Output (CMYK) 255 0 0 255 Light (White) 1023 0
SM
2-37
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Picture Element Correction

The Picture Element Correction circuit does two things. 1. Completion of the Scan Line Correction process The discrepancy in the spacing of the RGB signals from the CCD in the sub-scan direction R is corrected by the line correction circuit in the scanner section (refer to Scanner Section G Scan Line Correction). However, if the correction data corresponding to the B magnification ratio is not an integer, then further correction is needed to synchronize the Picture Element Correction RGB signals.
A269D074.WMF
2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light If the CCD board is not perpendicular to the light axis, the position of each pixel is different from the original image position. This difference becomes larger towards the ends. Under this condition, vertical black lines (in the sub-scan direction) at the left and right edges of the original are colored because the Y, M, and C toner dots are not properly positioned. (This can be checked by looking at the vertical lines at the right and left edges of a copy of the C4 color chart.) Therefore, the CCD line spacing is also corrected here. The target areas for this correction are shown above. The green CCD line is taken as a standard, and the ends of the red and blue lines are corrected. Adjust SP modes 4-932-001 to 4-932-004 to change the vertical line correction level. (See 6.7.2 Main Scan Position Dot Correction)
A257/A269
2-38
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
ACS (Auto Color Selection)
A269D076.WMF A269D075.WMF
The auto color selection function determines if an original is black/white or color. Then black copy mode or full color mode is automatically selected to match the original. To recognize if the original has a color area or not, the RGB video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signal levels (MAX-MIN in the above diagram) is within a certain range, the original is considered black and white. During the 1st scanning cycle, the latent image is developed with the amount of black toner specified by the gamma () corrected RGB video signals. If the original does not have any color areas, the 2nd scanning is aborted and the developed image is transferred from the transfer belt to the copy paper. Then the black & white copy comes out. If the original has a color area, copying resumes in the full color copy mode. Users can maximize the quality of their output by selecting priority for black and white or full color original in ACS mode, using the User Tools (ACS Priority). (The above right figure shows the effect of this setting.) The K setting prevents the UCR process from reducing the image density too much in low image density photo areas. This is explained in more detail in the section on UCR.
SM
2-39
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Automatic Original Type Selection

If this function is selected, the copier starts a pre-scan when the Start key is pressed. During the pre-scan, the copier detects two or more image features and identifies the type of original. Since the copier selects the mode that is most suited to the original, the selected mode does not always match the specified mode. For example, the copier may not copy text originals in the text mode. The copier automatically selects one of the following 9 original modes: Automatically selected original modes 1) Text mode 2) Printed text/photo 3) Glossy text/photo 4) Copied text/photo 5) Printed photo 6) Glossy photo 7) Copied photo 8) Marker pen 9) Ink jet NOTE: Mixed-type originals are not recommended because the copier cannot select an appropriate mode for such originals (they may be copied, however).
A257/A269
2-40
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Separation
The copier senses and separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas. Generally, The text areas feature an appreciable difference in contrast between the background and image parts. The photo (dot screen) areas feature many intermediate levels of gradation. The copier senses these features and separates the image into black text, colored text, and photo areas.
Text Area
A269D077.WMF
Edge Separation
Black Text Colored Text Photo
Dot Screen Separation
Colored Text Separation

A269D078.WMF
(1) Edge separation

The edges of text and line diagram elements are identified by using the characteristics of strong contrast, continuity of black or color pixels, and continuity of white pixels around the black or color pixels. The machine does this by only referring to the green signal.
(2) Dot screen separation

Dot screen areas are separated from non-dot screen areas (mainly text). The machine determines that if white pixels are not detected around the non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area. The machine does this by only referring to the green signal.
(3) Colored text separation

Black pixels and color pixels in text areas are identified by determining the difference among the RGB maximum signal levels and the output levels of the RGB video signals.
SM 2-41 A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filtering and Color Conversion
A269D079.WMF
A269D080.WMF
RGB Smoothing Filter

Depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or depending on the selected original mode), the appropriate software filters are applied to the RGB video signals. The RGB smoothing filter is applied to photo areas; an edge emphasis filter is applied to text areas.
Color Conversion
A matrix converts the RGB video signals from each scanning cycle into YMCK video signals. The content of the matrix depends on the selected mode. The transparency for each color toner is not ideal, as shown above. Color conversion compensates for the difference between ideal and actual characteristics. The following modes affect the matrix: color conversion mode (this is a user mode, not to be confused with the color A269D081.WMF conversion process described in this section), pastel mode, color balance mode, original mode (press print glossy photo, 2nd generation), RGB toner correction mode The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix operation, for simple color copying without any special modes applied. For example, to represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a proportion of 1:1.
A257/A269
2-42
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Original Color Toner Y M C K K 1 1 1 1 R 1 1 0 0 Y 1 0 0 0 G 1 0 1 0 C 0 0 1 0 B 0 1 1 0 M 0 1 0 0 W 0 0 0 0 Detailed Descriptions
Color Conversion Table
If the user selects a special mode some of the values in this table may be between 0 and 1. The following page briefly explains the effects of some modes. Color Conversion mode Color conversion mode is a user feature, not to be confused with color conversion (RGB to CMYK) described above. In color conversion mode, a selected color (C/M/Y/R/G/B/K/W) on an original that falls within the recognized thresholds for that color is converted into a different color on the copy. Up to 4 colors can be converted at one time. (Please refer to the operator's manual for details.) For example, when changing Yellow to Black, the coefficients for the Yellow video signal in the color conversion table become: Y: 1, M: 1, C: 1, K: 1 Pastel mode In pastel mode, the matrix parameters change, and the output of the combined YMCK data shifts to a value between 100 % and 25 %. There are 9 steps, and the value used depends on the user's selection. Color balance mode In color balance mode, the data output for each color (YMCK) can be changed independently by changing the matrix parameters. Three are nine possible values for each color. Original mode There are three modes within photo mode (Press Print, Glossy Photo, and 2nd Generation) and three types of special original mode (Marker Pen, Inkjet, Map). The machine selects the most suitable matrix for the original type that is selected by the user at the operation panel. For inkjet mode, the user can select one of three different inkjet gamma () tables to emulate the output of three different types of inkjet printer. (This is done with the User Tools.) RGB toner correction mode Two color toners are used on R, G, and B output in the single color mode. The toner mixing ratios for R, G, and B are adjustable (SP 5-611-001 to 5-611-006). The adjustments are valid for two-toner single-color (R, G, or B) copy modes only. Twin color mode Twin color mode separates black part area and colored areas. The machine then converts black to one color (that was selected by the user) and all the color areas another color (the output has only two colors). (Refer to the operator's manual for details.)
SM 2-43 A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Background Density Control and ADS
A269D084.WMF
A269D085.WMF
A269D083.WMF
Background density control This function removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain threshold. The threshold that is applied depends on the color mode (single color or full color). For each of these modes, the user can select a different threshold. ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) In ADS, the user does not set the threshold; the machine calculates it, guided by input from the user for F/C and 2C mode. In full color mode, after scanning the machine calculates the threshold for removing background by referring to the RGB data taken from the entire original. In black and white mode, the machine detects the background level for the original, also known as the peak white level, and removes this from the image, to make a white background. Peak level data is taken for each scan line to correct for changes in background density down the page. From the peak white level, the machine determines the white reference value for A/D conversion. Therefore, in black and white mode the background density is controlled before data is input to the A/D converter.
A257/A269 2-44 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
UCR (Under Color Removal)
A269D086.WMF
Obtaining the right colors using YMC toner addition does not always work perfectly. For example, if the same quantity of toner for each color (YMC) is put on the paper, ideally the image should become black, but in reality it becomes a dark color, such as dark blue. To compensate for this, an equal portion of the common ID value for each color is subtracted. This reduces the amount of color toner on the paper, and a proportional amount of black toner is added. This process is known as UCR. The UCR ratio is the percentage of the common ID value for YMC that is subtracted and converted to black. In the above example, where the UCR ratio is 100%; the entire common ID value is subtracted from Y, M, and C, and converted to K. In actual use, the UCR ratio depends on the color mode and the image density. For example, when the UCR ratio is 95%, 95% of the entire common ID value is subtracted from Y, M, and C, and converted to K. The UCR ratio can be adjusted by the user during initial setup.
SM
2-45
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Magnification Processing
Main Scan Magnification
A269D088.WMF
The machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in the sub-scan direction. However, an LSI on the IPU Board handles reduction and enlargement in the main scan direction. Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (the CCD elements cannot be squeezed or expanded). So, to reduce or enlarge an image, imaginary points are calculated that would correspond to a physical enlargement or reduction of the image. The correct image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the image data for the nearest two true points. The calculated image data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data. NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a service manual and will not be covered here.
400 dpi to 600 dpi Conversion

The copier converts image data that is scanned at 400 dpi to 600 dpi by performing the same processing that is explained above in Main Scan Magnification by applying 150% magnification processing on the image data for both main and sub scans.
A257/A269
2-46
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Creation
These are some of the user selectable image processing functions.
Mirror Image
This function generates a mirror image of the original by inverting the original image in the main scan direction.

A269D951.WMF
Slanted Image
This function generates a slanted image of the original by shifting the original image in the main scan direction by a specified angle. The maximum allowable angle is 45.
+10
R
45 +45 Image area
This area is not printed.

A269D952.WMF
Repeat Image
The copier can copy a specified area of the original repeatedly over the entire page. There are three ways of specifying the copy area. (Refer to the operator's manual for details.) 1) Entering length. 2) Entering the number of images 3) Entering via an editor
SM
2-47
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Outline Image
The copier converts the image data into binary-value data and submits the converted data into an outline image filter. The frame width may be set to 0.25, 0.5, or 0.75 mm.
Outline image output
Input
Outline image filter
A269D953.WMF
Shadow Image
The shadow is cast in the lower right direction from the original at an angle of 45 degrees. The shadow may be plane or solid and the shadow color may be the same color or specified color. To produce a half tone of the same color, the copier identifies the color of the original and uses that color for shading. The color may be specified from the editor (K, C, M, Y). The width of the shadow can be specified between 1 mm and 4 mm in 1 mm units. The copier does not allow the user to specify the color of the shadow when performing both outline imaging and shadowing.
<Plane shadow>
<Solid shadow>
A269D954.WMF
Positive-Negative (Image Inversion)

The copier converts the colors of the full-color original to their complementary colors in the inversion mode. W to K B to Y G to M R to C The user may specify the area and magnification ratio.

A269D955.WMF
A257/A269
2-48
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Gradation Processing
Gamma () Correction (Printer )
[Fig. 1]
A269D089.WMF
[Fig. 2]
A269D090.WMF
CMKY Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black are identical, as shown in figure 1. However, they are not because electrical components always vary slightly, resulting in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2. The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure can compensate for any discrepancies in color reproduction. ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, black text). After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service programs (SP4-910 to SP4-926). Using these programs, each gamma curve can be adjusted for 4 different modes: ID max., High ID, Middle ID, and Low ID, as shown on the following page. If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled. Alternatively, the factory settings can be loaded using SP 5-610-004. In addition, the factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5-610-005. SP7-904 prints the current manual settings.
SM
2-49
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID max. This mode adjusts the total image density level as shown in figure 3.
[Fig. 3]
A269D091.WMF
Shadow (High ID) The High ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure 4).
[Fig. 4]
A269D092.WMF
Middle (Middle ID) The Middle ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure 5).
[Fig. 5]
A269D093.WMF
Highlight (Low ID) The Low ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure 6).
[Fig. 6]
A269D094.WMF
A257/A269
2-50
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The copier firmware has a test pattern that has eight 17-step gradation scales for each color (KCMY), including background white, for Text and Photo modes.
Dark Light
Auto color calibration This machine automatically calibrates the printer gamma () curve when the user selects ACC. When ACC is activated, the machine prints out an ACC Test Pattern. The user puts the test pattern on the exposure glass, then the machine scans the test pattern. The machine scans eight lines, one for each color (KCMY) in text mode, and one for each color in photo mode. The machine corrects the printer gamma by comparing the ideal settings with the current image density. Then the machine combines the corrected gamma curve with the High, Middle, and Low ID values currently in memory (these are not reset to the defaults first, as in some earlier models)
K C M Y K C M Y
A269D095.WMF
The machine the calculates the ID max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes (SP4-910 to SP4-926). ACC target: This copier allows adjustments in 10 steps on the target base to be used during auto color correction. (SP4-501-001 through SP4-501-008: For the copier) (SP4-502-001 through SP4-502-008: For the printer) Default: 5 Adjustable range: 0 to 10 NOTE: The adjustable range is 0 to 50. However, the effective range is 0 to 10. Even when it is set to 50, it is the same level for 10.
SM
2-51
A257/A269
IMAGE PROCESSING
Dither Processing
This copier provides 256 gradations by using 1 dot by 1 dot and 2 dots by 2 dots dither patterns in each of the text and photo modes, whereby ensuring high image quality. In the printer mode, the copier uses a different table for photo mode dithering from that for the copier.
A269D096.WMF
A269D097.WMF
Area Manipulation Functions

In an edit model, the image data in the areas that are specified from the operation panel and that are subject to pre-scanning are encoded in the area processor section and sent to the image processor section together with the main scan image data. The data in each area (20 areas maximum) is subject to color correction in the "color calibration 2" step of the IPU board. The edit version of this copier is also equipped with image overlay capabilities.
CPU
The copier incorporates a 32-bit CPU to process and control the timing of the data in the scanner and IPU sections.
IPU Board Test

The IPU consists of some LSI chips, DRAM, SRAM, and a controller block that controls these chips and RAM. They are interconnected in a way that allows IPU board tests to be run from SP mode (SP4-904-001 and SP4-094-002) and check for IPU malfunctions (ASIC diagnostics on the shading and subsequent stages).
A257/A269
2-52
SM
LASER EXPOSURE
2.5 LASER EXPOSURE

2.5.1 OVERVIEW
2 3 4 5 6 12
Detailed Descriptions A257/A269
14
7 13 12 11 9 10
A269D102.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
LD control board LD unit Cylindrical lens 1st f lens 2nd f lens Polygon mirror Polygon motor drive board
8. Laser synchronization detector 9. Polygon mirror motor 10. OPC drum 11. Toner shield glass 12. Drum mirror 13. Laser synchronization detector mirror 14. BTL (Barrel Toroidal Lens)
This machine uses laser diodes to produce electrostatic images on an OPC drum. The laser diode unit converts image data from the LD main control board into laser pulses, and the optical components direct these pulses to the drum. For main scanning, this copier uses a polygon mirror that rotates at 23,622 rpm. The drum rotation (with a peripheral velocity of 200 mm/s) controls sub-scanning. The copier achieves 256 gradations using a combination of laser power modulation (PM) and pulse width modulation (PWM). The laser diode unit is a multi-beam type with two laser diodes and supports laser exposure at 600 dpi.
SM
2-53
LASER EXPOSURE
2.5.2 LD UNIT
LD Safety Switch
Front Door Safety SW
Video Control Board CN601-4 CN603-23 ~ 27 LD2 CN601-3 LD CN600-1 PD LD LD1 CN650-24 ~ 28
LDDR
PD
+5V
PSU
LD Drive IC LD Drive IC
A269D250.WMF
The front door has two safety switches that ensure that the laser beam does not accidentally switch on during servicing, while the front door is open. These safety switches are installed in series on the 5V line between the PSU and the LD unit. When the front door is opened, the door switches cut off the 5V line to the LD unit.
A257/A269
2-54
SM
LASER EXPOSURE
LD Unit Configuration
The LD unit is a 2LD multi-beam type. It consists of two laser diodes [A], two collimate lenses [B], two apertures [C], a composite prism [D], and an LD control board [E]. The beams from the laser diodes are converted to parallel beams by the collimate lenses. The apertures then form the laser beams to the diameter necessary for writing on the drum. The two laser beams are output in parallel 42.3 m apart through the composite prism. Two lines are written simultaneously on the drum. This provides printing at 600 dpi (sub-scan). The wavelength of the semiconductor laser diodes is 780 nm and the maximum output power is 15 mW.
LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 2 mm 42.3 m
A269D103.WMF
[D]
[A]
[C]
A269D512.WMF
[B]
SM
2-55
A257/A269
LASER EXPOSURE
Auto Power Control (APC)
LD5V
VIDEO
LD
PD
LEVEL
Current Control IC
LD OFF
LD Drive Board
A259D501.WMF
Even if a constant electric current is applied to the laser diode, the intensity of the output light changes with the temperature. The intensity of the output decreases as the temperature increases. In order to keep the output level constant, the output light intensity is monitored through a photodiode (PD) enclosed in the laser diode. The photodiode passes an electrical current that is proportional to the light intensity. The output is not affected by temperature, so it faithfully reflects the changes in the LD output, without adding anything itself. Just after the main switch is turned on, the current control IC on the LD drive board excites the laser diode at full power (power level 32) and stores the output of the photodiode as a reference. The current control IC monitors the current passing through the photodiode. Then it increases or decreases the current to the laser diode as necessary, comparing it with the reference level. Such auto power control is done during printing while the laser diode is active. The laser power level is adjusted on the production line. Do NOT touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.
A257/A269
2-56
SM
LASER EXPOSURE
2.5.3 LASER OPTICS SYSTEM

7 1
4
A269D101.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4.
Laser diode unit Cylindrical lens Polygon mirror f Lens 1
5. f Lens 2 6. Drum mirror 7. Barrel toroidal lens (BTL)
Cylindrical Lens
The LD unit sends laser beams to the polygon mirror through the cylindrical lens. The cylindrical lens determines the beam diameter in the sub scan direction.
Polygon Mirror
The polygon mirror assembly consists of a motor and a polygon mirror integrated in a unit. The polygon mirror is hexahedral. The mirror surfaces have been ultraprecision machined to provide precise dot placement and increase reflection efficiency. The polygon motor rotates at 23,622 rpm and writes 12 lines per revolution (2 lines per surface). The polygon motor is always rotating while power is on to ensure fast copying.
SM
2-57
A257/A269
LASER EXPOSURE
f Lenses and the BTL

The angles between pixels are equal. However, if the beam were to go directly to the drum as shown in the upper illustration, the spacing between pixels would depend on the angle of the beam. The pixels near the end of the drum would be further apart than the ones near the middle, and slightly thicker toward the ends of the drum than in the middle. The f-theta lenses [A] and barrel toroidal lens (BTL) [B] correct for this by deflecting the beam slightly inward to ensure uniform pixel spacing and diameter. The f-theta lenses and BTL also correct for very slight deviations of the polygon mirror surfaces from being perfectly perpendicular to the plane of the laser beam. [B] [A]
A269D098.WMF
Laser Synchronization Mechanism

The laser synchronizing detector board [A] synchronizes the main scan start timing. This board generates and sends a synchronization signal when the laser synchronizing detector mirror [B] reflects the laser beam to the detector as the laser beam starts its sweep across the drum.
[B] [A]
A269D101.WMF
A257/A269
2-58
SM
LASER EXPOSURE
Laser Exposure Control
Data 255
R, G, B, and CCD output
PM 32 24 16 8
Data 0
PM 32 24 16 8
Data 48
PM 32 24 16 8
Data 255
2 4 6 8 PWM
2 4 6 8 PWM
2 4 6 8 PWM
256 gradations
A269D099.WMF
Two modulation systems are used to produce 256 gradations of printout from the LD output. One is pulse width modulation (PWM) in which the ON time of the laser diode is adjusted. The other is power modulation (PM) in which the luminous intensity (brightness) of the laser beam is controlled. To make the latent image, the laser beam illuminates the image area on the drum surface. The longer the laser is on and the more intense it is, the darker the developed pixel becomes. Modulating (changing) the width of the pulse makes the length of time that the laser is on longer or shorter. There are eight possible pulse width levels in this model. While the laser is on to make one dot, the intensity of the laser is controlled by power modulation (PM). The lasers intensity is controlled by the amount of current sent to the laser diode. Modulating the power makes the laser brighter or dimmer. There are 32 possible power levels, or laser intensity levels. The laser engine can use the 8 pulse width levels and 32 power levels to create the 256 possible grayscale values for each pixel for each color. In the printer mode, the machine carries out 1,200 dpi compatible smoothing.
SM
2-59
A257/A269
LASER EXPOSURE
Multibeam Laser Exposure

The employment of the 2LD multi-beam system makes it possible to print faster or at higher dot density without increasing rotational speed of the polygon mirror. Low-speed rotation of the polygon mirror contributes to prolonged service life of the polygon motor and low noise. While the beam from LD1 [A] passes [A] straight through the composite prism [B], the beam from LD2 [C] is reflected within the composite prism and exits the prism near the beam from LD1. The two beams intersect on the polygon mirror, and then scan over the OPC drum surface with a spacing of approximately 2 mm in the main scan direction and with a spacing of approximately 42.3 m in the sub scan direction. This gives laser exposure at 600 dpi (sub scan).
[C]
[B]
A269D511.WMF
Laser Diode Control Board Functions

The laser exposure control board performs the following control functions: Process control correction Storing internal pattern data Storing character data for data output Performing smoothing in the 1,200 dpi printer mode (Smoothing processing proper is carried out by the printer controller.) Preserving the auto color calibration values Preserving the printer values Performing fine adjustment of main and sub scan magnification ratios (controller mode) Main scan: Adjust by changing the clock frequency (SP2-112). Sub scan: Adjust by changing the polygons rotational speed (SP2-113). (The main scan magnification ratio must be adjusted whenever the sub scan magnification ratio is adjusted.)
A257/A269
2-60
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

2.6.1 OVERVIEW
13
12 4
11 10 5 9 8 7
A269D301.WMF
1. Toner cartridge 2. Toner cartridge set sensor 3. Revolver/Drum drawer (without drum unit details) 4. Drum 5. Development roller 6. TD sensor
7. Toner catch cover 8. Mixing augers 9. Toner supply auger 10. Toner end sensor 11. Revolver H.P. sensor 12. Revolver lock 13. Revolver filter
This machine has four development unitsone for each color (K, Y, C, and M). The development units are mounted around a rotating mechanism called the revolver. The revolver rotates counterclockwise to bring the proper color development unit to the drum. The revolver and the drum unit are mounted in a pull-out drawer (revolver/drum drawer) for easy maintenance.
SM
2-61
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.2 REVOLVER MECHANISM
A269D302.WMF
The revolver unit is composed of four development units, one for each color (KYCM). It develops colors by rotating the revolver counter-clockwise (as viewed from the front of the copier), 90 degrees at a time, in the order of K, Y, C, and M. In printer mode, development is carried out in the order of Y, C, M, and K to improve the reproducibility of black letters. The development units for each color can be removed easily.
A257/A269
2-62
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Revolver Drive
[B] [A]
A269D303.WMF
[A]
30
[C]
A269D304.WMF
The revolver in the drawer unit is supported by the ring bearings [A] at the front and rear of the revolver. It is rotated by the revolver drive motor [B]. The revolver rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front of the copier in 90 degree steps. Since the revolvers home position lies 30 before the Ks development position, [C] the revolver is rotated by 30 before starting development. The revolver drive motor is a 2-phase stepper motor.
SM
2-63
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Revolver Home Position Detection
[B]
[A]
A269D305.WMF
[B]
30
A269D304.WMF
The revolver HP sensor [A], a photointerrupter, is on the front of the revolver/drum drawer. The actuator [B] is attached to the front of the revolver. The CPU detects the revolver home position when the actuator enters the HP sensor. The home position is 30 degrees before the K development position for copy and printer mode. This clearance between the development sleeve and the drum prevents the drum surface from becoming dirty and minimizes toner consumption when development is not taking place. Whenever a copy job ends, the copier returns the revolver to home position. It also does this when the copier is turned on and when the front door is opened or closed. The toner bottle is locked into place so that it cannot be accidentally removed. However, when there is a toner near end or toner end condition, the revolver stops at a different position in standby mode so that the toner bottle can be changed. Then, when the user makes a copy, [C] the revolver goes to home position first, before the copy is made. SC361 is turned on when a revolver HP sensor error occurs.
A257/A269
2-64
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.3 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM
[C]
[D]
[A] [B]
A269D306.WMF
The developer (700 g) in each development unit is supplied to the development roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B] and attracted onto the roller surface by the magnets inside the development roller. The attracted developer is trimmed to the desired thickness by a magnetic doctor blade [C], and then carried out to the drum [D] where the latent image is developed. The magnetic doctor blade attracts the carrier and increases friction. This reduces the time required to create the triboelectric charge on the toner carrier particles. (Reduces developer setting time.) It also maintains the image density more effectively than a non-magnetic doctor blade. The uniform clearance (photoconductor gap: PG) between the development roller and the drum is guaranteed by the combination of the development unit locks at both ends of the development mechanisms and the drawer positioning mechanism.
SM
2-65
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.4 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE
[A]
A269D307.WMF
The revolver unit contains four development mechanisms. At any one time, only one development mechanism is driven (the one for the color that is being developed) The drum peripheral component motor drives the development roller and screws using the torque of the drum peripheral motor through development clutch [A] and idler gears.
2.6.5 DEVELOPER AGITATION
[A]
A269D307.WMF
The two transfer augers [A] circulate and agitate the developer. This is a more compact system than the paddle mechanism used in older models. Developer is agitated during the process control check, during toner supply, and during development (only for the color being used).
A257/A269
2-66
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.6 TONER AGITATION

The toner is agitated by the rotation of the revolver.
2.6.7 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

[C] [B] [D] [A]
A269D308.WMF
Since this copier uses a revolver mechanism, it needs only one bias terminal. When a development unit is at the development position, the development input shaft [A] is in contact with the bias terminal [B] at the rear of the revolver. At this time, voltage passes from the high voltage supply board [C] to the development roller shaft through the bias terminal The bias terminal has a spring [D] to push it against the development input shaft to prevent poor terminal contact when the development unit reaches the copying position. This model uses both ac and dc bias. The ac bias improves toner transfer to the drum. AC: Peak-to-peak 0.8 kV, 2.25 kHz DC: Center 500 V (depending on the process control self check) The ac bias is applied only during the copy cycle. At other times the ac bias is turned off to prevent toner from transferring to the drum and only the dc bias is applied. SC360: Development bias (high-voltage power supply - B) error
SM
2-67
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.8 TD SENSOR NONCONTACT COUPLER
[B] [C]
A269D303.WMF
[A] [D]
A269D309.WMF
Each of the four development units has a TD sensor [A]. These sensors interface with the CPU through a single interface called a noncontact coupler. The noncontact coupler has two parts; one is mounted on the main unit [B] and the other inside the bearing ring of the revolver [C]. These two sections are separated by an air-gap. Power for the revolver side is provided through a circular coil [D] (a small transformer) inside the coupler sections. The power transformation is: 38 Vac (main unit) 12 Vac (revolver) 12 V (for TD sensor). The TD sensor output is conveyed through optical communication (Infra-red). The CPU receives TD sensor output only from the development unit at the development position.
A257/A269
2-68
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.9 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM
[C] [A] [D]

[B] [C]
A269D311.WMF
[D]
A269D310.WMF
Toner is supplied to the development unit that is at the development position. Toner supply is driven by the drum peripheral components motor via the toner supply clutch [A] and a series of gears. At the development position, toner is supplied to the toner supply section from the toner cartridge [B] and moved to the development shutter opening [C] by the toner supply auger [D]. There the toner falls into the development unit. The development shutter closes under its own weight when the revolver rotates, thus preventing developer from being fed back from the development unit to the toner supply unit.
SM
2-69
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.10 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION

The toner cartridge set sensor [A] detects the metallic mark (Reflector) on the toner bottle. This sensor is on the upper front side of the drawer unit
[A]
A269D312.WMF
2.6.11 TONER CARTRIDGE SHUTTER LOCK PIN

A lock pin [A] prevents the toner cartridge shutter from opening when the toner cartridge [B] is not installed. This lock pin is pressed to release the shutter when the toner cartridge is set in the main unit.
[B]
[A]
A269D358.WMF
2.6.12 INCORRECT TONER INSTALLATION PREVENTION

Each toner cartridge has pins [A] to prevent it from being installed in the wrong place. The pins are at different positions for each color.
[A]
A269D313.WMF
A257/A269
2-70
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.13 TONER END SENSOR
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
A269D314.WMF
When a development unit moves to the copy position, the mirror blocks [A] in the toner feed hopper match up with the light emitter and receiver of the toner end sensor [B]. If there is toner in the hopper, the path of light is blocked. If there is no toner, light reflects through the mirror blocks back to the toner end sensor. (Toner end sensor output High [5 V] Toner present. Toner end sensor output Low [0 V] Toner absent.) As the toner supply auger [C] rotates, a strip of Mylar [D] inside the toner supply unit swings up and down and wipes off the inner surfaces of the mirror blocks, thereby preventing toner from adhering to the mirror blocks. The toner sensor output is sampled 160 times every 4 milliseconds when a development unit is at the copy position. A toner absent condition is flagged when 20 or more sensor output samples are read low (no toner detected) within a 4 millisecond interval. A toner near end is signaled when this toner absent condition is detected three times in succession for the same color. After a toner near end is indicated, the toner end condition is reached when the IPU pixel counter counts up the equivalent of 10 A4 sheets of pixels (100% coverage) for that color. The machine can copy/print at least 10 sheets after the toner near end condition is signaled. There are two possible cases as follows: 1. The toner end condition occurs before 10 sheets are printed: In this case copying stops after 10 sheets are printed. This is true regardless of paper size. 2. Ten sheets (of any size) are printed before toner end occurs: In this case copying stops when the toner end condition occurs.
SM 2-71 A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.14 TONER END RECOVERY

The toner end recovery processing proceeds as shown below.
Set toner cartridge
N = 0 Yes N = 2 Move revolver to home position No
Three revolution of revolver stopping at every 90 degrees rotation.
N = N+1 Move to toner development position for the color
No Toner detected?
Yes
Toner near end and toner end
End
A269D351.WMF
1. The copier moves the toner cartridge of the first color to be subject to toner replenishment confirmation to the toner end sensor detection position (K Y C M). 2. The copier rotates the toner hopper to add toner. 3. The copier checks for the presence or absence of toner with the toner end sensor and flags OK or NG internally. 4. The copier moves the next color to the toner end sensor detection position and performs steps 2 and 3).
A257/A269 2-72 SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
5. When the toner recovery cycle ends, the copier moves the revolver to the toner end sensor detection position for any cartridges that are still flagged as NG. It then performs the toner recovery cycle again. If a cartridge is flagged NG again, the copier returns the cartridge to the state before the toner recovery state (toner near end and toner end LEDs are lit).
6. The copier resets the toner near end and toner end states and resets the toner end related counters (pixel and page counters) for toners for which toner recovery was completed and flagged OK.
2.6.15 TONER LOOSENING

This copier loosens the toner in the toner cartridge by rotating the revolver 3 turns before performing the auto initial process control self check at power-on time. This prevents the toner inside the cartridge from adhering together and forming lumps of toner when the copier is not in use for a long time.
SM
2-73
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
2.6.16 REVOLVER LOCK MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
A269D315.WMF
This copier is provided with a lock mechanism that prevents the revolver from rotating inadvertently during toner replacement or when the toner cartridge shutter is being opened or closed. When the front cover is opened, the push rod [A] on the front of the revolver/drum drawer is released, the lock pawl [B] rotates into the lock notch of the revolver. When the front cover is closed, a pin on the door pushes in the revolver lock button to release the lock pawl. A lock release tool is stored inside the copier unit. It may be used to check the machine operation during maintenance. CAUTION: Concerning the safety switch actuator: Be sure to set the lock release tool before inserting the door safety switch actuator. If the revolver rotates in the locked state, the copier displays Revolver Motor Outof-step and SC361 (Revolver H.P. Error).
A257/A269
2-74
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
2.7 TRANSFER BELT UNITS

2.7.1 OVERVIEW
This copier uses two transfer beltsan image transfer belt and a paper transfer belt. The copier transfer belt system first develops the 4 color toner images on the transfer belt and then later transfers the complete image onto the paper. This permits the image transfer to the paper in a single operation. For the paper transfer step, the copier employs an insulated transfer belt system to improve the efficiency of image transfer to the paper. The paper transfer belt also provides smooth paper transport as the paper passes through the image transfer area and receives the image. 1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 9 10 17 16 15 14 13 11 12
A269D401.WMF
4 5
7 8
1. OPC drum 2. Transfer belt bias roller 3. Image transfer belt (ITB) 4. Belt mark sensor 5. Transfer belt drive roller 6. Transfer belt tension roller 7. Paper transfer counter roller 8. Paper registration rollers 9. Paper transfer tension roller 10. Paper transfer belt (PTB) 11. Paper transfer bias roller 12. PTB blade counter roller
13. PTB cleaning blade 14. PTB cleaning brush 15. PTB back brush 16. Belt discharge corona unit 17. Paper transfer drive roller 18. Pick-off plate 19. Separation corona unit 20. ITB blade counter roller 21. ITB cleaning blade 22. ITB lubricant brush 23. ITB lubricant bar 24. Ground roller
SM
2-75
A257/A269
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
2.7.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT SECTION

Image Transfer Belt Drive Mechanism
[A] [B] [D]
[C]
A269D402.WMF
The image transfer belt [A] is always in contact with the drum, and rotates in one direction only. This belt has its own motorthe image transfer belt motor [B]. This motor is a rotary positioning servomotor. This type of motor provides very stable drive. It compensates for the vibrations caused by the contact and release operations of the belt cleaning blade and paper transfer unit and allows image transfer operations while these actions are going on. The transfer belt motor is coupled to the transfer belt drive roller [C] through a timing belt [D]. In the OHP or thick paper mode, the operation speed of the machine is reduced to half of that for the normal paper immediately before paper transfer is carried out.
A257/A269
2-76
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Belt Tension Release Mechanism

[C]
(1) (3)
[B]
Removal tension state (2) Full tension state
A269D403.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
A269D404.WMF
Image transfer belt tension is applied or released using the belt tension lever [A] located on the front of the unit. Turning the belt tension lever rotates the eccentric cams [B] on the shaft/cam assembly, and the cams change the angle of the tension bracket [C]. This changes the amount of tension applied to the image transfer belt. Applying full tension to the belt makes the drum and belt contact across the width of approximately 18 mm. The belt tension lever is used to put the belt in three tension conditions(1) the full tension state (drum contact position), (2) the removal tension state (image transfer belt unit install/uninstall position), and (3) the tension released state (image transfer belt replacement position).
SM
2-77
A257/A269
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Image Transfer Belt Bias

The high voltage supply board [A] applies a voltage to the transfer belt through the bias roller [B], which is inside the transfer belt. Color toners are superimposed on the transfer belt one at a time. The transfer voltage is increased as they are superimposed. Since the image transfer belt has a high resistance, a belt discharge system is used (see the belt cleaning section). SP2-301: Set Primary Transfer Bias SC400: Belt transfer bias PP (highvoltage power supply: T1, PCC) error [A]
A269D405.WMF
[B]
Belt Mark Sensor Mechanism

The machine uses the belt mark detection sensor [A] to align the position of the image on the belt for each color by detecting the belt mark [B]. The belt mark is a highly reflective metallic (gold colored) patch. The FGATE signal is generated when the belt mark is detected, and this signal allows image data to be written to the drum. SC452 is generated when the copier fails to detect the belt mark at the required time.
[B]
[A]
A269D406.WMF
A257/A269
2-78
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Belt Cleaning Mechanism

[F] [B] [A] [C] [D]
[D]
[H]
[E]
[G]
[C]
A269D407.WMF
[C]
A269D408.WMF
(1) Contact/Release Mechanism

The belt cleaning shift clutch [A] (a half-turn clutch) transfers drive from the drum peripheral component motor [B] to the belt cleaning cams [C] in the cleaning unit. These cams move the cleaning blade [D], the entrance seal [E], and the lubricant brush [F] into or out-of contact with the transfer belt depending on the point in the copy/print cycle.
(2) Contact/Release Detection

The blade contact state is detected when the actuator [G] on the cleaning contact/release drive coupler actuates the image transfer belt cleaning home position sensor [H]. If the actuator is not detected at the end of a copy job, SC457 (belt cleaner reset error) is generated and the copier stops.
(3) Contact/Release Timing

The cleaning blade, entrance seal, and lubricant brush contact the belt when the Start key pressed. When printing two or more colors, the cleaning blade, entrance seal, and lubricant brush are released when the leading edge of the image for the color reaches the front of the entrance seal. The entrance seal contacts the belt before (and releases after) the cleaning blade and lubricant brush to prevent toner from falling into the paper transfer section during contact/release. The toner pan on the bottom part of the unit is also used to prevent the toner from falling into the paper transfer section. The cleaning blade and lubricant brush contact the belt at the same time.
SM
2-79
A257/A269
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
[B]
[A]
[D] [C] [E] [A] [B]

A269D409.WMF
[A]
[C]
A269D410.WMF
[F]
A269D419.WMF
Lubricant Application
Normal machines usually generate a film of toner on the belt. Toner film reduces the ability of toner to separate from the belt. To solve this problem, the lubricant brush [A] applies a small amount of lubricant [B] to the transfer belt. The lubricant brush and the toner collection coil [C] are driven by the drum peripheral component motor [D] through the image transfer belt cleaning drive clutch. [E]
Transfer Belt discharge

Since the image transfer belt is made of high-resistance materials, a bias (DC+) is applied to the lubricant brush by high voltage supply board Q1 [F] to discharge the voltages that accumulate on the belt. Since the amount of residual charge on the image transfer belt varies depending on the environment (temperature and humidity), an appropriate bias (voltage) is applied according to the temperature and humidity. SP2-601: Set up image transfer belt discharge DC bias SC: SC402: Image transfer belt discharge leak
A257/A269
2-80
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Cleaning Vacuum
The exhaust fan at the rear of the copier draws air through the image transfer belt cleaning unit to remove any toner that is scattered by the contact and release of the cleaning mechanism.
A269D421.WMF
Toner Collection Mechanism

The used toner collected in the drum cleaning unit, the image transfer belt cleaning unit, and the paper transfer belt cleaning unit is conveyed by various toner collection coils and transport coils to the used toner tank. The toner recover mechanism is shown by the illustration to the right. The capacity of the used toner tank is approximately 6 liters.
A269D411.WMF
SM
2-81
A257/A269
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
2.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER BELT SECTION

Paper Transfer Unit Contact/Release Mechanism
When the transferred paper reaches approximately 10 mm before the transfer position, the paper transfer belt shift clutch [A] (half-turn) is turned on, rotating the shaft: cams [B]. half a turn. The cams elevate the paper transfer unit, causing the paper transfer bias roller [C] to press the paper transfer belt [D] against the image transfer belt [E]. At this moment a contact width of approximately 2 mm is formed where the image transfer belt and the paper transfer belt contact. [G] [F] [D] [B]
[A] [D] [E]
[B]
[C]
A269D412.WMF
When paper transfer ends, the paper transfer belt shift clutch is turned on again to turn the eccentric cams another half turn, which releases the contact between the two transfer belts. The contact or release between the paper transfer bias roller and image transfer belt is detected by the paper transfer belt home position sensor [F], which senses an actuator [G] on the camshaft. If the actuator is not detected at the end of a copy job, SC456 (Paper transfer belt error) is generated and the copier stops.
Paper Transfer Belt Drive

The paper transfer belt has a separate motorthe paper transfer belt motor [A].
[A]
A269D413.WMF
A257/A269
2-82
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Paper Transfer Belt Cleaning
[C]
[A] [B]
A269D415.WMF
The paper transfer belt has to be cleaned to remove paper dust and toner contamination. This is done with a blade [A] and a cleaning brush [B]. The back brush [C] contacts the back side of the paper transfer belt. This brush is actually to keep the drive roller, cleaning counter roller, paper transfer bias roller, and tension roller clean.
SM
2-83
A257/A269
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Paper Transfer Bias

The copier transfers the toner image on the image transfer belt to the paper using a bias roller system. A constant current system is used to generate the paper transfer bias. The paper transfer bias is provided directly to the paper transfer bias roller shaft by high voltage supply board T2 [A]. The paper transfer current is modified based on the following four conditions: 1. Absolute humidity The current value is switched under low temperature/low humidity conditions and high temperature/high humidity conditions according to the absolute humidity that is measured by the temperature and humidity sensors [B] on the side panel of the copier main unit. 2. Trailing edge of the paper The transfer current is increased for the first 15 mm at the leading edge and the last 15 mm at the trailing edge. This prevents poor image transfer at the leading and trailing edges. 3. Paper transfer speed The current value is switched according to the process speed of the paper for the normal paper and OHP/thick paper modes. 4. Side of the paper (duplex) The current value is switched for the front and back sides of the paper. SP2-310: Set secondary transfer bias SC450: Paper transfer bias PP (highvoltage power supply: T2, D) error SC495: Temperature sensor error SC496: Humidity sensor error
A269D417.WMF
[A]
A269D416.WMF
[B]
A269D422.WMF
A257/A269
2-84
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNITS
Paper Transfer Belt Discharge

To remove the charges accumulated on the paper transfer belt, a belt discharge corona unit [A] is installed under the unit near the drive roller. This corona unit removes the charges that accumulate on the paper transfer belt. The corona unit is an ac corona with a dc component (5.8 kV ac, +600 dc). Charging starts when a point corresponding to the leading edge of the image reaches position [B] in the figure. Since the paper transfer belt receives a static electric charge simply by being rotated, dc voltage (+300 V) is always applied to the belt when it is turning. [A]
A269D415.WMF
[A]
A269D420.WMF
[B]
Paper Separation Mechanism

The copier uses a combination of three standard methods to separate the paper from the transfer belt. 1. Curvature separation The paper transfer belt turns so sharply as it passes around the paper transfer drive roller [B] that paper tends to separate due to its own stiffness. 2. Separation corona A269D418.WMF [B] The separation corona unit [C] discharges the toner and paper to reduce the electrical attraction between the paper and the paper transfer belt. (The separation corona is not close to the contact point of the two transfer belts; so, it does not interfere with the transfer of the image to the paper.) 3. Mechanical pick-off The pick-off plate (not shown) provides mechanical assistance to help the paper separate from the paper transfer belt. [C]
SM
2-85
A257/A269
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION SECTION
2.8 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION SECTION

Diagram
1 2 18 17 4 5 16 6 15 3
14
13 8 9 11 10
A269D701.WMF
12
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Registration sensor By-pass open/close switch By-pass grip roller By-pass feed roller By-pass pick-up roller By-pass reverse roller Vertical transport roller Grip roller Tray paper feed roller
10. Tray reverse roller 11. Tray pick-up roller 12. 3rd tray size sensor 13. 2nd tray size sensor 14. Duplex unit 15. 1st tray set sensor 16. Tray lift arm 17. Lower registration roller 18. Upper registration roller
A257/A269
2-86
SM
2.8.2 PAPER TRAY SECTION

Paper Feed/Separation Mechanism
This copier employs the FRR paper feed system. The paper feed unit is made up of a pick-up roller [A], a paper feed roller [B], a reverse roller [C], and a grip transport roller [D]. When the paper feed clutch [E] turns on, the paper feed roller shaft starts rotation and drives the paper feed roller through a one-way clutch [F]. The pick-up roller also starts rotation via a relay gear. [E] [D]
[F] [A] [C] [B]

A269D703.WMF
Reverse Roller Release Mechanism

The reverse roller of this copier is kept away from the paper feed roller in the standby mode. Only during the paper feed process, the reverse roller solenoid [A] moves the reverse roller [B] up against the paper feed roller [C].
[C] [C]
[B] [B] [A]

A269D705.WMF
Paper Feed Operation

When the paper feed signal is supplied from the main control board, the pick-up roller solenoid turns on, which lowers the pick-up roller and starts feeding the paper.
A269D704.WMF
SM
2-87
A257/A269
Paper Lift Mechanism

When a tray is set, the lift motor [A] to the rear of the tray engages with the pin on the bottom plate lift arm shaft and starts rotation. This causes the bottom plate lift arm [B] to rotate and lift the tray. [A]
[B]
A269D706.WMF
When a tray is set, the pick-up roller solenoid [C] turns on to lower the pickup roller [D]. When the tray bottom plate rises to the feed position, the top surface of the paper lifts the roller. When the actuator [E] moves out of the upper limit sensor [F] the sensor turns on and the lift motor turns off. As paper is used, the paper and the pick-up roller drop. When the paper drops far enough the actuator enters the upper limit sensor again. The lift motor then turns on again to lift the paper to the feed position.
[C] [F] [E]
[D]
A269D707.WMF
When the tray is pulled out, the bottom plate lift arm shaft is disengaged from the lift motor, causing the tray bottom plate to fall under its own weight.
A269D708.WMF
A257/A269
2-88
SM
Paper End Detection

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. [A] [B]
A269D709.WMF
Paper Near End Detection

The mechanism shown to the right tells the CPU when a tray is nearly our of paper. Actuators [A] on the output coupler of the tray lift motor actuate the paper height sensor [B]. When there is sufficient paper in the tray, the actuator is oriented as shown in the middle illustration. When the paper tray is in a near end state, the actuator rotates with the rotation of the tray lift arm and reaches a position where it blocks the paper height sensor. The sensor signals the main control board that the paper tray is in a near end state. There are four actuators because there are four possible ways for the motor's the output coupler to mate with the tray lift arm shaft. However they engage, one of the actuators will be in the proper position. [B]
[A]
A269D720.WMF
[B]
[A]
Sufficient paper in the tray
Paper near end
A269D721.WMF
SM
2-89
A257/A269
2.8.3 BY-PASS PAPER FEED SECTION

By-pass Feed Table
The by-pass feed table has a pressrelease type latch. The latch [A] unhooks and the table opens when the user presses the release point on the upper left corner of the by-pass feed table. A paper length sensor [B] detects the orientation of the paper on the by-pass feed table. The by-pass table sensor [C] detects when the by-pass feed table is opened. A cleaning pad [D] (brush) cleans the by-pass paper length sensor when the table is opened and closed. [A] [D]
[C]
[B]
A269D710.WMF
By-pass Feed Unit

The by-pass feed unit opens as shown in the figure. It must be opened to remove paper jams in the vertical transport section. [A]: Release lever [B]: By-pass feed unit switch [B]
[A]
A269D711.WMF
By-pass Paper End Sensor

If paper is loaded in the paper tray, the paper end feeler [A] is raised by the paper stack and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper runs out, the paper end feeler drops and the paper end sensor is activated. By-pass paper tray capacity is 50 sheets.
[A]
[B]
A269D713.WMF
A257/A269
2-90
SM
By-pass Pick-up Roller Pressure

[D] [D] [E] [E] [G] [F] [A] [B]
A269D716.WMF
[C]
This copier can handle a wide range of feed stock, including normal, OHP, thick, and thick paper 2 (very thick). For this reason it uses two pick-up solenoidsthe main by-pass pick-up solenoid [A] and the sub by-pass pick-up solenoid [B]. It controls the reverse roller pressure through the reverse roller solenoid [C]. The copier controls these three solenoids and the paper feed to handle various types of paper. The pick-up roller is normally held in the elevated position by the force of the pickup release springs [D]. These springs pull the pick-up release levers [E] against the projections of the pick-up roller arm [F]. When the timing for feeding the paper is reached, the pick-up solenoids turn on as shown in the timing charts on the next page (specific to the mode selected). The solenoid links rotate the pick-up release levers away from the pick-up roller arm, and one or both of the pick-up pressure springs [G] presses the pick-up roller down against the paper. The reverse roller solenoid turns on when by-pass double-sided copies (normal or thick paper) or OHP sheets are fed. (The user must select the proper by-pass mode from the operation panel.) When the reverse roller solenoid is on, it increases the pressure between the reverse roller the paper feed roller. With normal paper, this would increase the likelihood of multiple feeding, but it decreases the chance of misfeeds of by-pass double-sided copies (normal or thick paper) or OHP sheets.
SM
2-91
A257/A269
By-pass Pick-up/Reverse Solenoid Timing Chart

- Normal paper mode <Normal paper> 100 ms 176 ms Intended start Main pick-up solenoid Sub pick-up solenoid Reverse roller solenoid
A269D756.WMF
<Normal paper double-sided paper> 100 ms 176 ms Intended start Main pick-up solenoid Sub pick-up solenoid Reverse roller solenoid
A269D757.WMF
20 ms
451 ms
- Half-speed mode <Thick paper> 100 ms 176 ms Intended start Main pick-up solenoid Sub pick-up solenoid Reverse roller solenoid
A269D758.WMF
451 ms <Thick paper by-pass double-sided/OHP paper> 100 ms 176 ms Intended start Main pick-up solenoid Sub pick-up solenoid Reverse roller solenoid
A269D759.WMF
20 ms A257/A269 2-92
451 ms
923 ms SM
2.8.4 PAPER FEED DRIVE

Tray Feed Unit Drive
Each paper feed unit is driven by the torque of the paper feed motor [A] via the paper feed clutch [B]. This torque is conveyed to the drive gear [C] of each tray by a belt [D]. The paper feed unit controls the drive action of the paper feed rollers by turning on and off the paper feed clutch [E]. [E] [C] [D]
[A] [B]
Registration Roller Drive

The registration roller has its own drive motor [A], which drives the registration rollers through a belt [B]. Compared with drive systems using a registration clutch, this system minimizes drive fluctuations and stops registration errors which are likely to occur when feeding paper thick paper 2. The lower registration roller [C] is a rubber roller with a diameter of 20 mm while the upper registration roller [D] is a metal roller with a diameter of 18 mm. The drive force is applied to the lower roller and is conveyed to the upper roller via the gears [E] on the front end of the rollers. [D]
A269D718.WMF
[B]
[B] [E] [A]
A269D717.WMF
By-pass Feed Unit Drive

The by-pass feed unit is driven by the torque of the paper feed motor [A] which is conveyed by the belt [B] and through a series of gears to the by-pass feed clutch [C]. NOTE: When copying on OHP sheets using the by-pass tray, small spots or scratches may appear at the center of the leading edge. This is caused by the contact of OHPs leading edge with next OHP sheet.
[C] [B]
[A]
A269D712.WMF
SM
2-93
A257/A269
TRANSPORT, FUSING, AND EXIT
2.9 TRANSPORT, FUSING, AND EXIT

22 21 20 6 19 18 17 8 16 15 14 9 10 11 7 23 1 2 3 4 5
13
12
A269D501.WMF
1. Hot roller 2. Hot roller thermofuse 3. Oil supply roller 4. Hot roller oil supply pad 5. Hot roller blade 6. Transport belt 7. Transport fan 8. Pressure roller thermofuse 9. Pressure roller thermistor 10. Pressure roller 11. Pressure cleaning roller
12. Pressure roller lamp 13. Pressure release screw 14. Pressure spring 15. Pressure adjustment screw 16. Exit sensor 17. Fusing exit roller (lower) 18. Exit roller (lower) 19. Exit roller (upper) 20. Fusing exit roller (upper) 21. Hot roller cleaning roller 22. Hot roller lamp 23. Hot roller thermistor
A257/A269
2-94
SM
2.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]
A269D502.WMF
The fusing unit, paper exit unit, and transport belt are driven by the fusing motor [A]. The fusing drive gears are released when the fusing/transfer drawer is pulled out. Gears are also provided on the front side of the hot and pressure rollers to suppress the effects of creases in the duplex copy mode.
SM
2-95
A257/A269
2.9.3 FUSING OVERVIEW

[F] [D] [A] [B] [C] [F]
[E]
A269D503.WMF
Toner is fused onto the paper that is fed from the transport section by applying heat and pressure. The hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B] each have a fusing lamp [C] (780 W for the hot roller and 400 W for the pressure roller). Their temperatures are controlled by the hot roller thermistor [D] and pressure roller thermistor, [E] respectively. Temperature control is accomplished normally by turning the fusing lamps on and off. Phase control can be selected using SP1-104-00. There are two thermofuses [F] in the fusing unitone near the hot roller and one near the pressure roller. Both thermofuses open at 152C. These thermofuses provide fusing overheat protection. This copier uses silicone rubber rollers as the hot and pressure rollers. The hot and pressure rollers are not covered with a tube to maintain high image reproducibility. Oil is applied to the rollers, however, to reduce the tendency of toner to stick to the rollers.
A257/A269
2-96
SM
2.9.4 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

The fusing temperature is controlled to one of the surface temperatures listed below according to the copy mode and operating condition.
Copy Mode OHP/ Thick Paper 1 Single Full Color Color 175C 175C 175C 175C 155C 155C
Fusing: simplex Fusing: duplex Pressure: simplex Pressure: duplex
190C 190C 160C 160C
Single Color 165C 165C 145C 145C
Full Color 175C 175C 155C 155C
Single Color 175C 175C 155C 155C
Full Color 175C 175C 165C 165C
In this copier: Paper with a weight greater than 105 g/m2 (28 lb.) and not greater than 157 g/m2 (42 lb.) is called thick paper 1 (thick paper). Paper with a weight greater than 157 g/m2 (42 lb.) and not greater than 256 g/m2 (68 lb.) is called thick paper 2 (very thick paper).
2.9.5 FUSING PRESSURE

The pressure roller is pressed against the hot roller by a spring and a bracket. The hot roller is pressed by unscrewing the pressure release screw [A]. Then the pressure lever presses up the pressure roller.
[A]
A269D504.WMF
SM
2-97
A257/A269
Stand-by Mode
Normal
Thick Paper 2
2.9.6 OIL SUPPLY

The gear on the fusing knob shaft on the front side of the fusing unit is always engaged with the oil cam gear [A]. The roller of the oil pump lever [B] is in contact with this cam gear. When the fusing motor turns on it drives the fusing knob shaft which rotates the oil cam gear. The roller of the oil pump lever follows the surface of the cam, and the lever alternately presses and releases the sleeve of the oil pump [C]. This action pumps oil to the oil supply pad [D]. Surplus oil is returns to the oil tank. The oil supply pad presses against the oil supply roller [E]. The oil supply roller applies oil to the hot roller and the hot roller applies oil to the pressure roller. The hot roller blade [F] spreads the oil evenly on the hot roller. [D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
A269D505.WMF
[F]
[B]
A269D506.WMF
2.9.7 CLEANING MECHANISM

The hot roller cleaning roller [A] removes toner and dust from the hot roller. A scraper [B] removes the toner and dust from the hot roller cleaning roller. [-15, 17, 19 copier] The pressure roller cleaning roller [C] cleans the pressure roller.
[B]
[A] [C]
A257/A269
2-98
SM
2.9.8 PAPER EXIT AND DUPLEX ENTRANCE

Paper Exit Mechanism
The exit rollers have ridges toward the inside to increase the stiffness of the paper fed from the fusing section and improve paper stacking.
A269D508.WMF
Junction Gate Mechanism

After fusing, the paper is directed either to the paper exit tray or to the duplex section by the junction gate [A]. The junction gate is actuated by the junction gate solenoid [B]. To the paper exit tray: The junction gate solenoid is off. To the duplex tray: The junction gate solenoid is on
[B]
[A]
A269D509.WMF
Paper Exit Cover

The paper exit door [A] is designed to open or close for jam removal. The transport roller plate [B] is released when the paper exit door is opened. The paper exit door switch [C] is provided to detect the set state of the paper exit cover. [B] [C]
[A]
A269D510.WMF
SM
2-99
A257/A269
DUPLEX TRAY
2.10 DUPLEX TRAY

2.10.1 OVERVIEW
13
12
11
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A269D643.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
End fence End fence jogger H.P. sensor Side fence jogger Side fence jogger H.P. sensor Bottom plate Duplex paper end sensor Separation roller
8. Vertical transport roller 9. Paper feed roller 10. Duplex turn sensor 11. Transport path 12. Duplex entrance roller 13. Duplex entrance sensor
A257/A269
2-100
SM
DUPLEX TRAY
2.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
A269D667.WMF
The duplex feed motor [A] drives all the rollers in the duplex tray using a series of gears and a timing belt [B]. Helical gears are used to reduce noise. The duplex feed motor also drives the duplex bottom plate up and down.
SM
2-101
A257/A269
DUPLEX TRAY
2.10.3 PAPER FEED INTO THE DUPLEX TRAY

The duplex feed motor is a stepper motor. The direction that the motor turns depends on whether the duplex unit is stacking or feeding.
Duplex Stacking
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
A269D644.WMF
Paper enters the duplex unit passing the entrance sensor [A], the duplex turn sensor [B], the paper feed roller [C], and the separation roller [D]. Then, it is stacked while the bottom plate [E] is in the lower position.
Paper Feed from the Duplex Tray

[C] [A]
[D] [E]
A269D645.WMF
The paper stacked in the duplex unit is in contact with the paper feed roller [A] after the bottom plate [B] is lifted up. Then, the paper feed roller feeds the paper to the registration rollers in the copier main body via the vertical transport roller [C]. The separation roller [D] has a one-way clutch. During paper stacking, the separation roller turns with the paper feed roller. During paper feed, the separation roller does not turn, so that it can separate the sheets of paper.
A257/A269
2-102
SM
DUPLEX TRAY
Duplex Entrance to Duplex Tray

[C] [E]
[B]
[A]
A269D646.WMF
[D]
A269D654.WMF
The duplex feed motor [A] starts after the leading edge of the paper activates the paper exit sensor. This motor drives the duplex feed rollers [B] and the duplex entrance rollers [C]. These rollers direct the paper from the junction gate into the duplex tray. The tip of the flip Mylar [D] moves to the left (front view) when the duplex feed rollers rotate to feed the copy into the duplex tray. The Mylar presses the paper against the duplex feed rollers, ensuring that the trailing edge of the paper clears the guide plate. The duplex turn sensor [E] detects the trailing edge of the paper as it enters the tray.
SM
2-103
A257/A269
DUPLEX TRAY
2.10.4 JOGGER MECHANISM
A269D648.WMF
[C] [E] [D] [A] [B]
[H]
[F] [G]
A269D649.WMF
A269D650.WMF
There are two motors for driving the fences. The side fence jogger motor [A] drives the side jogger fences. The end fence jogger motor [B] drives the end jogger fence. Using two separate motors for the side and end fences allows the duplex tray to handle all paper sizes from A3/11" x 17" to A5/ 81/2" x 51/2" sideways. There are two home position sensors. One is for the side jogger fences [C], and the other is for the end fence [D]. When the main switch turns on, the side fence jogger motor and the end fence jogger motor move the side jogger fences and the end fence to their home positions. When the registration clutch turns on, the side fences move 10.5 mm, and the end fence moves 7 mm away from the selected paper size. Then when the copy paper is delivered to the duplex tray, the jogger fences move inward to square the paper. (This is done 690 ms after the duplex turn sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper. The duplex turn sensor [E] is in the diagram on the previous page.) Shortly after this, the jogger fences move back to their previous positions. After the last copy of the first side copy run enters the duplex tray, the jogger fences remain against the paper stack. There are two end fences. One [F] is for A3/ 11" x 17" size paper. The other [G] is for sizes smaller than B4. They are included as a unit. When A3/11" x 17" size paper is in the duplex tray, the end fence unit moves to the left and the B4 end fence rotates down as it is pressed against the end fence stopper [H].
A257/A269
2-104
SM
DUPLEX TRAY
2.10.5 PAPER FEED FROM THE DUPLEX TRAY

Bottom Plate Lift Mechanism
[B]
[D] [C]
[F]
[A]
A269D653.WMF
[C] [F]
[D]
A269D655.PCX
[E] While the first side is being copied, the duplex feed motor [A] turns clockwise and the cam clutch gear [B] turns counter-clockwise (see the above drawing). Then all copies are stacked in the duplex tray unit. After the first side copies are done, the duplex feed motor [A] changes direction, and the cam clutch gear [B] turns clockwise. The cam clutch [C] also turns clockwise because of a spring inside the clutch. The pin [D] on the clutch lifts up the duplex lever [E] through a spring, raising the duplex bottom plate [F]. Then the duplex feed rollers feed the stacked copies to begin reverse side copying.
SM
2-105
A257/A269
DUPLEX TRAY
2.10.6 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM

[F] [E] [G]
[B] [A] [D] [B] [A]

A269D651.WMF
[B]
[C]
A269D647.WMF
While paper is stacking in the duplex tray, the paper flatteners [A] correct curl at the leading edge of the paper. After all the paper is stacked in the duplex tray, the jogger fences square the paper and the duplex feed motor turns counter-clockwise briefly to prepare to feed the paper from the duplex tray. At this time, the bottom plate rises and the duplex feed rollers [B] move the flip Mylars [C] back to the right (front view). The duplex paper feed system consists of three sets of duplex feed rollers and a separation roller [D]. The separation roller has a one-way bearing inside, so it rotates freely during paper stacking and locks during paper feeding. The duplex feed rollers can feed only the top sheet of the stack because the separation rollers function in the same way as a friction pad does. After the duplex tray runs out the final copy, the paper end feeler [E] drops through a slot in the duplex bottom plate. The duplex paper end actuator [F], which is on the same shaft as the duplex paper end feeler, pivots into the duplex paper end sensor [G]. Then the sensor signals the CPU to stop the next paper feed cycle.
A257/A269
2-106
SM
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.11.1 CONFIGURATION
ADF Sorter
Main Control Board CPU Flash ROM Flash memory card
:Depends on the model
BANK/RSS
LCD operation panel
LCD controller
CPU support ASICs
I/O control board
FPU IDU
Scanner IPU Board CPU Flash ROM Flash memory card
Extended bus interface
Scanner motor
IPU (ASIC devices)
Bus switch board CIVIC Interface Controller
LD programming board
SBU
Optional
A269D806.WMF
The main control board CPU manages the scanner, operation panel, and printer engine to control the entire copier system. The scanner IPU board CPU controls the scanner motor and image data processing. Both the main control board and the scanner IPU board have flash memory so that their programs can be replaced using a flash ROM card. The main control board manages printer controller options through the extended bus interface.
SM
2-107
A257/A269
2.11.2 NORMAL COPY MODE

This copier has three power supply modes.
Main Power Switch Off State

When the main power switch is turned off, the power to the following heaters is turned on to prevent condensation. These heaters are powered off by relays on the AC drive when the main power switch is turned on. Optics Anti condensation heater Paper transfer heater Paper tray heaters (Option)
Power-off (Sleep) State

The power-off state of this copier conforms to the International Energy Star standard for Sleep Mode. Of the DC outputs (VAA, VCA, VCB, VCC1, and VCC2) from the PSU, only VCC2 is turned on; all of the other outputs are held off. In this state, power is applied only to the main control board and the operation switch, so that the machine can detect when the operation switch is pressed. In this state, the fusing lamps are off. When the main board detects that the operation switch was pressed, the machine goes back to standby mode.
A257/A269
2-108
SM
Copier Modes
This machine has three different modes it can assume when the main power switch is on and the machine is not copying. This is shown by the following illustration.
Main (AC) power switch on
Standby mode
Energy saver key on Operation switch off
Energy saver timer
Energy saver key on Operation switch on Auto off timer Print command from controller
Energy saver mode Operation switch off
Sleep mode
A269D807.WMF
Stand-by Mode Operation panel ON Fusing power ON (stand-by temperature) Energy Saver Mode Operation panel OFF except for the Main Power indicator, Operation Switch on indicator, and Energy Saver key indicator. Fusing power ON (stand-by temperature) Sleep Mode Operation panel OFF except for the Operation Switch on indicator. Fusing power OFF +5 volts is supplied to the main control board
SM
2-109
A257/A269
Main power switch off state
Main (AC) power switch off
Any state
2.11.3 OPERATION PANEL

This copier integrates a large-sized full-color LCD (640 x 480 dot) operation panel. This operation panel is controlled by the CPU (LCD controller) on the main control board. The display image data generated during area manipulation is stored by the scanner IPU directly (DMA mode) in the VRAM on the main control board before being transferred to the operation panel. Image data can be displayed in 256 colors using an 8-bit color scheme (3 bits for R, 3 bits for G, and 2 bits for B). The area manipulation information specified on the operation panel is sent to the area manipulation section in the scanner IPU and used for image processing in synchronization with the scan data generated in the copy mode.
8 bit
8 bit 3bit + 3bit + 2bit = 8bit
8 bit
A269D855.WMF
The following table shows the resolution of the data. For example, if the user selects Zoom 1, the scale of the display in the editor window on the operation panel is 200%, so the machine generates 50 dpi data to display in the editor window.
Resolution 25 dpi 50 dpi 67 dpi 100 dpi 132 dpi Scale 100% 200% 264% 400% 528%
Full display Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Zoom 3 Zoom 4
A257/A269
2-110
SM
2.11.4 PRINTER CONTROLLER INTERFACE

The printer controller is an option for this copier. The printer controller interface board interfaces the copier with the controller. The CIVIC interface between the controller unit and the bus switch board transfers image data on an 8-bits/pixel basis for each color.
The FCI (Fine Character and Image) chip performs image smoothing and line correction. When the user selects smoothing, the FCI converts the image data (8 bits) to 7 bits of image and 1 bit of pixel positioning data, to simulate 1200 dpi resolution across the page (see Laser Exposure - Smoothing for more details).
Main Control Board
Printer Controller
From the copier
CIVIC interface Controller Interface Board Video bus switching control FCI
From the printer controller
LD Control Board
A269D811.WMF
SM
2-111
A257/A269
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 DIMENSIONS
1. Copier + Platen Cover 730 mm (W1) x 780 mm (D) x 980 mm (H1) 2. Copier + Platen Cover + Paper Exit Tray 1,643 mm (W2) x 780 mm (D) x 1,045 mm (H2)
SM
3-1
A257/A269
Installation
3. Copier + ARDF + LCT + Sorter stapler 1,930 mm (W3) x 780 mm (D) x 1,110 mm (H3)
3.1.2 ENVIRONMENT
To ensure the optimum copy quality, the following environmental requirements need to be observed. When installing this copier at the customer site, make sure that the location meets the following requirements.
Environmental Requirements
1. Avoid an area which is exposed to direct sunlight or is excessively illuminated (the illumination should not exceed 2,000 lux). 2. Avoid an area which is too hot and humid or too cold and dry. Standard temperature range: 10C to 32C Standard humidity range: 15% to 90% Limit of high temperature and humidity: 30C/90% or 32C/80% 3. Avoid an area near fire or heat. 4. Avoid an area which is exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes areas where the machine will not be directly exposed to: 1) Cool air from an air conditioner 2) Heat from a heater. 5. Avoid a dusty area (maximum allowable amount of dust: 0.15 mg/m3).
A257/A269
3-2
SM
6. Avoid a poor-ventilated area (required minimum ventilation: 30 m3/hr/man 7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases. 8. Place the machine on a level floor (the inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm). 9. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations. 10. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea level. 11. If the machine is installed close to other electronic equipment, they may interfere with each other. To avoid this problem: 1) Keep the machine as far away as possible from television sets or radios. 2) Reorient the receiving antenna of television sets and radios as needed. 3) Use a separate outlet for the machine.
CAUTION
1. Do not install the machine in a very humid or dusty area. 2. Do not install the machine on a shaky or inclined floor.
SM
3-3
A257/A269
Installation
Minimum Space Requirements

Provide clearance for the copier, as shown below. If one or more options (such as the ARDF or sorter stapler) are added to the copier, this clearance should be provided around the entire system.
A269I157.WMF
NOTE: A space of at least 100 mm (4.0") at the rear of the machine is important for machine ventilation.
A257/A269
3-4
SM
Power Requirements
WARNING
1. Install the machine as close to the outlet as possible. Firmly plug in the machine after installation. 2. Avoid multi-wiring. 3. The power cord should be placed where it cannot be stepped on or flattened by the machine. When installing the machine, route the power cord out of the way of general traffic. 4. Be sure to connect the power cords grounding wire.
Installation A257/A269
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 16 A (North America) 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz: More than 8 A (Europe, Middle Ease) 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8 A (Asia) 2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10% 3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
SM
3-5
COPIER
3.2 COPIER
3.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Description Qty 1. Operating Instructions Quick Reference ............................... 1 2. Operating Instructions manual .............................................. 1 3. Touch panel pen ................................................................... 1 4. Copy tray............................................................................... 1 5. Tray size decal ...................................................................... 1 6. Image samples...................................................................... 1 7. Factory data sheet ................................................................ 1
A257/A269
3-6
SM
COPIER
3.2.2 PREPERATION
1. Remove the strips of filament tape shown in the figures to the right.
A269I101.WMF
2. Remove the protectors [A] from the metal rollers. 3. Peel off the two strips of filament tape [B] and remove the protective sheet [C].
[A] [C]
[B]
A269I154.WMF
4. Lift the lower guide plate [D] and take out the protective sheet.
[D]
[C]
A269I152.WMF
SM
3-7
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
5. Open the front door and remove the revolver cover [A] (4 screws).
[A]
A269I102.WMF
[C] 6. Loosen the screw [B] (dont remove) then remove the fusing/transfer drawer clamp [C]. NOTE: Keep the fusing/transfer drawer clamp in a safe location as it will be reused when relocating the copier. Part No.: A2691115 7. Tighten the screw [B] again. [B]
A269I140.WMF
[E] 8. Remove the scanner unit clamp [D] (1 screw [E]). NOTE: Keep the scanner unit clamp and the screw in a safe location as it will be reused when relocating the copier. Part No.: A2691114 [D]
A269I138.WMF
A257/A269
3-8
SM
COPIER
9. Remove the charge corona unit [A] (1 snap ring and 1 connector). 10. Remove the pre-cleaning corona unit [B] (1 screw). [A]
[B]
A269I327.WMF
11. Remove the transfer faceplate [C] (3 black screws, 1 knob, 1 connector, and 2 clamps).
[C]
A269I390.WMF
12. Remove the image transfer belt cleaning unit [D].
[D]
A269I302.WMF
SM
3-9
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
13. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer [A] (1 black screw). NOTE: Do not keep the drawer unit pulled out with the drum unit attached (without shielding the drawer unit). If the drawer unit were left out, the drum would be exposed to light. [A] This would cause optical fatigue, resulting in image anomalies. Shield the drum unit with 5 or more sheets of paper). 14. Lift the drum unit [B] out of the revolver/drum drawer. 15. Rotate the drum unit clockwise as shown by the arrow [C] and set it upside-down. [B] [C]
A269I305.WMF
A269I306.WMF
NOTE: 1) It is important to rotate the drum unit as shown by arrow. This prevents toner spillage. 2) Shield the drum unit with 5 or more sheets of paper. Otherwise, the drum will be exposed to light, which would cause optical fatigue, resulting in image anomalies.
16. Remove the revolver clamp (1 screw). NOTE: Keep the revolver clamp in a safe location as it will be reused when relocating the copier. Part No.: A2573256
A269I110.WMF
A257/A269
3-10
SM
COPIER
3.2.3 DEVELOPER INSTALLATION
[A]
[C]
A269R325.WMF
[C] [B]
A269R308.WMF
NOTE: Place a floor mat or other protective sheet on the floor. Take care not to contaminate the customers floor. 1. Remove the revolver filter [A]. 2. Remove the toner density sensor connector [B] and open the development unit locks [C] at both ends of the revolver.
CAUTION
Do not push the revolver/drum drawer into the copier with developer locks left open. Otherwise, the revolver locks may strike the main unit frame, resulting in permanent damage to the revolver.
SM
3-11
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
[A]
[B]
A269R309.WMF
[C] [D]
A269R151.WMF
A269I357.WMF
3. Remove the development unit [A] and close the toner supply unit shutter [B].
CAUTION
Be sure the pawl of the revolver lock [C] is engaged before removing a development unit. Failure to observe this precaution may rotate the revolver, causing permanent damage to the development unit or its locks. NOTE: When you remove a development unit, be sure to rotate in the direction shown in the figure. Rotating a development unit in the wrong direction may cause the revolver unit to be damaged.
CAUTION
Remove the development unit, for one color at a time. Removing two or more development units at the same time may unbalance the revolver. This will cause the revolver to turn, possibly catching your fingers. 4. Remove the developer cover [D] (2 screws, 4 hooks). (Release the hooks with a screwdriver.)
A257/A269 3-12 SM
COPIER
[A]
A269I351.WMF
[B]
A269I359.WMF
1. Set the developer cover [A] as shown in the figure and place the development unit on it. 2. Pour 1 bag (700 g) of developer in the developer assembly. 3. Turn the sleeve in the forward direction [C] several rotations to give it a smooth layer of developer. 4. Replace the developer cover (2 screws). 5. Open the toner supply unit shutter [B] and set the developer assembly in the revolver/drum drawer (2 lock screws and 1 sensor connector).
SM
3-13
A257/A269
Installation
[C]
COPIER
[A]
[A]
A269I353.WMF
[B]
A269I357.WMF
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the development locks [A] (forward and rear) are secured before rotating the revolver. This is required to protect the development unit and locks from damage. 2. Make sure the development unit lock screws are tight. Loose lock screws will cause an uneven photoconductor gap. 6. Press the revolver lock button [B] to release the revolver lock, rotate the revolver to the next color and install the new developer.
CAUTION
1. Be sure to set the revolver locks before removing the development unit. Failure to observe this precaution may allow the revolver to rotate, causing permanent damage to the development unit or its locks. 2. Always rotate the revolver in the direction shown in the figure. Otherwise, the developer might spill out of the developer assembly.
A257/A269
3-14
SM
COPIER
7. Re-install the revolver filter. Re-install the drum unit, then re-install the revolver/drum drawer, while pushing in the latches on the sides of the rails.
CAUTION
When the drum unit is set in the revolver/drum draw and the development unit is set at 90 (development unit removal position), the drum may contact the lip of the development unit upper cover [A]. This may cause the drum to be scratched or damaged.
[A] Revolver Home Position To prevent the drum from being damaged at installation or developer replacement, the revolver unit should be placed at its home position before the drum is set in the revolver/drum draw. M C
30
K Y
SM
3-15
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
3.2.4 LOADING TONER CARTRIDGES

[B] [D]
[A] [C]
A269I118.WMF
[E]
A269I119.WMF
1. Remove the strip [A] of tape securing the toner cartridge. 2. Remove the strip of tape [B] securing the toner supply shutter of the color currently in the replacement position.
CAUTION
Only remove the toner supply shutter tape when the toner cartridge holder is at the toner replacement position. Otherwise, toner will be spilled. 3. Shift the toner supply shutter to the left [C].
CAUTION
Be sure to shift the toner supply shutter after removing the tape strip. 4. Confirm that the toner cartridge has the same color as the toner supply shutter and set the toner cartridge in the cartridge holder. 5. Turn the cartridge lever to the left [D].
CAUTION
1. Only install the toner cartridge when the cartridge holder is in the toner replacement position. 2. When setting up the toner cartridge lever, make sure that the lock is set as shown in the figure [E].
A257/A269
3-16
SM
COPIER
[A]
[B]
A269I120.WMF
[C]
A269I160.WMF
6. Press the revolver lock release lever and turn the revolver 90 degrees counterclockwise. Then install the toner cartridge of the next color following the above steps. 7. While pushing the Image Transfer Belt to the right, reinstall the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning unit.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn the revolver counterclockwise. Do not turn the revolver clockwise. Otherwise, the developer would likely spill out. 8. Reinstall the transfer faceplate [A] (3 black screws, 1 knob, 1 connector, and 2 clamps). Set the transfer belt tension lever [B] to the image transfer position (1 snap ring). Reinstall the charge and PCC coronas. NOTE: 1) When re-installing the transfer face plate, tighten the knob [B] at first before tightening other screws. 2) After re-installing the transfer faceplate, be sure to set the transfer belt tension lever [C] to the image transfer position (1 snap ring).
SM
3-17
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
3.1.5 FUSING UNIT
Rev. 08/99
[A]
A269I123.WMF
[C] [B]
A269I125.WMF
A269I124.WMF
1. Pull out the fusing/transfer drawer [A]. 2. Open the paper exit cover [B] and completely loosen (dont remove) the fusing pressure release screws [C] (2 black screws).
3. Fill the oil tank with new type silicone oil up to the MAX mark. NOTE: This machine uses a new Silicone Oil Type SS (P/No. A2579100). It is strongly recommended that you use the new style silicone oil.
CAUTION
Take care not to spill silicone oil on the floor. If silicone oil is spilled on the floor, wipe it up completely. Otherwise, the floor will get slippery and you might slip and fall.
A257/A269
3-18
SM
COPIER
3.2.6 DEFAULT SETTINGS AND OPERATION CHECKS

1. Install the revolver cover (4 screws). 2. Follow the procedure in the flow chart below after installing.
Start
Open front cover and turn on power
This step avoids starting the initial process control self check.
Close front cover
Run SP3-005-005 (Run TD sensor initialization: all colors)
Action
Result is 1 (successful) or Other (failure)?
Others (failure)
Analyze according to TD sensor initialization result analysis table in Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting".
1 (successful)
Run SP2-225-005 (Run Dev. agitation: all colors)
Others (failure)
Analyze according to Dev. agitation result analysis table in Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting".
1 (successful)
End
Action
A269I153.WMF
SM
3-19
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
3. Load paper in the paper trays and set the paper tray sizes. 1st Tray 1) Press the [User Tools/K] key and then the [System Settings] key. 2) Press [Next] until Tray Paper Size is displayed. 3) Press the [Change] key corresponding to the tray you want to change. 4) When the paper size and orientation menu appears, select the Paper Size and Orientation and press [OK]. 5) Press [Previ] to return to the [System Settings] menu screen, then press [OK] to exit the default settings mode. 6) Make sure that the paper size and orientation you set up from the touch panel display matches the actual paper size. 2nd and 3rd Tray 1) Set the paper size selector [A] of each paper tray to the appropriate paper size. 2) Make sure that the paper size displayed on the touch panel matches the actual paper size. 3) If you move the paper size selector [A] to the * position, paper size is selected through the User Tools.
[A]
A269I159.WMF
4. Make copies of image samples (letter, photo, and letter/photo modes). 5. Press the [User Tools/K] key. 6. Run Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) from Default Settings. NOTE: Since this unit has been subject to color adjustment using Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) at factory, there is no need to make automatic color calibration again if the customer is satisfied with the image sample he or she generated. For the detailed automatic color calibration procedure, refer to the Operating Instructions manual for the customer. 7. Make sure that the sample image has been copied normally.
A257/A269
3-20
SM
COPIER
3.2.7 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

1. First, screw down the leveling feet [A] enough to lock the machine in position 2. Next, level the machine.
[A]
A269I129.WMF
3.2.8 COUNTER DISPLAY SETTING

1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Run SP7-008-000, Counter Display Setting. 3. Select which counter to be displayed. 1=counter based on developments 2=counter based on copies/prints NOTE: The setting can be changed only once. The setting cannot be changed any more after it has been changed. If the setting is changed by mistake, contact your key person.
3.2.9 RESETTING THE ELECTRONIC TOTAL COUNTER

1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Run SP7-825, Total Counter 0 Reset. 3. Exit the SP mode and press the [Counter] key on the operation panel to confirm that the electronic total counter is set to 0.
SM
3-21
A257/A269
Installation
COPIER
3.2.10 PREPARATION FOR TRANSPORT
[B] [A]
A269I110.WMF
[F]
A269I127.WMF
[C]
[D]
A269I139.WMF
[E]
A269I191.WMF
1. Remove the revolver cover and release the transfer belt tension lever [A] (one snap ring). 2. Install the revolver clamp [B]. The revolver must be at its home position. NOTE: Keep the revolver clamp in a safe location as it will be reused when relocating the copier. Part No.: A2573256 3. Re-install the scanner unit clamp [C] (1 screw [D]). NOTE: Keep the scanner unit clamp and the screw in a safe location as it will be reused when relocating the copier. Part No.: A2691114 4. Loosen the screw [E] (dont remove) and re-install the fusing/transfer drawer clamp [F]. Then tighten the screw [E] again. NOTE: Keep the fusing/transfer drawer clamp in a safe location as it will be reused when relocating the copier. Part No.: A2691115
A257/A269 3-22 SM
PLATEN COVER (A749-01)
3.3 PLATEN COVER (A749-01)

3.3.1 INSTALLATION
[C] [A] [A] [D] [A]
Installation
A749I500.WMF
[B]
A749I504.WMF
[E]
A749I503.WMF
1. Cut the platen holder cover [A] out of the upper rear cover [B] with wire cutters. 2. Insert the platen holders [C] as shown (1 screw for each). 3. Install the platen cover [D] as shown. 4. Attach the caution decal [E] which comes from the copier as shown.
SM
3-23
A257/A269
ARDF (A663)
3.4 ARDF (A663)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box with the following list: Description Qty 1. New equipment Condition Report.......................................... 1 2. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1 3. Stud Screw ............................................................................ 1 4. Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M4 x 10.............................. 1 5. Sponge Retainer.................................................................... 1
A257/A269
3-24
SM
ARDF (A663)
3.4.2 INSTALLATION
[A]
[A]
[B]
A663I500.WMF
A663I501.WMF
[D] [I] [E] [F]
[H]
[J] [C]
A663I502.WMF
[G]
A663I503.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the strips of tape [A]. 2. Stick the sponge retainer [B] on the top cover of the copier as shown. 3. Tighten the two stud screws [C]. 4. Mount the ARDF by aligning the holes [D] in the ARDF and the stud screws [C], then slide the ARDF to the front as shown. NOTE: When mounting the ARDF, hold it by hand as shown in the illustration. Holding it in another way may damage the ARDF. 5. Screw the two stud screws [E] into the holes [F] and tighten them. 6. Connect the connectors [G] into the socket on the rear of the copier. 7. Attach the symbol explanation decal [H], the combine originals explanation decal [I], and the caution decal [J] which comes from the copier to the ARDF as shown.
SM 3-25 A257/A269
Installation
SORTER STAPLER (A831)
3.5 SORTER STAPLER (A831)

3.5.1 INSTALLATION
[A]
[B] [A] [C] [A]
[A] [A]
A831I500.WMF
[F]
[E] [D]
A831I501.WMF
A831I502.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the strips of tape [A] and the shipping retainers [B]. 2. Open the front door [C] and remove the strips of tape [D]. 3. Remove the stapler cover [E] (4 screws), and remove the strips of tape and shipping retainers [F].
A257/A269
3-26
SM
[B]
[A]
A831I509.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
A831I508.WMF
4. Confirm that the shaft [A] of the guide plate [B] is in the lower position of the opening [C]. If it is not, move it to the lower position. NOTE: 1) Be careful not to bend the guide plate. 2) If the position of shaft [A] is not correct, guide plate may be bent when installing the sorter stapler on the copier. A bent guide plate can cause paper jams.
SM
3-27
A257/A269
Installation
[A]
A831I503.WMF
[B]
A831I504.WMF
5. Mount the sorter stapler mounting brackets (2 types) [A] on the copier as shown (2 screws for each bracket). 6. Set the sorter stapler to the copier temporarily (4 hooks [B]).
A257/A269
3-28
SM
5 mm/0.20"
[B]
[D]
90 mm/3.54"
[E] [A] [C]

A831I505.WMF A831I510.WMF
[H]
[G]
[F]
A831I506.WMF A831I511.WMF
7. Remove the screw [A], and pull out the sorter stapler half-way after releasing the lock lever [B]. Then secure the mounting bracket [C] with two screws [D].
CAUTION
When pulling out the sorter stapler, make sure that the lower hooks are properly engaged in the sorter staplers baseplate. Otherwise, the sorter stapler may fall over. 8. Affix the sponge seal [E] to the position shown in the figure. 9. After locking the sorter stapler, connect the optical fiber cable [F] and connector [G] to the copier. 10. Set the output tray [H] as shown.
SM 3-29 A257/A269
Installation
[J]
[I]
A831I507.WMF
11. Use the height adjuster [I] to eliminate any gap [J] between the sorter stapler and the copier.
A257/A269
3-30
SM
LCT (A683)
3.6 LCT (A683)

3.6.1 INSTALLATION
A683I501.WMF
A683I500.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes. NOTE: For A257/A269 copiers, the LCT Adapter (A840) must be installed at the same time. See the installation procedure of the LCT Adapter (A840) when installing this LCT (A683).
SM
3-31
A257/A269
Installation
LCT ADAPTER (A840)
3.7 LCT ADAPTER (A840)

3.7.1 INSTALLATION
[E] [A]
A840I500.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
A840I501.WMF
[F]
A840I502.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power code before starting the following procedure. NOTE: The LCT (A683) must be unpacked before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the paper transport unit [A] (4 stud screws) and the springs [B] (adhesive tape) from the LCT. 2. Remove the LCT front cover [C] (2 screws) and remove the LCT upper cover [D] while lifting up the front side (pulling out from the bosses [E]). 3. Install the transfer unit [F] on the LCT (2 M4 x 8 screws).
A257/A269 3-32 SM
LCT ADAPTER (A840)
[D]
[F]
[B] [C] [E] [G]
[A]
A840I503.WMF
[J]
[I]
[H]
A840I504.WMF
4. Install the upper cover [A], which is included in the LCT adapter kit onto the LCT while lifting up the front side (putting the bosses [B] in the opening [C] at first, then bosses [D] in the openings [E] while lifting the end of cover [F]). 5. Reinstall the LCT front cover [G] (2 screws). 6. Loosen the screw [H] and slide the lock plate [I] of the vertical transport unit [J]. Then remove the vertical transport unit from the copier (1 connector).
SM
3-33
A257/A269
Installation
LCT ADAPTER (A840)
[D] [B] [C]
[A]
A840I505.WMF
[F] [G] [E]

A840I506.WMF
[H]
[F] [H] [I]

A840I507.WMF
7. Remove the cover [A] from the vertical transport unit (4 screws). 8. Remove the following parts from the vertical transport unit. 1) Release lever [B] 2) Release lever shaft [C] 3) Spring [D] 4) Hooks [E] (2 screws) 5) Snap Ring [F] 9. Re-install the release lever shaft [G] using the hooks [H] (2 screws) which are included in the LCT adapter kit. Then fix the band [I] to the vertical transport unit as shown (1 M3 x 6 screw).
A257/A269 3-34 SM
Rev. 01/2000
LCT ADAPTER (A840)
[A]
[D] Rear
Front [C] [B]

A840I508.WMF
0 ~ 0.7 mm (0 ~ 0.03")
[H]
4 1 mm (0.15" 0.04")
A840I509.WMF
[G]
NOTE: The cut-out [H] of the mylar is located on the front of the unit. All gaps are within the adjustment range. The side-to-side positioning should be adjusted using the rear side plate (outer surface).
[E]
[F]
A840I510.WMF
10. Re-install the cover [A] to the vertical transport unit (lightly tighten the 2 screws). Then set the band [B] as shown. 11. Affix the mylar [C] to the vertical transport unit as shown. Attach the springs [D] onto the vertical transport unit (1 screw for each spring). 12. Re-install the vertical transport unit [E] to the copier (1 lock plate [F] and 1 connector [G]).
SM
3-35
A257/A269
Installation
LCT ADAPTER (A840)
[A]
[A]
A840I511.WMF
[D]
[B]
A840I512.WMF
[C]
A840I513.WMF
13. Remove the 6 plastic caps [A] from the copier with pliers. Then tighten the screws [B] firmly. 14. Tighten the hooking screws [B], which are included in the LCT adapter kit, to the copier. 15. Hang the LCT [C] on the hooking screws [D]. Then secure the LCT to the copier (4 screws).
A257/A269
3-36
SM
LCT ADAPTER (A840)
[B]
[A]
A840I515.WMF
[D] [C]
A840I514.WMF
16. Fix the band [A] to the LCT as shown by using the nylon rivet [B]. 17. Remove the plastic cap [C] and connect the LCT cable [D] to the copier.
SM
3-37
A257/A269
Installation
FILM PROJECTOR TABLE (A702-19)
3.8 FILM PROJECTOR TABLE (A702-19)

3.8.1 INSTALLATION
[A]
A702I151.WMF
[B]
A702I152.WMF
1. Remove the upper right cover [A] (1 screw). 2. Install the table [B] (7 screws).
A257/A269
3-38
SM
FILM PROJECTOR TABLE (A702-19)
[B]
A702I153.WMF
[C]
[D]
A702I154.WMF
A702I155.WMF
3. Install the lower cover [A] (2 screws). 4. Install the table cover [B]. 5. Install the joint cover [C], and [D].
SM
3-39
A257/A269
Installation
[A]
FILM PROJECTOR UNIT(A846)
3.9 FILM PROJECTOR UNIT(A846)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box with the following list: Description Qty 1. Mirror Unit.............................................................................. 1 2. Power Cord............................................................................ 1 3. Film Strip Holder.................................................................... 1 4. Slide Holder ........................................................................... 1 5. Glass Mount Holder ............................................................... 1 6. Base Film (FUJI, KODAK, AGFA) ......................................... 3 7. Slide Mount............................................................................ 1 8. Correction filter (P, N) ............................................................ 2 9. Blower Brush ......................................................................... 1 10. Projection Lamp..................................................................... 1 11. Film Position Sheet................................................................ 2 12. Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 12 ........................................ 5 13. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
A257/A269
3-40
SM
3.9.2 INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
A846I514.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: The film projector table (A702-19) must be installed before starting the following procedure. 1. Place the projector unit [A] on the Table by aligning the holes of the projector base plate with the positioning pins [B]. Then secure the projector unit with five M3 x 12 screws.
SM
3-41
A257/A269
Installation
[A]
[C] [D]
[B]
A846I500.WMF
[E]
A846I510.WMF
A846I511.WMF
2. Remove the lamp cover [A] (1 screw) and open the reflector cover [B]. Then, plug the projector lamp [C] into the socket. Then close the reflector cover. NOTE: The projector lamp should be inserted horizontally until it stops. 3. Remove the cover [D] (2 rubber caps, 4 screws). 4. Remove the inner cover [E] (2 screws).
A257/A269
3-42
SM
A846I515.WMF
[A] [C]
A846I501.WMF
5. Remove the plastic cap [A] and connect the optical fiber cable [B] to the copier. 6. Connect the power cord [C] to the power inlet and plug it into the wall outlet.
WARNING
After plugging the power cord into the wall outlet, do not touch the electrical components inside the projector unit. Otherwise, you might receive an electrical shock.
SM
3-43
A257/A269
Installation
[B]
[B]
[D] [A]
[C]
A846I502.WMF
7. Perform the height adjustment as follows. 1) Place the film position sheet [A] on the exposure glass, aligning it at the rear left corner. NOTE: C is written at the corner mark [D] on the film position sheet for the A257/A269 copiers. 2) Put the mirror unit [B] on the exposure glass by aligning the holes with the positioning pins [C] on the lens cover.
A257/A269
3-44
SM
[I]
[A] [F] [B]

Installation
[E]
[C]
[F]
[H]
[G]
A846I503.WMF
3) Set the film strip holder [A] into the film projector unit at the base film setting position. NOTE: Push the film strip holder lightly to confirm that the film strip holder is set correctly. 4) Turn on the test switch [B] on the projector control board and turn on the projector unit main switch [C].
CAUTION
The lamp housing and reflector [D] will become very hot. The lamp cooling fan [E] will start turning suddenly when the lamp housing temperature becomes high. Keep hands away from those components to avoid any injury. 5) Loosen the wing nut [F]. 6) Adjust the position of the projected light by turning the dial [G] with a hexagon wrench [H] until it is at the center of the 4" x 5" frame [I] which is reflected in the mirror unit. 7) Tighten the wing nut [F]. 8) Turn off the projector main switch and the test switch. 9) Reinstall the lamp cover and other covers.
SM 3-45 A257/A269
[B]
[A]
A846I504.WMF
A846I505.PCX
[C]
[D]
A846I507.WMF
A846I506.WMF
8. Adjust the angle [A] of the mirror unit as follows: 1) Turn on the copier main switch and wait for the ready condition. 2) Open the lens cover and position the mirror unit on the exposure glass. 3) Set the correction filter [B] for positive films in the filter slot. 4) Turn on the projector main switch and press the option key. 5) Perform shading using the positive 35 mm slides mode. 6) Set one of the orange base films in the slide holder and position it in the projector unit. 7) Make a copy of the orange film. 8) Check if the orange image is even or not. If the image is uneven, adjust the mirror angle as follows: 8-1) When the leading part is dark [C]. a) Move the front and rear arm guides [D] to the left so that the mirror angle is increased (2 screws each). NOTE: Position the arm guides at the same location at front and rear, using the ruler decals. This prevents the mirror from being twisted. b) Make a copy of the orange film. c) Repeat a) and b) until the orange image becomes even.
A257/A269
3-46
SM
[A]
[B]
A846I508.WMF
A846I506.WMF
8-2)
When the trailing part is dark [A]. d) Move the front and rear arm guides [B] to the right so that the mirror angle is reduced (2 screws each). NOTE: Position the arm guides at the same location at front and rear, using the ruler decals. This prevents the mirror from being twisted. e) Make a copy of the orange film. f) Repeat a) and b) until the orange image becomes even.
9. Check some copy images from positive or negative films.
SM
3-47
A257/A269
Installation
KEY COUNTER HOLDER
3.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER
[A]
[B] [C]
A269I130.WMF
1. Remove the right-side front cover [A]. 2. Remove the plastic cap [B] with nippers. 3. Plug in the connector [C] for the key counter holder. 4. Secure the key counter holder on the main unit (2 screws). 5. Replace the right-side front cover (1 screws).
A257/A269
3-48
SM
USER CODE SETTING
3.11 USER CODE SETTING

When User Code Setting is used, following procedure is required. (About the User Code Setting, see the user tools section of operating instruction.)
[A]
Installation
A269I200.WMF
[B]
1. Remove the right-side front cover [A]. 2. Remove the connector coupler [B]. 3. Replace the right-side front cover. 4. Set the SP5-113-000 (Key counter/Key card/Coin lock) to 2 (Key counter). NOTE: Key counter is not required.
SM
3-49
A257/A269
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES
4.1.1 HOW TO ENTER AN SP MODE
Follow the procedure below to enter an SP mode.
L F
Clear Mode Press and hold down for 3 seconds How to make a copy in SP mode: The screen switches to the copy mode when you press the Interrupt key ( N ) in SP mode. After the copy job is finished, the screen goes back to the SP mode screen when the Interrupt key is pressed again. A service program number is composed of the 3 levels (first, second and third). There are two ways to access a desired SP mode as follows.
Service Tables A257/A269
Example;
5 009 002 5 (1 digit): 009 (3 digits): 002 (3 digits): First level Second level Third level
Method 1. Enter the specific number (first, second, and third levels) of a SP mode using the numeral keys; and then, press the Enter (#) key. You can go directly in the specific SP mode. (Example) Input 5009002 using the numeral keys and press the Enter (#) key. Method 2. Select a specific SP mode by scrolling down or up and press the OK key to go into the next level. (Example) Select 5 by pressing the Next key; then press the OK key. Select 009 by pressing the Next key, then press the OK key. Select 002 by pressing the Next key. Method 1 & 2. Enter the specific number of a SP mode up to the second level and scroll up or down the screen by pressing Next or Previous key. (Example) Input 5009 using the numeral keys and press the Enter (#) key. Scroll up or down and select 002.
SM 4-1
Pop-up Screen When the OK key is pressed after the second level of one of the following SP modes is opened on the screen, another screen is popped up on the screen. In total, 11 kinds of pop-up screens are available in the SP mode. (This kind of screen is not used for all SP modes.) A group of related SP modes are displayed on the pop-up screens.
Screen SP Mode No. 1-001 1-002 1-003 4-012 1-105 2-101 2-112 2-113 2-225 3-005 3-126 3-964 3-975 2-310 4-505 4-506 4-910 4-911 4-912 4-913 4-914 4-915 4-916 4-917 4-918 4-919 4-920 4-921 4-922 4-932 5-955 7-202 7-203 7-207 7-210 7-803 7-804 7-818 7-905 7-910 7-911 SP modes displayed Function Lead edge registration adjustment Side-to-side registration adjustment Paper feed timing adjustment Scanning blank margin adjustment Hot/pressure roller temperature setting Sub-scan/Main-scan blank margin adjustment Main-scan magnification adjustment Sub-scan magnification adjustment Developer initialization Toner density initial setting Forced self-check Developer initialization result Self-check result PTB bias adjustment ACC target level adjustment: High light area ACC target level adjustment: Shadow area Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: K Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: C Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: M Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: Y Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter, single color: K Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: K Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: C Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: M Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: Y Gamma adjustment: Printer: K Gamma adjustment: Printer: C Gamma adjustment: Printer: M Gamma adjustment: Printer: Y Main scan dot position correction Print internal pattern Developer counter PM parts counter (Image development ) PM parts counter (Cleaning section) PM parts counter (Fusing section) PM counter PM counter clear Developer counter clear PM counter print PM parts counter (PTB section) PM parts counter (Duplex unit)
A B C D
F G
I J
See Appendix for the pop-up screen of the above SP modes.
A2457/A269
4-2
SM
4.1.2 SP MODE TYPES

The SP modes of this copier are divided into the following eight groups: 1) Paper feed/transport/fusing (1. Feed) 2) Drum unit (2. Drum) 3) Process control (3. Process) 4) Scanner unit (4. Scanner) 5) Operating mode/system (5. Mode) 6) Peripherals (6. Periphs) 7) Logged data (7. Log) 8) Others (special modes) (8. Special Mode) ( ): Mode name displayed on the screen.
4.1.3 SP MODE CHART

See Appendix for a detailed description of the SP mode items.
4.1.4 SP4-301 APS OPERATION CHECK DETAILS

The table below shows the relationship between the codes that are displayed when you run Check APS Operation (Size Display) in SP4-301 and the paper sizes.
Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Paper Size No Original A0, Sideways A1, Sideways A2, Sideways A3, Sideways A4, Sideways A5, Sideways A6, Sideways A7, Sideways B0, Sideways B1, Sideways B2, Sideways B3, Sideways B4, Sideways B5, Sideways B6, Sideways B7, Sideways Double postcard, Sideways (200 mm x 148 mm) Postcard, Sideways (A6) Line slider 1, Sideways (210 mm x 170 mm) Line slider 2, Sideways (300 mm x 250 mm) Paper Size A4, Lengthwise A5, Lengthwise A6, Lengthwise A7, Lengthwise B0, Lengthwise B1, Lengthwise B2, Lengthwise B3, Lengthwise B4, Lengthwise B5, Lengthwise B6, Lengthwise B7, Lengthwise Double postcard, Lengthwise 145 (148 mm x 200 mm) 146 Postcard, Lengthwise (A6) Line slider 1, Lengthwise 147 (170 mm x 210 mm) Line slider 2, Lengthwise 148 (210 mm x 340 mm) Book card 1 (six-folded), Lengthwise 149 (225 mm x 276 mm) Book card 2 (six-folded), Lengthwise 150 (250 mm x 300 mm) 151~159 Not used 11" x 17" 160 161 11" x 14" Code 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144
SM
4-3
A257/A269
Service Tables

Paper Size Book card 1 (six-folded), Sideways 21 (276 mm x 225 mm) Book card 2 (six-folded), Sideways 22 (300 mm x 250 mm) 23~31 Not used 32 17" x 11" 33 14" x 11" 34 15" x 10" 35 14" x 10" 36 14" x 81/2" 37 13" x 81/2" 38 11" x 81/2" 39 14" x 81/4" 40 13" x 81/2" 41 13" x 8" 42 101/2" x 8" 43 10" x 8" 44 81/2" x 51/2" 45~127 Not used 128 Unidentifiable size 129 A0, Lengthwise 130 A1, Lengthwise 131 A2, Lengthwise 132 A3, Lengthwise Code Code 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173~191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 10" x 15" 10" x 14" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 11" 81/4" x 14" 81/4" x 13" 8" x 13" 8" x 101/2" 8" x 10" 51/2" x 81/2" Not used FPU MAX SIZE (145mm x 217.2mm) 35mm film S 35mm film M 4" x 5" 60mm x 45mm 60mm x 60mm 60mm x 70mm 60mm x 80mm 60mm x 90mm Paper Size
NOTE: The above table shows the relationship between the registered code numbers and the available paper sizes. This does not mean that all of the above paper sizes can be recognized by APS. For the paper sizes that APS can recognize, see Chapter 1, Section 1.2, Basic Specifications, and Chapter 2, Section 3, Scanner.
A2457/A269
4-4
SM
4.1.5 TEST PATTERN

NOTE: The data selected for the test pattern in the following SP modes will not be automatically reset to the default 000 when you go out from the SP mode. Make sure that the data is reset to 000 after the test is finished. IPU Test pattern (SP 4-417)
3rd level 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 No pattern Grid pattern Slanted grid pattern 256 gradation (Horizontal) 256 gradation (Vertical) Color patch RGB gray scale (16 gradation steps) YMCK-RGB 16 gradation YMCK 16 gradation YMCK 128 gradation Same as 001 Same as 008 Same as 009 YMCK 16 gradation YMCK 128 gradation Description
LD control board test pattern (SP 4-907)

3rd level 000 001 002 003 004 005 Description No pattern Black pattern White pattern 16 gradation pattern 4 dot grid pattern 2 dot grid pattern
SM
4-5
A257/A269
Service Tables
4.1.6 SP5-803 INPUT CHECK

The table below lists the items of the main unit input check. COPIER
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Sensor/Switch/Signal Drum motor: Motor OK signal Fusing motor: Motor OK signal Paper feed motor: Motor OK signal ITB motor: Motor OK signal PTB motor: Motor OK signal Polygon motor: Motor OK signal Wire cleaner motor: Motor OK signal Drum peripheral component motor: Motor OK signal Toner cartridge set sensor Toner end sensor PTB unit H.P. sensor ITB cleaning H.P. sensor Toner overflow sensor 1st paper tray upper limit sensor Not used 2nd paper tray upper limit sensor 3rd paper tray upper limit sensor 1st paper feed sensor Not used 2nd paper feed sensor 3rd paper feed sensor Not used 1st paper end sensor Not used 2nd paper end sensor 3rd paper end sensor By-pass paper end sensor 2nd tray paper size switch - SW1 2nd tray paper size switch - SW2 2nd tray paper size switch - SW3 2nd tray paper size switch - SW4 2nd tray paper size switch - SW5 3rd tray paper size switch - SW1 3rd tray paper size switch - SW2 3rd tray paper size switch - SW3 3rd tray paper size switch - SW4 3rd tray paper size switch - SW5 By-pass paper width detection board - SW1 By-pass paper width detection board - SW2 By-pass paper width detection board - SW3 By-pass paper width detection board - SW4 By-pass paper length sensor 1st paper height sensor Not used 2nd paper height sensor 3rd paper height sensor Not used Not used 1 tray set switch Not used By-pass table sensor Status 0 OK OK NG OK OK NG OK OK Detected (Set) Detected (End) Touch Release (at H.P.) Not detected Detected Detected Detected Detected (paper) Detected (paper) Detected (paper) Detected (End) Detected (End) Detected (End) Detected (End) Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Not actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Actuated Open 1 NG NG OK NG NG OK NG NG Not detected Not detected Release (at H.P.) Touch Detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Not actuated Close
A2457/A269
4-6
SM

No. 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 100 101 Sensor/Switch/Signal Registration sensor Duplex side fence H.P. sensor Duplex end fence H.P. sensor Duplex entrance sensor Duplex turn sensor Duplex paper end sensor Duplex unit set detection Paper exit sensor Oil end sensor Duplex turn guide sensor Front door switch Vertical transport door switch - SW1 Vertical transport door switch - SW2 Paper Exit door switch PCC current leak detection Paper separation corona current leak detection (D) Charge corona current leak detection (C) ITB lubricant brush current leak detection (Q1) PTB discharge corona current leak detection (Q2) Paper separation sensor Key counter OK detection Key card OK detection (Used in Japan market only) Total counter check 1 Total counter check 2 Scanner H.P. sensor Platen cover position sensor Status 0 No detected Detected (H.P.) Detected (H.P.) Detected (paper) Not detected Not detected Detected (set) Detected (paper) Detected (End) Detected (paper) Open Open Open Open Detected (Leak) Detected (Leak) Detected (Leak) Detected (Leak) Detected (Leak) Not detected OK OK Not activated Not activated Not detected Open Status 0 Close Close Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected 1 Open Open Detected (limit) Detected (limit) Detected (paper) Detected (paper end) 1 Detected (paper) Not detected Not detected Not detected Detected (paper) Detected (End) Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Close Close Close Close Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Detected (paper) NG NG Activated Activated Detected (H.P.) Close
LCT
Input No. 110 111 112 113 114 115 Sensor/Switch/Signal Tray cover switch LCT set sensor Lift sensor Lower limit sensor Relay sensor Paper end sensor
SM
4-7
A257/A269
Service Tables
SORTER
Input No. 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 Sensor/Switch/Signal Entrance sensor Proof exit sensor Bin jam sensor (at entrance area of bins) Bin jam sensor (on the bins) Bin H.P. sensor Wheel sensor Bin rear plate open sensor Bin rear plate close sensor Jogger H.P. sensor Grip H.P. sensor Stapler unit H.P. sensor Stapler H.P. sensor Staple end switch Paper sensor Door safety switch Not used Inverter sensor Grip unit H.P. sensor Cartridge set switch Staple unit set detection Staple unit pull-out position sensor Status 0 Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Close Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Detected (H.P.) 1 Detected (paper) Detected (paper) Detected (paper) Detected (paper) Detected (H.P.) Detected (H.P.) Detected (open) Detected (close) Detected (H.P.) Detected (H.P.) Detected (H.P.) Detected (H.P.) Detected (End) Detected (paper) Open Detected (H.P.) Detected (H.P.) Detected (Set) Detected (Set) Not detected
ADF
Input No. 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Sensor/Switch/Signal Original width sensor 3 Original width sensor 2 Original width sensor 1 Registration sensor Feed-out sensor DF position sensor ADF position sensor Feed-in cover open sensor Feed-out cover open sensor Status 0 Not activated Not activated Not activated Not detected Not detected Open Close Open Open 1 Activated Activated Activated Detected (original) Detected (original) Close Open Close Close
A2457/A269
4-8
SM
4.1.7 SP5-804 OUTPUT CHECK

The table below lists the items of the main unit output check. COPIER
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Electrical Component Drum motor (standard speed, forward) Drum motor (half speed, forward) Drum motor (standard speed, reverse) Not used Fusing motor (standard speed) Fusing motor (half speed) Not used Paper feed motor (standard speed) Paper feed motor (half speed) Not used Drum peripheral component motor Wire cleaner motor (forward) Wire cleaner motor (reverse) PCC QL Main charge corona & grid (C & G) Development bias (AC) Development bias (DC) Development bias (AC + DC) Drum cleaning brush bias (BR) ID sensor LED Development clutch PTB shift clutch Not used Toner supply clutch Revolver motor current (rotation) Revolver motor current (development) Revolver motor current (stand-by) Revolver rotation (90o) Not used Not used ITB motor (standard speed, forward) ITB motor (half speed, forward) ITB motor (standard, reverse) ITB bias (T1) ITB cleaning drive clutch ITB cleaning shift clutch ITB lubricant brush bias (Q1) PTB motor (standard, forward) PTB motor (half speed, forward) PTB motor (standard, reverse) PTB discharge (Q2) Not used Power relay (printer) Hot roller fusing lamp Pressure roller fusing lamp Charge fan Transport fan Exhaust fan Fusing fan (bottom) Not used ID sensor fan No. 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 Electrical Component Not used Development cooling fan (standard speed) Development cooling fan (half speed) Fusing fan (upper) Not used Paper feed drive clutch By-pass feed clutch Main by-pass pick-up solenoid Sub by-pass pick-up solenoid By-pass reverse roller solenoid 1st paper feed clutch 1st pick-up solenoid 1st reverse roller solenoid Not used Not used Not used 2nd paper feed clutch 2nd pick-up solenoid 2nd reverse roller solenoid 3rd paper feed clutch 3rd pick-up solenoid 3rd reverse roller solenoid 1st tray lift motor (forward) 1st tray lift motor (reverse) Not used Not used 2nd tray lift motor (forward) 2nd tray lift motor (reverse) 3rd tray lift motor (forward) 3rd tray lift motor (reverse) Registration motor (providing power) Registration motor (standard speed) Registration motor (half speed) Not used Not used Junction gate solenoid Duplex feed motor (forward) Not used Duplex feed motor (reverse) Not used Side fence jogger motor (forward) Side fence jogger motor (reverse) End fence jogger motor (forward) End fence jogger motor (reverse) Not used Not used Optics cooling fan (rear) Optics cooling fan (front) IPU cooling fan Scanner motor (provide power) Exposure lamp Power relay (scanner)
SM
4-9
A257/A269
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2000
To activate the revolver motor 45 or 90 degrees, No. 26 Revolver motor current (rotation) needs to be ON. OPTIONS (FPU, SORTER, ADF)
No. 107 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 Electrical Component FPU: Lamp Sorter: Transport motor (Proof mode) Sorter: Transport motor (Sort mode) Sorter: Exit motor Sorter: Turn gate solenoid Sorter: Bin Motor Sorter: Bin rear plate motor Sorter: Grip motor Sorter: Grip shift motor Sorter: Staple unit motor Sorter: Stapler motor No. 130 131 133 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 Electrical Component Sorter: Reverse solenoid Sorter: Jogger Motor Same as 131 ADF: Feed-in motor (forward) ADF: Feed-in motor (reverse) ADF: Belt drive motor (forward) ADF: Belt drive motor (reverse) ADF: Feed-out motor ADF: Inverter solenoid ADF: Indicators ON
4.1.8 SP5-114-000 ACCOUNT COLOR MODE SETUP

When the key counter has been installed or the user code mode has been enabled, it is possible to select color mode(s) which are only accessible by using the key counter or user code. The default for this SP is 15. This means that the key counter or user code is always required when making copies.
Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Black/White Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Single Color Twin Color Full Color
Counter:
A key counter or user code is required to make copies. The number is then counted up by the key counter or the user code counter.
No Mark: Copies can be made without a key counter or user code. NOTE: 1. Before setting SP5-114-000, SP5-113-000 (Key Counter (User Code)/Key Card/Coin Lock must be selected. For example, set to 2 (= Key Counter(User Code)) when you use Key Counter. 2. When SP5-104-000 (A3/DLT Double Count) is set to 1 (Double Count), the electrical counters of the operation panel, the mechanical counters and also a key counter count up double for A3/DLT (Ver 1.612 Firmware or greater).
A257/A269 4-10 SM
Rev. 04/2000
USER TOOLS
4.1.9 SP5-955 PRINTER INTERNAL PATTERN

5-955-018: Internal Pattern Types
The default values and printer internal patterns, which are generated in the LD control board, are listed below.
0: No pattern 1: Print margin pattern 2: Print out all fonts 3: 1 dot/line grid pattern 4: Belt pattern 5: 16-gradation with blank 6: Solid 7: 1 dot pattern (2x2) 8: 1 dot pattern (4x4) 9: 1 dot sub scan line 10: 2 dot sub scan line 11: 1 dot main scan line 12: 2 dot main scan line 13: Color patch 14: Grid scanner image 18: 2 beams pitch pattern 19: 2 beams density pattern
5-955-002 to 5-955-016 LD_PWM (16 gradations): Specifies the LD output level (determines the output levels (gradations) of 16 grayscales in SP5-955-5, -16, and -17). 002: 1/15: 2nd level setting 016: 15/15: 16th level setting 5-955-17 LD_PWM (trailing edge color patch half tone): Specifies the LD output level (determines the half-tone gradations of the trailing edge color patch in SP5-955-13).
4.2 USER TOOLS

4.2.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS
Press the User Tools key to enter user tools mode
SM
4-11
A257/A269
Service Tables
5-955-001 LOAD_PWM (dot, line): Specifies the LD output level (determines the test pattern gradations for SP5-955-1 through -4, -6 through -14, and -18 through -19).
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
4.2.2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF USER TOOLS

See User Tools in Changing the machine setting of Operating Instructions.
4.3 TP/SW/LED/FUSE
4.3.1 MAIN CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS
TP NO. Signal Name TP101 GND TP102 GND TP103 /FGATE TP104 ENGY TP105 FB_T2 TP106 FB_T1 TP107 FB_G TP108 BLTPTN TP109 FB_C TP111 FB_BDC TP112 TMP TP113 HUM TP114 P_SEN2 TP115 P_SEN1 TP116 V_SEN TP117 UPHT_TH TP118 LWHT_TH TP120 /Z_CROSS TP121 +5V TP122 TP123 TP124 TP125 TP130 TP131 TP133 TP136 TP137 TP140 TP141 TP142 TP143 TP144 TP145 TP147 TP148 TP900 CLK /IACK /RESET GND /DSACK1 /DSACK0 /AS /DME /VRAM YXX+ Y+ YD LP GND XCK +5VB Description Ground terminal Ground terminal /BFGATE signal from the LD control Save Energy mode PTB bias (T2) feedback signal ITB bias (T1) feedback signal Grid bias (G) feedback signal Transfer belt mark detection signal Charge corona bias (C) feedback signal Development bias (DC) feedback signal Temperature Humidity ID sensor: YMC ID sensor: K Potential sensor Hot roller thermistor Pressure roller thermistor Zero-cross signal 5V line System clock Factory use Factory use Ground terminal Factory use Factory use Factory use This signal is generated when the IPU sends all lines of the image data used in the editing function to the main control board. Factory use Touch panel Y-axis: Ground Touch Panel X-axis: Ground Touch Panel X-axis: Power source Touch panel Y-axis: Power source Factory use Factory use Ground terminal Factory use 5V line Stand-by (V) Remarks 0 0 0 to 5.0 Active L 0 to 5.0 Active H 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 Active L 5 Set to 20 MHz when the 0 to 5.0 CPU starts.
0 to 5.0
If the screen is blank after scanning the image, check this point. Active L
0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0
0 5.0 (Held off in the Energy Star mode)
A2457/A269
4-12
SM
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
4.3.2 LD MAIN CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS

Pin No. Signal Level TP 1 0~5V Signal ground Printer line synchronizing signal FGATE signal based on belt mark TP22 TP29 TP31 0~5V 0V 0~5V Signal ground Belt mark detection signal Signal Laser synchronizing signal Function When beam reaches to the detector, it outputs 0V. The detector outputs 2 signals at 420 sec frequency during image writing. Signal ground (can be used as GND during test) Low (0V) pulses are generated at 210 sec frequency during image writing. Frame gate (FGATE) signal is generated at LD control based on the belt mark signal Signal ground (can be used as GND during test) Belt mark signal from the image transfer belt
TP 6 TP17
0V 0~5V
4.3.3 I/O CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS

Service Tables
Location TP No. IN/OUT Name B-1 TP101 IN Potential sensor Registration sensor A-1 TP102 IN A-1 B-1 B-1 A-1 A-2 C-1 D-2 B-2 B-2 D-2 B-2 D-2 B-2 B-2 C-3 D-2 D-2 B-2 D-2 D-2 D-2 D-2 D-2 TP103 TP104 TP105 TP106 TP107 TP108 TP109 TP110 TP111 TP112 TP113 TP114 TP115 TP116 TP117 TP118 TP119 TP120 TP121 TP122 TP123 TP124 TP125 OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT OUT IN OUT IN OUT OUT ID sensor LED (same function as TP164) Fusing motor: OK signal GND (5 V) Belt mark detection Revolver H.P. sensor ITB cleaning unit H.P. sensor Not used Registration motor: Clock Wire cleaner motor: trigger Fusing motor Wire cleaner motor: forward/reverse Fusing motor: Trigger Registration motor: trigger Toner end sensor By-pass table open/close Fusing fan (upper) PTB shift clutch Charge current leak detection Transport fan Drum peripheral component motor: OK signal Drum peripheral component motor: trigger PTB motor: trigger 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 Stand-by(V) 0 to 5.0 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 Low: Standard speed, High: Half speed Forward: High Reverse: Low ON: Low, OFF: High ON: Low, OFF: High Open: Low, Close: High ON: LOW, OFF: High ON: Low Leak detected: Low ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low Remarks Paper present: High, No paper: Low 5V: LED OFF Less than 5V: LED ON Constant-seed motor rotation: Low Mark detection: High H.P. position: High Unit contact: High, Unit released: Low
SM
4-13
A257/A269
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
Location TP No. IN/OUT B-2 D-2 E-2 B-2 C-2 D-2 B-2 D-2 D-2 B-2 C-2 B-3 B-3 B-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 B-3 C-3 C-3 B-3 C-3 C-3 B-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 B-3 D3 B-3 C-3 C-3 E-3 B-3 B-3 A-4 B-3 B-3 B-3 C-3 C-3 TP126 TP127 TP128 TP129 TP130 TP131 TP132 TP133 TP134 TP135 TP136 TP137 TP138 TP139 TP140 TP141 TP142 TP143 TP144 TP145 TP146 TP147 TP148 TP149 TP150 TP151 TP152 TP153 TP154 TP155 TP156 TP157 TP158 TP159 TP160 TP161 TP162 TP163 TP164 TP165 TP166 TP167 TP168 IN Name Separation sensor GND (5 V) GND (24 V) Wire cleaner motor: Power up PTB motor: half speed Toner cartridge set sensor Stand-by(V) 0 to 5.0 5 24 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 PTB discharge corona (Q2): PWM PTB discharge corona (Q2): trigger Drum motor: OK signal Wire cleaner motor: over current detection ITB lubricant brush bias (Q1): leak detection ITB bias (T2): PWM Drum motor: brake Charge grid (G): PWM Development bias (DC): PWM PTB bias (T2): trigger Charge corona fan Drum motor: forward/backward Charge grid (G): trigger Development bias (DC): trigger Drum motor: trigger PTB unit H.P. sensor PTB discharge corona (Q2): leak detection ITB lubricant brush bias (Q1): PWM Development cooling fan: half speed ITB cleaning drive clutch ITB motor: OK signal PTB motor: OK signal ITB lubricant brush bias (Q1): trigger By-pass feed unit switch Drum motor: half speed Development cooling fan: full speed Development CL 5V Revolver motor current switch: 2 A Revolver motor current switch: 1 A Paper exit sensor ID sensor LED (same function as TP103) Charge (C): trigger Development bias (AC): trigger Fusing fan (bottom) Junction gate SOL 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5V pulse 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 50 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 Half speed: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low, OFF: 5V ON: Low, OFF: 5 V High: 2A High: 1A Paper present: High, No paper present: Low 5V: LED OFF Less than 5V: LED ON ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: High, OFF: Low Remarks Paper present: High, No paper: Low
OUT OUT IN OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN OUT OUT OUT IN IN OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
ON: Low Cartridge present: Low, No cartridge: High ON: Low Motor constant-speed rotation: Low
ON: Low, OFF: 5 V Unit up (contact): Low, Down (release): High Leak detection: Low
ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low, OFF: 5 V Motor constant-speed rotation: Low Motor constant-speed rotation: Low
A2457/A269
4-14
SM
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
Location TP No. IN/OUT E-4 A-4 B-4 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-4 E-4 B-4 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-3 C-4 C-3 C-4 E-4 E-4 A-4 A-4 B-4 D-4 D-4 B-4 D-4 D-4 E-4 D-4 D-4 D-4 E-4 D-4 C-4 B-5 C-5 C-5 C-5 C-5 C-5 D-5 C-5 D-5 D-5 C-5 D-5 D-5 TP169 TP170 TP171 TP172 TP173 TP174 TP175 TP176 TP177 TP178 TP179 TP180 TP181 TP182 TP183 TP184 TP185 TP186 TP187 TP188 TP189 TP190 TP191 TP192 TP193 TP194 TP195 TP196 TP197 TP198 TP199 TP200 TP201 TP202 TP203 TP205 TP206 TP207 TP208 TP209 TP210 TP211 TP212 TP213 TP214 TP215 IN IN IN IN IN Name Bypass: paper width sensor: 1 Oil end sensor Development bias (DC): feedback PTB bias (T2): feedback Charge grid (G): feedback By-pass: paper width sensor: 2 Factory use QL Development cooling fan: half speed Development cooling fan: full speed ITB cleaning shift CL Toner supply CL ID sensor fan By-pass paper width sensor: 3 By-pass paper width sensor: 4 ID sensor: YMC ID sensor: K Factory use By-pass paper feed clutch Main by-pass pick-up solenoid Factory use Sub by-pass pick-up solenoid By-pass reverse roller Solenoid ITB motor: trigger ITB motor: half speed ITB motor: forward/reverse Registration motor: power down Registration motor: current 5V By-pass paper length sensor By-pass paper end sensor Stand-by(V) 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 Remarks Open: High Detection: Low Oil present: High, Empty: Low
IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN IN OUT OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT
5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0
Open: High Detection: Low ON: Low ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low ON: Low, OFF: 5 V ON: Low Open: High Detection: Low Open: High Detection: Low
5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0
ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low Forward: High, Reverse: Low
1st paper feed sensor Duplex paper feed sensor 1st paper feed clutch 2nd paper feed clutch 1st pickup Solenoid 1st reverse roller Solenoid 1st upper limit sensor
0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0
Sensed: High Paper present: Low, No paper present: High Paper present: High, No paper present: Low Paper present: High, No paper present: Low ON: Low ON: Low ON: Low
OUT IN
5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0
ON: Low Lift sensed: Low
SM
4-15
A257/A269
Service Tables
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
Location TP No. IN/OUT Name A-5 TP216 IN Zero-cross signal Factory use B-5 TP217 C-5 TP218 D-5 TP219 OUT 2nd reverse roller solenoid D-5 TP220 Factory use B-5 TP221 Factory use B-5 TP222 1st paper end sensor C-5 TP223 IN C-5 C-5 D-6 D-6 B-5 B-5 D-6 A-6 D-6 A-6 D-6 A-6 D-6 D-6 D-6 A-5 C-6 C-6 D-6 D-6 D-6 D-6 A-6 A-5 C-6 C-6 B-6 B-6 B-6 B-6 B-6 C-6 C-6 B-6 B-6 C-6 C-6 D-6 B-6 A-5 C-6 B-6 B-6 C-6 D-6 TP225 TP226 TP227 TP228 TP229 TP230 TP231 TP232 TP233 TP234 TP235 TP236 TP237 TP238 TP239 TP240 TP241 TP242 TP243 TP244 TP245 TP246 TP247 TP248 TP249 TP250 TP251 TP252 TP253 TP254 TP255 TP256 TP257 TP258 TP259 TP260 TP261 TP262 TP263 TP264 TP265 TP266 TP267 TP268 TP269 OUT OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN OUT OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 1st tray lift motor: forward 1st tray lift motor: backward Total counter: 1(K): OK Total counter: 2 (CMY): OK Duplex entrance sensor Toner overflow sensor 2nd paper height sensor Pressure roller thermistor 3rd paper height sensor Hot roller thermistor Humidity sensor Total counter: 1 Key counter Key counter: OK Pressure roller fusing lamp: trigger 3rd tray lift motor: forward 3rd tray lift motor: reverse Total counter: 2 Key card count signal 1st paper height sensor Temperature sensor Hot roller fusing lamp: trigger 2nd tray lift motor: reverse 2nd tray lift motor: forward Side fence jogger motor: phase A Paper separation corona (D): PWM Side fence jogger motor: phase B Paper separation corona (D): trigger Drum cleaning bias roller (BR): trigger 2nd reverse roller solenoid 3rd reverse roller solenoid 3rd feed clutch 3rd pick-up solenoid GND (5 V) ITB bias (T1): feedback PCC (AC): trigger Power relay: printer PCC (DC): trigger Paper feed motor: OK signal Stand-by(V) 5V pulse Remarks
5.0 to 0
ON: Low
0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0
Paper present: Low, No paper present: High ON: High ON: High
Paper present: Low Toner full: Low Many: Low, Few: High Many: Low, Few: High
5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 5.0 to 0 0 to 5.0 0 to 5.0 5V pulse 5V pulse 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0
ON: Low Key counter connected: Low OK: Low ON: High ON: High ON: Low ON: Low Many: Low, Few: High
ON: High ON: High
ON: Low OFF: 5v ON: Low ON: Low
OUT OUT
5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 0
ON: Low ON: Low
IN OUT OUT OUT IN
5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0
A2457/A269
4-16
SM
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
Location TP No. IN/OUT Name B-7 TP270 OUT Exhaust fan C-7 TP271 OUT Paper feed motor: Clock B-7 TP272 OUT ITB bias (T1): PWM C-7 TP273 OUT Paper feed motor: trigger B-7 TP274 OUT ITB bias (T1): trigger B-6 TP275 IN PCC: leak detection Paper separation corona (D): leak B-6 TP276 IN detection B-6 TP277 OUT Power relay: scanner Key card: OK C-7 TP278 IN E-7 E-7 B-8 E-7 B-8 E-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 C-5 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 D-5 B-8 B-8 B-8 A-5 B-8 B-8 B-9 B-9 B-9 TP279 TP280 TP281 TP282 TP283 TP284 TP285 TP288 TP289 TP293 TP294 TP295 TP296 TP297 TP298 TP299 TP300 TP301 TP302 TP305 TP306 TP307 TP312 TP313 TP314 TP315 TP316 TP317 TP318 TP319 TP321 TP322 TP325 TP326 TP327 IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN OUT IN OUT IN IN OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN OUT OUT IN OUT OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN IN IN IN IN 3rd paper feed sensor Duplex feed motor: Clock 1st tray set switch Sleep Mode ON 2nd tray paper size switch: 5 2nd tray paper size switch: 4 2nd tray paper size switch: 3 2nd tray paper size switch: 2 2nd tray paper size switch: 1 3rd paper end sensor 3rd upper limit sensor Duplex turn sensor 2nd upper limit sensor Duplex entrance sensor 2nd paper end sensor Duplex paper end sensor Duplex end fence H.P. sensor End fence jogger motor: phase XA Duplex side fence H.P. sensor End fence jogger motor: phase A 3rd paper feed sensor Duplex set detection Side fence jogger motor: phase XB Side fence jogger motor: phase XA 3rd tray paper size switch: 1 3rd tray paper size switch: 2 3rd tray paper size switch: 3 Duplex feed motor: power down 3rd tray paper size switch: 4 End fence jogger motor: phase B Duplex feed motor: trigger 3rd tray paper size switch: 5 End fence jogger motor: phase XB Duplex feed motor: forward/reverse Stand-by(V) Remarks 5.0 to 0 5V pulse 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 ON: Low 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 Leak sensed: Low, 5.0 to 0 Normal: 5v 5.0 to 0 Key card connected: 5.0 to 0 Low Paper present: Low, 0 to 5.0 No paper: High 5.0 to 0 Lift sensed: Low Paper present: High, 5.0 to 0 No paper: Low 5.0 to 0 Lift sensed: Low Paper present: Low, 5.0 to 0 No paper: High Paper present: Low, 0 to 5.0 No paper: High Paper present: Low, 5.0 to 0 No paper: High 5.0 to 0 HP: Low 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 HP: Low 5V pulse Paper present: High, 0 to 5.0 No paper: Low Set sensed: Low, 0 to 5.0 Not set: 5v 5V pulse 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 ON: Low OFF: 5 V 5.0 to 0 ON: Low OFF: 5 V 5.0 to 0 ON: Low OFF: 5 V 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 ON: Low OFF: 5 V 5V pulse ON: Low 5.0 to 0 (open collector) 5.0 to 0 ON: Low OFF: 5 V 5V pulse Forward: Low 5.0 to 0 (open collector), Reverse: High Paper present: High, 0 to 5.0 No paper present: Low 5V pulse 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0
Set: Low ON: Low OFF: 5 V ON: Low OFF: 5 V ON: Low OFF: 5 V ON: Low OFF: 5 V ON: Low OFF: 5 V
SM
4-17
A257/A269
Service Tables
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
Location TP No. IN/OUT Name D-3 TP333 GND (24 V) C-8 TP340 +12 V C-8 TP341 12 V D-8 TP342 GND (24 V) C-6 TP343 IN Paper exist door open/close D-8 TP344 IN Vertical transport door open/close D-8 TP345 IN Front door open/close C-8 TP346 24 V (VAA2) D-8 TP347 GND (38 V) C-8 TP348 5V D-8 TP349 38 V C-8 TP350 24 V (VAA1) C-8 TP351 24 V (VAA3) C-8 TP352 5 V (VCC1A) C-9 TP353 GND (5 VA) B-9 TP354 GND (5 V) B-9 TP355 5VE E-1 TP356 ITB motor FG signal Stand-by(V) 0 12.0 V 12 V 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 5.0 to 0 24 0 5 38 24 24 5 0 0 5 5V pulse Remarks
A2457/A269
4-18
SM
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
4.3.4 FUSE SPECIFICATIONS

Fuse No. 101 102 103 EU AA Used Not used Used Used NA Line AC AC Rating 250V/15A Major Load Fusing lamps Condition SC558 is displayed. Fusing Lamps OFF OFF OFF Normal function Exposure Lamp OFF OFF OFF OFF
301
6 7 31 71
81
71, 81 3, 7 3, 31 3, 71 3, 81
Copier does not function at all. Not Used Copier does not AC used function at all. Used Used Scanner lamp, SC101 is displayed NA: 125V/5A anti-condensation after the warm-up of AC the development unit EU: 250V/4A heater is completed. Used Used Drum motor, SC440 is displayed NA: 125V/6.3A DC24V revolver motor after the machine EU: 250V/6.3A warm-up starts. Used Used High-voltage Front door open NA: 125V/6.3A power supply stays ON. DC24V EU: 250V/6.3A boards, ITB/PTB motors Used Used Solenoid, fan, Door open (By-pass NA: 125V/6.3A clutches, sensors. feed unit and vertical DC24V transport doors) EU: 250V/6.3A Etc. stays ON. Used Used S/S, ADF, LCT S/S and ADF are not NA: 125V/6.3A detected. SC505 is DC24V detected when LCT EU: 250V/6.3A is equipped. Used Used Scanner, printer SC101 is displayed NA: 125V/6.3A after the warm-up of DC24V the development unit EU: 250V/6.3A is completed. Revolver motor, Power goes down Used Used NA: 125V/6.3A DC38V fusing motor, etc. just after the scanner EU: 250V/6.3A starts moving. Used Used NA: 125V/2A Main scanner IPU SC172 is displayed. DC17V EU: 250V/2A Used Used NA: 250V/3.15A All 5V, 5VE Copier does not 5V, function at all. 5VE EU: 250V/2A Used Used Operation panel, SC302 is displayed DC 250V/2A I/O just after the warm-12V up starts. Used Used Operation panel, No indicators on the I/O, etc. operation panel lit. NA: 125V/3.15A DC12V Copier stops just EU: 250V/3.15A after the warm-up starts. When both the fuses are blown Same as Fuse 81 Same as Fuse 3 Same as Fuse 31 Same as Fuse 3 No indicators on the operation panel lit and the copier does not start warm-up. Copier does not function at all.
NA: 125V/10A Main switch EU: 250V/6.3A Main Switch 250V/4A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Normal function
Normal function
Normal function
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Vcc1 Vcc2
When the power line is opened
5V lines for normal copy 5V line for sleep mode
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
SM
4-19
A257/A269
Service Tables
TP/SW/LED/FUSE
NOTE: When Fuse 4 is opened, copy can be made. However, paper jam occurs at the sorter stapler if it is installed since the machine cannot detect the sorter stapler.
4.3.5 LED/SW SPECIFICATIONS OF SCANNER IPU BOARD

LED Specifications
Condition at check timing LED Software Up-grade from IC card Blinking: IC card/flash memory verification error After scanner startup AGC (at shading) Blinking (400 ms intervals): Black level O/E difference correction error (1st NG) Blinking (1.6 s intervals): Black level O/E difference correction error (2nd NG) Blinking (400 ms intervals): Black level correction error (1st NG) Blinking (1.6 s intervals): Black level correction error (2nd NG) Blinking (400 ms intervals): NG condition on white level correction error Blinking: Normal operation Light ( or OFF): Scanner functioning error
LED1
LED2
Blinking: Data polling error
Light: Installation in progress LED3 Blinking: Flash memory erase error LED4
FGATE signal monitor LED5 LED lights when receiving the FGATE signal from the LD control board to control the image output timing. Image data signal monitor LED6 Monitors 8th bit of the Image data sent from IPU to the LD control board; and, LED lights when the data in 8th bit is 1.
SW Specifications
DIP-SW SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 Normal mode OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF to ON: 1 scan OFF to ON: Scanner motor current off ON to OFF: Scanner motor current on H.P. check OFF to ON: Lamp on (scanner fan on) ON to OFF: Lamp off (scanner fan off) OFF to ON: Scanner free run starts ON to OFF: Scanner free run stops Main switch is turned on if this switch is ON: AGC Shading 1 scan Factory use Not used
A2457/A269
4-20
SM
Rev. 12/99
ROM HISTORY
4.4 ROM HISTORY

4.4.1 ROM HISTORY MAIN CONTROL
A257/A269 Main Control Firmware History Description of Modification 1. Copies or Developments is displayed in the counter display (when the Counter Key is pressed). Copies is displayed for a machine with Copy counter set. Developments is displayed for a machine with Development counter set. NOTE: This change is available only when English has been selected. 2. Confirmation button on the Operation Panel is changed from OK to Confirm. 3. Full color sorting button in Duplex/ADF/Sorter mode in Copier Feature mode in User Tools is changed from On / Off to Off / On. This is because the default setting for Full Color Sorting is On. 4. Image Rotation and Auto Reduce/Enlarge can be used at the same time. 5. Area Editing and Auto Reduce/Enlarge can be used at the same time. The following SP Modes have been added: SP8-(140 148)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-(240 248)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-(340 343)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 3) July 99 1.561 Serial # Oct 99 Ver. 1.572
SM
4-21
A257/A269
Service Tables
ROM HISTORY
Rev. 12/99
1. The Drum Motor Stop Timing has been optimized to prevent the possibility of the belt surface scratching the OPC Drum. 2. On/Off timing for the ITB Cleaning Brush and Cleaning Blade has been optimized to prevent toner accumulated on the edge of the blade from falling on the Image Transfer Belt. 3. The following SP Modes have been added: SP8-115 Fusing Temperature setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-215 Fusing Temperature setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-315 Fusing Temperature setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 3) SP8-(130-138) Paper Transfer Current Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-(230-238) Paper Transfer Current Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-(330-338) Paper Transfer Current Setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 1)
June 99
1.542
The following software bugs have been corrected: 1. When twin color (red and green), poster (2x2), and thick paper modes are selected, a solid image may appear on the leading edge of the copy. 2. Copies may become solid black when using ADF in ACS mode when making more than two continuous copies. 3. On units without an ADF, the operation panel may become locked when removing paper waiting for the second side to be copied in the duplex tray. 4. An abnormal image may appear when copying on 13x19 paper with an enlargement ratio of 200%. 5. The erase margin may be abnormal when using A6 paper with European models. 6. Some items may not be printed by the SP Data Printing function. The following software bug has been corrected: 1. Some text in the Systems Setting screen on the operation panel was mis-aligned. Start of production
May 99
1.514
April 99
1.502
March 99
1.501
A2457/A269
4-22
SM
Rev. 10/99
ROM HISTORY
4.4.2 ROM HISTORY SCANNER IPU

A257/A269 Scanner IPU Firmware History Description of Modification 1. The following SP Modes have been added: SP8-(140 148)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-(240 248)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-(340 343)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 3) 2. When the setting is changed from the default (5) to 6, the ACC target density level for the printer mode (SP Mode 4-502-001 to 004) has been changed as follows: If the setting of ACC target density level fro the printer mode (SP Mode 4-502-001 to 004, adjustable range: 0 to 10, default setting: 5) is changed to 6, the level of ID max will become greater (20% up for K, 15% up for Y, M, and C). NOTE: 1. The level of ID max will not change, even if the setting is changed to 7, 8, 9 or 10. 2. If the ID max is increased, there is a greater tendency for toner scattering to occur in the text area. The following software bugs have been corrected: 1. A small non-painted area may appear in the copied image after painting inside a closed loop area. 2. SC326 may appear when making A3 copies in Auto Original Type Select and 400%. 3. APS may not function properly immediately after ACC has failed. Start of production March 99 1.15 May 99 1.16 Serial # July 99 Ver. 1.19
SM
4-23
A257/A269
Service Tables
PM PROCEDURES
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.1 PM PROCEDURES
5.1.1 PM-RELATED COUNTERS
PM counters are available in the SP mode. After performing a PM procedure, reset the PM counters.
SP7-803 (PM Counter Display)

Total PM Counters Total Number of Development Cycles Total Count PM Counter Setting Current PM Count D P D D Set Reset
Developer/Drum Counters K C M Y Drum
Reset All Developer Counters D D D D D Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Next Back
A269P501.WMF
80KD PM Replacement Parts Drum Cleaning Brush Drum Cleaning Blade Drum Lubricant Bar Bias Roller Blade Image Transfer Belt Charge Corona Wire Charge Corona Grid Charge Wire/Grid Cleaner PCC Charge Wire Development Dust Filter Charge Corona Dust Filter Dust Filter Fusing Unit Filter Used Toner Hot Roller Oil Supply Pad
Reset All 80KD PM Counters D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset P P Reset Reset Prev Next Back
A269P502.WMF
SM
5-1
A257/A269
Preventive Maintenance
PM PROCEDURES
160KD PM Replacement Parts Pressure Roller Hot Roller Bearing Pressure Roller Bearing Hot Roller Blade Pressure Roller Blade
Reset All 160KD PM Counters D D D D D P P P P P Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
Prev Next Back
A269P503.WMF
200KD PM Replacement Parts ITB: Lubricant Brush ITB: Cleaning Brush ITB Lubricant Bar Separation Corona Wire PTB Discharge Wire PTB Cleaning Brush PTB Cleaning Blade Paper Transfer Belt PTB Back Brush
Reset All 200KD PM Counters D D D D D D D D D Reset Reset Reset P P P P P P Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
Prev Next Back
A269P504.WMF
A257/A269
5-2
SM
PM PROCEDURES
400KD PM Replacement Parts 1st Tray 1st Tray 1st Tray 2nd Tray 2nd Tray 2nd Tray 3rd Tray 3rd Tray 3rd Tray Duplex Unit Duplex Unit Duplex Unit Pick-up Roller Feed Roller Reverse Roller Pick-up Roller Feed Roller Reverse Roller Pick-up Roller Feed Roller Reverse Roller Feed Roller Reverse Roller Bottom Plate Pad
Reset All 400KD PM Counters

0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P
Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Prev Next Back
A269P508.WMF
Others By-pass Tray By-pass Tray By-pass Tray LCT LCT LCT ARDF ARDF ARDF Pick-up Roller Feed Roller Reverse Roller Pick-up Roller Feed Roller Reverse Roller Transport Belt Separation Belt Separation Roller
Reset All Counters

0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P
Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Back
0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 O 0000000 O 0000000 O
0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P
Print PM counter
Print
Prev Back
A269P509.WMF
SM
5-3
A257/A269
PM PROCEDURES
5.1.2 REGULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW DIAGRAM

80 kD
Check counters.
Check counters. Total counter PM counter
Make a sample copy.
Copy a C-4 chart in the following modes: Black photo mode Full color photo mode Full color letter mode
Optics
1. Wipe the platen cover first with a damp cloth and then with a dry cloth. 2. Clean the exposure glass with water or alcohol (be sure to clean it during on-site maintenance). 3. Wipe the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mirrors with a silicone cloth or optics cleaning paper. 4. Clean the optical filter with a blower brush. 5. Clean the original sensor with a blower brush.
Development unit 200 k Replace all developer (K, C, M, and Y) at the same time. 200 k
1. 2. 3. 4.
Wipe the development unit toner hopper with a dry cloth. Replace revolver filter Clean the entire development unit (including covers and gears). Visually check the side seals (replace seals if cracks, warps, or breakages are found). 5. Clean the entrance and outlet seals with a dry cloth (replace seals if cracks, warps, or breakages are found). 6. Clean the toner end sensor with a blower brush, then wipe it with a dry cloth. 7. Wipe the development assembly bias terminals with a dry cloth (any cloth contaminated by oil or other foreign substances is disallowed).
Around the drum
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Replace the PPC charge wire. Wipe the PPC casing with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth. Wipe the PPC end block with a dry cloth. Replace the cleaning blade, then apply setting powder. Replace the lubricant bar. Replace the cleaning brush. Clean the entire cleaning unit and entrance mylar. Clean the entire drum unit (including QL and potential sensor) with a dry cloth. Clean the entire drawer unit (including the ID sensor and carrier catcher) with a dry cloth. Replace the grid. Replace the charge corona wire. Replace the cleaner pad. Clean the charge corona unit, wipe it with a damp cloth, then wipe the casing with a dry cloth (be sure to clean it during on-site maintenance).
A269P505.WMF
A257/A269
5-4
SM
PM PROCEDURES
A269P506.WMF
SM
5-5
A257/A269
PM PROCEDURES
200 k Run TD sensor initialization. SP2-225-005 Make sure that the execution result is 1. 200 k
Execute forced process control self check (SP3-126) If the developer replacement is done, run developer setup: all color (SP2-225-005).
Paper feed section
TD sensor initialization and forced process control self check preliminary operations 1. Install all unit covers. 2. Turn on the main power switch with the front cover opened. 3. When the cover open message appears on the operation panel LCD, close the front cover and enter the SP mode.
160 k 200 k Clean the by-pass rollers. Clean the paper trays, and paper feed pick-up, feed, and separation rollers. Clean the transport roller drive. Clean the paper feed guide plate. Clean the vertical transport section. 200 k 160 k Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean the the the the the grip roller. vertical transport guide plate. transport roller drive. paper feed guide plate. vertical transport section.
Duplex unit section
1. 2. 3. 4. 200 k
Wipe the duplex tray (Mylar, filler) with a dry cloth. Clean the feed roller. Clean the separation roller. Wipe the bottom plate pad with a dry cloth.
Wipe the duplex tray (Mylar, filler) with a dry cloth. 200 k
Check result of forced process control self check, or developer agitation. Make sure that the execution result is 1.
Make a copy and check image quality.
Check counters.
Check power supply for proper connection.
A269P507.WMF
A257/A269
5-6
SM
REGULAR PM ITEMS
5.2 REGULAR PM ITEMS

Regular PM items: To be performed every 80,000 developments and 200,000 developments in accordance with the following table.
5.2.1 REGULAR PM TABLE

NOTE: Be sure to use a dry cloth when wiping off any residual toner. Toner will clot when mixed with alcohol.
kD: K Developments I: Inspect L: Lubricate R: Replace C: Clean A: Adjust
PM item 1st, 2nd, 3rd mirrors and Reflector Optical filter Original sensor Slide rail Exposure glass Platen cover Transport belt Transport Unit C EM 80 kD C C C C C C C C Schedule 160 200 240 320 kD kD kD kD C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Block 400 kD C C C C C C Remarks Wipe with a silicone cloth or optics cleaning paper. Clean with a blower brush. Wipe with a dry cloth. Clean with a blower brush Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with water, then with a dry cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol.
Scanner unit
Development unit toner hopper Toner cartridge unit Developer (K)
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
Wipe with a dry cloth or vacuum-clean. Wipe with a dry cloth or vacuum-clean. Developer life is 60 kD. (See PM counter SP7-803) Replace K, C, M, Y at the same time. Developer life is 48 kD for each color. (See PM counter SP 7-803) Replace K, C, M, Y at the same time. Cover: Wipe with a dry cloth. Gears: Clean with a blower brush. Visually check. Replace if cracks, warps, or breakages are found. Clean with a blower brush, then wipe with a dry cloth. Clean with a blower brush, then wipe with a dry cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth (should be free of oil or foreign matter). Wipe with a dry cloth (should be free of oil or foreign matter).
Developer (C, M, Y) Development unit
Development unit (including covers and gears) Side seal, entrance seal Toner set sensor Toner end sensor Revolver filter Bias terminal
C I C C R C
C I C C R C
C I C C
C I C C R
C I C C R C
C I C C R C
SM
5-7
A257/A269
Optics Unit
Toner shield glass
Wipe with a dry optics cleaning cloth (A0129111).
REGULAR PM ITEMS
Schedule 200 240 320 kD kD kD C C R R R R R L C C R C C C R R R R R L C R C Block
PM item PCC casing and end block PCC wire Cleaning blade Lubricant bar Cleaning brush Bias roller blade Bias roller terminal
EM C
80 kD C R R R R R L
160 kD C R R R R R L C R C
400 kD C R R R R R L C R C
Remarks Wipe with a damp cloth. Then wipe with a dry cloth. Apply setting powder when replacing. Replace if chips or creases are found.
Drum peripheral components
Cleaning unit and entrance mylar Drum Drum unit (including QL and potential sensor) Revolver drawer (including ID sensor and carrier catcher) Charge corona unit casing and end blocks Charge corona wire Charge corona grid Wire cleaner pad Charge corona filter Belt cleaning unit (toner hopper and entrance seal) ITB Cleaning blade
C R C
Apply a small amount of KS660 silicone grease. Clean with a blower brush, then wipe with a dry cloth. Apply setting powder when replacing. Wipe with a dry cloth.
Wipe with a dry cloth. C C C C C C Wipe with a dry cloth. C C C C R R R R C C C R R R R C C R R R C L C R C C C C C C C C C L C R R C C C C R C R C R R C C C C C C C C C L C R C L C R C C C C R R R R C C R R R R C C R R R R Wipe with a dry cloth or vacuum-clean. C R R R C L C R R R C R C R R Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth. During replacement, apply setting powder to the transfer belt. Replace if chips or creases are found. Clean with a vacuum cleaner if it is found to be too dirty during inspection. Clean with a blower brush, then wipe with a dry cloth. Apply a small amount of G40M silicone grease. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol, then with a dry cotton cloth. Apply setting powder when replacing. Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth. Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth. Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth.
Image transfer unit Paper transfer unit
ITB Lubricant bar ITB Lubricant brush Transfer belt mark sensor Apply grease to bias terminal Transfer belt unit (with inner rollers) Transfer belt Paper transfer belt Belt discharge wire Belt discharge corona unit casing and end block PTB: Separation corona wire PTB: Separation corona unit casing and end block PTB: Cleaning blade PTB: Cleaning brush
A257/A269
5-8
SM
Rev. 08/99
PM item PTB: Back brush Paper transfer section EM 80 kD Schedule 160 200 240 320 kD kD kD kD R Block 400 kD R
REGULAR PM ITEMS
Remarks
Paper transfer unit
Wipe with a dry cloth. C C
Hot roller Hot roller Oil supply pad Pressure roller Hot roller bearing Pressure roller bearing Apply grease to heat insulating bushing Apply grease to fusing drive/fusing gears Fusing/pressure thermistors Fusing/pressure cleaning rollers Scraper Hot roller blade Pressure roller blade Pressure roller oil supply pad Oil pan
R R
R R R R R
R R
R R R R R
R R
Wipe with a dry cloth, then apply grease (Barrierta A0289300). Apply Mobile Temp 1.
L C C C C
L C C C R R R C
L C C C C
L C C C R R R C
L C C C C Clean with suitable solvent, then apply silicone oil to the contact surface. Clean with suitable solvent. -15, -17, -19 copier only Clean with suitable solvent. Clean with a dry cloth while taking care not to damage the edge. -22, -26, -27, -29 copier only -22, -26, -27, -29 copier only Clean with a dry cloth, then wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol. Any precipitates in the oil tank may be left there. Silicone Oil Type SS P/No.A2579100 should be used. Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth.
Fusing unit
Silicone oil I Paper pick-up rollers, paper feed rollers, paper separation rollers By-pass pick-up roller, by-pass feed roller, by-pass separation roller Registration rollers Registration sensor: vertical transport Relay rollers Registration guide plate Vertical transport guide plate Vertical transport rollers L L L L L L
Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
Paper feed unit
C C
C C C C C C
C C
C C C C C C
C C
Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Clean with a blower brush, then wipe with a dry cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
SM
5-9
A257/A269
REGULAR PM ITEMS
Schedule 200 240 320 kD kD kD I C / R R R C C C C L C C / R R R C C C L C Block
PM item Used toner tank
EM
80 kD C / R R R C C C L C
160 kD C / R R R C C C L C
Others
I Exhaust dust filter Fusing unit filter Paper feed separation roller Paper feed roller Duplex bottom plate pad Spring clutch Duplex unit
Duplex unit
Remarks 400 kD C Collect used toner, then wipe the containers with a dry cloth, or replace / R the used toner tank. R R Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry R cloth. Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry R cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth. R L C Apply Mobile Temp 1. Wipe with a dry cloth.
A257/A269
5-10
SM
REGULAR PM ITEMS
Peripherals
PM item Paper feed roller LCT (A683) Pick-up roller Separation roller Tray bottom plate Transport rollers Idle rollers 20 bin sorter stapler (A831) Exit rollers Bins Entrance, bin, and stapler sensors Bearings Gears Stapler Sorter section paper exit Mylar C C C C C L L I I EM 80 kD I I I C 160 kD I I I C Schedule 200 240 320 kD kD kD I I I C I I I C R R R C Block 400 kD I I I C Remarks Guideline: Every 150,000 normal sheets Guideline: Every 150,000 normal sheets Guideline: Every 150,000 normal sheets Clean with a dry or damp cloth (dry cloth). If dirty, clean with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol. If dirty, clean with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol. If dirty, clean with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol. If dirty, clean with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol. Clean with a blower brush. Lubricate if abnormal sound is heard (silicone oil or Launa oil). Lubricate if abnormal sound is heard (resin grease, G-501). Stapler life: 200,000 staples. Paper exit Mylar wear life: 1 million sheets

Block Schedule PM item Transport belts Separation belts ARDF (A663) Separation rollers Registration sensor Size sensor Paper exit sensor EM C C C 80 k 160 k 240 k 320 k 400 k R R R C C C R R R C C C R R R C C C R R R C C C R R R C C C Remarks Wipe with a damp dry cloth. Wipe with a damp dry cloth. Wipe with a damp dry cloth. Clean with a blower brush. Clean with a blower brush. Clean with a blower brush.
NOTE: 1) For ARDF, schedule is counted by number of originals. 2) Number of original is displayed by SP7-803.
SM
5-11
A257/A269
PM-RELATED COUNTERS
6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6.1 PM-RELATED COUNTERS
PM counters are available using SP7-803. After performing a PM related replacement or adjustment procedure, reset the PM counter. (See 5.1.1).
6.2 SERVICE REMARKS
[A]
[B] [B]
[A]
A269R331.WMF A269R330.WMF
[C]
WARNING
1. Turn the copier main switch off when setting the revolver lock release tool [A] and door safety switch actuator [B]. 2. Set the revolver lock release tool [A] first when setting the revolver lock release tool and door safety switch actuator [B]. If the copier starts without the revolver lock release tool [A], revolver will be locked and SC361 (Revolver H.P. sensor error) will display. 3. Never touch the area around the revolver after turning on the copier main switch while using the door safety switch actuator and revolver lock release tool. In case of rotation of revolver, your hands may be injured. 4. Check and note down the setting of Timed Process Control Self Check (SP3972-000) before using release tools. If the Timed Process Control Self Check starts suddenly, your hands may be injured. (See Section 2.1.2 about the timing of starting the Timed Process Control Self Check. Enter the value 0 in SP3-972-000 (Entering a value of 0 surpresses the execution this self check). The default interval of Timed Process Control Self Check is 6 hours.) 5. After using these tools [A], [B], secure them to the upper right inner cover with a plastic screw [C] as shown.
Replacement and Adjustment
6. Enter the previous setting of Timed Process Control Self Check (SP3-972000) again.
SM
6-1
A257/A269
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3 COVERS AND FILTERS

6.3.1 UPPER AND LOWER FRONT COVER
1. Remove the front door [A] (two pins). 2. Remove the lower front cover [B] (one screw). NOTE: Set the door part of the hinge immediately above the hinge of the main unit before inserting the pin.
[A] [B]
A269R901.WMF
6.3.2 RIGHT-SIDE FRONT COVER AND RIGHT EDGE COVER

1. Remove the right-side front cover [A] (3 screws). 2. Remove the right edge door [B] (3 pins).
[B]
[A]
A269R902.WMF
A257/A269
6-2
SM
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3.3 INNER COVERS

1. Remove the front door. 2. Remove the five inner covers as follows: Upper left inner cover [A] (2 screws) Lower left inner cover [B] (3 screws) Revolver cover [C] (4 screws) Upper right inner cover [D] (2 screws) Lower right inner cover [E] (2 screws) [A]
[B]
[C] [D] [E]

A269R903.WMF
6.3.4 REAR COVERS

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (7 screws). 2. Remove the right-side rear cover [B] (3 screws).
[A] [B]
A269R904.WMF
SM
6-3
A257/A269
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3.5 LEFT COVERS

1. Remove the left cover [A] (6 screws). 2. Remove the left front cover [B] (4 screws).
[A]
[B]
A269R905.WMF
6.3.6 EXPOSURE GLASS

1. Remove the left upper cover [A], right upper cover [B], and rear upper cover [C]. 2. Remove the vertical scale [D] (2 screws). 3. Remove the horizontal scale [E] (3 screws). 4. Remove the exposure glass [F]. (When reinstalling the exposure glass, ensure that the white plate faces down and to the left.) [D] [A]
[C]
[E]
[F] [B]
A269R906.WMF
A257/A269
6-4
SM
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3.7 OPERATION PANEL

1. Remove the operation panel [A] (4 screws and 4 connectors). NOTE: Perform the touch panel calibration procedure after replacing the operation panel. (See Touch Panel Calibration.) [A]
A269R911.WMF
6.3.8 USED TONER TANK

1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (1 screw). 2. Remove the used toner tank [B] (1 connector).
[B] [A]
A269R907.WMF
SM
6-5
A257/A269
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3.9 CHARGE CORONA FILTER

1. Open the right edge door. 2. Replace the charge corona filter [A] as shown in the illustration.
[A]
A269R908.WMF
6.3.10 DUST AND OZONE FILTERS

[B] [C]
[D]
[A] [E]
[F]
1. Remove the screw retaining the filter box (left side). 2. Loosen the filter box [A] with a screwdriver as shown and then pull it out. 3. Replace the exhaust dust filter [B]. NOTE: When re-installing the exhaust dust filter, align the sponge seal [C] and [D]. 4. Replace the ozone filter [E]. NOTE: When re-installing the ozone filter, the parting line [F] should be at the position shown in figure.
A257/A269
6-6
SM
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3.11 SCANNER FILTER

1. Remove the upper right cover [A] (2 screws). 2. Replace the scanner filter [B]. [A]
[B]
A269R910.WMF
6.3.12 REVOLVER FILTER

1. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer [A]. (See 6.4.1.) 2. Replace the revolver filter [B].
[B]
A269R325.WMF
SM
6-7
A257/A269
[A]
COVERS AND FILTERS
6.3.13 INNER COVER FILTER

1. Remove the revolver cover [A] (4 screws). 2. Replace the inner cover filter [B].
[A]
[B]
A269R917.WMF
6.3.14 FUSING UNIT FILTER

1. Lower release lever B2 and pull out the fusing/transport unit. 2. Remove the fusing unit filter bracket [A] (1 screw and 2 hooks). 3. Replace the fusing unit filter [B]. NOTE: This filter absorbs silicone oil vapor coming off of the fusing unit.
[A]
A269R919.WMF
[B]
A269R918.WMF
A257/A269
6-8
SM
UNIT REMOVAL
6.4 UNIT REMOVAL

NOTE: Place a mat on the floor to keep the floor clean before performing this procedure.
6.4.1 REVOLVER/DRUM DRAWER
[A] [D]
[E]
[F]
A269R327.WMF
[C]
[B]
A269R326.WMF
[G]
A269R302.WMF
[H]
A269R305.WMF
1. Remove the revolver cover (4 screws). 2. Move the transfer belt tension lever [A] from the copy position stud [B] to the tension stud [C] (1 snap ring and 1 connector). 3. Remove the charge corona unit [E] (1 snap ring and 1 connector). 4. Remove the pre-cleaning corona unit [F] (1 screw). 5. Remove the transfer faceplate [D] (3 black screws, 1 knob, 1 connector, and 2 clamp). 6. Remove the image transfer belt cleaning unit [G]. 7. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer [H] (1 black screw). NOTE: Do not keep the drawer unit pulled out with the drum unit attached (without shielding the drawer unit). If the drawer unit were left out, the drum would be exposed to light. This would cause optical fatigue, resulting in image anomalies. Shield the drum unit with 5 or more sheets of paper).
SM 6-9 A257/A269
UNIT REMOVAL
6.4.2 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL

NOTE: Shield the drum unit with 5 or more sheets of paper. Otherwise, the drum will be exposed to light, which would cause optical fatigue, resulting in image anomalies.
[A] [B]
A269R306.WMF
1. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer. 2. Lift the drum unit [A] out of the revolver/drum drawer. 3. Rotate the drum unit clockwise as shown by the arrow [B] and set it upsidedown. NOTE: It is important to rotate the drum unit as shown by arrow. This prevents toner spillage.
A257/A269
6-10
SM
UNIT REMOVAL
6.4.3 REINSTALLING THE REVOLVER/DRUM DRAWER
[A]
[B]
A269R329.WMF
[A] [C] [D]

A269R307.WMF
[E]
A269R411.WMF
1. Press in the drawer rail stoppers [A] and slide the revolver/drum drawer [B] into the machine. (1 screw). NOTE: 1) Do not apply excessive force if the drawer does not fit in place. Press the revolver lock button [C] to release the revolver lock, turn the revolver slightly counterclockwise to release any catch in the revolver motor gear assembly and then reinsert the drawer. 2) Push the flange [D] of the OPC drum to the rear side of the copier. Then confirm that the gears between the drum and the drum shaft are engaged correctly. 2. Install the charge corona unit (1 snap ring) and PCC and (1 screw). 3. Install the image transfer belt cleaning unit [E]. NOTE: Be sure to shift the image transfer belt unit to the right before installing the cleaning unit. Failure to observe this caution may damage the image transfer belt.
SM
6-11
A257/A269
UNIT REMOVAL
6.4.4 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the revolver cover (4 screws). 2. Move the transfer belt tension lever [A] from the image transfer position stud [B] to the tension stud [C] (1 snap ring and 1 connector). 3. Remove the transfer faceplate [D] (3 black screws, 1 knob, 1 connector, and 2 clamp). [E] NOTE: 1) When re-installing the transfer faceplate, tighten the knob [E] at first before tightening other screws. 2) After re-installing the transfer [D] faceplate, set the transfer belt [A] tension lever to the image transfer position stud [B] again.
[B]
[C] 4. Remove the image transfer belt cleaning unit [E].
A269R326.WMF
[E]
A269R302.WMF
5. Pull out the image transfer belt unit [F] until it stops. Then, release the stopper [G] and remove the transfer belt unit from the main unit.
[G]
[F]
A269R401.WMF
A257/A269
6-12
SM
UNIT REMOVAL
Reinstalling the Image Transfer Belt Unit
[B]
[A]
A269R411.WMF
1. Set the transfer belt unit. NOTE: Before reinstalling the transfer belt unit, make sure the tension lever is set on the tension stud. 2. Install the image transfer belt cleaning unit [A]. NOTE: Be sure to shift the image transfer belt unit to the right [B] before installing the image transfer belt cleaning unit. Failure to observe this caution may damage the image transfer belt. 3. Mount the transfer faceplate (1 knob, 2 black screws, 1 connector, and 1 clamp). NOTE: When mounting the transfer faceplate, tighten the knob before tightening the screws. Otherwise, the transfer faceplate may not be set properly.
SM
6-13
A257/A269
UNIT REMOVAL
Rev. 12/99
6.4.5 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT REMOVAL

[X]
[A] [D] [C]
[A] [F]
A269R416.WMF
[X] [E]
transfer NOTE: When installing the paperis set in the unit, make sure the snap ring [E] groove of the paper transport belt drive roller shaft [F]. Otherwise the following problems may occur: SC456 (paper transfer unit position error) Damage to the paper transfer belt
[B]
A269R406.WMF
!WARNING
Do not press rail release springs [X] which are just behind the rail stoppers. Pressing them may cause the fusing/transfer drawer to come off together with the rails. This is dangerous because the drawer is heavy. 1. Press the stoppers [A] on both sides of the fusing/transfer drawer rail and pull out the drawer. 2. Remove the fusing/transfer drawer cover [B] (3 screws). 3. Remove the separation plate [C] (1 shoulder screw and 1 screw). NOTE: Keep the separation plate in a safe location to prevent it from being accidentally deformed. 4. Remove the paper transfer unit [D] (bias terminal, 2 snap rings, 2 bearings).
A257/A269
6-14
SM
UNIT REMOVAL
6.4.6 REMOVING THE FUSING UNIT
WARNING
1. Exercise adequate care when handling the fusing unit as it may be hot. 2. Take care not to spill silicone oil on the customers floor. Completely wipe up any spilled silicone oil with a silicone oil remover. Otherwise, you might slip and fall. [X]
[A]
[A]
A269R416.WMF
[X]
[B]
A269R511.WMF
WARNING
Do not press rail release springs [X] which are just behind the rail stoppers. Pressing them may cause the fusing/transfer drawer to come off together with the rails. This is dangerous because the drawer is heavy. 1. Press the stoppers [A] on both sides of the fusing/transfer drawer rail and pull out the drawer. 2. Lift and remove the fusing unit [B]. When reinstalling the fusing unit, align two positioning pins with two positioning keys.
SM
6-15
A257/A269
DRUM UNIT
6.5 DRUM UNIT

6.5.1 DRUM REPLACEMENT
[A]
[A]
A269R201.WMF
A269R202.WMF
1. Pull out the revolver drum drawer. (See 6.4.1.) 2. Remove the drum unit. (See 6.4.2.) 3. Remove the drum support bushing [A] (2 screws each) and remove the drum. 4. Install the new drum and apply setting powder to the entire drum surface. NOTE: Be sure to apply the setting powder over the entire drum. This prevents the cleaning blade from catching on the drum surface. 5. Turn the drum forward two or three rotations to settle the setting powder between the drum surface and cleaning blade. NOTE: Do not touch the drum beyond 10 mm from the edge. 6. Perform the process control self-check on the new drum. (See the post-replacement process on the next page.)
A257/A269
6-16
SM
DRUM UNIT
Post-replacement Procedure
NOTE: After installing a new drum, be sure to perform the procedures in the following flowchart.
Start
Results Self Chk
Results TD sensor initialization
Close front cover
Exe: K Dev. Agitation Exe: K Exe: C
001
Exe: K Exe: C Exe: M Exe: Y Exe: All Exe: M 001
SP3-126-001 (Run forced process control self check)
Exe: M Exe: Y Exe: All Exe: CMY 001
Back
Others (failure)
1 (successful)
Analyze according to developer setup result analysis table in Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting".
End
Action
A269R552.WMF
SM
6-17
A257/A269
(To image quality adjusrment)
DRUM UNIT
6.5.2 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT
[A]
A269R206.WMF
[B]
A269R204.WMF
1. Remove the drum unit. (See the previous procedure.) 2. Remove the cleaning unit [A] from the drum unit (2 screws). 3. Remove the cleaning blade [B] from the cleaning unit (2 screws). NOTE: 1) After installing a new blade, be sure to apply setting powder over the entire drum. This prevents the cleaning blade from catching on the drum surface. 2) Rotate the drum forward two or three rotations to settle the setting powder between the drum surface and cleaning blade.
A257/A269
6-18
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.5.3 CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A269R203.WMF
1. Remove the drum unit. (See 6.5.1) 2. Remove the cleaning unit from the drum unit (2 screws) and remove the cleaning blade (2 screws). (See 6.5.2.) 3. Remove the brush holder [A] (1 screw) and the cleaning brush [B].
6.5.4 LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the cleaning blade. (See 6.5.2.) 2. Remove the spring and flip the blade holder [A] up. 3. Remove the lubricant bar holder [B] (3 screws). 4. Remove the lubricant bar clamping bracket [C] (1 screw) and the lubricant bar [D]. [C]
A269R214.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
SM
6-19
A257/A269
DRUM UNIT
6.5.5 BIAS ROLLER BLADE REPLACEMENT
[A] [B]
A269R211.WMF
1. Remove the lubricant bar holder [A] (3 screws). 2. Remove the bias roller blade [B] (3 screws).
6.5.6 CHARGE GRID AND CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[D] [C] [B]
A269R210.WMF
1. Remove the charge grid [A] (1 screw). 2. Remove the front and back end block covers [B]. 3. Replace the corona wire [C] and the cleaner pad [D]. NOTE: Do not touch the corona wire directly. Skin oils can deteriorate the corona wire over time, causing uneven charging.
A257/A269 6-20 SM
DRUM UNIT
6.5.7 PCC REPLACEMENT
A269R209.WMF
1. Remove the PCC from the main unit. 2. Remove the front and rear end blocks and replace the PCC wire. NOTE: Do not touch the PCC wire directly. Skin oils can deteriorate the corona wire over time, causing uneven charging.
SM
6-21
A257/A269
DRUM UNIT
Rev. 7/13/99
6.5.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR REPLACEMENT

NOTE: The drum potential sensor consists of a sensor element and a control board. Replace both the sensor and control board at the same time.
[A]
[D] [C]
[B] [E]
A269R207.WMF
A269R208.WMF
1. Remove the OPC drum. (See 6.5.1.) 2. Remove the cleaning unit. 3. Remove the duct cover [A] (4 screws) and the duct [B] (2 screws). 4. Remove the sensor [C] and sensor board [D] (2 screws). NOTE: 1) When re-installing the duct cover, be sure to align the guide rails [E] for the main charge corona unit. 2) When cleaning the metal part of the potential sensor, blow off dirt with a blower brush, then wipe with dry cotton (do not use a vacuum cleaner). Use a vacuum cleaner to clean the potential sensor parts other than the metal part.
A257/A269
6-22
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.5.9 ID SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A269R212.WMF
[E]
[D] [C]
A269R213.WMF
1. Press the revolver lock release button [A] and rotate the revolver to the position indicated in the figure. 2. Unplug the ID sensor connector and remove the ID sensor holder [B] (1 screw). 3. Remove the bracket [C] (1 screw) of the developer catcher [D] and remove the carrier catcher. 4. Remove the ID sensor [E] (1 screw).
SM
6-23
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
6.6 SCANNER UNIT

6.6.1 EXPOSURE LAMP REPLACEMENT
[A] [B]
A269R001.WMF
1. Remove the exposure glass. (See 6.3.6.) 2. Position the first scanner at the cut-out on the frame. 3. Remove the lamp holder cover [A] (2 screws) and remove the exposure lamp [B]. NOTE: Do not touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp.
A257/A269
6-24
SM
SCANNER UNIT
6.6.2 SBU REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
A269R002.WMF
A269R003.WMF
2. Remove the left upper stay [A] (4 screws). 3. Remove the SBU cover [B] (4 screws). 4. Remove the harness [C] from the 3 clamps. 5. Disconnect the flat cable [D] from the SBU connector. 6. Remove the SBU [E]. (4 screws) NOTE: Never remove the screws securing the SBU lens assembly to the SBU base. This SBU lens assembly is precisely positioned with respect to the SBU base at the factory.
SM
6-25
A257/A269
1. Remove the exposure glass. (See 6.3.6.)
SCANNER UNIT
6.6.3 OPENING THE SCANNER UNIT

NOTE: Be sure to remove the document feeder or platent cover before starting this procedure. Otherwise, the document feeder or platent cover might fall off backwards when you open the scanner unit.
[C]
[A] [B]
A269R006.WMF
A269R112.WMF
1. Remove the following covers (see 6.3 Covers and Filters): Operation panel Rear cover Upper rear cover, 2. Remove the revolver cover [A] (4 screws) and remove the support rod [B] from the rear side of the revolver cover. 3. Remove the pressure plate bracket [C] (5 screws to remove, 6 screws to loosen, and 1 connector).
A257/A269
6-26
SM
SCANNER UNIT
[B]
[A]
A269R007.WMF
4. Remove two scanner lock brackets [A] (1 screw each) and disconnect the ground cable (1 screw). 5. Lift the scanner unit as shown in the figure and prop it up with the support rod [B].
CAUTION
Take care not to knock the support rod [B] while the scanner unit is open. If the support rod is disengaged, the scanner unit may suddenly fall into the closed position.
SM
6-27
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
6.6.4 SCANNER IPU MAIN/SUB BOARD REPLACEMENT

[A]
[C]
A269R004.WMF
[D] [B] [E]

A269R005.WMF
A269R008.WMF
1. Remove the following covers: SBU cover (See 6.6.2.) Rear cover (see 6.3.4.) Upper rear cover (See 6.3.6.) Bracket pressure plate (See 6.6.3.) 2. Disconnect the flat cable [A] from the scanner IPU main-board. NOTE: Do not remove the flat cable from the SBU. 3. Remove the rear IPU cover [B] (1 screw). 4. Remove the harness [C] from the scanner IPU sub-board (6 connectors). 5. Open the scanner unit. (See 6.6.3.) 6. Remove the write harness [D]. 7. Remove the IPU base [E] as shown in the figure (4 screws). NOTE: Before removing the IPU base, confirm that the flat cable between the scanner IPU main-board and the SBU is disconnected.
A257/A269
6-28
SM
SCANNER UNIT
6.6.5 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT

[B] [A] [D] [C]
A269R011.WMF
[G]
[E]
A269R012.WMF
[F]
A269R013.WMF
1. Remove the scales (vertical/horizontal), exposure glass, and the upper covers (left, right, and rear). (See 6.3.6.) 2. Remove the upper right stay [A] (4 screws) and the upper left stay [B] (4 screws). Remove the parts from the frame on the side where the scanner wire to be replaced is located. On the front side: remove the operation panel.) On the rear side, do the following: 1) Disconnect the connector for the pressure plate release sensor [C] and remove the bracket pressure plate [D] (remove 5 screws and loosen 6 screws). 2) Remove the upper rear stay [E] (2 harnesses, 1 fiber-optics cable, and 6 screws). 3) Remove 1 connector, 2 screws and the tension spring; then, remove the scanner motor [F] and timing belt [G]. NOTE: When reinstalling the scanner motor, engage the timing belt with the motor drive gear and then attach the tension spring. This moves the motor to the correct position and tightens the timing belt properly. Then tighten the screws to secure the scanner motor.
SM 6-29 A257/A269 Replacement and Adjustment
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[B]
A269R014.WMF
A269R016.WMF
3. Loosen the first scanner wire clamp screw and remove the scanner wire. At this moment, loosen the clamp screw on the side from which the wire is not to be removed. 4. Route the new scanner wire as shown in the figure. Take care to orient the wire correctly before threading it on the pulleysthere is a ball on one end of the wire an eyelet on the other. 1) Secure the first and second carriages on the scanner with locking pins [B]. Set the scanner locking pins as shown in the figure (4 locations). When the scanner is at the correct position, the locking pins slide in and out smoothly. Locking Pin part No.: A2599010 2) Place the ball located at the center of the wire in the groove on the pulley and wind the wire the number of turns indicated in the figure. Winding procedure: Wind 3 turns outward from the ball at the center of the wire (up to the red mark), then 5 turns inward (up to the black mark). There will be a total of 8 turns including the one for the center ball. 3) Route the ball side part of the wire on the pulleys as shown in the figure (, ), then the ball into the hole in the frame (). 4) Route the ring side part of the wire on the pulley (, , , ), then hook the ring on the wire tension bracket ().
A257/A269 6-30 SM
SCANNER UNIT
5. Hook the spring on the wire tension bracket and tighten the screw permanently. 6. Clamp the wire. 7. Remove the scanner locking pins. 8. Replace all parts except those removed in step 1. 9. After tensioning the wire by executing a scanner free run (SP 4-013-0022), reset the scanner locking pins, then loosen and reset the scanner wire clamp. 10. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
SM
6-31
A257/A269
SCANNER UNIT
6.6.6 APS AND H.P. SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A] [A]
[B]
A269R015.WMF
[D] [C]
A269R017.WMF
1. Remove the exposure glass. (See 6.3.6.) 2. Remove the APS sensors [A] (1 screw, 1 connector, each). 3. Remove the left upper stay [B] (2 screws). 4. Remove the H.P. sensor bracket [C] (1 screw and 1 connector). 5. Remove the H.P. sensor [D] (1 screw).
A257/A269
6-32
SM
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
6.7 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

6.7.1 PRINTER ADJUSTMENT
Auto Color Calibration (ACC)
Make use of the ACC function (see the installation procedure).
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment

The printer curve created during the auto color calibration can be modified using SP modes. The adjustment uses only Offset values. NOTE: Never change Option values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Middle (Middle ID) Shadow (High ID) ID max Offset Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image density.) The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are three adjustable modes: Text (Letter) mode Photo mode Single color mode SP4-910 screen
Gamma Adj Letter: Copy H K C M Y 15 15 15 15 M 15 15 15 15
Offset S 15 15 15 15 IDmax 15 15 15 15 K C M Y H 000 000 000 000 M
Option S 000 000 000 000 IDmax 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Photo: Copy Offset H K C M Y 15 15 15 15 M 15 15 15 15 S 15 15 15 15 IDmax 15 15 15 15 K C M Y H 000 000 000 000 M 000 000 000 000 Option S 000 000 000 000 IDmax 000 000 000 000 Next Back Single Color: Copy K 15 15 15 15 000 000 000 000
A269R553.WMF
SM
6-33
A257/A269
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Open the 4-910 screen. 3. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard. NOTE: Never change Option value (default value is 0). <Standard Copy Quality in Text Mode>
Standard Copy Quality in Photo Mode Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart ID max: 1 (K, C, M, and Y) Middle (Middle ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Shadow (High ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Highlight (Low ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that level 2 is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 matches that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
4. Copy the C-4 chart in the photo mode. 5. Open the 4-910 screen. 6. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard. NOTE: Never change Option value (default value is 0).
A257/A269
6-34
SM
<Standard Copy Quality in Photo Mode>

Standard Copy Quality in Photo Mode Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart ID max: 1 (K, C, M, and Y) Middle (Middle ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Shadow (High ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Highlight (Low ID) (K, C, M, and Y) 4 Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that level 2 is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is seen as gray.
K Highlight (Low ID) (C, M, and Y) <on the full color copy>
7. Copy the C-4 chart in the [Auto Text/Photo] mode. 8. Examine the photo part (lower half of the image) on the C-4 chart. Compare the copy with the chart. Proceed to the next step if color displacement errors are found. Terminate the adjustment if the check proves normal. 9. Adjust the offset for Low ID within the range of 2.
SM
6-35
A257/A269
ACC Target Modification

It is possible to adjust the image that is generated after the execution of ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) (an image that has been subject to automatic color calibration) by modifying the ACC target in SP modes. This adjustment must be performed when the scanner characteristics change after the CCD is replaced, causing the target to be displaced. SP Modes for ACC Target Density Adjustment
SP Number SP4-501-001: SP 4-501-002: SP 4-501-003: SP 4-501-004: SP 4-501-005: SP 4-501-006: SP 4-501-007: SP 4-501-008: SP 4-502-001: SP 4-502-002: SP 4-502-003: SP 4-502-004: SP 4-502-005: SP 4-502-006: SP 4-502-007: SP 4-502-008: Output Type Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Print: Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Original Type Text Text Text Text Photo Photo Photo Photo Text Text Text Text Photo Photo Photo Photo Color K C M Y K C M Y K C M Y K C M Y
Default: 5 Adjustable range: 0 to 10 NOTE: The adjustable range is 0 to 50. However, the effective range is 0 to 10. Even when it is set to 50, it is the same level for 10. Values: Values smaller than 5 (standard): The ACC target gets lighter. Values greater than 5 (standard): The ACC target gets darker. The effect of the setting is similar to the middle ID sub-adjustment in the manual printer gamma adjustment
A269R554.WMF
A257/A269
6-36
SM
6.7.2 MAIN SCAN POSITION DOT CORRECTION

NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, perform the printer registration adjustment (see procedure 6.11.11). 1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011. 2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value. 3. Press the Interrupt key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo mode. NOTE: It is necessary to copy the C-4 chart in photo mode. In letter mode, color displacement cannot be checked properly. Be sure to perform the following procedure for both the left and right edges of the C-4 chart. 4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do this.) If they overlap the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the SP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantly extend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step. 5. Press the interrupt key to return to the SP mode and open SP4-932. The following table shows the location of the current values.
4-932-1 4-932-2 4-932-3 4-932-4 Dot correction R left edge Dot correction R right edge Dot correction B left edge Dot correction B right edge
R G B
A269D074.WMF
CCD lines
SM
6-37
A257/A269
Rev. 03/2000
6. Change the values in accordance with the following tables.
Condition The yellow line is to the left of the black line, and the cyan line is to the right of the black line. The cyan line is to the left of the black line, and the yellow line is to the right of the black line.
Sub condition The edges of the yellow and cyan lines deviate evenly from the black line. The cyan line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. The yellow line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. The edges of the yellow and cyan lines deviate evenly from the black line. The cyan line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. The yellow line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line.
Location of new value The new value is in the middle row, to the left of the current value's column. The new value is in the top row, to the left of the current value's column. The new value is in the bottom row, to the left of the current value's column. The new value is in the middle row, to the right of the current value's column. The new value is in the top row, to the right of the current value's column. The new value is in the bottom row, to the right of the current value's column.
Top Row Middle Row Bottom Row
18 19 29 28
27 37 38
36 46 47
45 55 56
65 64 54
74 73 63
83 82 72
92 91 81
NOTE: In the above table: The first digit represents the value of the red correction (4-932-1: R left, 4-932-2: R right) The second digit represents the value of the blue correction (4-932-3: B left, 4-932-4: B right)
A257/A269
6-38
SM
Example: 1. The C-4 chart's vertical lines do not overlap properly. On the right side of the chart, the yellow line is to the left of the black line and the cyan line is to the right of the black line. The yellow line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. These conditions are used to determine what the new values should be. The new value is located in the bottom row, to the left of the current value's column. For the right side of the chart, the machine's current red correction value is 6 (4-932-2), and the blue correction value is 5 (4-932-4). Therefore, the current value in the chart is 65. The new value (bottom row to the left) is 56. 2. On the left side of the chart, the cyan line is to the left of the black line and the yellow line is to the right of the black line. The edges of the yellow and cyan lines deviate evenly from the black line. These conditions are used to determine what the new values should be. The new value is located in the middle row, to the right of the current value's column. For the left side of the chart, the machine's current red correction value is 6 (4-932-1), and the blue correction value is 4 (4-932-3). Therefore, the current value in the chart is 64. The new value (middle row to the right) is 73.
SM
6-39
A257/A269
LASER OPTICS SECTION
6.8 LASER OPTICS SECTION WARNING

Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before attempting any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier uses a class 3B laser beam with a wavelength of 780 nm and an output of 15 mW. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
6.8.1 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
A269R105.WMF
[C]
A269R106.WMF
1. Remove the operation panel and upper rear cover, then open the scanner unit.
CAUTION
Take care not to remove the support rod while the scanner unit is open. Disengagement of the support rod may cause the scanner unit to fall down. 2. Remove the toner shield glass [A]. NOTE: Remove the toner shield glass before removing the optical housing unit. This is to prevent the toner shield glass from inadvertently broken. 3. Remove the optical housing unit [B] (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 4 clamps). 4. Remove the optical housing cover [C] (10 hooks).
A257/A269
6-40
SM
[D]
A269R107.WMF
5. Remove the polygon motor [D] (3 screws and 1 connector). 6. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
SM
6-41
A257/A269
6.8.2 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
A269R109.WMF
1. Remove the optical housing unit (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 2 clamps). 2. Remove the laser synchronizing detector board [A] (2 screws). 3. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
6.8.3 LD UNIT REPLACEMENT
[A]
A269R108.WMF
1. Remove the optical housing unit (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 2 clams). 2. Remove the LD unit [A] (3 screws). 3. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. 4. Check and adjust the LD pitch (see the next page). NOTE: Although the LD pitch is guaranteed by the LD unit, it may deviate from the normal value depending on the combination with the optical housing unit. Be sure to check the LD pitch after replacing the LD unit.
A257/A269 6-42 SM
LD Pitch Check and Adjustment]

1. Enter SP5-955 (the following display will appear); then, select the 2-Beams Pitch Pattern and enter 100 for the Dot Line value (default value is 128). Then press the [Interrupt] key, select Black & White, and print on A3/11 x 17 paper.
Ptrn Selection Print Margin Pattern Printout All Fonts 1 dot/line Grid Pattern Belt Pattern 16-gradation with blank Solid 1 Dot Pattern (2 x 2) 1 Dot Pattern (4 x 4) 1 Dot Subscan Line 2 Dot Subscan Line 2 Beams Pitch Pattern 2 Beams Density Pattern 1 dotn Mainscan Line 2 Dot Mainscan Line Color Patch Grid Scanner Image 1/15 2/15 3/15 4/15 5/15 6/15 7/15 017 034 051 068 085 102 119 LD-PWM 8/15 9/15 10/15 11/15 12/15 13/15 14/15 15/15 Color Patch Dot Line 136 153 170 187 204 221 238 255 128 128
Back
A269R520.WMF
SM
6-43
A257/A269
2. Check the vertical lines running down the page. (Actually there aren't really any vertical lines. They are an optical illusion caused by the test pattern.) There are two cases as follows: If the vertical lines are prominent, the beam pitches for LD1 and LD2 do not match. If the vertical lines are not prominent, the beam pitches for LD1 and LD2 match.
[Printed pattern]
Paper feed direction
Printed pattern consists of 1 dot line of LD1 and LD2 as shown below. For example, if the beam pitch is too wide, the 1 dot line of LD2 will be close to the next 1 dot line of LD1. line. In this case, the printed pattern looks like a vertical striped pattern.
Row 1 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 17 Line 18 1 dot line of LD1 1 dot line of LD2 1 dot line of LD1 1 dot line of LD2
Row 2
Row 3 1 dot line of LD1
1 dot line of LD2 1 dot line of LD1
1 dot line of LD2
1 dot line of LD1 1 dot line of LD2 1 dot line of LD1 1 dot line of LD2
Line 19
A269R522.WMF
Reference: Beam pitch for LD1 and LD2 is 42.3 m (1 dot)
A257/A269
6-44
SM
3. If the vertical line pattern is clearly visible over more than 2/3 of the paper, examine the vertical line pattern with a magnifier (the adjustment is completed when the vertical stripe pattern area is smaller than 2/3 of the entire paper).
Category [A] Wider LD Pitch Category [B] Narrower LD Pitch
Low density (Wide)
High density (Narrow)
High density (Narrow)
Low density (Wide)
A269R523.WMF
SM
6-45
A257/A269
A269R111.WMF
4. If the image that is checked with a magnifier comes under category [A], Wider LD Pitch: 1) Remove the exposure glass. 2) Insert an adjusting screwdriver into the scanner unit LD angle adjustment access hole and turn the screw clockwise half a turn. Then, regenerate the test pattern (1 turn of adjusting screw corresponds to 5 m). 3) Write (2.5 m, 0.5 turn) in the sample output. 4) Turn the screw another half a turn (clockwise) and regenerate the test pattern. 5) Write (5 m, 1 turn) in the sample output. 6) Turn the screw another half a turn (clockwise) and regenerate the test pattern. 7) Write (7.5 m, 1.5 turn) in the sample output. 8) From the four sample output sheets, select the one in which the vertical stripes are least prominent. Turn the adjusting screw back to the position of the selected sample output. 5. If the image that is checked with a magnifier comes under category [B], Narrower LD Pitch: 1) Remove the exposure glass. 2) Insert an adjusting screwdriver into the scanner unit LD angle adjustment access hole and turn the screw counterclockwise half a turn. Then, regenerate the test pattern (1 turn of adjusting screw corresponds to 5 um). 3) Write (+2.5 m, +0.5 turn) in the sample output. 4) Turn the screw another half a turn (counterclockwise) and regenerate the test pattern. 5) Write (+5 m, +1 turn) in the sample output. 6) Turn the screw another half a turn (counterclockwise) and regenerate the test pattern. 7) Write (+7.5 m, +1.5 turn) in the sample output. 8) From the four sample output sheets, select the one in which the vertical stripes are least prominent. Turn the adjusting screw back to the position of the selected sample output 6. Paint-lock the screw.
A257/A269 6-46 SM
6.8.4 SQUARENESS ADJUSTMENT

The purpose of this adjustment is to finely adjust the obliqueness of the image that is caused by the laser unit. NOTE: This procedure is used to finely adjust the inclination of the lines in the horizontal direction (horizontal lines) in the image by turning the laser unit and therefore tilting the scanning line of the laser beam. 1. Generate the Print Margin Pattern in the SP mode (SP5-955-17) and measure its squareness. (When the squareness of the laser unit is poor, the lines in the horizontal scanning direction are inclined and the lines in the feed direction (vertical lines) stand upright. 2. Loosen (4) screws securing the optical housing unit. 3. Remove the vertical reference pin [A] located on the left front side of the optical housing unit.
[A]
A269R110.WMF
4. Turn the optical housing unit (clockwise or counterclockwise) according to the inclination of the lines in the horizontal scanning direction (see the figure below for guidelines). 5. Tighten the 4 screws and the vertical reference pin again.
SM
6-47
A257/A269
Case A
Case B
A269R524.WMF
A. In this case, turn the unit clockwise. B. In this case, turn the unit counterclockwise. Amount of inclination: The amount of inclination of the lines in the horizontal scanning direction in the image is almost proportional to the angle by which the optical housing unit is turned. Standard value: Inclination of the lines in the laser beam scanning direction (horizontal lines) must be within 0.5 mm maximum for the 240 mm scanning line. You can make fine squareness adjustments within this range.
A257/A269
6-48
SM
6.8.5 LD CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
A269R010.WMF
1. Open the scanner unit. (See 6.6.3.)
CAUTION
Take care not to remove the support rod while the scanner unit is open. Disengagement of the support rod may cause the scanner unit to fall down. 2. Remove the laser control board cover [A] (2 screws). 3. Remove the laser control board [B] (1 flat cable connector, 5 connectors, 4 screws, and 1 clamp).
Replacement and Adjustment SM 6-49 A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

6.9.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT
Developer Collection
[A]
[C]
A269R325.WMF
[C]
[B]
A269R308.WMF
NOTE: Place a floor mat or other protective sheet on the floor. Take care not to contaminate the customers floor. 1. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer. (See 6.4.1.) 2. Remove the revolver filter [A]. 3. Remove the drum unit and shield. (See 6.4.2.) 4. Remove the connector [B] of the toner density sensor and open the development unit locks [C] at both ends of the revolver.
CAUTION
Do not push the revolver/drum drawer into the copier with development unit locks left open. Otherwise, the development unit locks may strike against the main unit frame, resulting in permanent damage to the revolver.
A257/A269
6-50
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[A]
[B]
A269R309.WMF
[C]
A269R151.WMF
CAUTION
Be sure the pawl of the revolver lock is engaged before removing a development unit. Failure to observe this precaution may rotate the revolver, causing permanent damage to the development unit or its locks. NOTE: When you remove a development unit, be sure to rotate in the direction shown in the figure. Rotating the development unit in the wrong direction may cause the developer to spill.
CAUTION
Remove the development units for one color at a time. Removing two or more development units at the same time may unbalance of the revolver. This will cause the revolver to turn, possibly catching your fingers. 2. Remove the developer cover [C] (2 screws, 4 hooks). (Release the hooks with a screwdriver.).
SM
6-51
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
A269R310.WMF
Rev. 03/2000
3. Hold the development unit inside a collection bag, rotate the unit until the opening faces downward, and shake the unit slightly to dump the developer. 4. When the agitator section gets almost empty, orient the development sleeve face up and rotate the sleeve in the reverse direction. 5. When no more developer falls down, rotate the sleeve in the forward direction several turns while maintaining the sleeves orientation. 6. Tilt the developer assembly so that its bottom faces upward to dump the remaining developer out of the agitator section. 7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until no more developer is collected. (A small amount of developer will remain in the development unitabout 10 grams. This is all right.)
NOTE: Please make note of the following during developer replacement in order to prevent over-toning, which may cause SC452 (Belt mark detection error) or SC385 (ID sensor VSG adjustment error).
REMARKS TECHNICAL BACKGROUND If toner recovery is performed before TD sensor initialization, the toner density target will be set to a higher value. If the initial process control self-check is done before the TD sensor initialization, the toner density may change. The toner density target will be set to an improper value. If the TD sensor initialization is performed for the developer that was already in the machine (i.e. not replaced), the toner density target will be set to the actual toner density of that developer.
If the machine is in the Toner Near End or Toner End condition when replacing developer, please replenish toner first to clear the condition. The front doors should be left open when the main switch is turned on following developer replacement. After the power is on, close the doors and perform the TD sensor initialization (SP3-5-00X). TD sensor initialization should only be done for the color(s) of developer replaced. SP3-5-001: SP3-5-002: SP3-5-003: SP3-5-004: SP3-5-005: When replacing Black developer When replacing Cyan developer When replacing Magenta developer When replacing Yellow developer When replacing all developers
A257/A269
6-52
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9.2 DEVELOPER INSTALLATION
[A]
[C]
A269R325.WMF
[C] [B]
A269R308.WMF
NOTE: Place a floor mat or other protective sheet on the floor. Take care not to contaminate the customers floor. 1. Remove the revolver filter [A]. 2. Remove the toner density sensor connector [B] and open the development unit locks [C] at both ends of the revolver.
CAUTION
Do not push the revolver/drum drawer into the copier with developer locks left open. Otherwise, the revolver locks may strike the main unit frame, resulting in permanent damage to the revolver.
SM
6-53
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[A]
[B]
A269R309.WMF
[C] [D]
A269R151.WMF
A269I357.WMF
CAUTION
Be sure to the pawl of the revolver lock [C] is engaged before removing a development unit. Failure to observe this precaution may rotate the revolver, causing permanent damage to the development unit or its locks. NOTE: When you remove a development unit, be sure to rotate in the direction shown in the figure. Rotating a development unit in the wrong direction may cause the revolver unit to be damaged.
CAUTION
Remove the development unit, for one color at a time. Removing two or more development units at the same time may unbalance the revolver. This will cause the revolver to turn, possibly catching your fingers. 4. Remove the developer cover [D] (2 screws, 4 hooks). (Release the hooks with a screwdriver.)
A257/A269 6-54 SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[A]
A269I351.WMF
[B]
A269I359.WMF
1. Set the developer cover [A] as shown in the figure and place the development unit on it. 3. Turn the sleeve in the forward direction several rotations to give it a smooth layer of developer. 4. Replace the developer cover (2 screws). 5. Open the toner supply unit shutter [B] and set the developer assembly in the revolver/drum drawer (2 lock screws and 1 sensor connector).
2. Pour 1 bag (700 g) of developer in the developer assembly.
SM
6-55
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[A]
[A]
A269I353.WMF
[B]
A269I357.WMF
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the development locks [A] (forward and rear) are secured before rotating the revolver. This is required to protect the development unit and locks from damage. 2. Make sure the development unit lock screws are tight. Loose lock screws will cause an uneven photoconductor gap. 6. Press the revolver lock button [B] to release the revolver lock, rotate the revolver to the next color and install the new developer.
CAUTION
1. Be sure to set the revolver locks before removing the development unit. Failure to observe this precaution may allow the revolver to rotate, causing permanent damage to the development unit or its locks. 2. Always rotate the revolver in the direction shown in the figure. Otherwise, the developer might spill out of the developer assembly. 7. Re-install the revolver filter. Then re-install the revolver drum drawer.
A257/A269
6-56
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
8. Follow the flow chart below.

Start
Close front cover
Run SP3-005-005 (Run TD sensor initialization: all colors)
Action
Others (failure)
Analyze according to TD sensor initialization result analysis table in Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting".
1 (successful)
Run SP2-225-005 (Run Dev. agitation: all colors)
Others (failure)
Analyze according to Dev. agitation result analysis table in Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting".
1 (successful)
End
Action
A269I153.WMF
SM
6-57
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REPLACEMENT
[A]
A269R312.WMF
The development unit supplied as a service part is used for all colors ( K, Y, C, and M). Install an actuator pin [A] according to the toner color.
A257/A269
6-58
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9.4 TONER CATCH COVER CLEANING

[A]
A269R315.WMF
1. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer. 2. Remove the drum unit and cover the OPC drum with 5 or more sheets of paper. NOTE: Failure to observe this precaution may expose the drum to external or reflected light and cause optical fatigue. 3. Open the toner catch cover [A] and clean it.
SM
6-59
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9.5 REVOLVER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
A269R316.WMF
[C]
A269R317.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (4 screws). 2. Remove the rear stay [A] (4 screws). 3. Remove the larger flywheel [B] (4 gold color screws). 4. Remove the revolver motor [C] with the motor bracket. NOTE: Be sure to remove the revolver motor with the bracket. The warranty applies only for the combination of the motor and the bracket.
A257/A269
6-60
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9.6 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
A269R318.WMF
1. Collect the developer. (See 6.9.1.) 2. Replace the toner density sensor [A] (2 screws). 3. Install new developer. 4. Follow the flow chart at the end of the developer installation procedure. (See 6.9.2.)
NOTE: In this case, TD sensor initialization and Developer agitation are required only for the color whose TD sensor and developer are replaced.
SM
6-61
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
6.9.7 TD SENSOR NONCONTACT COUPLER REPLACEMENT

Main Unit Element
[B]
[A]
A269R316.WMF
[C]
A269R319.WMF
[D]
A269R320.WMF
1. Pull out the drawer unit, remove the drum unit, and cover the drum. NOTE: Failure to cover the drum may expose the drum to external or reflected light and cause light fatigue. (See 7.3 Drum Light Fatigue in the Troubleshooting section.) 2. Remove the rear cover (4 screws). 3. Remove the rear stay [A] (4 screws). 4. Remove the larger flywheel [B] (4 gold color screws). 5. Remove the smaller flywheel [C] (4 gold color screws). 6. Remove the TD sensor I/F board 1 [D] (2 screws and 2 connectors).
A257/A269
6-62
SM
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
TD Sensor Interface (I/F) Board
[A]
[D]
A269R321.WMF
[B] [C]
A269R322.WMF
1. Remove the paper discharge corona unit. 2. Pull out the revolver/drum drawer, remove the drum unit, and cover the drum. NOTE: Failure to cover the drum may expose the drum to external or reflected light and cause optical fatigue. 3. Lift the revolver/drum drawer [A] off of the slide rails.
CAUTION
Be sure to push the slide rails back into the copier after removing the drawer. 4. Remove the revolver gear [B] (4 screws). 5. Disconnect the two TD sensor I/F board 2 connectors [C] and remove the ground screw [D].
SM
6-63
A257/A269
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[B] [A]
A269R323.WMF
A269R324.WMF
6. Remove the TD sensor I/F board 2 [A] (2 screws). NOTE: When installing the revolver gear, slide and align the gear with the screw hole as shown in the figure [B].
A257/A269
6-64
SM
IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION
6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION

6.10.1 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C] [A] [D]
A269R402.WMF
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See 6.4.4 Transfer Unit Removal.) 2. Place the transfer belt unit upright as shown in the figure and remove the rail [A] and upper entrance guide plate [B] (1 screw, each). 3. Release the transfer belt tension lever [C] from the tension stud [D] (1 snap ring) and rotate the lever completely counterclockwise as shown in the illustration. (This releases all tension from the belt so that it can be replaced.). 4. Slide off the transfer belt and replace it with a new one. NOTE: 1) Be sure to hold the transfer belt at its ends and never touch the belt surface. Any contamination on the belt might result in poor copy quality. 2) When installing a new transfer belt, make sure that the alignment ridges along both edges of the belt do not ride on the rollers. (They should fit cleanly over the ends of the rollers.) 3) After removing the transfer belt, clean each roller with water or alcohol. When using alcohol, set the rollers aside for about 10 minutes to dry. If alcohol remains on the rollers when the belt is replaced, the rollers may adhere to the belt.
SM
6-65
A257/A269
5. Move the transfer belt tension lever slightly to the left of the tension stud as shown in the illustration to the right (so you can turn the belt). Then apply setting powder to the entire belt surface while rotating the belt. NOTE: After replacing the transfer belt, be sure to apply setting powder as instructed above. Failure to do so may cause the belt to be caught by the blade, resulting in an SC452 condition (belt mark detection error) or a bent blade bracket.
6. Reset the belt tension lever on the tension stud and install the image transfer belt unit. 7. Install the image transfer belt cleaning unit [A]. NOTE: Be sure to shift the image transfer belt unit to the right before installing the cleaning unit. Failure to observe this caution may damage the image transfer belt.
A269R412.WMF
[A]
A269R411.WMF
A257/A269
6-66
SM
6.10.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT BLADE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the transfer faceplate and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit [A].
[A]
A269R302.WMF
2. Remove the lubricant brush holder (See 6.10.3) 3. Replace the blade [B] (2 screws). NOTE: Do not touch the rubber part of the cleaning blade assembly. Handle only the bracket. [B]
A269R404.WMF
4. After replacing the blade, remove the transfer belt unit from the main unit and apply setting powder to the entire belt surface while rotating the belt. NOTE: After replacing the transfer belt, be sure to apply setting powder as instructed above. Failure to do so may cause the belt to be caught by the blade, resulting in an SC452 condition (belt mark detection error) or a bent blade bracket. 5. Reconnect the transfer belt tension lever to the tension stud and install the transfer belt unit. 6. Install the image transfer belt cleaning unit.
A269R412.WMF
SM
6-67
A257/A269
6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT LUBRICANT BAR AND LUBRICANT BRUSH REPLACEMENT
[A]
[C]
A269R302.WMF
[D] [B] [E]

A269R403.WMF
1. Remove the transfer faceplate and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit [A]. 2. Remove the bias connector [B]. 3. Remove the lubricant brush holder [C] (2 screws). 4. Remove the lubricant brush [D] and lubricant bar [E] (2 e-rings). NOTE: When reinstalling the lubricant bar, make sure that the springs are set properly.
A257/A269
6-68
SM
6.10.4 PAPER TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT

[B] 1. Remove the paper transfer unit. (See 6.4.5.) 2. Remove the entrance guide plate [A] (2 screws). 3. Place the paper transfer unit upright, and remove the lock pin [B]. 4. Remove the paper transfer belt [C] while rotating the belt. NOTE: The parting line of the belt shoulder [D] should be the direction shown in figure. Incorrect direction of parting line may cause the peeling off of the belt shoulders by the edge of rollers. [D]
Incorrect Correct
A269R407.WMF
[C] [A]
Direction of Belt rotation
A269R491.WMF
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. 2. Remove the cleaning blade [A] (2 screws). 3. Remove the brush [B] (1 screw).
A269R410.WMF
SM
6-69
A257/A269
6.10.5 PAPER TRANSFER BELT BLADE/CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT
6.10.6 BACK BRUSH REPLACEMENT

1. Pull out the fusing/transfer drawer [A] and remove the fusing/transfer drawer cover (3 screws). 2. Lift the drawer knob and pull out the belt back brush [B].
A269R405.WMF
6.10.7 PAPER TRANSFER BELT DISCHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the belt discharge corona unit [A] (1 snap ring). 2. Release and remove the front and rear end block covers [B]. 3. Replace the corona wire [C]. [A]
A269R408.WMF
[B] [C]
A269R415.WMF
A257/A269
6-70
SM
6.10.8 PAPER DISCHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B] [C]
A269R413.WMF
A269R414.WMF
1. Remove the paper discharge corona unit [A] (1 snap ring). 2. Release and remove the front and rear end block covers [B]. 3. Replace the corona wire [C].
Replacement and Adjustment 6-71 A257/A269
SM
6.11 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION SECTION

6.11.1 BY-PASS FEED TABLE REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
A269R701.WMF
[C]
A269R702.WMF
1. Open the by-pass unit. 2. Remove the smaller cover [A] (2 screws). 3. Disconnect two connectors [B]. 4. Remove the by-pass feed table [C] (1 snap ring and 1 sectoral gear).
A257/A269
6-72
SM
6.11.2 BY-PASS FEED PAPER WIDTH SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A269R703.WMF
[C]
[D]
A269R704.WMF
1. Remove the by-pass feed table. (See the previous procedure.) 2. Remove the by-pass feed table cover [A] (4 screws)and the by-pass table extender [B]. 3. Remove the by-pass paper length sensor bracket [C] (3 screws). 4. Remove the by-pass paper width sensor [D] (1 screw).
SM
6-73
A257/A269
6.11.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Open the by-pass feed table. 2. Remove the roller cover [A] (squeeze and pull). 3. Remove the by-pass pick-up roller [B] (1 snap ring).
[B]
[A]
A269R705.WMF
6.11.4 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Open the by-pass feed table. 2. Remove the roller cover. (See above.) 3. Remove and replace the by-pass feed roller [A] (1 snap ring).
[A]
A269R706.WMF
A257/A269
6-74
SM
6.11.5 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the cover beneath the by-pass feed table [A]. 2. Remove and replace the by-pass separation roller [B] (1 snap ring).
[A]
[B]
A269R707.WMF
6.11.6 BY-PASS PAPER FEED UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the right front and right rear covers. 2. Remove the by-pass feed table. 3. Remove the slider [A] from the by-pass paper feed unit (1 snap ring). 4. Remove the ground cable [B] (1 screw), 2 connectors [C], and harness holder [D] from the rear of the copier. 5. Open the copiers vertical transport unit [E]. 6. Remove four by-pass paper feed unit mounting screws and remove the bypass paper feed unit [F] (4 hooks). NOTE: Mounting plates [G] are spring loaded. [F] [D] [G]
A269R708.WMF
[A] [C] [B]
[E]
SM
6-75
A257/A269
6.11.7 BY-PASS PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION

1. Open the vertical transport unit. 2. Fit the 2 lower hooks [A] into the mating holes in the copier. 3. Close the by-pass unit (need not set completely). 4. Fit the 2 upper hooks [B] in the copiers structure. 5. Temporarily secure the supporting plate with two screws on each side. 6. Thread the links shaft [C] into the hole in the slide bracket; then, fit the slider [D] on the shaft and secure it with a snap ring. [C] [D]
[B] [A]
A269R717.WMF
[F] 7. Remove the two positioning pins [E] that are threaded in the copiers frame in the locations shown in the figure. 8. Open the by-pass unit and insert the positioning pins into the holes [F] as shown in the figure. [E]
A269R718.WMF
A257/A269
6-76
SM
9. Close the by-pass unit again and align holes [A] with the positioning pins [B]. 10. While keeping aligned with the positioning pins, tighten the four screws while slightly lifting the front and rear supporting plates.
[A] [B]
[A]
A269R719.WMF
11. Open the by-pass unit, remove the front and rear positioning pins and store them in the original locations. 12. Connect two harness connectors and the ground wire, and install the harness holder.
A269R720.WMF
SM
6-77
A257/A269
6.11.8 REGISTRATION SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the image transfer belt unit. (See Image Transfer Unit Removal.) 2. Remove and replace the registration sensor [A] from the front of the copier using a stubby screwdriver (1 screw, 1 connector.
[A]
A269R714.WMF
6.11.9 PAPER TRAY ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the paper feed tray [A] (4 screws).
[A]
A269R716.WMF
2. Remove the pick-up roller [B], feed roller [C], and separation roller [D] for the paper feed tray you removed (1 snap ring for each roller).
[B]
[D]
[C]
A269R710.WMF
A257/A269
6-78
SM
6.11.10 PAPER FEED UNIT AND PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Open the I/O control board [A] (3 screws). 3. Remove the following three boards: Image transfer belt motor drive board [B] (2 screws and 3 connectors). CSS/LCT board [C] (2 screws and 2 hooks). Paper feed drive motor [D] (3 screws and 2 connectors). [B]
[C]
[D] [A]
A269R711.WMF
4. Remove the paper feed unit drive gear assembly [E] (4 screws and 2 hooks). 5. Remove the separation roller drive gear [F] (1 E-ring). 6. Remove the paper feed clutch [G] (1 Ering). 7. Remove the vertical transport roller drive gear [H] (1 E-ring). 8. Uncouple the paper feed unit connector [I].
[H]
[G] [F] 9. Pull out the paper feed tray of the unit to be removed and remove the paper feed unit [J] (2 screws).
A269R712.WMF
[J]
A269R713.WMF
SM
6-79
A257/A269
[E]
6.11.11 COPY IMAGE AREA ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the leading edge registration for each paper type and line speed (normal paper, OHP, thick paper 1, thick paper 2). Adjust the side to side registration for each paper feed station. Adjustment standards: Leading edge margin: 4 2 mm Side to side: 1.5 0.5 mm for each side(total margin of 4 mm or less) 1. Place the type paper for which you want to perform the registration adjustment in the paper feed tray. 2. Enter the SP2-101 mode and return all the settings to 0.0 (default value). 3. Generate a trim pattern. 1) Enter the SP5-955 mode and select Print Margin from the list of internal patterns shown in the popup window. 2) Press the Interrupt key to temporarily exit the SP mode screen, select the Black & White and the paper feed tray to be adjusted, then press the Start key to generate the crop mark trim pattern. 3) Press the Interrupt key again to return to the SP mode screen. 4. Perform the leading edge registration adjustment. Standard value: 4 1 mm 1) Enter the SP1-1 mode (Lead Edge Regist). 2) Select the adjustment conditions. a) Nrml Paper (Normal paper) b) OHP c) Thk (Thick paper 1) d) Super Thk (Thick Paper 2) 3) Type a number in Data Input on the screen from the numeric keypad on the operation panel. Input a larger value to increase the leading edge margin [A] or a smaller value to decrease the leading edge margin. Input value range: 4.9 to 4.9 To enter a negative number, press the key before typing the value. You need not enter a decimal point. For example, to enter 1.4, type:
.1
4) After entering a number, press (Enter key) to save the number in Set Data.
A257/A269
6-80
SM
5) Check the leading edge adjustment by generating the crop mark trim pattern (step 3). 6) Repeat until margin [A] of the trim pattern is within the standard value. [B] [B] [A]
Feed Direction
5. Perform the side to side registration adjustment. Standard value: 1.5 0.5 mm 1) Enter the SP1-2 mode (side to side edge registration adjustment). 2) Select the paper feed unit to be adjusted. a) By-ps (By-pass table) b) Tray1 c) Tray2 (NOTE) d) Tray3 e) Tray4 f) Dplx (Duplex unit) g) LCT NOTE: 1) Any value entered for Tray2 is ignored (this is for nonduplex models). Tray 3 on the SP popup screen Tray 2 on the operation panel screen Tray 4 on the SP popup screen Tray 3 on the operation panel screen
SM
6-81
A257/A269
2) Type a number in Data Input on the screen from the numeric keypad on the operation panel. Input a larger value to shift right or a smaller value shift left (when viewing in the direction of paper feed). Input value range: 4.9 to 4.9 To enter a negative number, press the key before typing the value. You need not enter a decimal point. For example, to enter 1.4, type:
.1
3) After entering a number, press (Enter key) to save the number in Set Data. 4) Check the side-to-side registration adjustment by generating the crop mark trim pattern (step 3). 5) Repeat until margin [B] in the trim pattern is within the standard value. NOTE: After the registration adjustment, press the pattern that is selected in the SP5-955s popup window (identified by highlight) to restore the original state. Otherwise, normal copy operation cannot be resumed. You may restore the original copy state by switching off and on the main power switch.
A257/A269
6-82
SM
PAPER TRANSPORT, FUSING, AND PAPER EXIT
6.12 PAPER TRANSPORT, FUSING, AND PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 TRANSPORT UNIT REMOVAL
1. Remove the fusing unit from the copiers main unit. (See section 6.4.6.) 2. Remove the transport unit [A] (1 connector, 1 bearing, and 1 snap ring). [A]
A269R512.WMF
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT TOP COVER REMOVAL

1. Remove the fusing unit from the copiers main unit. (See section 6.4.6.) 2. Remove the fusing unit top cover [A] (1 screw). [A]
A269R501.WMF
SM
6-83
A257/A269
6.12.3 OIL SUPPLY UNIT REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING

1. Remove the fusing unit top cover. (See 6.12.2.) 2. Remove the oil supply tube [A] (1 screw). 3. Remove the 2 oil supply unit pressure springs [B]. 4. Remove four lock screws and remove the oil supply pad [C] while turning it in the direction shown by the arrows. [C] [A]
A269R502.WMF
[B]
5. Clean the oil application roller with cotton.
A269R503.WMF
A257/A269
6-84
SM
6.12.4 HOT ROLLER BLADE REPLACEMENT
[D] [B] [E] [B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
A269R516.WMF
1. Remove the fusing unit top cover. (See 6.12.2.) 2. Remove the oil supply tube [A] (1 screw). 3. Remove the 2 oil supply pressure springs [B]; then, remove the oil supply assembly [C].
4. Remove the 2 hot roller blade pressure springs [D]; then, remove the hot roller blade [E].
SM
6-85
A257/A269
6.12.5 CLEANING THE CLEANING ROLLER SCRAPER

1. Remove the fusing unit top cover. (See 6.12.2.) 2. Remove the cleaning roller scraper [A] with the bracket [B] (3 screws). 3. Clean the cleaning roller scraper with clean cloth. [A] [B]
A269R513.WMF
6.12.6 FUSING THERMOFUSE AND THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit top cover. (See 6.12.2.) 2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [A] (1 screw and 2 connectors). 3. Remove the fusing thermistor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector). [B]
[A]
A269R504.WMF
A257/A269
6-86
SM
6.12.7 FUSING UNIT DISASSEMBLY

[C] [E] [F]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[F] 1. Remove the fusing unit top cover. (See 6.12.2.)
A269R505.WMF
2. Remove the oil supply tube and the oil supply pad assembly. (See 6.12.3.) 3. Remove the hot roller blade. 4. Remove the oil pump assembly [A] (2 screws). Then disconnect the oil end sensor connectors. 5. Remove the hot roller lamp connectors [B]. Then, remove the pressure thermofuse harness from the clamp [C].
6. Turn the pressure releasing screws [D] (black screws) clockwise to release the fusing pressure. 7. Pull out the unit support stay [E] (1 screw). (This prevents the fusing unit from tipping over.) 8. Remove the lock screws (2 screws on the front and 2 screws on the rear) and rotate the upper section of the fusing unit away from the lower section as shown in the figure.
CAUTION
1) Be sure to remove the hot roller lamp harness connectors. An attempt to disassemble the fusing unit with the harness connectors attached may cause permanent damage to the hot roller lamp. 2) Black screws are used as pressure releasing screws. Turning a golden color screw would alter the nip width.
SM
6-87
A257/A269
6.12.8 FUSING LAMP REPLACEMENT

1. Disassemble the fusing unit into two parts. (See 6.12.7.) 2. Remove the front and rear fusing lamp holders [A] (1 screw each). 3. Replace the fusing lamp [B]. [A]
[B]
A269R506.WMF
6.12.9 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Disassemble the fusing unit into two parts. (See 6.12.7.) 2. Replace the hot roller [A] (2 C-rings, 2 heat-insulating bushings, 2 gears, and 2 ball bearings). NOTE: Apply Barrierta L55/2 grease to the inner and outer surfaces of the front and rear hot roller bushings every 80K scans. (Barrierta grease: A0289300)
A269R507.WMF
[A]
CAUTION
Take care with the Barrierta grease as it will vaporize when heated. The resulting gas is harmful if inhaled.
A257/A269
6-88
SM
6.12.10 HOT ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER CLEANING

1. Disassemble the fusing unit into two parts. (See 6.12.7.) 2. Remove the hot roller. (See 6.12.9.) 3. Remove the fusing cleaning roller assembly [A] (2 screws). 4. Clean the surface of the hot roller cleaning roller. [A]
A269R514.WMF
6.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP/ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. Disassemble the fusing unit into two parts. (See 6.12.7.) 2. Remove the fusing knob [A] (1 screw) and the oil tank [B]. 3. Remove the pressure roller lamp holders [C] (1 screw each). [B] [C]
[A]
4. Uncouple the front and rear connectors of the pressure roller lamp. 5. Remove the lower entrance guide plate [D] (2 screws). 6. Lift the pressure roller [E] together with the pressure roller lamp and then take out the lamp. 7. Replace the pressure roller (1 gear and 2 ball bearings).
[E]
[D]
A269R509.WMF
SM
6-89
A257/A269
A269R508.WMF
6.12.12 PRESSURE THERMOFUSE AND THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

[B] 1. Remove the fusing unit top cover. (See 6.12.2.) 2. Remove the fusing unit lower entrance guide plate [A] (2 screws). 3. Remove and replace the pressure thermofuse [B] (2 connectors) and pressure thermistor [C] (2 connectors). [C] [A]
A269R510.WMF
6.12.13 PRESSURE CLEANING ROLLER CLEANING

1. Remove the pressure cleaning roller assembly [A] (2 springs). 2. Clean the pressure cleaning roller.
[A]
A269R515.WMF
A257/A269
6-90
SM
6.12.14 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: 1) Be sure to perform the nip band width adjustment only when the fusing unit is at the operating temperature. 2) Place an OHP sheet on the by-pass feed table before starting this procedure. 3) Use only A4/LT oriented sideways (other sizes of OHP sheet may cause a paper jam). 4) If the copier is connected to a sorter, a paper jam will occur after the OHP sheet is ejected.
A269R551.WMF
2. When the OHP sheet is ejected, measure the width of the nip band. (The nip band is the opaque stripe across the OHP sheet.) 1) If the has irregular boundaries, measure the narrower width. 2) For both edges of the OHP sheet, measure the width 10 mm away from the edge. 3. Check that the average of the width of the three bands (front, rear, and center) matches the standard value. Standard value Center: 9.3 0.3 mm Edges: Nip width within 0.5 mm of the same value on both edges (0.5 mm maximum deviation) 4. If the measured nip width does not correspond to the standard value, correct the nip width using the pressure adjustment screw.
SM
6-91
A257/A269
1. Enter the SP mode and measure the fusing nip band width (SP1-109-00).
6.12.15 CAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN USING A FUSING UNIT THAT HAS BEEN IN STOCK FOR A LONG PERIOD
NOTE: When using a fusing unit hat has been in stock for an extended period, press the pump with fingers to check whether adequate amount of oil is pumped up. Reason: A fusing unit that has been stocked unused for a long time may have a clogged pump or valve in the oil supply unit. Such a fusing unit will not work properly. This may result in an oil supply shortage and consequently an earlier than usual deterioration of the hot roller.
A257/A269
6-92
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT

6.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
A269R531.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit [A]. 2. Remove the duplex unit (4 screws).
6.13.2 SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A] [C]
[B]
A269R532.WMF
1. Remove the duplex unit (see procedure 10.1). 2. Remove the separation roller assembly [A] (2 screws). 3. Remove the spring [B]. 4. Replace the separation roller [C] (2 E-rings and 2 bearings). NOTE: Be sure to install the separation roller (one-way clutch) so that the clutch is visible.
SM
6-93
A257/A269
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.3 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[D] [B]
[C]
[F] [E] [A] [E]

A269R533.WMF
[G]
[F]
[H]
A269R534.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Remove the guide rail [A] (1 screw and 1 snap-ring). 3. Remove the upper guide plate [B] and lower guide plate [C] (1 snap-ring). 4. Remove the inner cover [D] (2 screws). 5. Remove the 2 snap-rings [E] from the both ends of the feed roller shaft. 6. Slide the bearings [F] inward. 7. Replace the feed roller [G] (2 E-rings, 2 paper flatteners [H], and 1 guide roller [I]). NOTE: 1) Be sure to install the feed and guide rollers correctly. 2) The feed roller is made of silicone rubber and is not compatible with the non-silicone rubber feed rollers used in some previous models.
A257/A269
6-94
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.4 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[B] [C]
[D]
[A] [E]
A269R535.WMF
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 in procedure 10.3. 2. Remove the bracket [A] (1 screw). 3. Remove the feed roller shaft assembly [B] (2 snap-rings). 4. Remove the pulley [C] and the timing belt [D]. 5. Remove the pressure spring [E].
Replacement and Adjustment SM 6-95 A257/A269
DUPLEX UNIT
[D]
[B]
[A] [H] [C]

A269R536.WMF
[I]
[D]
[G] [E]
[F]
A269R537.WMF
[C]
[E]
[G]
6. Disconnect the connector [A] of the duplex feed motor [B]. 7. Close the side fences [C] and remove the duplex feed assembly [D] (5 screws). 8. Remove the duplex feed motor assembly (3 screws). 9. Replace the duplex feed motor (2 screws). NOTE: 1) When installing the duplex feed assembly [D] on the base unit, place the bottom plate [F], with the mylar strip [E], above the bracket tabs [G]. 2) Ensure the base unit's mylar strip [H] is placed on the guide plate [I], as shown.
A257/A269
6-96
SM
SYSTEM AND ELECTRONICS
6.14 SYSTEM AND ELECTRONICS

6.14.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE USING AN IC CARD
Care of the IC Card
Never insert an IC card with the main power switch set to ON or remove it when main power is on. Do not set the main power switch to OFF during the software installation process. Since the IC card is a precision part, it must not be exposed to high temperature, humidity, or direct sunlight. Never bend, scratch, or apply excessive shock to an IC card.
Upgrading the Main Control Board Software
[A]
A269R152.WMF
1. Enter SP7-801 and check the current version of main control board. 2. Turn off the main power switch on the copier. 3. Insert the required IC card [A] as shown in figure. NOTE: Confirm the direction of IC card. (The side with A should be facing right) 4. Turn on the main power switch. The system starts from the IC card. 5. Run the main program download function from SP5-827. 6. After confirming the End message displayed on the screen, turn off the main power switch and remove the IC card. NOTE: Never remove the IC card before turning off the main power switch. 7. Turn on the main power switch again and check the version of main control board software by SP7-801.
SM
6-97
A257/A269
Upgrading the Scanner IPU Software
[B]
[A]
A269R912.WMF
1. Enter SP7-801 and check the current version of scanner IPU software. 2. Turn off the main power switch on the copier. 3. Open the front cover and remove the revolver cover (4 screws). 4. Loosen the 4 screws holding the IPU cover [A] and slide the cover to the left to remove it. 5. Insert the required IC card [B] as shown in figure. NOTE: Confirm the direction of IC card.(The side with A should be facing up)
A257/A269
6-98
SM
6. Set the revolver lock release tool [A] and the safety switch actuator [B].
[A]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[C]
WARNING
1. Turn the copier main switch off when setting the revolver lock release tool [A] and door safety switch actuator [B]. 2. Set the revolver lock release tool [A] first when setting the revolver lock release tool and door safety switch actuator [B]. If the copier starts without the revolver lock release tool [A], revolver will be locked and SC361 (Revolver H.P. sensor error) will display. 3. Never touch the area around the revolver after turning on the copier main switch while using the door safety switch actuator and revolver lock release tool. In case of rotation of revolver, your hands may be injured. 4. Check and note down the setting of Timed Process Control Self Check (SP3-972-000) before using release tools. If the Timed Process Control Self Check starts suddenly, your hands may be injured. (See Section 2.1.1 about the timing of starting the Timed Process Control Self Check. Enter the value 0 in SP3-972-000 (Entering a value of 0 surpresses the execution this self check). The default interval of Timed Process Control Self Check is 6 hours.) 5. After using these tools [A], [B], secure them to the upper right inner cover with a plastic screw [C] as shown. 6. Enter the previous setting of Timed Process Control Self Check (SP3972-000) again.
SM
6-99
A257/A269
A269R920.WMF
7. Turn on the main power switch. A program download sequence will start automatically. (LED3 on the scanner IPU turns on while the program is being rewritten). NOTE: Do not attempt to remove the IC card or turn off the main power switch while program downloading is in progress. 8. When the program rewrite ends, LED3 goes off and LED4 flashes. 9. After confirming that LED3 is off, turn off the main power switch. (Keeping the main power switch on will cause SC690. In such a case, turn off the main power switch and proceed with the next step). NOTE: The SC690 occurs due to the scanner IPU not communicating with the Main Board during the upgrade procedure. 10. Turn off the main power switch and remove the IC card. NOTE: Never remove the IC card before turning off the main power switch. 11. Turn on the main power switch again. Then enter the SP7-801 and verify that the software has been upgraded properly.
A257/A269
6-100
SM
NV-RAM Uploading and Downloading

This copier can upload and download copier settings from and into its NV-RAM in SP modes using an IC card. SP5-824: Upload Executing an upload saves the copier settings (including the main counter value and serial number) onto the flash ROM on the main control board. SP5-825: Download Executing a download loads copier settings (excluding the main counter value and serial number) from the flash ROM on the main control board.
Upload/download procedure
1. Print the copier settings using the SP7-902 mode. 2. Set the main power switch to OFF and insert an IC card which contains the main control board software into the main control board. (See the illustration in 6.14.1.) 3. Set the main power switch to ON and select either SP5-824 (to upload) or SP5825 (to download). 4. Start uploading or downloading. 5. Wait until end of processing is indicated on the screen (approximately 1 to 3 minutes, depending on the size of the software). 6. When the end of processing message appears, set the main power switch to OFF and remove the IC card. NOTE: Never remove the IC card before turning off the main power switch. 7. Replace all covers and turn on the main power switch.
8. In the case of a download, display the settings in the SP7-902 mode and compare them against the old values to verify that the downloading was successful. NOTE: When uploading, a pre-programmed IC card is needed because the machine boots from the IC card. A blank IC card can not be used.
SM
6-101
A257/A269
Rev. 07/2001
6.14.2 RAM CLEAR

RAM Clear Procedure
NOTE: Clearing the RAM resets all SP and UP values, except the serial number and main counter value, to the defaults. It is, therefore, important to perform this step using the procedure shown below. 1. Before clearing the RAM, either: execute SP7-902 to output the SP mode values that have been changed from their default values; or Upload the settings from the NV-RAM onto the flash ROM on main control board using the SP5-824 mode. (See NV-RAM uploading and downloading.)
3.
2. Use the SP5-801 mode to clear the NV-RAM. After the RAM is cleared, turn the unit OFF then ON. 4. Perform the touch panel calibration. NOTE: After the NV-RAM clearing, the touch panel is not effective. Therefore, the Touch Panel Calibration is required (See 6.14.5 Touch Panel Calibration). 5. Run the forced process control self-check (SP3-126). (Potential table optimization is required since RAM clearing also initializes the process control data.) 6. Enter the SP mode changes that were output in step (1), or download the NVRAM values from the flash ROM on main control board. (See NV-RAM Uploading and Downloading.) 7. Perform the ACC procedure. 8. If the color balance after the ACC is not correct, adjust the ACC target using SP4-502 (for copier mode) and SP4-503 (for printer mode). NOTE: To clear (zero) the counter log data, run the SP7-808 (Clear All Counters).
A257/A269
6-102
SM
6.14.3 MAIN CONTROL BOARD

Main Control Board Replacement Procedure
The NV-RAM on the main control board retains the device number information, counter information, and other settings. For this reason, it is necessary to take the NV-RAM from the old main control board and install it on the new main control board when the main control board is replaced. (The main control board that is supplied as a service part has no NV-RAM.)
[B]
A269R915.WMF
[A]
A269R914.WMF
2. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord. 3. Remove the left cover (4 screws). 4. Remove the main control board [A] (14 connectors, 2 fiber-optics connectors, and 8 screws). 5. Remove the NV-RAM (IC115) [B] from the old main control board. 6. Install the NV-RAM you removed on the new main control board. 7. Install the board and covers in the reverse order of disassembly. 8. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main power switch. 9. Verify the default values and program version in the appropriate SP mode. 10. Output a copy and check it for any errors.
SM
6-103
A257/A269
1. If possible, record the device number information, counter information, and other default values.
6.14.4 COUNTERS
About the Total Counter
The total counter value is stored in the NV-RAM on the main control board. It cannot be reset with RAM clear. Consequently, the NV-RAM in this copier corresponds to the conventional electronic or mechanical counters and must be handled as such. (See the following procedurePrecautions to be Observed When Replacing the Total Counter (NV-RAM).) The factory-set counter value is a negative value. When the total counter has a negative value, it may be reset using SP7-825. However, resetting is disabled if the counter value is positive. The counter value can be monitored using the counter key located on the right side of the operation panel.
Mechanical Counter
This copier is also provided with a mechanical counter. This mechanical counter is covered with a seal because normally it isn't used. This counter has no reset function, and no service code will display if it becomes faulty. The mechanical counter is set to 0 at the factory. It starts counting when the total counter is reset using the SP7-825 mode. (If the total counter isn't reset using SP7-825, the mechanical counter starts when the total counter reaches 0.) NOTE: Normally you shouldn't ever need to peel the seal off of the mechanical counter.
A257/A269
6-104
SM
Rev. 11/18/2003
NV-RAM Replacement Procedure Revision Make sure you have the factory settings that come with the copier before beginning the following procedure.
1. Use the SP7-902 mode to output the SP mode values that have been modified from their default value. 2. Set the main power switch OFF and unplug the power cord. 3. Replace the NV-RAM (IC115) on the main board. 4. Reassemble the machine. 5. Open the front cover, then turn ON the machine main power. NOTE: Be sure to leave the front cover open until Step 13 has been completed. This is to prevent the machine from initiating initial process control self-check. A four-digit SC may appear at this time (SC4xxx) and remain displayed until the RAM clear is performed in Step 8 below, however please ignore this SC and continue with the procedure. 6. Perform Touch Panel Calibration (see pg. 6-106). 7. SC195 (Serial number error) appears on the display. Then, enter the machine serial number in the factory set mode (Performed by a Regional Representative). NOTE: Sometimes SC195 does not appear during the 4 digits SC remains displayed. Even though in this case, enter the machine serial numbers in the factory set mode. 8. Perform SP5-801 (RAM clear) to reset SP and UP values to their defaults. 9. Turn the main power OFF/ON and confirm that no SC is displayed. 10. Perform Touch Panel Calibration again. 11. Set SP7-008-000 (Counter display setting) to the appropriate value: 1: Developments counter value 2: Copies/Prints counter value NOTE: If this SP is not set to a value of 1 or 2, the abnormal value in the SP (e.g. 102, 65) will prevent the electrical counter panel button from functioning. 12. Perform SP7-808 (Counter all clear). NOTE: If this is not performed, the counters will take on abnormal values. See logging data sheet (SP7-809-003) to confirm. 13. Perform SP7-825 to reset the electrical counter values to 0, unless you are using P/N A2579590 or newer (NV-RAM Zero Counter), in which case this step is unnecessary. NOTE: If this step is not performed for previous NV-RAMs (negative counters), the mechanical counter will not increment. 14. Use the electrical counter panel button to confirm that all electrical counters have been successfully set to 0. 15. Enter SP mode changes you output in step (1). 16. Perform the auto color calibration procedure.
17. If the image needs adjustment after being subject to auto color calibration,
calibrate the target using the SP4-501/502/503 modes.

SM 6-105 A257/A269
6.14.5 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION

NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel in the following cases: When the operation panel is replaced. When NV-RAM clear (SP5-801) has been performed. 1. Press the [Interrupt] key, then press and hold the [Clear Stop] key for 3 seconds. The calibration screen will appear.
1.
Touch Panel Calibration. Please touch higher left corner
2.
Touch Panel Calibration. Please touch lower right corner
3.
Please touch some places you like to check your calibration. OK: # key NG: Clear/Stop key
A269R525.WMF
2. Gently touch the screen with the tip of editor pen in sequence as indicated by the arrow marks which appears on the screen (from higher left to lower right). 3. Touch any location with the editor pen to verify the current coordinates. 4. Terminate the calibration with the [#] key if the coordinates of the X mark almost match the point you touched. If the coordinates disagree, rerun the calibration with the [Clear/Stop] key. NOTE: Do not use a sharp object such as a normal pen or mechanical pencil for this procedure. The touch panel might be damaged.
A257/A269
6-106
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Rev. 12/99
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
7.1.1 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK RESULTS (SP3-975-00)
Self Check Results 03-975-00
Displayed Value 1 Successful Item Related SP No. None Major Cause Remarks
89
Process Control Selfcheck
99 100 110
Forced termination (door opened, etc.) ID sensor offset error Vsg adjustment error
120
Coating weight calculation error
130 20! 300 31! 32! 40! 41!
Vmin error calculation error, invalid or Vk value Residual potential error Vd adjustment error Vpl adjustment error Self check process control error (unable to calculate) Self check process control error (out of range condition)
When SP3-125-000 (Process Control Method) is set to 1 3-125(fixed potential control). 000 When toner end or toner near end condition happens. Power is turned off during selfNone check. Temporary main power failure ID sensor connector disconnected Dirty ID sensor, dirty drum, 3-2-xx foreign materials or flaws on the drum ID sensor noise interference, defective development unit, None incorrect charge control unit setup, development bias error ID sensor noise interference, K toner density too low 3-121-xx Development unit error, mixed 3-122-xx colors Drum anomaly, faulty LD unit, 3-111-00 poor grounding Drum deterioration, optical None fatigue None Drum anomaly, faulty LD unit
SC385 is indicated. SC385 is indicated.
NOTE: 1: K, 2: Y, 3: C, and 4: M are displayed for the respective colors for items identified by ! in the Displayed value column of the table.
Troubleshooting
SM
7-1
A257/A269
Rev. 12/10/2000
7.1.2 DEVELOPER SETUP RESULTS (SP3-964-00)

Displayed Item Value 1 Successful Unable to perform calculation, 20 invalid or Vk value 31 32 40 41 Vd adjustment error Vpl adjustment error Self check process control error (unable to calculate) Self check process control error (out of range condition) Toner end condition, etc. (before toner is replenished) Toner supply error ( value will not go up when toner is replenished.) TD sensor initialization error Vref adjustment error Forced termination during the developer agitation. Toner end during the developer agitation. Incorrect setting of process control method. Forced termination after the developer agitation. Forced termination (before the developer agitation.) ID sensor offset error Vsg adjustment error Related SP No. Major Cause Development unit error, mixed colors Drum deterioration, optical fatigue Drum abnormally, faulty LD unit Same as process control selfcheck result. Same as process control selfcheck result. Toner end sensor actuated, toner end condition Developer/toner supply mechanism error, toner supply motor cable disconnected Toner end condition detected during developer setup. Rerun. Remarks
50
51 530 54 59 596
SC or door open. Toner end or toner end is detected during the developer agitation. Incorrect process control SP3method is selected by SP3-125125-000 000. Change the setting to 0 (Process control ON). SC or door open. Power turned off during selfcheck, temporary main power failure. Door open or SC. ID sensor cable disconnected Dirty ID sensor, dirty drum, foreign materials or flaws on the drum ID sensor noise interference, defective development unit, incorrect charge control unit setup, development bias error ID sensor noise interference, BK toner density too low Drum anomaly, faulty LD unit, poor grounding
597
599 99 100 110
120
Error of calculating the amount of toner on the drum. Vmin error Residual potential error
130 300
NOTE: 1: K, 2: Y, 3: C, and 4: M are displayed for the respective colors for items identified by in the Displayed value column of the table.
A257/A269
7-2
SM
Developer Agitation (SP2-225) OPERATION FLOW

Start
Initial checking
Toner end? TD sensor is correctly initialized?
Developer agitation
Forced process control self check
End
A269R526.WMF
7.1.3 TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION RESULTS (SP3-005-006)

Displayed Item Value 1 Successful TD sensor output error 14 20 24 TD sensor initialization error TD sensor communication error Related SP No. Major Cause TD sensor output cannot be adjusted within 2.5 0.1 V Remarks
NOTE: 1: K, 2: Y, 3: C, and 4: M are displayed for the respective colors for items identified by 4 in the Displayed value column of the table.
Troubleshooting
SM
7-3
A257/A269
SC CODE TABLE
7.1.4 SELF-CHECK PROCESS CONTROL RELATED SCS

SC385: Vsg Adjustment Error
The LCD displays SC385 when the output from the ID sensor is found to be outside 1.8 0.05 V during Vsg adjustment. Turning the power off then on resets this condition. However, SC385 is lit again after the end of each copy job even when this SC condition is reset by turning the power off then on. Toner is still supplied, but using fixed supply mode, until a subsequent Vsg adjustment is successful. NOTE: Vsg adjustment timing: When a process control self-check is done (forced, power-on time, or fixed interval). When developer initialization is done (SP2-225-1 to SP2-225-5). When the output is differs from the Vsg value measured during the preceding Vsg adjustment by more than 0.05 V.
7.2 SC CODE TABLE

See Appendix-A for a detailed description of the SC code table.
7.2.1 SC TYPES AND RESETTING PROCEDURES

Type
B C D
Display Method Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel. The machine is disabled. The user cannot reset the SC. SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected. SCs that are not shown on the operation panel. They are internally logged. Turning the operation switch or main power switch off then on resets the SC. Displayed on the operation panel. Re-displayed if they occurred after the main power switch is turned on again.
How to Reset Turn the main switch off then on before entering SP mode. Reset the SC (set SP5-810 to 1), then turn the main switch off then on again. Turn power off/on.
Logging only Turn the operation switch or main power switch off and on.
All SCs are logged.
A257/A269
7-4
SM
DRUM LIGHT FATIGUE
7.3 DRUM LIGHT FATIGUE

Leaving the drum exposed to direct sunlight will cause it damage. This damage creates light fatigue on the drum, an effect that will be visible on the print out. When the drawer unit is slid out, even if the drum remains in the drawer unit, it will be exposed to direct and reflected light. Light fatigue will occur if the drum is exposed for more than 2 minutes. This section will show how to determine where light fatigue occurred on the image. Making a print test pattern with SP mode 5-955-18 enables you to determine whether the drum has light fatigue. Follow this procedure to make a test pattern with A3 (DTL) in 1C (single color) mode using SP mode.
1. Enter SP mode 5-955. 2. Set SP 5-955-018 to 6 to select the Solid test pattern. 3. Set SP 5-955-001 to 51 to select the LD writing value, 51. 4. Press the N key to change the LD. 5. Select A3 (DTL) size and B/W mode (or another 1C mode). 6. Press the E key to make a test pattern in 1 to 1 copy mode. 7. Check whether the image has a dark uneven area. 8. If the darker area location is similar to the following figure, replace the drum. 9. After replacing the drum, set SP5-955-001 10 128 and 5-955-018 to 0.
Feed direction PCC
Image transfer belt cleaning section
A3/DTL
Light fatigue through the LD writing window.
Approximately 10 mm
Approximately 70 mm
Light fatigue by reflected light under the PCC unit
SM
7-5
A257/A269
Troubleshooting
Approximately 80 mm
A663 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Original Size and Weight: Thick original mode (default mode) Use this setting for normal paper types Maximum A3, 11" x 17" Minimum B6 (sideways), 51/2" x 81/2" Weight 52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lbs.) Thin original mode Maximum A3, 11" x 17" Minimum B6, 51/2" x 81/2" Weight 40 ~ 128 g/m2 (11 ~ 34 lbs.) Auto reverse mode Maximum A3, 11" x 17" Minimum B5, 51/2" x 81/2" Weight 52 ~ 105 (14 ~ 27 lbs.) Automatic feed - ADF mode Manual feed one by one - SADF mode Auto Reverse Feed - ARDF mode 50 sheets at 80 g/m2 (21 lbs.) Face up, first sheet on top Feed Roller and Friction Belt One flat belt 45 W 24 V 10% from the copier, 1.8 A 610 x 507 x 130 mm (24.0" x 20.0" x 5.1") Approximately 10.5 kg (23.2 lbs.) 40 cpm (A4/LT sideways) 555 mm/s (21.9 inches/s) 590 ms (thin original mode) 690 ms (thick original mode)
Original Feed:
Original Table Capacity: Original Placement: Original Separation: Original Transport: Power Consumption: Power Source: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight: 1 to 1 Copying Speed Capability Original Transport Speed Time Needed for Original Replacement (A4 sideways)
SM
8-1
A257/A269
ARDF A663
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
2. COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1 11 2 3 4 5
10 9
A663V502.WMF
1. Original Stopper 2. Press Lever 3. Original Table 4. Exit Rollers 5. Inverter Pawls 6. Inverter Rollers
7. Transport Belt 8. Pick-up Rollers 9. Pull-out Roller 10. Feed Roller 11. Friction Belt
A257/A269
8-2
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2 1 17 16 15 14 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A663V503.WMF
12 13
1. Original set sensor 2. Feed in Cover Open Sensor 3. Stopper Solenoid 4. Indicator Panel Lamps 5. Feed-in Motor 6. Belt Drive Motor 7. DF Main Board 8. Inverter Solenoid 9. Feed-out Cover Open Sensor
10. Feed-out Motor 11. Feed-out Sensor 12. APS Start Sensor 13. DF Position Sensor 14. Original width Sensor-1 15. Original width Sensor-2 16. Original Width Sensor-3 17. Registration Sensor
SM
8-3
A257/A269
ARDF A663
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Motors M1 M2 M3 Sensors S1 S2 S3 S4 Name Feed-in Belt Drive Feed-out Function Drives the feed-in system (pick-up feed and pull-out rollers separation belt) Drives the transport belt Drives the feed-out and the inverter system Detects whether originals have been placed on the original table Informs whether the feed-in cover is open or not Informs whether the feed-out cover is open or not Checks for original misfeeds and determines original stop timing when in auto-reverse mode Informs the CPU that it is time to detect the original size (in platen mode) Informs the CPU whether the DF is in the up or down position Detects the width of the original Detects the width of the original Detects the width of the original Determines original stop timing and measures the length of the original Lifts the original stopper and lowers the feed-in lever to feed the set of originals to the feed roller Energizes to invert the original when copying two-sided originals Controls all DF functions Informs the operator that the DF is in the down position. Informs the operator that the auto feed mode is available. Index No. 5 6 10
Original Set Feed-in Cover Open Feed-out Cover Open Feed-out
1 2 9 11
S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 Solenoids SOL1
APS Start DF Position Original Width-1 Original Width-2 Original Width-3 Registration
12 13 14 15 16 17
Stopper
SOL2
Inverter
PCB PCB1 DF Main Board Indicators (Lamps) L1 Ready L2 Auto
7 4 4
A257/A269
8-4
SM
ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM
[B] [D] [A] [C]
[E]
[F]
A663D514.WMF
When an original is placed on the table, the leading edge is stopped by the stopper [A], and the feeler activates the original set sensor [B]. The Insert Original indicator light goes out and the DF informs the copier's CPU that the originals have been set. When the Print key is pressed, the stopper solenoid [C] activates to raise the stopper to allow the originals to be fed in, and to lower the press lever [D] to press the originals against the pick-up rollers [E]. An anti-static brush [F] is installed to eliminate static electricity caused during the original pick-up process.
SM
8-5
A257/A269
ARDF A663
SEPARATION AND PAPER FEED MECHANISM
4.2 SEPARATION AND PAPER FEED MECHANISM

[D]
[A]
[E]
A663D515.WMF
[C]
[B]
[F]
[D]
[E] [A]
A663D516.WMF
[B]
Originals are separated using the friction belt [A] and the feed roller [B]. When the copier sends a signal to the DF to feed in the original, the feed-in motor [C] starts rotating (clockwise) to drive the pick-up [D], feed and pull-out [E] rollers. A one-way bearing stops the friction belt from rotating. Originals are separated and fed in one by one because the resistance of the stationary friction belt is greater than the friction between pages of the original. When the registration sensor [F] detects the separated first original, the feed-in motor reverses (counter clockwise), and the drive is transmitted only to the pull-out rollers due to a one-way bearing. In this condition, the pull-out rollers are still rotating in the same direction, and they feed the original to the exposure glass. The motor turns off when the trailing edge of the 1st original has finished passing over the sensor. To prepare the next original, the feed-in motor turns clockwise to separate the second original and the motor turns off when the registration sensor detects the second original. When it is time for the second original to be fed to the exposure glass, the feed-in motor turns counter clockwise.
A257/A269
8-6
SM
FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM
4.3 FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM

[A]
[B] [C]
A663D517.WMF
The feed-in motor [A] drives the friction belt [B] through timing belts and gears. The one-way bearing allows the belt to rotate in the direction shown only when the feed-in motor is rotating counterclockwise. (The feed-in motor rotates counterclockwise when the original is passing over the registration sensor, and only the pull-out rollers are rotating to feed the paper to the exposure glass.) As a result of this operation, the part of the friction belt that contacts the feed roller [C] or the original changes. This prevents multiple feeding or causing originals to become dirty. The reverse movement of the friction belt will not affect the next original because the pressure of the press lever holds the originals in place.
SM
8-7
A257/A269
ARDF A663
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[C] [B]
A663D518.WMF
[A]
The DF detects original width using three original width sensors-1 [A], -2 [B] and -3 [C]. It also detects the original length using the registration sensor. The DF CPU counts the feed-in motor's drive pulses during the on timing of the registration sensor. Based on this pulse count, the CPU determines the original length. The machine detects the original size by the total combination of all four sensors.
A257/A269
8-8
SM
PAPER TRANSPORT MECHANISM
4.5 PAPER TRANSPORT MECHANISM

[A]
[C]
[B]
A663D519.WMF
Rear Scale
3.5 mm
Left Scale Original
A663D520.WMF
An independent motor called the belt drive motor [A] (a dc stepper motor) drives the transport belt [B]. The belt drive motor starts rotating soon after the copier sends an original feed-in signal. Inside the transport belt are four pressure roller shafts, which achieve the proper amount of pressure between the belt and the original. The pressure roller shaft [C] closest to the left original scale is made of rubber for the stronger pressure that is required when in the thick original mode (this is the mode used for normal paper). The other rollers are sponge rollers. Since the copier's original alignment position is at the left rear corner (not in the center), the originals fed from the DF must also be at this position. But if the original was to be fed along the rear scale, unnecessary original skew, jam or wrinkling may occur. To prevent such problems, the original transfer position is set to 3.5 mm away from the rear scale as shown. The correction for this 3.5 mm gap is compensated for by the position of the lens unit. (Also see "Horizontal Lens Positioning" in the Optics section of the manual for the copier main body.)
SM
8-9
A257/A269
ARDF A663
THICK/THIN ORIGINAL MODES
4.6 THICK/THIN ORIGINAL MODES
Fig. 1
[A]
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
A663D521.WMF
This document feeder has two different ways of stopping originals at the correct position on the exposure glass. The technician can select one of these using a copier SP mode. The user can also select the mode. 1. Thick Original Mode (Normal Paper Mode) This mode is the factory set mode. The belt drive motor remains energized to carry the original approximately 7 mm pass the left scale (Figures 1 and 2). Then the motor pauses and reverses to feed the original back against the left scale (Fig. 3). This forces the original to hit against the left original scale [A] and thus aligns the trailing edge to minimize the original skew on the exposure glass. 2. Thin Original Mode To protect originals from being damaged by the movements of the transfer belt, thin original mode can be selected. The belt drive motor stops shortly after the original trailing edge passes the registration sensor. This stops the original at the correct position on the exposure glass.
A257/A269
8-10
SM
ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.7 ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A] [B]
A663D522.WMF
[B]
A663D523.WMF
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier's CPU sends the feed-out signal to the DF CPU. When the DF receives the feed-out signal, the belt drive and feed-out motors [A] turn on. The feed-out sensor [B] installed in the feed-out section counts the number of pulses to calculate how long the feed-out motor must stay on to feed the original out of the machine completely.
SM
8-11
A257/A269
ARDF A663
TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED MECHANISM
4.8 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED MECHANISM

[B] [A]
[B]
A663D524.WMF
Unlike one-sided original feed, the backside of the original must be copied first to keep the originals and copies in the correct order. During original feed-in, the sequence is the same as for one-sided feed. However, the belt drive motor continues rotating until the original reaches the inverter section. The DF CPU also energizes the feed-out motor and the inverter solenoid [A] for a short time to lift the inverter pawls [B]. After the inverter mechanism inverts the original, the belt drive motor reverses and the original is fed towards the original scale. It is stopped at the correct position on the exposure glass, and the DF CPU sends the copy start signal. When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier's CPU sends the invert original signal to the DF CPU in order to make a copy of the front side. The original is inverted in the same way as for copying the backside, as explained earlier on this page.
A257/A269
8-12
SM
A4 SIDEWAYS: 1 SIDED ORIGINAL
5. TIMING CHARTS
5.1 A4 SIDEWAYS: 1 SIDED ORIGINAL
SM
8-13
A257/A269
ARDF A663
A663D525.WMF
COMBINE 2 ORIGINAL MODE
5.2 COMBINE 2 ORIGINAL MODE
A663D526.WMF
A257/A269
8-14
SM
A4 SIDEWAYS: DUPLEX
5.3 A4 SIDEWAYS: DUPLEX
A663D527.WMF
SM
8-15
A257/A269
ARDF A663
DIP SWITCHES
6. SERVICE TABLES
6.1 DIP SWITCHES
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 DPS 101 2 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 Function ^ Normal setting One-sided thin original mode free run with paper One-sided thick original mode (normal mode) free run with paper One-sided thick original mode (normal mode) fee run without paper Two-sided mode free run with paper Two-sided mode free run without paper One-sided thin original mode free run with paper One-sided thick original mode (normal mode) free run with paper Two-sided mode free run with paper Not used Solenoid test Motor test Combine two originals mode free run with paper Not used Not used Indicators On
NOTE: 1) Paper will automatically feed after 3 seconds when the "with paper" free run modes are selected. 2) To prevent the friction belt from wearing, open the feed-in cover when performing the "without paper" free run modes. To make a free run 1. Set up dip switches 1 to 4 for the required free run mode the test begins automatically. 2. To stop the free run, put the dip switches back to 0.
A257/A269
8-16
SM
VARIABLE RESISTORS
6.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS

VR No. 101 102 Function Adjusts the registration in one-sided thin original mode. Adjusts the registration in two-sided original mode.
6.3 LED
LED No. 101 Function Monitors the communication with the copier.
6.4 FUSE
FUSE No. 101 Function Protects the 24 V line.
SM
8-17
A257/A269
ARDF A663
TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT

7.1 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT
[A] [B] [C]

A663R510.WMF
[D]
[E]
A663R511.WMF
A663R512.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DF. 2. Remove the grip [A] (3 screws). 3. Remove the 6 screws securing the transport belt assembly [B]. NOTE: Remove the two lower screws [C] first. 1. Bend the transport belt assembly and pull out the transport belt [D] as shown. NOTE: 1) When installing the transport belt, make sure that the belt runs under the belt guide spacers [E]. 2) When securing the transport belt assembly with the 6 screws, make sure to secure the four upper screws first.
A257/A269
8-18
SM
FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
7.2 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[B] [D] [C]
[A]
A663R513.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed-in cover [A]. 2. Remove the feed roller assembly [B] by pulling it towards the front. 3. Replace the feed roller. NOTE: When installing the feed roller assembly, make sure the pins [C, D] on both sides are fixed properly.
SM
8-19
A257/A269
ARDF A663
FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT
7.3 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
A663R514.WMF
[C]
A663R515.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed-in cover [A]. 2. Gently pull up the friction belt assembly [B] and remove it from the shaft. 3. Replace the friction belt [C].
A257/A269
8-20
SM
ORIGINAL SET AND WIDTH SENSOR REPLACEMENT
7.4 ORIGINAL SET AND WIDTH SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
A663R516.WMF
[B]
[C] [F] [G] [D]
[E] [H] 1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the upper cover [A] (7 screws). 3. Remove the pick-up solenoid spring [B]. 4. Remove the stopper/pressure lever shaft [C] (2 E-rings). 5. Remove both front [D] and rear [E] feed-in cover magnet catches (1 screw each). 6. Remove the feed-in guide plate [F] (4 screws). 7. Remove the original set sensor assembly [G] (1 screw). 9. Replace the required sensor.
ARDF A663 A257/A269
A663R517.WMF
8. Remove the original width sensor assembly [H] (1 screw).
SM
8-21
VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
7.5 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

7.5.1 ONE SIDED THIN ORIGINAL MODE
NOTE: 1) After replacing the DF main board, always do the Rough Adjustment using VR101 first. Then do the Fine Adjustment procedure. 2) At other times, just do the Fine Adjustment procedure. 3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dipswitch. [B] [C]
[A]
A663R518.WMF
- Rough Adjustment (Using VR101) 1. Remove the small cover [A] at the rear of the DF upper cover (1 screw). 2. Turn on dipswitch 101-1 [B]. 3. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lbs.s.) on the original table. (The paper will feed automatically.) 4. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DF carefully so that the original does not move. 5. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of the paper and the left original scale is 0 2.5 mm. 6. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust the registration with VR101 [C]. (Turning VR101 counter-clockwise will increase the gap.) - Fine Adjustment (Using a Copier SP Mode) 1. Perform steps 1 through 5 of the rough adjustment procedure. 2. If the gap is larger than 2.5 mm, adjust the registration with the copier SP mode for the DF Registration Adjustment in one-sided original mode. (Increasing the setting will increase the gap.)
A257/A269
8-22
SM
VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
7.5.2 TWO SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

NOTE: 1) After replacing the DF main board, always do the Rough Adjustment using VR102 first. Then do the Fine Adjustment procedure. 2) At other times, just do the Fine Adjustment procedure. 3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dipswitch. [C] [B]
[A]
A663R518.WMF
- Rough Adjustment (Using VR102) 1. Remove the copier's left original scale (2 screws). 2. Remove the small cover [A] at the rear of the DF upper cover (1 screw). 3. Turn on dip switch 101-3 [B]. 4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lbs.) on the original table. (The paper will feed automatically.) 5. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DF carefully so that the original does not move. 6. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of the paper and the left edge of the original rear scale is 10 2 mm. 7. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust the registration with VR102 [C]. (Turning VR102 counter-clockwise will increase the gap.) - Fine Adjustment (Using a Copier SP Mode) 1. Perform steps 1 through 6 of the rough adjustment procedure. 2. If the gap is not within specification, adjust the registration with the copier SP mode for the DF Registration Adjustment in two-sided original mode. (Increasing the setting will increase the gap.)
SM
8-23
A257/A269
ARDF A663
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION (DF POSITIONING) ADJUSTMENT
7.6 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION (DF POSITIONING) ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: 1) First, adjust the DF side-to-side registration using the copier SP mode for this (see Replacement and Adjustment - Side-to-side Registration Adjustment in the copier manual).C 2) Do the following adjustment only when the registration cannot be brought within the specification (0 2 mm) using the above mentioned SP mode. SPECIFICATION (Original position from the rear scale)
Thick (Normal) Paper Original Mode Thin Original Mode Two Sided Original Mode 3.5 2 mm (3.5 3 mm for B6 lengthwise) 3.5 2 mm 3.5 3 mm
1. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lbs.) on the original table and press the Print key. 2. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DF carefully so that the original does not move. 3. Check if the gap between the rear edge of the paper and the rear original scale is within the specification listed above. 4. If it is out of specification, reposition the 2 screws [A] securing the DF hinge to [A] the long screw hole as shown. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 3.
A663R519.WMF
6. Secure the DF unit at the position where the gap falls within specification. 7. Check the copy quality and adjust the ADF side-to-side registration with the copier SP mode if it is not within the 0 2 mm specification (see Replacement and Adjustment - Side-to-side Registration Adjustment in the copier manual).
A257/A269
8-24
SM
A683 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Remaining Paper Detection: Power Source: Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H): A4 sideways/LT sideways 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb. ~ 28 lb. 1500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb) 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end) 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier) 40 W 17 kg (37.5 LBS.) 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm (15.3 x 20 x 15.3)
SM
9-1
A257/A269
Large Capacity Tray A683
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2 3 4 5
A683V500.WMF
1. Relay Roller 2. Relay Sensor 3. Paper Feed Roller 4. Pick-up Roller
5. Paper End Sensor 6. Paper Tray 7. Separation Roller
A257/A269
9-2
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

17 16 15 14 5 13 6 1 2 3 4
8 12 11 10 9
A683V501.WMF
1. Relay Clutch 2. Paper Feed Clutch 3. LCT Motor 4. Paper Height 1 Sensor 5. Paper Height 2 Sensor 6. Paper Height 3 Sensor 7. Main Board 8. Side Fence Position Sensor 9. Lower Limit Sensor
10. LCT Set Sensor 11. Tray Cover Switch 12. Lift Motor 13. Down Switch 14. Relay Sensor 15. Paper End Sensor 16. Lift Sensor 17. Pick-up Solenoid
SM
9-3
A257/A269
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Motors M1 M2 Sensors S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 Switches SW1 SW2 Solenoids SOL1 Pick-up Controls up-down movement of the pick-up roller. 17 Tray Cover Down Stops the LCT lift motor when the tray cover is opened. Lowers the LCT bottom plate if pressed by the user. 11 13 Paper End Relay Lift Lower Limit Paper Height 1 Paper Height 2 Paper Height 3 LCT Set Side Fence Position Informs the copier when the paper has run out. Detects the copy paper coming to the relay roller and checks for misfeeds. Detects when the paper is at the correct paper feed height. Detects when the tray is completely lowered, to stop the LCT motor. Detects the paper height. Detects the paper height. Detects the paper height. Detects whether the LCT is correctly set or not. Detects when the side fence is set at the A4 size position. 15 14 16 9 4 5 6 10 8 Name LCT Lift Function Drives all rollers. Drives the paper tray up or down. Index No. 3 12
Magnetic Clutches MC1 Paper Feed MC2 Relay PCBs PCB1 Main
Drives the paper feed roller. Drives the relay roller.
2 1
Controls the LCT and communicates with the copier.
A257/A269
9-4
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 10 2 3
9 8 5
6 7
A683V502.WMF
1. Relay Clutch 2. Paper Feed Clutch 3. LCT Motor 4. Tray Bottom Plate 5. Pick-up Roller
6. Tray Drive Belts 7. Lift Motor 8. Separation Roller 9. Paper Feed Roller 10. Relay Roller
SM
9-5
A257/A269
PAPER FEED MECHANISM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
[D]
[A]
[B] [C]
A683D500.WMF
This machine uses the FRR paper feed system (paper feed roller [A], separation roller [B], pick-up roller [C]). When the start key is pressed, the pick-up solenoid [D] energizes and the pick-up roller touches the paper.
A257/A269
9-6
SM
TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM

Large Capacity Tray A683 A257/A269
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM

[D]
[F] [B] [G] [A] [H]
[C]
A683D501.WMF
[E]
The lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the tray bottom plate [B] through gears and timing belts [C].
Tray lifting conditions

When the tray lift sensor [D] turns off in the following conditions, the tray lift motor raises the tray bottom plate until the tray lift sensor [D] turns on again. Just after the main switch is turned on During copying Just after the tray cover is closed Just after leaving the energy saving mode
Tray lowering conditions

In the following conditions, the lift motor lowers the tray bottom plate until the lower limit [E] sensor turns on. Just after the paper end sensor turns on Just after the down switch is pressed by the user The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high/low outputs from three sensors (paper height sensor 1 [F], 2 [G], and 3 [H].)
Amount of paper Near end 25% 50% 75% 100% Paper Height Sensor 1 On (High) Off (Low) Off (Low) Off (Low) Off (Low) Paper Height Sensor 2 Off (Low) On (High) On (High) Off (Low) Off (Low) Paper Height Sensor 3 Off (Low) Off (Low) On (High) On (High) Off (Low)
SM
9-7
TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
A683D502.WMF
When there is a paper jam between the copier and the LCT, the user releases the lock lever [A] and can slide the LCT away from the copier to remove the jammed paper. When sliding the LCT back into position, the LCT is secured against the copier in the correct position by the docking pins [B] on the LCT.
A257/A269
9-8
SM
DIP SWITCHES
3.
SERVICE TABLES
DPS101 3 4 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3.1 DIP SWITCHES

1 1 1 2 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 1 Description Default Free run
NOTE: 1) Do not use any other settings. 2) To do the free run, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the paper from the LCT (this is because the machine has no jam detection). 2. Set DPS101 for the free run as shown above. 3. Turn the main switch off, wait a few seconds, then switch back on. 4. Press SW101 to start the free run. 5. To stop the free run, press SW102.
3.2 TEST POINTS

No. TP100 TP101 TP103 TP104 TP105 TP106 Label (24 V) (GND) (TXD) (RXD) (5 V) (GND) Monitored Signal +24 V Ground TXD to the copier RXD from the copier +5 V Ground
3.3 SWITCHES
No. SW101 SW102 Function Starts the free run Stops the free run
3.4 FUSES
No. FU101 Function Protects the 24 V line.
SM
9-9
A257/A269
COVER REPLACEMENT

4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[D]
[F]
[B] [A]
[C]
[E]
A683R500.WMF
Tray Cover
1. Remove the tray cover [A] (1 snap ring).
Front Cover
1. Remove the front cover [B] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the tray cover. 2. Remove the cover hinge [C] (2 screws). 3. Remove the rear cover [D] (3 screws).
Right Lower Cover

1. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws).
Upper Cover
1. Remove the front cover. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Remove the upper cover [F].
A257/A269 9-10 SM
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
A683R501.WMF
1. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. 2. Open the tray cover.
Pick-up Roller
3. Replace the pick-up roller [A] (1 snap ring).
Paper Feed Roller

3. Replace the paper feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
Separation Roller
3. Remove the guide plate [C] (2 screws). 4. Replace the separation roller [D] (1 snap ring).
SM
9-11
A257/A269
TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A] [C]
[B]
A683R502.WMF
1. Remove the front and rear cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
Tray Lift Sensor

3. Replace the tray lift sensor [B] (1 connector).
Paper End Sensor

3. Replace the paper end sensor [C] (1 connector).
A257/A269
9-12
SM
RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

A683R503.WMF
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B] [A]
[C]
1. Pull out the LCT. 2. Remove the joint guide [A] (4 screws). 3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (1 screw). 4. Replace the relay sensor [C] (1 connector).
SM
9-13
A257/A269
SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE

A4 LT
[B]
[A] A4 LT
A683R504.WMF
1. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. 2. Remove the tray cover. 3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] (1 screw each). 4. Install the side fences in the correct position.
A257/A269
9-14
SM
A831 SORTER STAPLER
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Number of Bins: Paper for Proof Tray: Size: Weight: Capacity: Paper for Bins:
Maximum paper size Minimum paper size
Console
Stapler Sorter A831 A257/A269
20 + Proof Tray Maximum: 13" x 19" Minimum: A6 lengthwise, 51/2" x 81/2" 64 ~ 157 g/m2, 17 ~ 42 lb. 250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) See the table below.
Stack 13" x 19" Sideways: A5, 51/2" x 81/2" Lengthwise: A6, 81/2" x 51/2" 250 g/m2, 66 lb. 64 g/m2, 17 lb. All sizes: 50 sheets/bin 2 sided copies: 40 sheets/bin Staple 13" x 19" B5, 81/2" x 11"
Sort 13" x 19" Sideways: A5, 51/2" x 81/2" Lengthwise: A5, 51/2" x 81/2" Maximum paper weight 250 g/m2, 66 lb. Minimum paper weight 64 g/m2, 17 lb. Maximum capacity All sizes: 50 sheets/bin 2 sided copies: 40 sheets/bin
200 g/m2, 53 lb. 64 g/m2, 17 lb. All sizes 50 sheets/bin 2 sided copies: 40 sheets/bin
Staple Position: a d e
A831V500.WMF
c
Staple mode 1........................... Staple mode 2........................... Staple mode 3...........................
a = 6 3 mm b = 6 3 mm c = 6 3 mm d = 66 3 mm e = 132 2 mm = 45 5
SM
10-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Staple Replenishment: Power Source: Power Consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:
Cartridge refill (5,000 pieces/cartridge) DC24 V (from copier) Average: less than 60 W 600 x 615 x 980 (23.6 x 24.2 x 38.6) Approximately 65 kg (143 LBS.)
A257/A269
10-2
SM
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2 1 3
Stapler Sorter A831
10
8 5
A821V503.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Proof tray Reverse unit Turn gate Entrance sensor Staple unit
6. Grip assembly 7. Bin drive motor 8. Helical wheels 9. Bins 10. Upper guide plate
SM
10-3
A257/A269
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
2 1
3 4
15
14 13
6 7 8
12 11 10
A831V504.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Main motor Main drive belt Drive belt 1 Drive belt 2 Sort timing belt 1 Sort timing belt 2 Staple unit drive belt Gripper motor
9. Gripper drive motor 10. Bin drive motor 11. Jogger motor 12. Wheel drive belts 13. Bin rear belt 14. Bin rear belt drive motor 15. Sorter exit motor
A257/A269
10-4
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
2.1.1 NORMAL (PROOF MODE) AND SORT/STACK MODE
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A831D151.WMF
Copies exiting the copier pass through the entrance guide plates [A] to the turn gate section. The turn gate [B] will send copies either to the proof tray or to the bins, depending on the mode.
Normal (Proof) Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Proof Tray)
The turn gate solenoid energizes to turn the turn gate clockwise after pressing the Start key. The main motor turns counter-clockwise to rotate the vertical transport rollers [C] and proof exit roller [D]. The turn gate directs copies through the proof transport section to the proof tray.
SM
10-5
BASIC OPERATION
Sort Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins)

[F]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[H] [C]
[I] [G]
A831D152.WMF
In this mode, the turn gate solenoid remains off to maintain the turn gate [A] in the upper position. The main motor turns clockwise to rotate the sorter transport rollers [B] and the exit motor rotates the exit rollers [C]. The turn gate directs copies to the sorter bins through the sorter transport section, delivering the first copy between the top bin [D] and the upper guide plate [E]. The jogger plate [F] then jogs to square the copies each time. Before the next copy reaches the sorter exit roller, the bin drive motor [G] rotates and advances the bin one step (the helical wheels [H] rotate once). When the cut out of the actuator reaches below the wheel sensor [I], the bin drive motor turns off. The bin advances with each delivered copy.
A257/A269
10-6
SM
BASIC OPERATION
Stack Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins)

[F]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[H] [C]
[I] [G]
A831D152.WMF
As with sort mode, the turn gate solenoid stays off and the turn gate [A] stays up after pressing the start key. The main motor turns clockwise to rotate the sorter transport rollers [B] and the exit motor rotates the exit rollers [C]. The turn gate directs copies to the sorter bins through the sorter transport section, delivering the copies between the top bin [D] and the upper guide plate [E]. The jogger plate [F] then jogs back and forth to square the copies each time. All copies from the copy run then feed into the first bin. When the final copy is delivered, the wheel drive motor [G] turns and advances the bin one step (the helical wheels [H] rotate once). When the cut out of the actuator reaches below the wheel sensor [I], the bin drive motor turns off.
SM
10-7
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
BASIC OPERATION
Reverse Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins)

[D]
[G] [E] [F] [A]
[B]
[C]
A831D152.WMF
As with reverse mode, the turn gate [A] stays up after pressing the start key. The main motor turns clockwise to rotate the sorter transport rollers [B]. Then reverse solenoid energizes to the reverse gate [C] counter-clockwise after pressing the start key. The reverse motor rotates the reverse rollers [D] to transport the paper into the reverse unit [E]. Then the reverse gate is released. Main motor and reverse motor rotates counter-clockwise to deliver the copies between the top bin [F] and the upper guide plate [G].
A257/A269
10-8
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.2 STAPLE MODE
A831D503.PCX
[A]
[B]
A831D504.PCX
After jogging the final set of copies, the staple unit staples the stacked copies as follows: The grip arms move inside the front side plate and catch the paper. The rear bin plate [A] is turned so it is flat with the sorter bin. The grip assembly brings the copies down underneath the stapler [B]. The staple unit changes the position (the position varies depending on the copy size and staple mode) and the stapler staples the copies.
SM
10-9
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
BASIC OPERATION
[A]
A831D505.PCX
The grip assembly brings the stapled copies back to the bin and the bin rear plate [A] returns to the original position. The grip assembly releases the copies and return to outside the front side plate so as not to disturb the bin movement. The bin advances one step. After stapling the final set of copies, the staple unit returns to the home position. There are two staple modes: 1) Automatic stapling: In ADF mode, when the staple mode is selected before pressing the start key, copies will be delivered to each bin and stapled automatically. 2) Manual stapling: In sort mode, after sorting the copies in the bins, the stapling mechanism will staple them after the user presses the manual staple key and selects the staple position. In stack mode, manual stapling is impossible.
A257/A269
10-10
SM
TURN GATE SECTION
2.2 TURN GATE SECTION
[A]
[C]
[B]
[H]
A831D103.WMF
A831D104.WMF
[C]
The turn gate [A] sends copies to the proof tray or the sorter bins depending on the mode. In proof mode, the turn gate solenoid [B] turns on and the main motor [C] turns clockwise after pressing the start key. The turn gate [A] directs copies upward through the proof transport section to the proof tray. In the sort, stack and staple modes, the turn gate solenoid stays off to direct copies to the sorter transport section. After the user presses the start key, the main motor [C] turns counter-clockwise.
SM
10-11
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
BIN DRIVE MECHANISM
2.3 BIN DRIVE MECHANISM
[E] [E]
[D]
15 30 [G] [A] [F] 40 40 [B]

A831D508.WMF
45
[C]
15 15
A831D509.WMF
The bin drive mechanism moves the bins up and down to receive copies. The main components in this mechanism are the bin drive motor [A], the two helical wheels [B], the wheel sensor [C], and the bins [D] themselves. There are four pins on each bin. Two of them fit in the slot on the helical wheels. Other two pins fit into the slots [E] of the side frames. The pins slide up and down in these slots. Two timing belts transmit the drive from the bin drive motor to the two helical wheels. When it rotates clockwise, the bins lift (black arrow) and when it rotates counter-clockwise, the bins lower (white arrow). There is a wheel sensor actuator on the front helical wheel; the actuator has a slot, which detects when the helical wheel has rotated 360 degrees. When the bins advance, the helical wheels rotate once (360 degrees) for each step. The spiral pitch on the helical wheel is greater when bins are at the staple and paper exit area than elsewhere. Consequently, the amount of bin shift is greater when bins are at the staple and paper exit area. This leaves enough space to staple [F] and stack paper [G] and reduces the total machine height.
A257/A269
10-12
SM
BIN HOME POSITION
2.4 BIN HOME POSITION
[A] [E]
A831D510.WMF
[B] [D]
[C]
A831D511.WMF
The bin HP sensor [A] and the wheel sensor [B] ensure that the sorter exit roller is between the upper guide plate [C] and the 1st bin [D] when all the bins are in their home position. After turning on the main switch, the bin lift motor [E] lowers the bins (turns counter-clockwise) until the bottom bin actuates the bin HP sensor. Then, the bin lift motor raises the bins (turns clockwise) until the wheel sensor activates. Consequently, the bins are in the home position.
SM
10-13
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
JOGGER SECTION
2.5 JOGGER SECTION
[B]
[A]
A831D512.WMF
After pressing the start key in the sort, staple and stack modes, the copier sends the paper size information to the sorter/stapler. In accordance with this data, the jogger motor [A] drives the jogger plate [B] from the jogger HP to a width 10 mm wider than the selected paper. 300 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes underneath the jam sensor, the jogger motor rotates forward and in reverse. This makes the jogger plate push all the copies against the front side plate to square the sheets. When the jogger plate pushes the paper, the plate shifts to a position 5 mm wider than the paper size when the bins lift. It shifts to a position 1 mm narrower than the paper size when the bins lowers.
A257/A269
10-14
SM
BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION
2.6 BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION

Fig. 1 [I] [A] [G] [F] [J] [C]
Stapler Sorter A831
Fig. 2 [E] [A]
[B] [D] [H]
[I] [F] [G]

A831D515.WMF
The bin rear plates [A] stand up as shown (Fig. 1). They are lowered only during stapling as shown (Fig. 2). In staple mode, when the jogger plate has jogged all copies, the bin rear plate drive motor [B] rotates a gear [C]. The gear [C] drives the piston rod [D], pushing the lever [E] down. The holder [F] engaging the pin [G] on the bin rear plate lowers in accordance with the lever [E] position. Thus, the bin rear plate becomes flat so as not to interfere with the copies brought to the staple position by the grip assembly. During stapling, the actuator [I] interrupts the rear plate open sensor [H] (Fig. 2) for the bin. When the bin rear plates are in their home position, the actuator [I] interrupts their HP sensor [J] (Fig. 1). Under this condition, a pin [G] enters the holder [F] or passes through it. After stapling is complete and the stapled paper returns to the bin, the gear [C] rotates 180 degrees and the bin rear plate returns to its home position.
SM
10-15
A257/A269
GRIP ASSEMBLY
2.7 GRIP ASSEMBLY

The grip assembly catches the jogged copies and moves them to the staple unit. After stapling, the grip assembly catches the copies again and moves them back. The grip assembly consists of grip arms, and the grip and grip shift motors. The grip arms catch the paper. The grip motor moves the grip arms inside and outside, and enables the grip arms to catch the paper. The grip shift motor causes the grip arms to carry the paper to the staple unit.
A257/A269
10-16
SM
GRIP ASSEMBLY
2.7.1 GRIP MOTOR

[B] [A]
Stapler Sorter A831
[C]
[F]
A831D516.WMF
[C]
[E] [D]
A831D517.WMF
When the grip motor [A] rotates several times, the lever [B] moves inside and pushes the grip arms [C]. After the grip motor rotates some more, the bracket [D] moves upward and pushes the pressure arm [E]. When the pressure arm move upward, the grip springs [F] attract the upper grip arms, then the grip arms catch the paper.
SM
10-17
A257/A269
GRIP ASSEMBLY
2.7.2 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
A831D518.WMF
The grip shift motor [A], a stepper motor, enables the grip arms to carry the paper to the staple unit and after stapling make it carry them back. The grip shift motor HP sensor [B] is actuated while the gripper is in the home (grip) position. The sorter/stapler main control board sends the appropriate pulses to the grip shift motor to determine the grip and staple positions. Vertical staple positions are adjusted by changing the DIP SW 2 on the main control board of sorter stapler.
A257/A269
10-18
SM
STAPLE UNIT
2.8 STAPLE UNIT

2.8.1 STAPLE UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
A831D519.WMF
The staple unit moves from the home position (top slant position) to the rear side of the machine in order to change the staple position. The staple HP sensor [A] activates when the staple unit is in the home position. In Top Slant mode, the stapler is only at the home position. In Top (or Bottom) single staple mode, the staple unit moves to the front (or rear) single staple position and stays there until stapling is complete. It then returns to the home position. In 2 Staples mode or Bottom single staple mode; the staple positions differ according to the paper size. The staple unit drive motor [B] is a stepper motor, and the number of steps from the home position determine the staple position. In 2 Staples mode, the staple unit goes back and forth to staple the two positions. Horizontal staple positions are adjusted by changing the DIP SW 2 on the main control board of sorter stapler.
SM
10-19
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
STAPLE UNIT
2.8.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B] [C] [I] [E] [A]

A831D520.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
A831D521.WMF
The stapler motor [A] drives the staple sheet drive belt. The staple sheets go under the hammer [B]. The stapler motor drives the staple hammer via gears [C], two eccentric cams [D]. When the grip brings the aligned copies to the staple position, the stapler motor starts rotating. When the cams complete one rotation, the staple HP sensor [E] is de-actuated. The stapler motor then stops. When the paper sensor [F] in the grip assembly does not detect that the copies are under the hammer, the stapler motor does not rotate. There are two sensors in the staple unit. One is the staple end sensor [G], which detects staple end conditions. The other is the cartridge set sensor [H],which detects when the staple cartridge is not installed. The staple cartridge has a clinch area [I], a deposit for jammed staples. Operators can remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
A257/A269 10-20 SM
STAPLE UNIT
Staple Prohibit Conditions

1. Under the following conditions, staple mode is disabled after pressing the staple key on the operation panel: If paper is in the bin before turning on the main switch. If the selected paper size does not match stapling specifications. If the paper comes from the by-pass feed table. 2. Under the following conditions, staple mode is canceled: If paper is manually loaded into a bin after selecting staple mode. If only one sheet is delivered to the bin. If the stack, slip-sheet or interrupt modes are selected. 3. Under the following conditions, manual stapling mode in sort mode is prohibited: If paper is manually loaded into a bin after selecting sort mode. If the paper size in the bin does not match stapling specifications. If only one sheet is delivered to the bin. The delivery of a smaller width paper to the bin later in Mixed Sizes mode. If copies already stapled, remain in the bin.
SM
10-21
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
STAPLE UNIT
2.8.3 STAPLE UNIT PULLED-OUT MECHANISM
[C]
[B] [D]
[A]
A831D524.WMF
For easy staple cartridge replenishment, the staple unit can be pulled-out from the front. Pulling out the R3 release grip [A] releases the stopper and enables the staple unit to be removed (staple unit pulled-out position). In this position, the stopper arm [B] locks the staple unit by dropping the arm to the edge of bracket [C]. When the staple unit is not in completely (the staple unit is between the staple unit HP and the staple unit pulled-out positions [D]), the LCD displays a message advising the user to set the staple unit in the home position.
A257/A269
10-22
SM
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL
3. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL
[A] [G]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
A831R101.WMF
1. Remove the proof tray [A] (2 screws). 2. Open the front door [B] and push away the staple unit. 3. Remove the lower cover [C]. 4. Remove the front inner cover [D] (3 screws). 5. Remove the left front cover [E] (2 screws). 6. Lift up the front door and remove it. 7. Remove the rear cover [F] (4 screws). 8. Remove the left upper cover [G] (2 screws).
SM
10-23
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
3.2 STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
[A] [F] [B]

A831R501.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
A831R502.WMF
1. Return the staple unit [A] to the home position by pulling out the staple unit. 2. Pull out the R3 release lever [B] and pull out the staple unit. 3. Remove the harness cover [C]. 4. Remove the staple unit [D] (1 connector and 1 screw). NOTE: When re-assembling the parts, hook the cutout [E] to the shoulder screw [F].
A257/A269
10-24
SM
JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIOIN
3.3 JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIOIN

[A]
[B]
[C] [E]
A831R503.WMF
[D]
A831R504.WMF
Removal
1. Remove the proof tray. (Refer to Exterior Cover Removal, section 4.1.) 2. Release the spring [A] of the upper jogger holder [B], and then pull out the jogger plate [C].
Installation
1. Insert the jogger plate through the upper holder [B]. 2. Push down the jogger plate towards the lower holder [D]. 3. Set the jogger plate in the lower holder [D]. 4. Hook the spring [A] of the upper jogger holder to the stopper [E].
SM
10-25
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
BINS REMOVAL
3.4 BINS REMOVAL

Removal
[A] [D]
A831R505.WMF
[C]
[B]
A831R542.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Raise all bins to the highest position by turning on DIP SW100-1 on the main PCB for the sorter, then turn off the main switch of the copier. 3. Remove the jogger plate (refer to Jogger Plate Removal) then move the upper jogger holder [A] to the front side. 4. Remove the rear cover then remove the bottom plate to access the drive belt. (Refer to Exterior Cover Removal section.) 5. Manually rotate the helical wheel drive belt [B] and move up the top guide [C] until the three guide pins [D] reach the top of the helical wheel as shown.
A257/A269
10-26
SM
BINS REMOVAL
[B]
[D]
[A] [F] [H]
[C]
A831R507.WMF
[E]
[G]
A831R508.WMF
6. Remove the top guide by releasing two pins [A and B] from the cutouts [C and D] at the end of the bin guide slots. Then remove the pins [E and F] from the cutouts [G and H]. 7. Move the next bin to the top position by manually rotating the helical wheel drive belt and remove it according to the removal procedure for the top guide (step 5 and 6). 8. Remove the other nineteen bins by repeating step 7.
SM
10-27
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
BINS REMOVAL
Installation
[H] [A]
[F] [E]
[B] [E] [D] [G]

A831R509.WMF
[J]
A831R510.WMF
[I]
1. While holding the bin rear plate [A] straight, insert the rear right guide pin [B] into the slot [C], and then lower the rear guide pin to the corner [D]. 2. While still holding the bin rear plate straight, insert the front right guide pin [E] to guide slot [F]. 3. Insert the other guide pins [G] and [H] to the slots [I] and [J].
A257/A269
10-28
SM
BINS REMOVAL
[B] [A]
A831R511.WMF
Good
No Good
A831R512.WMF
4. Manually rotate the helical wheel drive belt [A] and lower the bin. NOTE: Before installing the next bin, rotate the helical wheels only once. Otherwise, the distance between the guide pins [B] become uneven and the bin tilts. 5. Set all bins and the top cover by repeating steps 1 to 4. 6. Re-install the jogger plate and all covers.
SM
10-29
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL
3.5 MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
A831R116.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (4 screws). 2. Disconnect the connector [A]. 3. Remove the main motor [B] (4 screws).
A257/A269
10-30
SM
GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
3.6 GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
[A]
[B] [D]
[C]
A831R514.WMF
1. Open the front door then remove the front inner cover. (Refer to Exterior Cover Removal, section 4.1.) 2. Disconnect the four connectors [A to D]. NOTE: When re-connecting the connectors, connect the longer harness [A] to grip shift motor HP sensor and the shorter harness [B] to grip motor HP sensor. 3. Remove the grip assembly.
SM
10-31
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
UPPER GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
3.7 UPPER GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

[C]
[A]
[B]
A831R515.WMF
1. Remove the grip assembly. (Refer to Grip Assembly Removal, section 4.6.) 2. Remove the timing belt securing bracket [A] (1 screw). 3. Remove the grip shift shaft [B] (1 E-ring). 4. While closing the upper-grip assembly [C], remove it.
A257/A269
10-32
SM
GRIP SHIFT MOTOR REMOVAL
3.8 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
A831R516.WMF
1. Remove the upper grip assembly. (Refer to Upper Grip Assembly Removal, section 4.7.) 2. Mark the original position of the screw [A] securing the grip shift motor [B]. 3. Remove the grip shift motor. NOTE: When re-installing the grip shift motor, place the motor at the original position by referring to the mark you made.
SM
10-33
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
HELICAL WHEELS REMOVAL
3.9 HELICAL WHEELS REMOVAL

Removal
Before removing the helical wheels, remove all bins and all exterior covers. (Refer to Exterior Cover, section 4.1, and Bins Removal, section 4.4.)
Front Helical Wheel

[A] [F]
[D]
A831R523.WMF
[B]
[B]
A831R524.WMF
[C] [C] [E]

A831R525.WMF
1. Remove the bracket [A] (4 screws). 2. Unhook the two springs [B]. 3. Loosen the two Allen screws [C]. 4. Remove the wheel sensor bracket [D] (1 screw). 5. While holding the pulley [E] to keep it in position, remove the helical wheel [F].
A257/A269 10-34 SM
Rear Helical Wheel
[A]
[D] [C]
[B]
1. Remove the bracket [A] (3 screws). 2. Loosen the two Allen screws [B] on the drive pulley. 3. While holding the pulley [C] to keep it in position, remove the helical wheel [D].
SM
10-35
A257/A269
Stapler Sorter A831
Installation
NOTE: After installing the helical wheels, perform the helical wheels alignment which is explained later.
Rear Helical Wheel
[B] [D] [E]
[A] [C]
A831R528.WMF
[B] [F]
A831R529.WMF
1. Place the bearing [A] on the notch on the bottom plate. 2. Set the helical wheel [B] into the pulley [C] then set the helical wheel on the bearing [A]. 3. Set the bracket with the bushing [D] on top of the helical wheel then install and slightly tighten three screws [E]. 4. Place a 0.4-mm thickness gauge [F] between the helical wheel [B] and the bushing [D] on the bracket. While holding the bushing down to the helical wheel, tighten the three screws [E].
A257/A269
10-36
SM
Front Helical Wheel
[D] [K]
[F]
Stapler Sorter A831
[G]
[D] [C] [B]

A831R530.WMF
[H]
[A] [J]
A831R531.WMF
[I] [E] [L]

A831R532.WMF
1. Place the bearing [A] on the notch [B] on the bottom plate. 2. Set the pulley [C] on the bearing. The direction of the pulley should be as shown in the illustration. 3. Set the helical wheel [D] in the pulley [C]. Leave the Allen screws [E] loosened. 4. Set the bracket with a bushing [F] on top of the helical wheels then install and slightly tighten the four screws [G]. 5. Place a 0.4-mm thickness gauge [H] between the helical wheel and the bushing on the bracket. While holding the bushing down to the helical wheel [D], tighten the four screws [G]. 6. Hook tension springs [I and J] then tighten the screw [K]. 7. Install the wheel sensor bracket [L].
SM 10-37 A257/A269
Alignment of the 2 Helical Wheels

[B] [A]
[C] [C]
A831R533.WMF
[E] [D] Front D = 1.7 0.5 mm E = 22.5 0.5 mm

A831R534.WMF
Rear
1. Confirm all belts are set correctly. 2. Align all holes [A] at the middle of the helical wheels at the center of the bin guide slots [B], as shown. 3. In this condition, tighten all Allen screws [C] on the helical wheel drive pulleys (2 Allen screws on each drive pulley). Make sure that the gaps [D and E] between the base plates and the pulleys are as shown in the illustration.
A257/A269
10-38
SM
GRIP MOTOR AND SENSORS REMOVAL
3.10 GRIP MOTOR AND SENSORS REMOVAL

3.10.1 GRIP MOTOR/GRIP MOTOR HP SENSOR/GRIP SHIFT MOTOR HP SENSOR REMOVAL
Stapler Sorter A831
[D]
[B]
[C] [A]
A831R517.WMF
1. Remove the grip assembly. (Refer to Grip Assembly Removal, section 4.6.) 2. Replace the grip motor HP sensor [A]. 3. Replace the grip shift motor HP Sensor [B]. 4. Mark the original position of the screw [C] securing the grip motor [D]. 5. Remove the grip motor. NOTE: When re-installing the grip motor, place the motor at the original position by referring to the mark you made.
SM
10-39
A257/A269
MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT
3.11 MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT
[A]
A831R518.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (refer to Exterior Cover Removal, section 4.1) then disconnect all connectors. 2. Remove the main control board [A] (3 screws). 3. Install the new main control board and set all connectors. 4. Position DIP 1, 2 and 3 as on the original main control board (DIP 1 is for SP mode, DIP 2 and 3 are for staple position adjustment). 5. Turn on the main switch for the copier, and then confirm the staple position. If incorrect, adjust the staple position. (Refer to the SP mode Staple Position Adjustment, section 4.11.)
A257/A269
10-40
SM
SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD)
4. SP MODE AND STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

4.1 SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD)
DIP 1 (Mode) SP Mode
1 0 0 1 1 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 Function Normal Setting System Free Run 1 Durability Free Run System Free Run 2 Bin Top Position PCB Test 1: ON : Not Concerned
4.1.1 DIP SWITCHES
0: OFF
DIP 2 (Staple) Staple Position Adjustment (A) DIP 3 (Chuck) Staple Position Adjustment (B)
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0: OFF Standard Position 0 mm + 0.5 mm + 1.0 mm + 1.5 mm + 2.0 mm + 2.5 mm + 3.0 mm + 3.5 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 2.5 mm 3.0 mm 3.5 mm 1: ON : Not Concerned
Feed direction
A831M051.WMF
SM
10-41
A846 FILM PROJECTOR UNIT
OVERVIEW
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Acceptable Film Types: Type: Positive film/Negative film Size: 35 mm - Approx. 140 x 210 mm (5.5 x 8.3) Others: 45 x 60 mm, 60 x 60 mm, 60 x 70 mm, 60 x 80 mm, 60 x 90 mm, 4" x 5" Max: 142 x 210 mm or 5.6" x 8.2" Mount: Strip: Focusing: Effective Film Area: Projection Ratio Copy Image Size Yes (Up to 5 frames can be set in the film holder.)
Film Projector Unit A846
Yes (A series of 6 frames can be set in the film holder.) Approx. 21.5 x 33.0 mm Approx. x 6
Fixed/Manual 35 mm: 35 mm: Other Sizes: Full Size Other Sizes: x 1 35 mm mount: 120.8 x 192.7 mm (4.8 x 7.6) 35 mm strip: Other Sizes: 129.3 x 198.6 mm (5.1 x 7.8) Full Size
All the reproduction features of the copier are available. Power Source: Dimensions (W x D x H): 120 V 60 Hz, more than 0.9 A 220 ~ 240 V 50/60 Hz, more than 0.5 A Projector: 300 x 442 x 212 mm 11.8" x 17.4" x 8.35" Mirror Unit: 298 x 232 x 50 mm 11.73" x 9.13" x 1.97" Weight: Projector: 10 kg, 22.1 lb. Mirror unit: 5 kg, 11.1 lb.
Remarks: The holder is required for installation.
SM
11-1
A257/A269
OVERVIEW
2. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT AND DESCRIPTIONS

1 2 3 4
9 5
A718V500.PCX
8
Symbol PCB1 Projector Control Board PCB2 PCB3 M1 SW1 L1 TH1 Lamp Thermofuse TF1 TR1 Transformer Noise Filter Board (220240V machine only) Lamp Cooling Fan Projector Switch Projector Lamp Lamp Thermistor Name Projector Lamp Regulator
6 7
Function Index No. 4 Supplies dc voltage to the projector lamp and lamp cooling fan. Controls the projector unit, communicating with the copier main board. Removes electrical noise. Blows air to the projector lamp section. Provides power to the projector unit. Applies light to the film for exposure. Detects the temperature around the projector lamp to control the lamp cooling fan. Opens the projector lamp circuit if the projector lamp section overheats. Steps down the wall voltage to 17 18 V ac.
5 3 2 1 7 8
9 6
A257/A269
11-2
SM
OVERVIEW
3. SECTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
3.1 OVERVIEW
[C]
[H] [G] [I] [E] [A]

[B]
[J]
[D] [F]
[K]
A718D500.WMF
This film projector unit allows copying from the following kinds of films: 35 mm positive slides (both mount films and glass mount films) 35 mm negative or positive strip films Positive or negative films of a wide size (45 x 60/60 x 60/60 x 70/60 x 80/60 x 90 mm/4" x 5"/ Maximum size of 142 x 210 mm or 5.6" x 8.2") The light from the projector lamp [A] is reflected by the reflector [B] and reaches the film (35 mm) in the film/slide holder [C] through the non-spherical lens [D], heat filter [E], and condenser lenses [F]. The projected film image reaches the mirror [G] through the correction filter (positive or negative) [H] and projection lens [I]. Then the mirror reflects the image onto the exposure glass through the Fresnel lens [J]. The first scanner moves under the exposure glass to read the projected film image and the light of the image is converted to R/G/B electrical signals by the CCD [K]. The 35 mm film's image is enlarged about 6 times when projected onto the exposure glass. For wide films, the first scanner reads the film placed on the exposure glass directly using the light from the projector lamp. The lamp cooling fan turns on and off depending on the temperature of the projector lamp section detected by the lamp thermistor. It turns on at around 45C and turns off at around 44C.
SM
11-3
A257/A269
SHADING
3.2 SHADING
When the projector unit is selected, shading should be done after selecting the type of film. The shading should be done with a base film and the N-correction filter for the negative films and with the P-correction filter (without base film) for the positive films. The N-correction filter corrects the color and intensity of the projected light. The Pcorrection filter corrects the light intensity of the projected light so that it becomes similar to that for the negative films. When "Shading" is performed, the first scanner moves and stops under the mirror unit. Then AGC (Auto Gain Control) for the light intensity from the projector lamp is performed. Shading for black and white levels is also performed after the AGC. This "Shading" should be performed whenever the type of film is changed or the mirror unit is moved.
A257/A269
11-4
SM
MIRROR UNIT
3.3 MIRROR UNIT

[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
A718D501.PCX
[A] [C] [B]
[D] [E] [F]

A718D502.PCX
The film image projected through the projection lens [A] is reflected to the Fresnel lens [B] by the mirror [C]. The Fresnel lens consists of two components, a circular-pitch Fresnel lens [D] and a parallel-pitch Fresnel lens [E]. The circular-pitch Fresnel lens changes divergent light to parallel light. The parallel-pitch Fresnel lens collects the light from the circular-pitch Fresnel lens in the main scan direction so that all the light reaches the color CCD lens [F]. The use of these two types of Fresnel lens makes the most of the light intensity from the projector lamp.
SM 11-5 A257/A269
A839 CONTROLLER INTERFACE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A] [B] [C]
[D]
[E]
A839I101.WMF
A839I501.WMF
[I]
[H]
Controller Interfacea A839
[F]
[G]
A839I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: Remove the platen cover or ADF if it is installed. 1. Remove the cover plate [A] from the operation panel with a small blade screwdriver. Then, install the controller LCD panel [B] on the operation panel (1 connector). 2. Remove the upper rear cover [C] from the copier (2 screws) and cut out the 2 plastic caps [D] and harness inlet plate [E] from the upper rear cover with cutting pliers. 3. Remove the 2 plastic caps [F] from the rear cover [G]; then, remove the 4 metal caps [H] with a blade screwdriver as shown. NOTE: Place a hand over the metal caps as you prize them out to prevent them from flying loose. 4. Remove the rear cover (5 screws) and shield cover [I] (4 screws). (The shield cover will not be used any more.)
SM 12-1 A257/A269
[F] [E] [A]
[C]
[B]
[G] [D] [A] [C] [J] [K]
[B]
A839I104.WMF
[H]
[K]
[L] [N] [O]
[O] [I]
A839I113.WMF
[N]
[P]
A839I114.WMF
[M]
5. Open 4 clamps [A] as shown, pull out the harnesses [B] & [C], and close the clamps. Then, put the harness [C] through the harness bushing [D]. NOTE: Make sure that the harness [B] is routed as shown. If it is routed in between the bracket [E] and stay [F] as shown in doted line, the harness may touch with the flywheel [G]. 6. Secure the grounding wire [H] (1 screw). (220 ~ 240 V version only) 7. Connect the interface harness [I] (connector which has a grounding wire) to the LD control board and secure the grounding wire [J] as shown (1 screw). NOTE: Insert the connector firmly so that the lock hooks [K] are engaged as shown. 8. Reinstall the upper rear cover [L] and the rear cover [M] with the three harnesses (3 harnesses and grounding wire on 220 ~ 240 V version) outside the machine as shown. 9. Secure the hook stud screws [N] and stand-off stud screws [O] 2 each. 10. Peal off the seal of two-sided tape and attach the 2 conductive gaskets [P] as shown.
A257/A269 12-2 SM
[A] [B] [C]
[D]
A839I115.WMF
[E] [F]
A839I121.WMF
[G]
A839I108.WMF
11. Loosen the screws securing the upper shielding cover [A], left shielding cover [B], and right shielding cover [C]; then, remove them from the interface unit [D]. 12. Put the 3 harnesses (3 harnesses and grounding wire on 220 ~ 240 V version) through the cut-out of the interface unit and hook the interface unit on the stud screws [E]. Then, secure the 3 screws ( 2 screws go into the stand-off stud screws [F]) and 1 grounding screw [G].
SM
12-3
A257/A269
[E] [C]
[B]
[D]
[L] [K] [A] [J] [K] [H] [I] [F] [G] [M]
A839I117.WMF
[O] [N] [O]

A839I118.WMF
13. Secure the grounding wire [A] (1 screw). (220 ~ 240 V version only) 14. Secure the harness [B] in the clamp [C] and connect the 2P connector on the power supply board [D] of the interface unit. Then, secure the grounding wire [E] as shown (1 screw). 15. Connect the 24P connector [F] on the interface board [G] and secure the harness in the clamp [H]. 16. Connect the interface harness [I] to the interface board and secure the harness in the clamp [J]. NOTE: Insert the connector firmly so that the lock hooks [K] are engaged as shown. Make sure that the ferrite core [L] is placed in the space of the cut out of the interface unit as shown. 17. Insert the controller box [M] in the interface unit [N] (2 screws) (Look down through the top of the interface unit to see the connectors. The controller box needs to be pulled up slightly to engage the connectors smoothly.) NOTE: Make sure that the connectors [O] are firmly connected.
A257/A269 12-4 SM
[C]
[A]
A839I111.WMF
[B] [D]
A839I119.WMF
A839I120.WMF
18. Reinstall the left shield cover [A] (7 screws). 19. Reinstall the right shield cover [B] (6 screws) and upper shield cover [C] (2 screws). 20. Install the interface unit cover [D] (4 screws). 21. See the service manual for printer set-up.
SM
12-5
A257/A269
APPENDIX-A SC CODE TABLE
SC CODE TABLE
SC CODE TABLE
SC No. Item Detection Conditions
- Timing & Condition The lamp output check signal (LAMPDET) is still HIGH 250 ms after the lamp turns on (the ON check is canceled if the lamp goes off within 250 ms).
Possible Causes
Related SC
Troubleshooting Procedure
1. Visually check the lamp element or check the continuity between both ends of the lamp terminals with a multimeter. 2. Check continuity at the ends of he thermostat terminals with a multi-meter. 3. Check if the connectors (CN1, CN2, and CN3) on the lamp regulator are properly connected. 4. Check the continuity of the 3 harnesses. 5. Replace the lamp regulator if 100Vac is provided from the AC drive board by checking CN3-1 and 5 on the lamp regulator. 6. Replace the AC drive board if 100Vac is not supplied at CN3 on the lamp regulator. 7. Replace the sub scanner IPU board and/or main scanner IPU board [ Signal Check ] LAMPDET: CN2-2 on lamp regulator / CN403-A10 on sub scanner IPU board LAMPTRIG: CN403-A9 on sub scanner IPU board / CN2-3 on lamp regulator
Type
D
SC101 Exposure lamp failure
Blown lamp Blown thermostat Blown fuse (FU301) Defective lamp regulator Poor connection of harnesses Defective The lamp output check harnesses signal is still LOW 30ms Defective AC drive after the lamp turns off board (the OFF check is Defective sub/main canceled if the lamp scanner IPU board turns on within 30 ms).
SM
A-1
A257/A269
SC CODE TABLE SC No. Item Detection Conditions Possible Causes Related SC

SC121
1. In SP 5-804-104, stop supplying the current to the scanner motor. Check the output signal from the scanner H.P. sensor in SP 5-803-100 by moving the scanner manually. (0: Not actuated; 1: Actuated - at H.P.) 2. If the result of step 1 is OK; 1 Check the tension of the timing belt. 2 Check if the pulley is firmly secured. 3 Check if the scanner wire is properly wired 4 Check the connection of CN700, CN701, and CN702 on the scanner motor drive board. 5 Check continuity of harnesses. 6 Replace the scanner motor drive board. 7 Replace the scanner motor. 3. If the result of step 1 is not OK; 1 Check if the harness is properly connected. 2 Check the continuity of harness. 3 Replace the sensor. 4 Replace the sub and/or main scanner IPU board(s). 5 Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Scanner HP: CN403-A1 on sub scanner IPU board Same as SC120.
Type
D
SC120 Scanner HP - Timing & Condition sensor does The scanner H.P. sensor not turn on does not turn on when the scanner moves back to the home position or at the home position check.
Scanner motor out of synchronization (drive error) Poor connection of connectors Defective scanner HP sensor The sensor output at Defective sub/main CN403-A1 stays HIGH (5V). scanner IPU board Defective main control board
Same as SC120 SC121 Scanner HP - Timing & Condition sensor does The sensor does not turn off not turn off when the scanner moves to the home position after scanning an original. The sensor output at CN403-A1 stays LOW (0V).
SC120
A257/A269
A-2
SM
SC CODE TABLE SC No. Item Detection Conditions Possible Causes

Same as SC120 or sequence error
Related SC
Same as SC120 or Replace the sub and/or main scanner IPU board(s).
Type
D
SC130 Scanner start - Timing error Scanning start During scanner motor ON
SC150 Scanner ROM mismatch
- Condition The scanning start signal is generated while the motor is moving. Total number of steps calculated based on the signal from the stepping motor is out of range. The H.P. sensor stays OFF when the scanner starts moving. - Timing An invalid IC card used (such as a After software installation or different model IC when the main switch turned card) on Replace the main scanner IPU board. - Condition Main scanner IPU detects that the software installed is not specific one.
Reinstall the correct IC card. Replace the main scanner IPU board.
SM
A-3
A257/A269
SC CODE TABLE SC No. Item Detection Conditions

- Timing When the main switch is turned on (after auto gain control at scanner IPU board)
Possible Causes
Poor connection of CCD flat cable Defective Scanner IPU board Defective CCD
Related SC
1. Check if the flat cable is firmly connected at CN501 and CN404 on the CCD board and main scanner IPU board. 2. Check the continuity of the flat cable. 3. Replace main scanner IPU board. 4. Replace CCD board as the lens unit assembly.
Type
D
SC170 Video processing error 1
- Condition The black level corrected between the Odd and Even (O/E) of the CCD is not in the proper range. Same as SC170 - Timing When the main switch is turned on (after auto gain control at scanner IPU board) - Condition The black level corrected is not in the proper range. - Timing Poor connection of CCD harness When the main switch is turned on (after auto gain Dirty optics control at scanner IPU Defective lamp board) regulator Defective main - Condition scanner IPU board The white level corrected is Defective CCD not in the proper.
Same as SC170.
1. Check SP 4-426-001 to 006 (RGB Gain). If the value of them is close to 255, clean the optics section (exposure glass, white plate, mirrors, and lens). 2. Visually check if the exposure lamp turns on during warming-up after the main switch is turned on. If not, replace the lamp regulator. 3. Check if the CCD flat cable is firmly connected at CN501 and CN404 on the CCD and scanner main IPU board. 4. Check the continuity of the flat cable. 5. Replace the main scanner IPU board. 6. Replace the CCD board as the lens unit.
A257/A269
A-4
SM

- Timing When the main switch is turned on - Condition The main scanner IPU board detects that the pattern of the bard code scanned in is not appropriate. - Timing When the main switch is turned on
Possible Causes
Non-standard bar code label Improper location of bar code Dirty bar code Defective main scanner IPU board Defective main control board Defective RAM board Defective main scanner IPU board Defective main control board
Related SC
1. Check if the bard cord is damaged or scratched. 2. Clean the optics section such as mirrors and lens and bar code. 3. Check if the mirrors are properly set on the 1st and 2nd scanners. If the spring plate, which is fix the position of mirrors, is out of position, it causes light axis to be changed. 4. Replace the main scanner IPU board. 5. Replace the main control board. 1. Check if the serial number stored in the RAM is correct. NOTE: Contacts your product specialist for the detailed procedure. 2. Replace the main scanner IPU board. 3. Replace the main control board.
Type
D
SC191 Bar code scan error
SC192 Bar code number mismatch
SC193 IDU error
- Condition The main control board detects that the bar code data scanned in does not match to the machine identification number stored in the RAM. - Timing Defective IDU When the main switch is Defective sub/main turned on scanner IPU board - Condition The IDU starts diagnosing at power-on and any hardware error is detected during diagnostics.
1. Perform the scanner IPU board test (SP 4-904-001 and 002). If not OK, replace the main and/or scanner IPU board. SP 4-904-001 or 002 0: OK 25 or 35: Replace sub scanner IPU board. Others: Replace main scanner IPU board. 2. Replace the IDU board.
SM
A-5
A257/A269

Improper serial number RAM board is replaced. Defective RAM
Related SC
1. Check and re-enter the serial number properly. NOTE: Contacts your product specialist for the detailed procedure.
Type
D
SC195 Serial - Timing number error When the main switch is turned on - Condition The serial number entered or stored in RAM is not correct. - Timing When the main charge is ON in the printing process or process control mode
Charge corona unit not installed properly Poor connection of harnesses - Condition Defective high The current leak is detected voltage supply board (C/G/B) for 2 seconds. Defective I/O control board Defective main control board. Same as SC301 - Timing SC302 Charge corona grid When the main charge grid voltage error is ON in the printing process or process control mode SC301 Charge current leak - Condition The feedback voltage is 4.8V or higher, or PMW value is 50% or higher for 500msec continuously.
1. Reinstall the charge corona unit properly or replace the charge corona unit. 2. Reconnect the connectors on the high voltage supply board (C/G/B), I/O control board, and main control board, or check the harnesses. 3. Check and clean the charge corona unit receptacle. 4. Replace the high voltage supply board (C/G/B). 5. Replace the I/O control board. 6. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Leak detection: CN217-7 or TP120 on I/O control board Same as for SC301 [ Signal Check ] Feedback signal: CN217-5, TP173, or CN211-A6 on I/O control board or CN302-A4 or TP107 on main control board PWM: CN217-6 or TP140 on I/O control board
A257/A269
A-6
SM

- Timing When the charge cleaner starts
Possible Causes
Related SC
1. Check if the connectors (CN861 & CN829) are firmly connected. 2. Check if the charge corona unit is properly set. 3. Clean the screw shaft if it is dirty. 4. Check if the cleaner pad is mechanically locked. 5. Check if the connector is firmly connected on the I/O control board (CN219). 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board.
Type
D
SC303 Charge cleaner motor error
SC320 Polygon motor error
Poor connection of connector Defective cleaner motor - Condition Cleaner pad locked Over-current is detected Defective I/O for 10 seconds when the control board cleaner pads start Defective main moving from rear to front. control board Over-current is still not detected 1 minute after the cleaner motor turns on. - Condition Poor connection of connector The polygon motor rotation speed stays out Defective polygon of the range 22 seconds motor after the main switch is Defective LD turned on. control board The polygon motor Defective main rotation speed becomes scanner IPU board out of the range while the main switch is ON. (Polygon motor keeps rotating with constant speed while the main switch is ON.)
1. Check the connector (CN602-5) on the LD control board is properly connected. 2. Check the continuity of harness. 3. Replace the polygon motor. 4. Replace the LD control board. 5. Replace the main scanner IPU board. [ Signal Check ] Motor OK: CN602-2 on LD control board.
SM
A-7
A257/A269

Poor connection of connectors Defective laser synchronizing detector board Improper laser beam axis Defective LD control board Defective main control board Defective optic housing unit
Related SC
1. Check if the connectors (CN3 & CN 602) are properly connected on the laser synchronizing detector board and LD control board 2. Remove and clean the synchronizing detector board. 3. Check if anything such as seal of the Barrel Toroidal lens in the optic housing unit interferes the laser axis. 4. Replace the synchronizing detector board. 5. Check if the harness connectors (CN1 & CN603) on the LD unit and LD control board are properly connected or check the continuity of the harness. 6. Check if the harness connectors (CN604 & CN306) on the LD control board and main control board are properly connected or check the continuity of the harness. 7. Replace the LD control board. 8. Replace the main control board 9. Check the optical housing unit or replace it. 1. Check if the connectors (CN1 & CN603) on the LD unit and LD control board are properly connected. 2. Check the continuity of the harness. 3. Check the harness connectors (CN604 & CN306)on the LD control board and main control board are properly connected. 4. Replace the LD unit. 5. Replace the LD control board 6. Replace the main control board.
Type
D
SC322 Laser - Timing & Condition synchronizin While the polygon motor g signal error keeps running and LD is ON, the LD control board does not receive the laser synchronizing signal.
SC323 LD error
- Timing During LD writing - Condition LD control boards detects the over-current or no feedback signal from LD unit.
Poor connection of connector Defective LD unit Defective LD control board Defective main control board
A257/A269
A-8
SM

- Timing & Condition The main control board does not receive FGATE signal from the LD control board while the image transfer belt makes 3 revolution after the Start key is pressed or at certain timing during copy cycle. - FAGTE signal This signal is generated at the LD control board certain timing after the LD control board receives the belt mark signal from the main control board in order to control the timing of the laser writing for color synchronization.
Possible Causes
Belt mark detection error Electrical noise Poor connection of connectors Defective LD control board Defective Main control board
Related SC
1. Clean the belt mark located back side of the image transfer belt or replace the belt if the belt mark is dirty or peel off. 2. Clean the belt mark detection sensor if it is dirty. 3. Clean the bias terminals of development units if they are dirty. 4. Check if the harness connectors (CN605 & NC406) on the LD control board and main scanner IPU board are properly connected. 5. Check if the harness connectors (CN604 & CN306) on the LD control board and main control board are properly connected. 6. Replace the LD control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] FGATE: CN604-A2 or TP22 on LD control board / CN306-A9 on main control board Belt mark: CN220-A12, TP106, or CN212-B11 on I/O control board / CN303-B1, TP108, or CN306-B2 on main control board / CN604-B9 or TP31 on LD control board If the machine is equipped with the controller, 1. Check if the connectors (CN606 & CN101) on the LD control board and controller I/F board are properly set. 2. Check if the controller I/F board is properly connected. 3. Replace the interface board.
Type
D
SC326 FGATE1 error
SM
A-9
A257/A269

SC326
Same as SC326.
Type
D
SC327 FGATE2 error
SC350 TD sensor communication error
SC351 TD Sensor Failure
Same as SC326 - Timing & Condition In the double image mode, the main control board does not receive the 2nd FGATE signal from the LD control board while the image transfer belt makes 3 revolution after the Start key is pressed or at certain timing during copy cycle. - Timing Poor connection of connectors When the main switch is turned on, during printing Defective TD process, or process control sensor interface self-check board 1 and/or 2 Defective I/O - Condition control board The main control board Defective main cannot communicate with control board TD sensors - Timing Poor connection of connector During printing process or process control self-check Defective TD sensor - Condition Defective TD The main control board sensor interface does not receive the TD board 2 sensor output or receive Defective main wrong data 4 times control board continuously.
1. Check if the connectors on the TD sensor interface board 1 (copier) and the main control board (CN353) are properly connected. 2. Check if 5V and 38V are provided to the TD sensor interface board 1 from I/O control board (CN218). 3. Check if the harnesses are damaged. 4. Check if TD sensor interface board 1 and 2 are properly installed. 5. Replace TD sensor interface board 1, 2, main control board, and/or I/O control board. 1. Check if the connectors on the TD sensor interface board 2 (revolver) and TD sensor are properly connected. 2. Check if the harnesses is damaged. 3. Replace TD sensor. 4. Replace the TD sensor interface board 2. 5. Replace the main control board.
A257/A269
A-10
SM

1. 2. 3. 4.
Clean the development roller shaft (terminal) if it. Clean the bias terminal if it is dirty. Replace the bias terminal if it does not move smoothly. Check the connectors of high voltage supply cable and trigger lines are properly connected on the high voltage supply board (C/G/B), I/O control board, and main control board. 5. Replace the high voltage supply board (C/G/B) 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Feedback signal: CN217-2, TP171, or CN211-A5 on I/O control board / CN302-A5 or TP111 on main control board PWM: CN217-3 or TP141 on I/O control board 1. Check if the connector of sensor is properly connected. 2. Replace the revolver H.P. sensor if the voltage at CN216-B5 on the I/O control board does not change when covering the sensor with a piece of paper. NOTE: Make sure that the revolver unit is locked in this step. 3. If the revolver unit does not rotate; 1 Replace the revolver motor. 2 Replace revolver motor drive board. 3 Replace the I/O control board. 4 Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Revolver H.P.: CN216-B5 or TP107 on I/O control board
Type
D
SC360 Development - Timing Poor connection of bias error connectors When the development DC bias turns ON during Dirty terminals printing process or process Defective high control voltage supply (C/G/B) - Condition Defective I/O The feedback voltage is control board 4.8V or higher, or PWM Defective main value becomes 80% or control board higher for 500 ms continuously.
SC361 Revolver HP - Timing & Condition sensor error The home position is not detected during 3 revolution of the revolver unit after the revolver motor turns on.
Poor connection of connector Dirty sensor Defective sensor Defective revolver motor Defective revolver drive board Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
SM
A-11
A257/A269
SC CODE TABLE SC No. Item Detection Conditions Possible Causes Related SC Troubleshooting Procedure
1. Check if the TD sensor connector is properly connected. 2. Clean the surface of the TD sensor. 3. Replace the TD sensor. If it becomes OK after the sensor is replaced, replace the developer of color related to the problem. If the problem is related to the toner density (too low or high), find a cause and fix it. Same as SC370
Type
D
SC370 TD sensor - Timing Poor connection of detection TD sensor harness When communicating with abnormal (K) TD sensors, during printing Dirty sensor process, or process control surface self-check Defective TD sensor - Condition Toner density is TD sensor output exceeds out of range 4.5V or becomes lower than 0.5V. Same as SC370 SC371 TD sensor detection abnormal (Y) Same as SC370 SC372 TD sensor detection abnormal (C) Same as SC370 SC373 TD sensor detection abnormal (M) - Timing SC385 ID sensor Dirty ID sensor VSG During process control self Poor connection of adjustment check, the main control connector error board detects that the signal Defective ID of Vsg fed-back from the ID sensor sensor is out of range. Poor cleaning
Same as SC370
Same as SC370
1. 2. 3. 4.
Clean the ID sensor. Check if the sensor connector is properly connected. Replace the ID sensor. Check the drum cleaning unit.
[ Signal Check ] ID sensor LED: CN216-B7 or TP103 on I/O control board ID sensor 1 (K ): CN216-B8 or TP188 on I/O control board / TP115 on main control board. ID sensor 2 ( CMY): CN216-B9 or TP187 on I/O control board / TP114 on main control board.
A257/A269
A-12
SM
1. Clean the charge unit or replace the charge wire and grid plate. 2. Reinstall the drum unit. 3. Check the drum counter (SP 7-803) and replace the drum if necessary. 4. Replace the potential sensor.
Type
D
SC387 Drum potential error
- Timing Uneven charge During initial process control Deteriorated drum check or interval (number of Defective potential copies) process control self sensor check - Condition While the revolver unit returns to the home position, the following condition is detected. VD < VG 200V VD > VG + 200V - Timing Poor connection of connectors While the image transfer belt bias is ON Defective high voltage supply board - Condition (T1/PCC/BR) The feedback voltage is Defective I/O 4.8V or higher, or PWM control board value is 50% or higher for 500ms continuously. Defective main control board
SC400 Image transfer belt bias error
1. Check if the connectors of high voltage cable and trigger lines are properly connected on the high voltage supply board, I/O control board, and main control board. 2. Replace the high voltage supply board (T1/PCC/BR). 3. Replace the I/O control board. 4. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Feedback signal: CN209-9, TP264, or CN211-A4 on I/O control board / CN302-A6 or TP106 on main control board. PWM: CN209-10 or TP272 on I/O control board.
SM
A-13
A257/A269
1. Check if the connectors on the image transfer belt drive board (CN740 and 741) and I/O control board (CN220) are properly connected. 2. Check the harnesses are damaged. 3. Replace the image transfer belt motor control board. 4. Replace image transfer belt motor. 5. Check if anything causes the load of the belt motor to be increased. [ Signal Check ] Motor OK: CN220-A2 or TP153 on the I/O control board 1. Check if the connectors on the terminal and high voltage supply board (Q1) are properly connected and if the harnesses are damaged. 2. Clean the receptacles. 3. Replace the high voltage supply board (Q1). 4. Replace the I/O control board. 5. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Leak detection: CN215-B7 or TP137 on I/O control board
Type
D
SC401 Image transfer belt motor lock
- Timing & Condition Defective image transfer belt motor The feedback signal from the motor is still out Defective image of range 2 seconds after transfer belt motor the trigger signal is sent. drive board The feedback signal Mechanical becomes out of range for problem (drive 2 seconds while the transmission) trigger signal is ON.
SC402 Image - Timing & Condition Defective high transfer belt The current leak is detected voltage supply lubricant board (Q1). more than 2 seconds. brush current Defective I/O leak control board Defective main control board
A257/A269
A-14
SM

- Timing & Condition When the current leak is detected for 2 seconds, leak detection starts 1 second after the paper separation corona turns on. The leak signal is monitored twice at every 1 second. When the leak condition is detected twice continuously, this SC is displayed. - Timing & Condition When the current leak is detected for 2 seconds, leak detection starts 1 second after the PCC turns on. The leak signal is monitored twice at every 1 second. When the leak condition is detected twice continuously, this SC is displayed.
Possible Causes
Discharge unit not properly set Corona wire broken Defective high voltage supply board (D) Defective I/O control board Defective main control board PCC unit not properly set Corona wire broken Defective high voltage supply board (T1/PCC/BR) Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
Related SC
1. Check if the discharge corona unit is properly set. 2. Replace the discharge corona wire if it is broken. 3. Check if the connectors on the terminal and high voltage supply board (D) are properly connected and if the harnesses are damaged. 4. Clean the receptacle. 5. Replace the high voltage supply board (D). 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Leak detection: CN208-1 or TP276 on I/O control board 1. Check if the PCC unit is properly set. 2. Replace the discharge wire if it is broken. 3. Check if the connectors on the terminal and high voltage supply board (T1/PCC/BR) are properly connected and if the harnesses are damaged. 4. Clean the receptacle. 5. Replace the high voltage supply board (T1/PCC/BR). 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Leak detection: CN209-6 or TP275 on I/O control board
Type
D
SC410 Paper separation current leak
SC422 PCC leak
SM
A-15
A257/A269

- Timing & Condition The feedback signal from the motor is still out of range 1 second after the trigger signal is sent. The feedback signal becomes out of range for 2 seconds while the trigger signal is ON.
Possible Causes
Poor connection of connector Defective drum motor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
Related SC
1. Check if the drum is locked by the cleaning blade. If yes, replace the cleaning blade. 2. Check if the connector (CN215) on the I/O control board is properly connected. 3. Check if the drum motor works properly in SP 5-804001 to 003. If not, replace the drum motor. 4. Replace the I/O control board. 5. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Motor OK: CN215-A7 or TP135 on the I/O control board 1. Check if the connector (CN220) on I/O control board is properly connected. 2. Check if there is any mechanical problem by rotating the motor manually. 3. Replace the drum peripheral component motor. 4. Replace the I/O control board. 5. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Motor OK: CN220-B9 or TP123 on I/O control board
Type
D
SC440 Drum motor error
SC441 Drum peripheral component motor lock
- Timing & Condition Defective motor The feedback signal Defective motor from the motor is still out dive board of range 1 second after Mechanical the trigger signal is sent. problem (drive The feedback signal transmission becomes out of range for problem) 2 seconds while the trigger signal is ON.
A257/A269
A-16
SM
1. Check if the paper transfer belt unit moves up and touch with the image transfer belt during copy cycle properly. 2. Check if the connectors of high voltage cable and trigger lines are properly connected on the high voltage supply board (T2), I/O control board, and main control board. 3. Replace the high voltage supply board (T2). 4. Replace the I/O control board. 5. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Feedback signal: CN221-A1, TP172, or CN211-A3 on I/O control board / CN302-A7 or TP105 on the main control board PWM: CN221-A2 or TP138 on I/O control board 1. Check if the connectors on the paper transfer belt drive board and I/O control board (CN221) are properly connected. 2. Check if there is any mechanical problem by rotating the motor manually. 3. Replace the paper transfer belt motor. 4. Replace the paper transfer belt motor drive board. 5. Replace the I/O control board. 6. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Feedback signal: CN221-B7 or TP154 on I/O control board
Type
D
SC450 Paper - Timing Defective high transfer bias When the paper transfer voltage supply (T2) current error bias turns on during printing Defective I/O process control board Defective main - Condition control board The feedback voltage is When the paper 4.8V or higher, or PWM transfer belt does value is 50% or higher for not touch with the 500ms continuously. image transfer belt and the paper transfer belt bias is ON
SC451 Paper transfer belt motor lock
- Timing & Condition Defective motor The feedback signal from Defective motor the motor is still out of dive board range 1 second after the Mechanical trigger signal is sent. problem (drive The feedback signal transmission becomes out of range for problem) 2 seconds while the trigger signal is ON.
SM
A-17
A257/A269

- Timing & ConditionThe main control board does not receive the belt mark detection signal from the belt mark detection sensor for a certain period.
Possible Causes
Dirty or damaged belt mark Belt mark out of position Defective sensor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
Related SC
1. Check if the image transfer release lever is properly set. 2. Clean the belt mark if it is dirty. 3. Replace the transfer belt if the belt mark peels off or damaged. 4. Clean the belt mark sensor if it is dirty. 5. Replace the belt mark detection sensor. 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Belt mark: CN220-A12, TP106, or CN212-B11 on I/O control board / CN303-B1 or TP108 on the main control board. 1. Check if the discharge corona unit is properly set. 2. Replace the discharge if it is broken. 3. Check if the connectors on the terminal and high voltage supply board (Q2) are properly connected and if the harnesses are damaged. 4. Clean the receptacle. 5. Replace the high voltage supply board (Q2). 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Leak detection: CN221-A5 or TP149 on I/O control board
Type
D
SC452 Belt mark detection error
SC455 Paper transfer belt discharge corona current leak
- Timing & Condition When the current leak is detected for 2 seconds, leak detection starts 1 second after the discharge corona turns on. The leak signal is monitored twice at every 1 second. When the leak condition is detected twice continuously, this SC is displayed.
Discharge unit not properly set Corona wire broken Defective high voltage supply board (Q2) Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
A257/A269
A-18
SM

Broken joint parts Defective paper transfer belt shift clutch Defective drum peripheral component motor Defective I/O control board
Related SC
1. Pull out and re-insert the paper transport unit. 2. Check if the joint parts are broken or not. 3. Replace the paper transfer belt unit H.P. sensor. (Input Check: SP 5-803-011) 4. Replace the paper transfer belt shift clutch. (Output Check: SP 5-804-023) 5. Replace the drum peripheral component motor. 6. Replace the I/O control board. [ Signal Check ] H.P.: CNCN221-B2or TP148 on I/O control Board
Type
D
SC456 Paper - Timing & Condition transfer unit When the paper transfer position error belt touches the image transfer belt, the paper transfer belt unit H.P. sensor signal stays HIGH. When the paper transfer belt releases from the image transfer belt. The paper transfer belt unit H.P sensor stays LOW. - Timing & Condition SC457 Image transfer belt When the belt cleaning cleaning unit section touches the position error image transfer belt, the belt cleaning sensor signal stays LOW. When the belt cleaning section releases from the image transfer belt. The belt cleaning sensor stays HIGH.
Dirty Sensor Defective sensor Defective belt cleaning shift clutch Defective drum peripheral component motor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
1. Pull out and re-insert the image transfer belt unit. 2. Clean the image transfer belt cleaning H.P. sensor if it is dirty. 3. Replace the sensor. (Input Check: 5-803-012) 4. Replace the belt cleaning shift clutch. (Output Check: SP 5-804-036) 5. Replace the drum peripheral component motor. 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] H.P.: CN219-B2 or TP108 on I/O control board
SM
A-19
A257/A269
1. Check the connectors (CN210, 211 & CN302) are properly connected on the I/O control board and main control board. 2. Replace the humidity sensor. 3. Replace the I/O control board. 4. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Temperature: CN210-1, TP247, or CN211-A9 on I/O control board / CN302-A1 or TP112 on main control board 1. Check the connectors (CN210, 211 & CN302) are properly connected on the I/O control board and main control board. 2. Replace the humidity sensor. 3. Replace the I/O control board. 4. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Humidity: CN201-4, TP236, or CN211-A8 on I/O control board / CN302-A2 or TP113 on main control board 1. Check if the connector (CN218) is properly connected on the I/O control board. 2. Replace the fusing motor. (Output check: SP 5-804005) 3. Replace the I/O control board. 4. Replace the main control board. 5. Check if anything causes overload for the fusing unit drive. [ Signal Check ] Motor OK: CN218-7 or TP104 on I/O control board A257/A269 A-20 SM
Type
C
SC495 Humidity sensor temperature detection error
- Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector The humidity sensor output for temperature is higher Defective humidity than 2.75V or less than sensor 0.25V. Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
SC496 Humidity sensor humidity detection error
- Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector The humidity sensor output for humidity is higher than Defective humidity 2V or less than 0.125V. sensor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
SC500 Fusing motor - Timing & Condition error The feedback signal from the motor is still out of range 1 second after the trigger signal is sent. The feedback signal becomes out of range for 2 seconds while the trigger signal is ON.
Poor connection of connector Defective fusing motor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board

- Timing & Condition The upper limit sensor stays HIGH when the pick-up solenoid turns off. The upper limit sensor stays LOW 1.5 seconds after the tray bottom plate goes down. The upper limit sensor stays HIGH 10 seconds after the tray bottom plate goes up. The upper limit sensor stays HIGH 3 seconds after the tray bottom plate goes up again. Not used Same as SC501
Possible Causes
Pick-up solenoid spring come off Defective upper limit sensor Defective tray bottom plate Defective tray lift motor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
Related SC
SC502 SC503 SC504
1. Check if the spring of pick-up solenoid comes off. 2. Check if the sensor harness is properly connected. 3. Clean or replace the sensor and replace it if necessary (Input Check: SP 5-803-014 to 017). 4. Replace the tray bottom lever if it is broken. 5. Pull out the paper tray and check if the tray lift motor works properly (Output Check: SP 5-804-75 to 82) 6. Replace the I/O control board. 7. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Limit sensor H.P.: CN224-A8 or TP215 on I/O control board
Type
B
SC501 1st paper tray error
SC502 2nd paper tray error SC503 3rd paper tray error
Not used SC501 SC502 SC504 Same as SC501 [ Signal Check ] Limit sensor H.P.: CN226-A8 or TP282 on I/O control board Same as SC501 [ Signal Check ] Limit sensor H.P.: CN226-B8 or TP280 on I/O control board
B B
SC504 4th paper tray error
Same as SC501
SC501 SC502 SC503
SM
A-21
A257/A269

- Timing & Condition While the paper tray is being lifted, the upper limit sensor does not activate within 2.5 seconds after the paper end sensor activates.
Possible Causes
Related SC
1. Open the LCT cover and reload paper properly. 2. Check if the paper end sensor is properly connected. 3. Replace the paper end sensor.
Type
B
SC505 LCT: Upper limit detection error
SC510 Paper feed motor error
Poor connection of the connectors Defective paper end sensor Paper is not properly loaded in the LCT or curled. - Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector The feedback signal from the motor is still out of Defective paper range 1 second after the feed motor trigger signal is sent. Defective I/O The feedback signal control board becomes out of range for Defective main 2 seconds while the control board trigger signal is ON. Mechanical overload Duplex unit not set properly Excessive load Poor connection of connector Defective side fence motor Defective I/O control board SC524
1. Check if the connector is properly connected on the I/O control board (CN230). 2. Replace the paper feed motor. (Output check: SP 5804-008 to 009) 3. Replace the I/O control board. 4. Replace the main control board. 5. Check the feed unit drive section and if anything causes overload. [ Signal Check ] Motor OK: CN230-A1 or TP269 on I/O control board 1. Pull out and re-insert the duplex unit. 2. Check the connector (CN488) is properly connected on the duplex control board. 3. Check if anything causes overload to the motor. 4. Replace the side fence motor (Output Check: SP 5-804 093 and 094). 5. Replace the I/O control board. [ Signal Check ] Duplex Side Fence H.P.: CN207-B6 or TP293 on I/O control board
SC522 Duplex - Side - Timing & Condition fence jogger The home position is still H.P. error detected a few seconds after the side fence leaves from the home position. The home position is not detected 12 seconds after the side fence moves back to the home position.
A257/A269
A-22
SM

Duplex unit not set properly Excessive load Poor connection of connector Defective end fence motor Defective I/O control board
Related SC
SC522
1. Pull out and re-insert the duplex unit. 2. Check the connector (CN484) is properly connected on the duplex control board. 3. Check if anything causes overload to the motor. 4. Replace the end fence motor (Output Check: SP 5-804 095 and 096). 5. Replace the I/O control board. [ Signal Check ] Duplex End Fence H.P.: CN207-B7 or TP288 on I/O control board 1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set. 2. Check if the thermistor connector is properly connected. 3. Replace the thermistor if it is deformed. 4. Replace the thermistor if it is opened by measuring the resistance. (Refer to the attached Temperature/ Resistance Conversion Reference Table.) 5. Replace the I/O control board. 6. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Thermistor: CN214-A4, TP234, or CN211-B1 on I/O control board / CN302-B9 or TP117 on main control board.
Type
B
SC524 Duplex - End - Timing & Condition fence jogger The home position is still H.P. error detected a few seconds after the end fence leaves from the home position. The home position is not detected 24 seconds after the end fence moves back to the home position. SC541 Hot roller thermistor open
- Timing Fusing unit not set properly at every 1 second when the fusing unit is set Poor connection of connector - Condition Defective The hot roller thermistor thermistor output is almost close to 5V, Defective I/O which is correspond to 0C, control board for 6 seconds continuously. Defective main control board
SM
A-23
A257/A269

- Timing & Condition The hot roller thermistor does not output an analog value corresponding to the ready temperature within 12 minutes after the main switch is turned on.
Possible Causes
Poor connection of connectors Hot roller fusing lamp brown Hot roller thermofuse opened Power fluctuation Defective main control board Defective I/O control board Defective AC drive board
Related SC
1. Check if the following connectors are properly connected; Hot roller fusing lamp connectors CN303 on the main control board CN212 and CN229 on the I/O control board CN7 on the AC drive board 2. Replace the hot roller fusing lamp if it is opened. 3. Replace the hot roller thermofuse if it is opened. 4. Check if the power supplied from the outlet fluctuates. 5. Replace the main control board, I/O control board, or AC drive board by checking the trigger signal at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Hot roller fusing trigger: CN303-B6 on main control board / CN212-B6, TP248, or CN229-5 on I/O control board / CN7-6 on AC drive board.
Type
A
SC542 Hot roller warm-up error
A257/A269
A-24
SM
1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set. 2. Check if the thermistor connector is properly connected. 3. Replace the thermistor if it is deformed. 4. Replace the thermistor if it is opened by measuring the resistance. (Refer to the attached Temperature/ Resistance Conversion Reference Table.) 5. Replace the main control board, I/O control board, or AC drive board by checking output from the thermistor and the trigger signal at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Thermistor: CN214-A4, TP234, or CN211-B1 on I/O control board / CN302-B9 or TP117 on main control board. Hot roller fusing trigger: CN303-B6 on main control board / CN212-B6, TP248, or CN229-5 on I/O control board / CN7-6 on AC drive board. Same as SC543
Type
A
SC543 Hot roller fusing lamp overheat
- Timing Fusing unit not set properly at every 1 second when the fusing unit is set Poor connection of connector - Condition Defective The hot roller thermistor thermistor output is lower than about Defective I/O 0.3V, which is correspond to control board 220C, for 3 seconds Defective main continuously. control board Defective AC drive board
Same as SC543 - Timing SC544 Hot roller fusing lamp at every 1 second after the lower warm-up is completed temperature - Condition The hot roller thermistor output is higher than about 3V, which is correspond to 87C, for 8 seconds continuously after the warmup is completed.
SM
A-25
A257/A269
Same as SC543
Type
A
SC545 Hot roller ready temperature abnormal
Same as SC543 - Timing at every 1 second after the temperature reaches to the ready condition
- Condition The hot roller thermistor output does not reach to the ready temperature within 7 minutes continuously. SC547 Hot roller - Timing Poor connection of temperature at every 1 second, 2minutes connectors does not after the main switch turned Hot roller fusing increase on and before the hot roller lamp brown temperature does not reach Hot roller to the ready condition thermofuse opened Defective main - Condition control board The fusing roller Defective I/O temperature does not control board increase by no more than Defective AC drive 3C for a minutes during board warm-up.
1. Check if the following connectors are properly connected; Hot roller fusing lamp connectors CN303 on the main control board CN212 and CN229 on the I/O control board CN7 on the AC drive board 2. Replace the hot roller fusing lamp if it is opened. 3. Replace the hot roller thermofuse if it is opened. 4. Replace the main control board, I/O control board, or AC drive board by checking the trigger signal at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Hot roller fusing trigger: CN303-B6 on main control board / CN212-B6, TP248, or CN229-5 on I/O control board / CN7-6 on AC drive board.
A257/A269
A-26
SM

- Timing at every 1 second after the fusing unit is set - Condition The pressure roller thermistor output is almost close to 5V, which is correspond to 0C, for 6 seconds continuously.
Possible Causes
Fusing unit not set properly Poor connection of connector Defective thermistor Defective I/O control board Defective main control board
Related SC
1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set. 2. Check if the thermistor connector is properly connected. 3. Replace the thermistor if it is deformed. 4. Replace the thermistor if it is opened by measuring the resistance. (Refer to the attached Temperature/ Resistance Conversion Reference Table.) 5. Replace the I/O control board. 6. Replace the main control board. [ Signal Check ] Thermistor: CN214-A9, TP232, or CN211-B2 on I/O control board / CN302-B8 or TP118 on main control board. 1. Check if the following connectors are properly connected; Pressure roller fusing lamp connectors CN303 on the main control board CN212 and CN229 on the I/O control board CN7 on the AC drive board 2. Replace the hot roller fusing lamp if it is opened. 3. Replace the hot roller thermofuse if it is opened. 4. Check if the power supplied from the outlet fluctuates. 5. Replace the main control board, I/O control board, or AC drive board by checking the trigger signal at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Pressure roller fusing trigger: CN303-B7 on main control board / CN212-B5, TP240, or CN229-4 on I/O control board / CN7-7 on AC drive board.
Type
A
SC551 Pressure roller thermistor open
SC552 Pressure roller warmup error
- Timing & Condition The pressure roller thermistor does not output an analog value corresponding to the ready temperature within 12 minutes after the main switch is turned on.
Poor connection of connectors Pressure roller fusing lamp brown Pressure roller thermofuse opened Brown fuse Power fluctuation Defective main control board Defective I/O control board Defective AC drive board
SM
A-27
A257/A269
1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set. 2. Check if the thermistor connector is properly connected. 3. Replace the thermistor if it is deformed. 4. Replace the thermistor if it is opened by measuring the resistance. (Refer to the attached Temperature/ Resistance Conversion Reference Table.) 5. Replace the main control board, I/O control board, or AC drive board by checking output from the thermistor and the trigger signal at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Thermistor: CN214-A9, TP232, or CN211-B2 on I/O control board / CN302-B8 or TP118 on main control board. Pressure roller fusing trigger: CN303-B7 on main control board / CN212-B5, TP240, or CN229-4 on I/O control board / CN7-7 on AC drive board. Same as SC553
Type
A
SC553 Pressure roller overheat
- Timing Fusing unit not set properly at every 1 second when the fusing unit is set Poor connection of connector - Condition Defective The pressure roller thermistor thermistor output is lower Defective I/O than about 0.3V, which is control board correspond to 220C, for 3 Defective main seconds continuously. control board Defective AC drive board
- Timing SC554 Pressure roller low at every 1 second after the temperature warm-up is completed - Condition The pressure roller thermistor output is higher than about 3V, which is correspond to 87C, for 8 seconds continuously after the warm-up is completed.
Same as SC553
A257/A269
A-28
SM
Same as SC553
Type
A
SC555 Pressure roller ready temperature abnormal
Same as SC553 - Timing at every 1 second after the temperature reaches to the ready condition
- Condition The pressure roller thermistor output does not reach to the ready temperature within 7 minutes continuously. - Timing SC557 Pressure Poor connection of roller connectors at every 1 second, 2minutes temperature after the main switch turned Pressure roller does not on and before the hot roller fusing lamp brown increase temperature does not reach Pressure roller to the ready condition thermofuse opened Defective main - Condition control board The pressure roller Defective I/O temperature does not control board increase by no more than Defective AC drive 3C for a minutes during board warm-up.
1. Check if the following connectors are properly connected; Hot roller fusing lamp connectors CN303 on the main control board CN212 and CN229 on the I/O control board CN7 on the AC drive board 2. Replace the hot roller fusing lamp if it is opened. 3. Replace the hot roller thermofuse if it is opened. 4. Replace the main control board, I/O control board, or AC drive board by checking the trigger signal at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Pressure roller fusing trigger: CN303-B7 on main control board / CN212-B5, TP240, or CNCN229-4 on I/O control board / CN7-7 on AC drive board.
SM
A-29
A257/A269

- Timing & Condition Zero cross signals generated within certain period does not reach a predetermined number.
Possible Causes
Poor connection of connectors Blown fuse Defective AC drive board Defective main control board Defective I/O control board
Related SC
1. Check if the following connectors are properly connected; CN212 and CN229 on the I/O control board CN303 on the main control board CN7 on the AC drive board 2. Check the continuity of the signal lines of the above harnesses. 3. Replace the fuse (FU101) if it is blown. 4. Replace the AC drive boar, I/O control board, or main control board by checking the signal line at each pin. [ Signal Check ] Zero cross: CN7-5 on AC drive board / CN229-6, TP216, or CN212-B8 on I/O control board / CN303-B4 or TP120 on main control board 1. Check if the connectors (CN355 and CN407) are properly connected on the sub control board and scanner IPU board. 2. Replace the sub and/or main scanner IPU board. 3. Replace the main control board. 1. Check if the IDU board is properly connected to the sub scanner IPU board is p. 2. Replace the IDU board. 3. Replace the scanner sub and/or main IPU board.
Type
A
SC558 Zero cross signal abnormal
SC601 Scanner IPU - Timing & Condition Poor connection of communiconnectors After the main control board cation error communicate successfully Defective sub/main with the scanner IPU board scanner IPU board once, communication error Defective main is detected. control board - Timing & Condition SC604 IDU Poor connection communibetween the IDU No response is received cation error from the IDU within 200 ms and scanner control boards after the scanner IP board sends a command signal Defective IDU and this error is detected 3 board times in total. Defective sub/main scanner IPU board
A257/A269
A-30
SM
1. Check the connector of the optical-fiber cable is properly set on the ADF main board and main control board or check if it is damaged. 2. Replace the ARDF main board. 3. Replace the main control board.
Type
D
SC620 ADF communication error
SC621 Sorter communication error
SC625 FPU communication error
SC626 LCT communication error
- Timing & Condition Poor connection of optical-fiber cable After the main control board or damaged communicate successfully with the ARDF once, Defective ARDF communication error is main board detected. Defective main control board - Timing Poor connection of optical-fiber cable When the main switch is or damaged turned on or while Sorter is running Defective Sorter - Condition main board The main control board Defective main detected a communication control board error with the Sorter main board. - Timing & Condition Poor connection of optical-fiber cable The scanner IPU board or damaged detected a communication error with FPU during the Defective FPU FPU is operating or after the main board FPU completes the Defective scanner operation. IPU board - Timing Poor connection of harnesses or When the main switch is damaged turned on or while LCT is running Defective I/F board - Condition RDS/LCT The main control board Defective LCT detected a communication main board error with the LCT main Defective main board. control board
1. Check the connector of the optical-fiber cable is properly set on the Sorter main board and main control board or check if it is damaged. 2. Replace the sorter main board. 3. Replace the main control board.
1. Check the connector of the optical-fiber cable is properly set on the FPU main board and main control board or check if it is damaged. 2. Replace the FPU main board. 3. Replace the scanner IPU board.
1. Check the connectors of harnesses are properly set on the main control board, I/F board RDS/LCT, and LCT main board or check if it is damaged. 2. Replace I/F board RDS/LCT board. 3. Replace the LCT main board. 4. Replace the main control board.
SM
A-31
A257/A269

- Timing & Condition The main control board receives no response from RDS when accessing it. Even when this error is detected, the copier does not show the SC code and this SC code is not logged. (Copier function is still working.) - Timing & Condition When the main CPU communicates with CPUs on other PCBs, main CPU does not receive response from others.
Rev. 02/2000 Possible Causes

Poor connection of harness, opticalfiber cable, or damaged Defective line adapter Defective I/F board RDS/LCT Defective main control board Scanner IPU firmware upgrade Poor connection of connectors Defective main scanner IPU board Defective main control board Defective TD sensor I/F board 1 Main board(s) of options Defective motor
Related SC
1. Check the connector of the harness and optical-fiber cable is properly set on the I/F board RDS/LCT and main control board or check if they are damaged. 2. Check and/or change the setting of the line adapter or replace it. 3. Replace the I/F board RDS/LCT. 4. Replace the scanner IPU board.
Type
SC630 RDS communication error
SC690 Application selection error
This SC code will be displayed when the scanner IPU firmware is changed. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the IC card; then, turn on the main switch. 1. Check if the connectors on the main control board, sub scanner IPU board, TD sensor I/F board 1, and the main board on each option equipped are properly connected. 2. Replace the defective board(s).
SC720 Sorter: Main motor error
SC721 Sorter: Bin motor error
- Timing & Condition When the encoder pulse does not change for 300 ms after the main motor starts. When the encoder pulse does not change for 100 ms during operation. - Timing & Condition -
1. Check if the motor works by SP 5-804-120 and replace it if necessary.
A257/A269
A-32
SM
Rev. 02/2000 SC No. Item Detection Conditions Possible Causes Related SC Troubleshooting Procedure
SC CODE TABLE Type

D
SC722 Sorter: - Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector Jogger motor The jogger H.P. sensor error does not activate within Defective jogger the timing programmed. H.P. sensor The jogger H.P. sensor Defective jogger does not deactivate motor within the timing programmed. SC724 Sorter: Grip motor error - Timing & Condition The grip shift motor H.P. sensor does not deactivate within 3200 ms when the grip assembly moves out from the home position. The grip shift motor H.P. sensor does not activate within 3200 ms after the grip when the grip assembly moves back to the home position. - Timing & Condition The staple H.P. sensor does not activates 700 ms after the staple unit drive motor turns on. Poor connection of connectors. Defective grip shift motor H.P. sensor Defective grip motor
1. Check if the jogger H.P. sensor connector is properly connected. 2. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor. (Input check: SP 5803-128) 3. Replace the jogger motor. (Output check: SP 5-804131)
1. Check if the connectors of the grip shift motor H.P. sensor and/or grip motor are properly connected. 2. Replace the grip shift motor H.P. sensor. (Input check: SP 5-803-129) 3. Replace the grip motor. (Output check: SP 5-804-127)
SC725 Sorter: Stapler unit drive motor error
Staple jam Excessive load when stapling many sheets of paper (out of limit) Poor connection of connectors Defective staple H.P. sensor Defective staple unit drive motor
1. Remove the staple(s) jammed if it causes SC. 2. Instruct user how many sheets can be stapled as maximum. 3. Check if the connectors of the staple H.P. sensor and/or staple unit drive motor are properly connected. 4. Replace the staple H.P. sensor. (Input check: SP 5803-130) 5. Replace the staple unit drive motor. (Output check: SP 5-804-129)
SM
A-33
A257/A269
Rev. 02/2000 Type

D
SC726 Sorter: End release motor error
- Timing & Condition Poor connection of connectors The bin end open or close sensor does not activate within Defective bin end the time programmed. open or close sensor When this error is detected Defective end release twice, this SC is displayed. motor Defective main board
1. Check if the connectors of the bin end open and close sensors and end release motor are properly connected. 2. Replace the bin end open or close sensor. (Input check: SP5803-126/127) 3. Replace the end release motor. (Output check: SP5-804-125) 4. Replace the main board. Motor overload: Check the mechanism, including the gears.
SC731 Sorter: Shift motor error SC732 Sorter: Bin drive motor error SC741 LCT: Main motor error
- Timing & Condition -
Excessive load Defective shift motor
Defective motor: Test with SP5-804-132. Replace if necessary. Defective lift motor: Test with SP5-804-124. Replace if necessary. ? Bin drive motor? Same test as SC721 Defective sorter control board: Replace.
1. Check if the connector is properly connected. 2. Replace the LCT main motor.
- Timing & Condition LCT main motor speed is out of range for more than 0.5 seconds during rotation. - Timing & Condition The upper limit sensor does not activate within 18 seconds after the lift motor turns on (in UP direction) when the main switch is turned on or close the LCT cover. The lower limit sensor does not activate within 18 seconds after the lift motor turns on (in DOWN direction) when paper runs out (paper end) or the Down key is pressed.
SC742 LCT: Tray lift error
Poor connection of connectors Defective LCT main motor Defective LCT main board Poor connection of connectors Defective lift motor Defective upper limit sensor Defective pick-up solenoid Defective LCT main board
1. Check if the connectors of the lift motor, upper limit sensor, and pick-up solenoid are properly connected. 2. Replace the lift motor. 3. Replace the upper limit sensor. 4. Replace the pick-up solenoid. 5. Replace the LCT main board.
A257/A269
A-34
SM
Rev. 02/2000
SC CODE TABLE Detection Conditions Possible Causes

Poor connection of connector Blown projector lamp Defective projector main board
SC No.
Item
Related SC
1. Check if the connector is properly connected. 2. Replace the projector lamp if it is blown. 3. Replace the projector main board. 1. Replace the projector main board. 2. Replace the sub and/or main scanner IPU board. 3. Replace the main control board.
Type
B
SC790 FPU: - Timing & Condition Projector The projector lamp does not lamp on error turn on 100msec after 5V is applied to it.
SC791 FPU: - Timing & Condition Defective projector main board Projector The projector lamp does not lamp off error turn off 100msec after it is Defective sub/main turned off. scanner IPU board Defective main control board SC792 FPU: - Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector Projector The projector lamp lamp overheats during projector Defective overheated operation. thermistor Defective projector main board SC901 Upper total - Timing & Condition Poor connection of counter error Feedback signal stays the connectors (Black) LOW when the main Defective counter switch is turned on. Feedback signal stays LOW just before the trigger signal goes ON. Feedback signal stays HIGH just before the trigger signal goes OFF. SC902 Lower total Same as SC901 counter error (Color)
1. 2. 3. 4.
Check if the connector of the fan is properly connected. Replace the fan if it is defective. Replace the thermistor if it is defective. Replace projector main board.
Check if the connectors are properly set. Replace the total counter.
[ Signal Check ] Trigger line: CN230-B8 on I/O control board Counter OK signal: TP227 on I/O control Board
Same as SC901 [ Signal Check ] Trigger line: CN230-B10 on I/O control board Counter OK signal: TP228 on I/O control board
SM
A-35
A257/A269
SC CODE TABLE
Temperature/Resistance Conversion Reference Table

Relationships between the fusing thermistor resistance and temperature
Temperature 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 Lower-limit Value 211.7 166.8 105.4 68.4 45.45 30.88 21.4 15.12 10.87 7.935 5.881 4.42 3.365 2.593 2.021 1.592 1.249 0.9849 0.7912 0.6834 0.5184 Standard Value 329.3 198.9 123.7 79.11 51.86 34.78 23.833 16.64 11.83 8.554 6.281 4.678 3.531 2.699 2.087 1.632 1.289 1.0228 0.8276 0.6719 0.5499 Upper-limit Value 398.9 236.9 145.1 91.44 59.14 39.16 26.51 18.3 12.88 9.216 6.703 4.948 3.703 2.807 2.154 1.672 1.33 1.068 0.8652 0.7067 0.5818
A257/A269
A-36
SM
APPENDIX-B SP MODE
SP Mode No.
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen
1. PAPER FEED/TRANSPORT/FUSING
1-001: Leading edge registration adjustment 1-001-001 Normal paper 1-001-002 1-001-003 1-001-004 OHP Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 903 903 903 903 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch ON timing. Screen - A Lead Edge Regist Normal Paper OHP Thick paper SP CARD Side to Side Reg By-pass Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 duplex Lct P.Feed Tmg Normal Paper/By-ps Tray Feed OHP/By-ps Thick Paper/By-ps Dplx Feed Oil End Sensor Fuser oil End Check
1-002: Side-to-side registration adjustment 1-002-001 By-pass 1-002-002 1st tray 1-002-003 Duplex (1st side) 1-002-004 2nd tray 1-002-005 3rd tray 1-002-006 Duplex (2nd side) 1-002-007 LCT 1-003: Paper feed timing adjustment 1-003-001 Normal paper, by-pass 1-003-002 Tray paper feed 1-003-003 By-pass OHP 1-003-004 By-pass: Thick paper 1-003-005 2nd side (Duplex) 1-101-000 Oil End Sensor Detection
0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA)
-5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position.
Screen - A
0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 2 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 1
-5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 7.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm 0 or 1
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the time from when the registration sensor is activated until the relay clutch is turned off.
Screen - A
Specifies whether the oil end sensor is set ON or OFF. 0 = OFF 1 = ON Selects the fusing temperature control mode. 0 = Phase control (for improving flicker of the fluorescent lamp) 1 = ON/OFF control (for minimizing radio wave noise)
1-104-000
Fusing control method selection
0 or 1
Phase control should only Fusing Control be selected if a user has a problem with flicker of the fluorescent lamp. The main switch needs to be turned off and on when the data is changed.
1-105: Hot/pressure roller temperature setting 1-105-001 Hot: 1st side: Idling
183 C
100 to 200 C
Adjusts the temperature at when the idling starts. The idling starts for 2 minutes when the temperature becomes over than Target - 15 C. If the temperature is higher than 50 C when the power relay is ON, the idling is not executed. Adjusts the temperature of the hot and pressure rollers in various modes.
Screen - B
Roller. Tmp Set 1
1-105-002
Hot: 1st side: Standby mode
193 C
100 to 200 C
SM
B-1
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 1-105-003
Item Hot: 1st side: Normal paper: FC
Default Value 178 C
Value Range 100 to 200 C
Step 1
SP7 in various modes.
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen 3
1-105-004
Hot: 1st side: Normal paper : 1C
168 C
100 to 200 C
1-105-005 1-105-006 1-105-007 1-105-008
Hot: 1st side:OHP/Thick paper: FC Hot: 1st side: OHP/Thick paper: 1C Pressure: 1st side: Standby Pressure: 1st side: Normal paper: FC Pressure: 1st side: Copy mode: Normal paper: 1C Pressure: 1st side: Copy mode: OHP/Thick paper: FC Pressure: 1st side: Copy mode: OHP/Thick paper: 1C Hot: 2nd side: Standby mode Hot: 2nd side: Copy mode: Normal paper: FC Hot: 2nd side: Copy mode: Normal paper: 1C Hot: 2nd side: Copy mode: OHP/Thick paper: FC Hot: 2nd side: Copy mode: OHP/Thick paper: 1C Pressure: 2nd side: Standby mode Pressure: 2nd side: Copy mode: Normal paper: FC Pressure: 2nd side: Copy mode: Normal paper: 1C Pressure: 2nd side: Copy mode: OHP/Thick paper: FC Pressure: 2nd side: Copy mode: OHP/Thick paper: 1C
178 C 178 C 160 C 155 C
100 to 200 C 100 to 200 C 100 to 200 C 100 to 200 C
1 1 1 1
5 6 7 8
1-105-009
145 C
100 to 200 C
1-105-010
155 C
100 to 200 C
10
1-105-011
155 C
100 to 200 C
11
1-105-012 1-105-013
193 C 178 C
100 to 200 C 100 to 200 C
1 1
12 13
1-105-014
168 C
100 to 200 C
14
1-105-015
178 C
100 to 200 C
15
1-105-016
178 C
100 to 200 C
16
1-105-017 1-105-018
160 C 155 C
100 to 200 C 100 to 200 C
1 1
17 18
1-105-019
145 C
100 to 200 C
19
1-105-020
155 C
100 to 200 C
20
1-105-021
155 C
100 to 200 C
21
1-106: Fusing temperature display 1-106-001 Pressure roller 1-106-002 Hot roller
C C
C C
1 1
Displays the temperature of the pressure roller. Displays the temperature the hot roller.
Roller Temp. Display Pressure Roller Temp Hot Roller Temp
A257/A269
B- 2
SM
SP Mode No. 1-108-000
Item Fusing unit set
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 or 1
Step 1
SP7
Description Disables fusing unit set detection. 0 = Detect 1 = Not detect - Procedure (1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off. (2) Pull out and remove the fusing unit. (3) Keep the front door open and turn on the main switch. (4) Access the SP mode and set the data to "1". (5) Close the front door.
Remarks Keep this at 0 for normal operation. This mode is valid only for the fusing unit.
Description displayed on the screen Fusing Unit Set
1-109-000
Fusing nip width measurement
Feeds OHP sheet and it stops 3 times for 2 seconds in between the hot rollers. This operation makes 3 NIP bands on the OHP sheet. Press the ON key to start.
Fusing Nip Band Wdth
1-112: Fusing temperature correction by environmental temperature 1-112-001 at high temperature 0 C -20 to 0 C 1-112-002 at low temperature 5C 0 to 20 C
1 1
Sets the threshold which activates this correction. Hot and pressure roller temperature is corrected when it is detected as high or low temperature environment.
Fusing Temp. shifting value Do not touch in the field. 1 2
1-801: Motor speed adjustment 1-801-002 Paper feed motor speed adjustment: Standard speed 1-801-005 1-801-010 Paper feed motor speed adjustment: Half speed Registration motor speed: Standard speed
0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
-1.0 to 1.0% -1.0 to 1.0% -1.0 to 1.0%
0.1 0.1 0.1
Motor Speed Adjustment Adjusts the paper feed motor (standard) speed by 0.1% Do not touch in the field. P Feed Mt: Normal Spd step. Adjusts the paper feed motor (half) speed in 0.1% step. Adjusts the registration motor (standard) speed by 0.1% step. P Feed Mt: Half Spd Regist Mt: Normal Spd
1-901: Duplex unit - Side/End fence position adjustment 1-901-001 Side fence 0 mm 1-901-002 End fence 0 mm
-5.0 to 5.0 mm -5.0 to 5.0 mm
0.1 0.1
Adjusts the side fence stop position of the duplex unit.
Fence Position Dplx Side Fence Adjust Dplx End Fence Adjust
2. DRUM UNIT
2-101: Sub-scan/Main-scan blank margin adjustment 2-101-001 Sub-scan: Leading edge: Normal 0 mm (FA) 2-101-002 Sub-scan: Leading edge: Thick 1 0 mm (FA) -4.0 to 4.0 mm -4.0 to 4.0 mm 0.1 0.1 903 903 Adjusts the blank margin at the leading or trailing edge in sub-scan (paper feed) direction. Screen- C Blnk Mrgn Lead Edge: Normal Lead Edge: Thick
SM
B-3
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-101-003 2-101-004 2-101-005 2-101-006 2-101-007 2-101-008 2-101-009 2-101-010 2-101-011
Item Sub-scan: Leading edge: Thick 2 Sub-scan: Leading edge: OHP Sub-scan: Trailing edge: Normal Sub-scan: Trailing edge: Thick 1 Sub-scan: Trailing edge : Thick 2 Sub-scan: Trailing edge: OHP Main-scan: Leading edge Main-scan: Trailing edge Sub-scan: Auto duplex: Trailing edge of 1st sided
Default Value 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA) 0 mm (FA)
Value Range -4.0 to 4.0 mm -4.0 to 4.0 mm -3.0 to 10.0 mm -3.0 to 10.0 mm -3.0 to 10.0 mm -3.0 to 10.0 mm -2.0 to 5.0 mm -2.0 to 5.0 mm -3.0 to 10.0 mm
Step 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
SP7 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen FsyncHeadErase V_Thick Lead Edge: OHP Trail Edge: Normal Trail Edge: Thick FsyncRearErase V_Thick Trail Edge: OHP Main Scan Head Side Main Scan Rear Side Trail Edge: Auto Dplx 1 side
Adjusts the blank margin at the leading or trailing edge in main-scan direction. Adjusts the blank margin at the trailing edge in sub-scan (paper feed) direction on the 1-sided copy in the duplex mode.
2-112: Main-scan magnification adjustment 2-112-001 Copy mode
0.0%
-1.0 to 1.0%
0.1
903
Main Scn Mag Adjusts the magnification in Main-scan direction of Copy Screen - D LsyncMagAdj COPY mode. Do not touch in the field. Adjusts the magnification in Main-scan direction of Printer mode. Screen - D LsyncMagAdj PRINTER
2-112-002
Print mode
0.0%
-1.0 to 1.0%
0.1
903
2-113: Sub-scan magnification adjustment 2-113-002 Printer mode
0.0%
-1.0 to 1.0%
0.1
903
Adjusts the magnification in Sub-scan direction of Printer mode.
Screen - D
Sub Scan Mag FsyncMagAdj PRINTER
2-207: Forced toner supply 2-207-001 K 2-207-002 C 2-207-003 M 2-207-004 Y 2-208: Forced Toner supply clutch ON times / Toner supply ratio 2-208-001 Clutch ON times: K 10 1 to 50 2-208-002 Clutch ON times: C 10 1 to 50 2-208-003 Clutch ON times: M 10 1 to 50 2-208-004 Clutch ON times: Y 10 1 to 50
Moves the selected development unit to the development position and forces toner to be supplied in according to the setting in SP2-208. Press ON key to start after selecting the color.
Forced Toner Splly K C M Y Toner Supply Forced: Times: K Forced: Times: C Forced: Times: M Forced: Times: Y
1 1 1 1
Sets the number of forced toner supply operations. Toner supply clutch turns on and off for 1 second each and this operation is repeated in according to the times selected. (Approximately 0.5g of toner is supplied while toner supply clutch is ON for 1 second. It means that about 5g of toner is supplied by this operation in the default setting. It increases toner density by about 0.7wt%.)
2-208-005 2-208-006 2-208-007 2-208-008
Toner supply ratio: Fixed mode: K Toner supply ratio: Fixed mode: C Toner supply ratio: Fixed mode: M Toner supply ratio: Fixed mode: Y
5% 5% 5% 5%
0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0 to 100%
1 1 1 1
Sets the toner supply ratio for each color in Fixed mode.
Fixed: Ratio: K Fixed: Ratio: C Fixed: Ratio: M Fixed: Ratio: Y
A257/A269
B- 4
SM
SP Mode No. 2-208-009
Item Toner supply method
Default Value 2
Value Range 0 to 2
Step 1
SP7
Description Selects the toner supply method. 0 = Fixed supply mode 1 = Proportional control supply mode (with TD sensor output) 2 = Fuzzy control supply mode
Remarks
Normally "2" should be Mode: 0:FIX, 1:PRP, 2:FZY selected. Only when the ID sensor and/or TD sensor is defective, the data needs to be changed as temporary.
2-225: Developer Initialization 2-225-001 K 2-225-002 C 2-225-003 M 2-225-004 Y 2-225-005 All color 2-225-006 CMY
Performs developer initialization and forced self-check for color(s) selected and displays the operation result. Press Execution key to start. 0 = failure 1 = success The followings are executed. Aging - Initial Vref check - Forced process control self check
Screen - E
Dev. Agitation K C M Y All Color CMY
2-301: ITB bias adjustment 2-301-001 4C : 1st color 2-301-002 4C : 2nd color 2-301-003 4C : 3rd color 2-301-004 4C : 4th color 2-301-005 2C : 1st color 2-301-006 2C : 2nd color 2-301-007 3C : 1st color 2-301-008 3C : 2nd color 2-301-009 3C : 3rd color 2-301-010 1C : 1st color 2-301-011 Non-image area
1500V 1700V 1900V 2100V 1500V 1700V 1500V 1700V 1900V 2100V 500V
300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias in standard speed mode at each transfer process (1C - 4C) and for color mode selected.
Basically, do not change the data since the suitable value is prefixed for some kinds of paper.
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for non-image area.
Belt transfer bias 1st 4C-mode 2nd 4C-mode 3rd 4C-mode 4th 4C-mode 1st 2C-mode 2nd 2C-mode 1st 3C-mode 2nd 3C-mode 3rd 3C-mode 1st 1C-mode Between image Areas
2-301-012
Half-speed
500V
300 to 4500V
903
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for half-speed in OHP/Thick paper modes. Before paper transfer in these mode, the developed image on the transfer belt passes the drum to synchronize the registration.
Half Spd:Image Area
2-301-024
Bias correction ON/OFF
0 to 1
903
Sets the correction mode ON or OFF. If ON, the transfer belt bias for image area is corrected by Vd (process control potential table). 0 = ON 1 = OFF
Vd Correction: 0:ON, 1:OFF
SM
B-5
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-301-025 2-301-026 2-301-027 2-301-028 2-301-029 2-301-030 2-301-031 2-301-032 2-301-033 2-301-034 2-301-035 2-301-036
Item 4C : 2nd side : 1st color 4C : 2nd side : 2nd color 4C : 2nd side : 3rd color 4C : 2nd side : 4th color 2C : 2nd side : 1st color 2C : 2nd side : 2nd color 3C : 2nd side : 1st color 3C : 2nd side : 2nd color 3C : 2nd side : 3rd color 1C : 2nd side : 1st color Lubricant brush 1 Lubricant brush 2
Default Value 1500V 1700V 1900V 2100V 1500V 1700V 1500V 1700V 1900V 2100V 500V 500V
Value Range 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V 300 to 4500V
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Description Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for 2 sided copy in duplex mode at each transfer process (1C - 4C) and for color mode selected.
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen 1st 4C-mode NrmlBack 2nd 4C-mode NrmlBack 3rd 4C-mode NrmlBack 4th 4C-mode NrmlBack 1st 2C-mode NrmlBack 2nd 2C-mode NrmlBack 1st 3C-mode NrmlBack 2nd 3C-mode NrmlBack 3rd 3C-mode NrmlBack 1st 1C-mode NrmlBack Q1_Brush CLN1 Q1_Brush CLN2
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias during the lubricant brush cleaning mode.
2-302: PTB bias - Humidity range threshold 2-302-001 Threshold 1 2-302-002 Threshold 2 2-302-003 Threshold 3 2-302-004 Threshold 4
4.3 g/m3 11.3 g/m3 18.0 g/m3 24.0 g/m3
0.6 to 50 g/m3 0.6 to 50 g/m3 0.6 to 50 g/m3 0.6 to 50 g/m3
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Changes the threshold of absolute humidity. TH1 TH2 TH3 TH4 | | | | Environment: LL L Normal H HH LL: Very low humidity L : Low humidity H : High humidity HH: Very high humidity
Forced Trans. Condition Shift Do not touch in the field. EnvLmt[0] EnvLmt[1] EnvLmt[2] EnvLmt[3]
02-310: PTB bias adjustment 2-310-001 Humidity range set-up
0 to 5
Specifies which humidity range is used for paper transfer bias. 0 = fixed humidity range (normal condition) 1 = condition changes by humidity sensor 2 = fixed humidity range (LL) 3 = fixed humidity range (L) 4 = fixed humidity range (H) 5 = fixed humidity range (HH) 903 903 903 903
Paper transfer bias Change the data only EnvChoise when the humidity sensor fails if necessary for a while.
2-310-002 2-310-003 2-310-004 2-310-005
Image area: Normal: 1C Image area: Normal: 2C Image area: Normal: 3C Image area: Normal: 4C
25 35 35 35
A A A A
5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100
A A A A
1 1 1 1
Adjusts the paper transfer belt bias for the type of paper Screen - F and copy mode. Basically, do not change the data since the suitable
NRML 1C NRML 2C NRML 3C NRML 4C
A257/A269
B-6
SM
SP Mode No. 2-310-006 2-310-007 2-310-008 2-310-009 2-310-010 2-310-011 2-310-012 2-310-013 2-310-014 2-310-015 2-310-016 2-310-017 2-310-018 2-310-019 2-310-020 2-310-021 2-310-022 2-310-023 2-310-024 2-310-025 2-310-026 2-310-027 2-310-028 2-310-029 2-310-030 2-310-031 2-310-032 2-310-033 2-310-034 2-310-035 2-310-036 2-310-037 2-310-038
Item Image area: Thick 1: 1C Image area: Thick 1: 2C Image area: Thick 1: 3C Image area: Thick 1: 4C Image area: OHP:1C Image area: OHP:2C Image area: OHP:3C Image area: OHP:4C Image area: Thick 2: 1C Image area: Thick 2: 2C Image area: Thick 2: 3C Image area: Thick 2: 4C Image area: Normal: 2nd side: 1C Image area: Normal: 2nd side: 2C Image area: Normal: 2nd side: 3C Image area: Normal: 2nd side: 4C Image area: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C Image area: Thick 1: 2nd side: 2C Image area: Thick 1: 2nd side: 3C Image area: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C Image area: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C Image area: Thick 2: 2nd side: 2C Image area: Thick 2: 2nd side: 3C Image area: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C ID pattern: Normal: 1C ID pattern: Normal: 2C ID pattern: Normal: 3C ID pattern: Normal: 4C ID pattern: Except for normal: 1C ID pattern: Except for normal: 2C ID pattern: Except for normal: 3C ID pattern: Except for normal: 4C Lubricant brush (Belt cleaning mode)
Default Value 14 18 18 18 16 18 18 18 16 20 20 20 30 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Value Range 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Description
Description displayed on the Remarks screen the data since the suitable value is prefixed for some THICK 1C THICK 2C kinds of paper. THICK 3C THICK 4C OHP 1C OHP 2C OHP 3C OHP 4C VERY-THICK 1C VERY-THICK 2C VERY-THICK 3C VERY-THICK 4C NRML Back 1C NRML Back 2C NRML Back 3C NRML Back 4C THICK Back 1C THICK Back 2C THICK Back 3C THICK Back 4C VERY-THICK Back 1C VERY-THICK Back 2C VERY-THICK Back 3C VERY-THICK Back 4C
35 A 35 A 35 A 14 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 16 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 30 30 30 12 14 14 14 35 A A A A A A A A A
5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 A 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 5 to 100 A A A A A A A A A
Adjusts the paper transfer belt bias of ID sensor pattern for normal paper or others, and copy mode.
Adjusts the paper transfer belt bias during the lubricant brush cleaning mode.
P-Ptn NRML 1C P-Ptn NRML 2C P-Ptn NRML 3C P-Ptn NRML 4C P-Ptn NOT-NRML 1C P-Ptn NOT-NRML 2C P-Ptn NOT-NRML 3C P-Ptn NOT-NRML 4C Q1_Brush CLN
SM
B-7
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-311-001
Item Forced belt cleaning
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description Lubricates the image transfer belt. Press the On key to start.
Remarks
This mode may effects for Cleaning partial blanking or insufficient belt cleaning.
2-313: PTB bias : Paper size correction 2-313-001 Normal: LT (S) or larger 2-313-002 Normal: B4 or larger 2-313-003 Normal: A4 (L) or larger 2-313-004 Normal: Less than A4 (L) 2-313-005 Thick 1: LT (S) or larger 2-313-006 Thick 1: B4 or larger 2-313-007 Thick 1: A4 (L) or larger 2-313-008 Thick 1: Less than A4 (L) 2-313-009 OHP:LT (S) or larger 2-313-010 OHP:B4 or larger 2-313-011 OHP:A4 (L) or larger 2-313-012 OHP: Less than A4 (L) 2-313-013 Thick 2: LT (S) or larger 2-313-014 Thick 2: B4 or larger 2-313-015 Thick 2: A4 (L) or larger 2-313-016 Thick 2: Less than A4 (L) 2-314: PTB bias : Leading edge correction 2-314-001 Normal: 1C 2-314-002 Normal: 2C 2-314-003 Normal: 3C 2-314-004 Normal: 4C 2-314-005 Thick 1: 1C 2-314-006 Thick 1: 2C 2-314-007 Thick 1: 3C 2-314-008 Thick 1: 4C 2-314-009 OHP: 1C 2-314-010 OHP: 2C 2-314-011 OHP: 3C 2-314-012 OHP: 4C 2-314-013 Thick 2: 1C 2-314-014 Thick 2: 2C 2-314-015 Thick 2: 3C 2-314-016 Thick 2: 4C 2-314-017 Normal: 2nd side: 1C 2-314-018 Normal: 2nd side: 2C 2-314-019 Normal: 2nd side: 3C 2-314-020 Normal: 2nd side: 4C 2-314-021 Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 2-314-022 Thick 1: 2nd side: 2C
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Corrects the paper transfer belt bias for the type of paper and paper size selected. The paper transfer belt bias times by the percentage selected in this SP mode is applied to the bias roller.
(S): Sideways (L): Lengthwise
P.T.B.: Paper:Size Correct NRML over LT Sideways NRML over B4 NRML over A5 Lengthwise NRML under A5 Lengthwise THICK over LT Sideways THICK over B4 THICK over A5 Lengthwise THICK under A5 Lengthwise OHP over LT Sideways OHP over B4 OHP over A5 Lengthwise OHP under A5 Lengthwise VERY-THICK over LT Sideways VERY-THICK over B4 VERY-THICK over A5 Lengthwise VERY-THICK under A5 Lengthwise Paper Trans Bias: Lead Edge NRML 1C NRML 2C NRML 3C NRML 4C THICK 1C THICK 2C THICK 3C THICK 4C OHP 1C OHP 2C OHP 3C OHP 4C VERY-THICK 1C VERY-THICK 2C VERY-THICK 3C VERY-THICK 4C NRML Back 1C NRML Back 2C NRML Back 3C NRML Back 4C THICK Back 1C THICK Back 2C
110% 110% 110% 110% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 110% 110% 110% 110% 100% 100%
50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Corrects the paper transfer belt bias for the paper leading edge area for the type of paper and copy mode. The paper transfer belt bias times by the percentage selected in this SP mode is applied to the bias roller.
A257/A269
B-8
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-314-023 2-314-024 2-314-025 2-314-026 2-314-027 2-314-028
Item Thick 1: 2nd side: 3C Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C Thick 2: 2nd side: 2C Thick 2: 2nd side: 3C Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C
Default Value 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
Value Range 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7 903 903 903 903 903 903
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen THICK Back 3C THICK Back 4C VERY-THICK Back 1C VERY-THICK Back 2C VERY-THICK Back 3C VERY-THICK Back 4C
2-315: PTB bias : Trailing edge correction 2-315-001 Normal: 1C 2-315-002 Normal: 2C 2-315-003 Normal: 3C 2-315-004 Normal: 4C 2-315-005 Thick 1: 1C 2-315-006 Thick 1: 2C 2-315-007 Thick 1: 3C 2-315-008 Thick 1: 4C 2-315-009 OHP: 1C 2-315-010 OHP: 2C 2-315-011 OHP: 3C 2-315-012 OHP: 4C 2-315-013 Thick 2: 1C 2-315-014 Thick 2: 2C 2-315-015 Thick 2: 3C 2-315-016 Thick 2: 4C 2-315-017 Normal: 2nd side: 1C 2-315-018 Normal: 2nd side: 2C 2-315-019 Normal: 2nd side: 3C 2-315-020 Normal: 2nd side: 4C 2-315-021 Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 2-315-022 Thick 1: 2nd side: 2C 2-315-023 Thick 1: 2nd side: 3C 2-315-024 Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C 2-315-025 Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C 2-315-026 Thick 2: 2nd side: 2C 2-315-027 Thick 2: 2nd side: 3C 2-315-028 Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C 2-316: PTB bias: Humidity correction 2-316-001 LL: Normal : 1C 2-316-002 LL: Normal: 4C 2-316-003 L: Normal: 1C 2-316-004 L: Normal: 4C 2-316-005 H: Normal: 1C 2-316-006 H: Normal: 4C 2-316-007 HH: Normal: 1C 2-316-008 HH: Normal: 4C 2-316-009 LL: Thick 1: 1C 2-316-010 LL: Thick 1: 4C 2-316-011 L: Thick 1: 1C 2-316-012 L: Thick 1: 4C 2-316-013 H: Thick 1: 1C 2-316-014 H: Thick 1: 4C 2-316-015 HH: Thick 1: 1C 2-316-016 HH: Thick 1: 4C 2-316-017 LL: OHP: 1C 2-316-018 LL: OHP: 4C
90% 90% 90% 90% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 90% 90% 90% 90% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 125% 100% 125% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 117% 114% 114% 114% 114% 100%
50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Corrects the paper transfer belt bias for the paper trailing edge area for the type of paper and copy mode. The paper transfer belt bias times by the percentage selected in this SP mode is applied to the bias roller.
Corrects the paper transfer belt bias for the type of paper and copy mode depending on the humidity condition. The paper transfer belt bias times by the percentage selected in this SP mode is applied to the bias roller. LL: Very low humidity L : Low humidity H : High humidity HH: Very high humidity
Paper Trans Bias: Trail Edge NRML 1C NRML 2C NRML 3C NRML 4C THICK 1C THICK 2C THICK 3C THICK 4C OHP 1C OHP 2C OHP 3C OHP 4C VERY-THICK 1C VERY-THICK 2C VERY-THICK 3C VERY-THICK 4C NRML Back 1C NRML Back 2C NRML Back 3C NRML Back 4C THICK Back 1C THICK Back 2C THICK Back 3C THICK Back 4C VERY-THICK Back 1C VERY-THICK Back 2C VERY-THICK Back 3C VERY-THICK Back 4C P.T.B. Correction:Humidity Basically, do not change Very-Low-Hum NRML 1C the data since the suitable Very-Low-Hum NRML 4C value is prefixed for some Low-Hum NRML 1C Low-Hum NRML 4C kinds of paper. High-Hum NRML 1C High-Hum NRML 4C Very-High-Hum NRML 1C Very-High-Hum NRML 4C Very-Low-Hum THICK 1C Very-Low-Hum THICK 4C Low-Hum THICK 1C Low-Hum THICK 4C High-Hum THICK 1C High-Hum THICK 4C Very-High-Hum THICK 1C Very-High-Hum THICK 4C Very-Low-Hum OHP 1C Very-Low-Hum OHP 4C Basically, do not change the data since the suitable value is prefixed for some kinds of paper.
SM
B-9
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-316-019 2-316-020 2-316-021 2-316-022 2-316-023 2-316-024 2-316-025 2-316-026 2-316-027 2-316-028 2-316-029 2-316-030 2-316-031 2-316-032 2-316-033 2-316-034 2-316-035 2-316-036 2-316-037 2-316-038 2-316-039 2-316-040 2-316-041 2-316-042 2-316-043 2-316-044 2-316-045 2-316-046 2-316-047 2-316-048 2-316-049 2-316-050 2-316-051 2-316-052 2-316-053 2-316-054 2-316-055 2-316-056
Item L: OHP: 1C L: OHP: 4C H: OHP: 1C H: OHP: 4C HH: OHP: 1C HH: OHP: 4C LL: Thick 2: 1C LL: Thick 2: 4C L: Thick 2: 1C L: Thick 2: 4C H: Thick 2: 1C H: Thick 2: 4C HH: Thick 2: 1C HH: Thick 2: 4C LL: Normal: 2nd side:1C LL: Normal: 2nd side: 4C L: Normal: 2nd side:1C L: Normal: 4C H: Normal: 2nd side:1C H: Normal: 2nd side:4C HH: Normal: 2nd side:: 1C HH: Normal : 2nd side: 4C LL: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C LL: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C HH: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C HH: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C LL: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 1C LL: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 4C L: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 1C L: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 4C H: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 1C H: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 4C HH: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 1C HH: Thick 2: 2nd-side: 4C
Default Value 114% 100% 114% 111% 114% 111% 100% 100% 100% 100% 117% 114% 117% 114% 100% 110% 100% 110% 100% 117% 100% 117% 100% 88% 100% 88% 117% 100% 117% 100% 100% 88% 100% 88% 117% 100% 117% 100%
Value Range 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Low-Hum OHP 1C Low-Hum OHP 4C High-Hum OHP 1C High-Hum OHP 4C Very-High-Hum OHP 1C Very-High-Hum OHP 4C Very-Low-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Very-Low-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Low-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Low-Hum VERY-THICK 4C High-Hum VERY-THICK 1C High-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Very-High-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Very-High-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Very-Low-Hum NRML Back 1C Very-Low-Hum NRML Back 4C Low-Hum NRML Back 1C Low-Hum NRML Back 4C High-Hum NRML Back 1C High-Hum NRML Back 4C Very-High-Hum NRML Back 1C Very-High-Hum NRML Back 4C Very-Low-Hum THICK Back 1C Very-Low-Hum THICK Back 4C Low-Hum THICK Back 1C Low-Hum THICK Back 4C High-Hum THICK Back 1C High-Hum THICK Back 4C Very-High-Hum THICK Back 1C Very-High-Hum THICK Back 4C V-Low-Hum V_THICK Back 1C V-Low-Hum V_THICK Back 4C Low-Hum VERY THICK Back 1C Low-Hum VERY THICK Back 4C High-Hum VERY THICK Back 1C High-Hum VERY THICK Back 4C V-High-Hum V_THICK Back 1C V-High-Hum V_THICK Back 4C Paper separation charge NRML 1C NRML 4C THICK 1C THICK 4C OHP 1C OHP 4C VERY-THICK 1C VERY-THICK 4C NRML Back 1C NRML Back 4C THICK Back 1C THICK Back 4C VERY-THICK Back 1C VERY-THICK Back 4C
2-402: Paper separation corona voltage adjustment : Image area 2-402-001 Normal: 1C 3000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-002 Normal: 2C/3C/4C 3000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-003 Thick 1: 1C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-004 Thick 1: 2C/3C/4C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-005 OHP: 1C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-006 OHP: 2C/3C/4C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-007 Thick 2: 1C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-008 Thick 2: 2C/3C/4C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-009 Normal: 2nd side: 1C 3000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-010 Normal: 2nd side: 2C/3C/4C 3000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-011 Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-012 Thick 1: 2nd side: 2C/3C/4C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-013 Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C 1000V 500 to 3000V 2-402-014 Thick 2: 2nd side: 2C/3C/4C 1000V 500 to 3000V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Adjusts the paper separation corona voltage for the different copy mode.
A257/A269
B-10
SM
SP Mode No.
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Paper Sep. CH Current: Leading NRML THICK OHP VERY-THICK NRML Back THICK Back VERY-THICK Back Paper Sep. CH Current: Humidity Very-Low-Hum NRML 1C Very-Low-Hum NRML 4C Low-Hum NRML 1C Low-Hum NRML 4C High-Hum NRML 1C High-Hum NRML 4C Very-High-Hum NRML 1C Very-High-Hum NRML 4C Very-Low-Hum THICK 1C Very-Low-Hum THICK 4C Low-Hum THICK 1C Low-Hum THICK 4C High-Hum THICK 1C High-Hum THICK 4C Very-High-Hum THICK 1C Very-High-Hum THICK 4C Very-Low-Hum OHP 1C Very-Low-Hum OHP 4C Low-Hum OHP 1C Low-Hum OHP 4C High-Hum OHP 1C High-Hum OHP 4C Very-High-Hum OHP 1C Very-High-Hum OHP 4C Very-Low-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Very-Low-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Low-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Low-Hum VERY-THICK 4C High-Hum VERY-THICK 1C High-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Very-High-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Very-High-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Very-Low-Hum NRML Back 1C Very-Low-Hum NRML Back 4C Low-Hum NRML Back 1C Low-Hum NRML Back 4C High-Hum NRML Back 1C High-Hum NRML Back 4C Very-High-Hum NRML Back 1C Very-High-Hum NRML Back 4C Very-Low-Hum THICK Back 1C Very-Low-Hum THICK Back 4C Low-Hum THICK Back 1C Low-Hum THICK Back 4C High-Hum THICK Back 1C
2-403: Paper separation corona voltage adjustment: Leading edge 2-403-001 Normal 100% 50 to 200% 2-403-002 Thick 1 100% 50 to 200% 2-403-003 OHP 100% 50 to 200% 2-403-004 Thick 2 100% 50 to 200% 2-403-005 2nd side: Normal 100% 50 to 200% 2-403-006 2nd side: Thick 1 100% 50 to 200% 2-403-007 2nd side: Thick 2 100% 50 to 200% 2-404: Paper Separation Corona Voltage: Humidity correction 2-404-001 LL: Normal: 1C 100% 2-404-002 LL: Normal: 4C 100% 2-404-003 L: Normal: 1C 100% 2-404-004 L: Normal: 4C 100% 2-404-005 H: Normal: 1C 100% 2-404-006 H: Normal: 4C 100% 2-404-007 HH: Normal: 1C 100% 2-404-008 HH: Normal: 4C 100% 2-404-009 LL: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-404-010 LL: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-404-011 L: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-404-012 L: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-404-013 H: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-404-014 H: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-404-015 HH: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-404-016 HH: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-404-017 LL: OHP: 1C 100% 2-404-018 LL: OHP: 4C 100% 2-404-019 L: OHP: 1C 100% 2-404-020 L: OHP: 4C 100% 2-404-021 H: OHP: 1C 100% 2-404-022 H: OHP: 4C 100% 2-404-023 HH: OHP: 1C 100% 2-404-024 HH: OHP: 4C 100% 2-404-025 LL: Thick 2: 1C 100% 2-404-026 LL: Thick 2: 4C 100% 2-404-027 L: Thick 2: 1C 100% 2-404-028 L: Thick 2: 4C 100% 2-404-029 H: Thick 2: 1C 100% 2-404-030 H: Thick 2: 4C 100% 2-404-031 HH: Thick 2: 1C 100% 2-404-032 HH: Thick 2: 4C 100% 2-404-033 LL: Normal: 2nd side: 1C 100% 2-404-034 LL: Normal: 2nd side: 4C 100% 2-404-035 L: Normal: 2nd side: 1C 100% 2-404-036 L: Normal: 2nd side: 4C 100% 2-404-037 H: Normal: 2nd side: 1C 100% 2-404-038 H: Normal: 2nd side: 4C 100% 2-404-039 HH: Normal: 2nd side: 1C 100% 2-404-040 HH: Normal: 2nd side: 4C 100% 2-404-041 LL: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 100% 2-404-042 LL: Thick 1 : 2nd side: 4C 100% 2-404-043 L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 100% 2-404-044 L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C 100% 2-404-045 H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 100%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Adjusts the paper separation corona voltage for the paper leading edge. The voltage of the image area times by the percentage selected in this mode is applied.
50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Corrects the paper separation corona voltage for each humidity condition and copy mode. LL: Very low humidity L : Low humidity H : High humidity HH: Very high humidity
SM
B-11
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-404-046 2-404-047 2-404-048 2-404-049 2-404-050 2-404-051 2-404-052 2-404-053 2-404-054 2-404-055 2-404-056
Item H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C HH: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C HH: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C LL: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C LL: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C L: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C L: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C H: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C H: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C HH: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C HH: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C
Default Value 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
Value Range 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen High-Hum THICK Back 4C Very-High-Hum THICK Back 1C Very-High-Hum THICK Back 4C V-Low-Hum V-THICK Back 1C V-Low-Hum V-THICK Back 4C Low-Hum VERY-THICK Back 1C Low-Hum VERY-THICK Back 4C High-Hum VERY-THICK Back 1C High-Hum VERY-THICK Back 4C V-High-Hum V-THICK Back 1C V-High-Hum V-THICK Back 4C Paper Separation CH correction: AC output NRML NRML 1C NRML NRML 4C NRML THICK 1C NRML THICK4C NRML OHP 1C NRML OHP 4C NRML V_THCIK 1C NRML V_THCIK 4C NRML B_NRML 1C NRML B_NRML 4C NRML B_THICK 1C NRML B_THICK 4C NRML B_V_THICK 1C NRML B_V_THICK 4C LL NRML 1C LL NRML 4C LL THICK 1C LL THICK4C LL OHP 1C LL OHP 4C LL V_THCIK 1C LL V_THCIK 4C LL B_NRML 1C LL B_NRML 4C LL B_THICK 1C LL B_THICK 4C LL B_V_THICK 1C LL B_V_THICK 4C L NRML 1C L NRML 4C L THICK 1C L THICK4C L OHP 1C L OHP 4C L V_THCIK 1C L V_THCIK 4C L B_NRML 1C L B_NRML 4C L B_THICK 1C L B_THICK 4C L B_V_THICK 1C L B_V_THICK 4C
2-405: Paper separation corona voltage: AC Component ON/OFF 2-405-001 Normal-Normal: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-002 Normal-Normal: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-003 Normal-Thick 1: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-004 Normal -Thick 1: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-005 Normal-OHP: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-006 Normal-OHP: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-007 Normal-Thick 2: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-008 Normal-Thick2: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-009 Normal-Normal: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-010 Normal-Normal: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-011 Normal-Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-012 Normal-Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-013 Normal-Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-014 Normal-Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-015 L-L: Normal: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-016 L-L: Normal: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-017 L-L: Thick 1: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-018 L-L: Thick 1: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-019 L-L: OHP: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-020 L-L: OHP: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-021 L-L: Thick 2: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-022 L-L: Thick 2: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-023 L-L: Normal: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-024 L-L: Normal: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-025 L-L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-026 L-L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-027 L-L: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-028 L-L: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-029 L: Normal: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-030 L: Normal: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-031 L: Thick 1: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-032 L: Thick 1: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-033 L: OHP: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-034 L: OHP: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-035 L: Thick 2: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-036 L: Thick 2: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-037 L: Normal: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-038 L: Normal: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-039 L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-040 L: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1 2-405-041 L: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C 1 0 or 1 2-405-042 L: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C 1 0 or 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Switches the paper separation corona ON or OFF for each mode. 0 = OFF 1 = ON
A257/A269
B-12
SM
SP Mode No. 2-405-043 2-405-044 2-405-045 2-405-046 2-405-047 2-405-048 2-405-049 2-405-050 2-405-051 2-405-052 2-405-053 2-405-054 2-405-055 2-405-056 2-405-057 2-405-058 2-405-059 2-405-060 2-405-061 2-405-062 2-405-063 2-405-064 2-405-065 2-405-066 2-405-067 2-405-068 2-405-069 2-405-070
Item H: Normal: 1C H: Normal: 4C H: Thick 1: 1C H: Thick 1: 4C H: OHP: 1C H: OHP: 4C H: Thick 2: 1C H: Thick 2: 4C H: Normal: 2nd side: 1C H: Normal: 2nd side: 4C H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C H: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C H: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C H-H: Normal: 1C H-H: Normal: 4C H-H: Thick 1: 1C H-H: Thick 1: 4C H-H: OHP: 1C H-H: OHP: 4C H-H: Thick 2: 1C H-H: Thick 2: 4C H-H: Normal: 2nd side: 1C H-H: Normal: 2nd side: 4C H-H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 1C H-H: Thick 1: 2nd side: 4C H-H: Thick 2: 2nd side: 1C H-H: Thick 2: 2nd side: 4C
Default Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Value Range 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen H NRML 1C H NRML 4C H THICK 1C H THICK 4C H OHP 1C H OHP 4C H V_THCIK 1C H V_THCIK 4C H B_NRML 1C H B_NRML 4C H B_THICK 1C H B_THICK 4C H B_V_THICK 1C H B_V_THICK 4C HH NRML 1C HH NRML 4C HH THICK 1C HH THICK 4C HH OHP 1C HH OHP 4C HH V_THCIK 1C HH V_THCIK 4C HH B_NRML 1C HH B_NRML 4C HH B_THICK 1C HH B_THICK 4C HH B_V_THICK 1C HH B_V_THICK 4C Transfer Belt Discharge: DC SPEED_STD 1C SPEED_STD 2C SPEED_STD 4C SPEED_HALF 1C SPEED_HALF 2C SPEED_HALF 4C SPEED_STD other SPEED_HALF other ENV_LL_SPEED_STD 1C ENV_LL_SPEED_STD 2C ENV_LL_SPEED_STD 4C EBV_LL_SPEED_HALF 1C EBV_LL_SPEED_HALF 2C EBV_LL_SPEED_HALF 4C ENV_LL_SPEED_STD other ENV_LL_SPEED_HALF other ENV_HH_SPEED_STD 1C ENV_HH_SPEED_STD 2C ENV_HH_SPEED_STD 4C ENV_HH_SPEED_HALF 1C ENV_HH_SPEED_HALF 2C ENV_HH_SPEED_HALF 4C ENV_HH_SPEED_STD other ENV_HH_SPEED_HALF other
2-601: ITB lubricant brush bias adjustment: After image development 2-601-001 Normal speed: 1C 50V 0 to 1000V 2-601-002 Normal speed: 2C 50V 0 to 1000V 2-601-003 Normal speed: 4C 50V 0 to 1000V 2-601-004 Half speed: 1C 50V 0 to 1000V 2-601-005 Half speed: 2C 50V 0 to 1000V 2-601-006 Half speed: 4C 50V 0 to 1000V 2-601-007 Normal speed: Others 100V 0 to 1000V 2-601-008 Half speed: Others 100V 0 to 1000V 2-601-009 Normal speed: LL: 1C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-010 Normal speed: LL: 2C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-011 Normal speed: LL: 4C 250V -500 to 500V 2-601-012 Half speed: LL: 1C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-013 Half speed: LL: 2C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-014 Half speed: LL: 4C 250V -500 to 500V 2-601-015 Normal speed: LL: Others 50V -500 to 500V 2-601-016 Half speed: LL: Others 50V -500 to 500V 2-601-017 Normal speed: HH: 1C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-018 Normal speed: HH: 2C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-019 Normal speed: HH: 4C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-020 Half speed: HH: 1C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-021 Half speed: HH: 2C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-022 Half speed: HH: 4C 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-023 Normal speed: HH: Others 0V -500 to 500V 2-601-024 Half speed: HH: Others 0V -500 to 500V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Adjusts the image transfer belt lubricant brush bias after Basically, do not change the image development is completed, for each speed in the data since the suitable value is prefixed for some 1C, 2C, or 4C mode. kinds of paper.
Shifts the image transfer belt lubricant brush bias set at SP 2-601-001 to 008 in each environment condition. LL = Low temperature and low humidity condition HH = High temperature and high humidity condition
SM
B-13
SM
SP Mode No. 2-601-025
Item Lubricant brush (Belt cleaning mode)
Default Value 100V
Value Range 0 to 1000V
Step 1
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Q1_Brush CLN
2-603: PTB discharge corona voltage adjustment 2-603-001 Normal: 1C 2-603-002 Normal: 2C 2-603-003 Normal: 3C 2-603-004 Normal: 4C 2-603-005 Normal: Non transfer area 2-603-006 Thick 1: 1C 2-603-007 Thick 1: 2C 2-603-008 Thick 1: 3C 2-603-009 Thick 1: 4C 2-603-010 Thick 1: Non transfer area 2-603-011 OHP: 1C 2-603-012 OHP: 2C 2-603-013 OHP: 3C 2-603-014 OHP: 4C 2-603-015 OHP: Non transfer area 2-603-016 Thick 2: 1C 2-603-017 Thick 2: 2C 2-603-018 Thick 2: 3C 2-603-019 Thick 2: 4C 2-603-020 Thick 2: Non transfer area 2-603-021 Lubricant brush (Belt cleaning mode)
900V 1100V 1100V 1100V 800V 900V 1100V 1100V 1100V 800V 900V 1100V 1100V 1100V 800V 900V 1100V 1100V 1100V 800V 1100V
100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V 100 to 1500V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Adjusts the paper separation belt discharge corona voltage for the type of paper and copy mode. Non transfer area: The different voltage is applied to the discharge corona after the trailing edge of paper passes it until next sheet of paper comes.
Belt Discharge Bias NRML 1C NRML 2C NRML 3C NRML 4C NRML Not-Trns THICK 1C THICK 2C THICK 3C THICK 4C THICK Not-Trns OHP 1C OHP 2C OHP 3C OHP 4C OHP Not-Trns VERY-THICK 1C VERY-THICK 2C VERY-THICK 3C VERY-THICK 4C VERY-THICK Not-Trns Q1_Brush CLN
2-604: PTB discharge corona voltage: Humidity correction 2-604-001 LL: Normal: 1C 100% 2-604-002 LL: Normal: 4C 100% 2-604-003 L: Normal: 1C 100% 2-604-004 L: Normal: 4C 100% 2-604-005 H: Normal: 1C 100% 2-604-006 H: Normal: 4C 100% 2-604-007 HH: Normal: 1C 100% 2-604-008 HH: Normal: 4C 100% 2-604-009 LL: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-604-010 LL: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-604-011 L: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-604-012 L: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-604-013 H: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-604-014 H: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-604-015 HH: Thick 1: 1C 100% 2-604-016 HH: Thick 1: 4C 100% 2-604-017 LL: OHP: 1C 100% 2-604-018 LL: OHP: 4C 100% 2-604-019 L: OHP: 1C 100% 2-604-020 L: OHP: 4C 100% 2-604-021 H: OHP: 1C 100% 2-604-022 H: OHP: 4C 100% 2-604-023 HH: OHP: 1C 100% 2-604-024 HH: OHP: 4C 100% 2-604-025 LL: Thick 2: 1C 100% 2-604-026 LL: Thick 2: 4C 100% 2-604-027 L: Thick 2: 1C 100%
50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Adjusts the paper transfer belt discharge corona voltage Basically, do not change the data since the suitable for each humidity condition and copy mode. value is prefixed for some LL: Very low humidity kinds of paper. L : Low humidity H : High humidity HH: Very high humidity
Belt Discharge Bias Correction Very-Low-Hum NRML 1C Very-Low-Hum NRML 4C Low-Hum NRML 1C Low-Hum NRML 4C High-Hum NRML 1C High-Hum NRML 4C Very-High-Hum NRML 1C Very-High-Hum NRML 4C Very-Low-Hum THICK 1C Very-Low-Hum THICK 4C Low-Hum THICK 1C Low-Hum THICK 4C High-Hum THICK 1C High-Hum THICK 4C Very-High-Hum THICK 1C Very-High-Hum THICK 4C Very-Low-Hum OHP 1C Very-Low-Hum OHP 4C Low-Hum OHP 1C Low-Hum OHP 4C High-Hum OHP 1C High-Hum OHP 4C Very-High-Hum OHP 1C Very-High-Hum OHP 4C Very-Low-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Very-Low-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Low-Hum VERY-THICK 1C
A257/A269
B-14
SM
SP Mode No. 2-604-028 2-604-029 2-604-030 2-604-031 2-604-032 2-802-000
Item L: Thick 2: 4C H: Thick 2: 1C H: Thick 2: 4C HH: Thick 2: 1C HH: Thick 2: 4C Charge wire/grid cleaner
Default Value 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
Value Range 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200% 50 to 200%
Step 1 1 1 1 1
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Low-Hum VERY-THICK 4C High-Hum VERY-THICK 1C High-Hum VERY-THICK 4C Very-High-Hum VERY-THICK 1C Very-High-Hum VERY-THICK 4C
Starts charge wire/grid cleaning. Press the ON key to perform the wire cleaning.
Forced Charge cleaning
2-803: Charge wire/grid cleaner 2-803-001 Start timing
0 or 1
Starts charge wire/grid cleaning after the main switch or operation switch is turned on and if the hot roller temperature is less than 100 C. 0 = OFF 1 = ON Sets the counter to start charge wire/grid cleaning after a copy job is finished when it reaches to the number of development cycles set in this SP. 0 = Disable the function Sets the time to start charge wire/grid cleaning. When the time set in this SP mode passes after the main switch is turned on, the charge wire cleaning starts after a copy job is finished. 0 = Disable the function
Auto Charge cleaner setting CHClnMode 0:OFF, 1:ON
2-803-002
Counter setting
0 - 80K
1K
ClntvCHCln
2-803-003
Time setting
0 to 999
1H
tIntvCHCln
2-912: Environment display 2-912-001 Temperature 2-912-002 Relative humidity 2-913-000 Toner overflow detection setting 1
C % 0 or 1 1
903 903 903
Displays temperature detected. Displays relative humidify detected. Sets the toner overflow sensor to be functioning or not. 0 = OFF 1 = ON
V = 0.050 x [ oC] V = 0.025 x [ RH% ]
Temperature Display temperature humidity Toner Overflow Sensor 1: Sensor On, 0: Sensor Off
2-951-000
Toner end detection setting
0 or 1
Sets the toner end sensors of all color to be functioning. 0 = ON 1 = OFF NOTE: Make sure that the data is set back to the default when it is set OFF temporary at servicing.
Toner End Detection 0: Detection, 1: No detection
2-953: Maximum toner supply ratio adjustment 2-953-001 K 2-953-002 CMY
100% 100%
0 to 100% 0 to 100%
1 1
903 903
Adjusts the maximum toner supply ratio (upper limit) in the continuous supply mode.
Max Toner Recovery Ratio MaxRtoBkTnAdd MaxRtoCITnAdd Toner End Detection Count
SM
B-15
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 2-955-000
Item Toner end: Counting method
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 or 1
Step 1
SP7
Description Selects the method to count the number of copies which can be made between toner near-end and toner end. 0 = both the counting methods by monitoring image coverage ratio (number of pixel) and number of copies. 1 = number of copies
Remarks
0 = 10 copies can be 0: pixel and sheet, 1: Sheet made at least. Toner end timing depends on image coverage. 1 = 10 copies
3. PROCESS CONTROL
3-005: TD sensor initialization 3-005-001 K 3-005-002 C 3-005-003 M 3-005-004 Y 3-005-005 All color 3-005-006 Toner density initial setting result 0 to 999 1 Does Vref adjustment. NOTE: Do not make a copy with new developer before the initial setting. This mode is required when the developer or TD sensor is replaced. Press the ON key to start. Displays the result of toner density initial setting. 1 = success others = error (Refer to the troubleshooting) Screen - E TD Sensor Initialization K C M Y All Color Result
3-006:TD sensor: Vcnt (gain) setting 3-006-001 K 3-006-002 C 3-006-003 M 3-006-004 Y
128 128 128 128
0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903
Adjusts the TD sensor gain data.
Toner density sensor Gain Do not touch in the field. VcontRef[TN_K] VcontRef[TN_C] VcontRef[TN_M] VcontRef[TN_Y]
3-007: TD sensor output display 3-007-001 K 3-007-002 C 3-007-003 M 3-007-004 Y 3-103: VSP display 3-103-001 K 3-103-002 C 3-103-003 M 3-103-004 Y
V V V V
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Displays the output from the TD sensor.
Toner density sensor output Vt[TN_K] Vt[TN_C] Vt[TN_M] Vt[TN_Y] VSP Display K C M Y
V V V V
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
903 903 903 903
Displays VSP of the ID sensor pattern developed.
3-107: ID sensor output display: Bare drum 3-107-001 VSG: K 3-107-002 VSP: Color
V V
0.01 0.01
903 903
Displays VSG measured on the bare drum.
VSG Display K Color
A257/A269
B-16
SM
SP Mode No. 3-111-000
Item Residual voltage display
Default Value V
Value Range
Step 1
SP7 903
Description Displays the residual voltage. The drum is charged at certain potential and exposed by full power of laser. The remained voltage (residual voltage) on the drum is used for process control.
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Residual Voltage Vr
3-121: Development Gamma 3-121-001 K 3-121-002 C 3-121-003 M 3-121-004 Y 3-122: VK 3-122-001 K 3-122-002 C 3-122-003 M 3-122-004 Y 3-125-000 Process control method 0
1 1 1 1 V V V V 0 or 1 1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Displays the development gamma.
Displays the Vk.
Sets the process control ON or OFF. 0 = ON 1 = OFF
Development Gamma DevGam [TN_K] DevGam [TN_C] DevGam [TN_M] DevGam [TN_Y] Vk K C M Y Potential Control Do not touch in the field. Potenticl Control 0: AUTO, 1: FIX
3-126-000
Forced Self-check
0 to 1
Performs the forced self-check. Press the ON key to start.
Screen - E
Forced P-Ctrl Self Chk
3-127: Process control gamma: Toner Max. M/A adjustment 3-127-001 K 0.7mg/cm2 3-127-002 Color 0.7mg/cm2
0.5 to 1.5mg/cm2 0.5 to 1.5mg/cm2
0.001 0.001
Adjusts the target of the maximum toner M/A used for the process control self check.
P-control gamma target Do not touch in the field. Max M/A: K Max: M/A: Color
3-128-00
Toner density automatic adjustment
0 or 1
Sets the toner density automatic adjustment ON or OFF. Do not touch in the field. Toner Density Auto Control If it is ON, the toner density is automatically adjusted 0: ON, 1: OFF during the forced or initial automatic process control. 0 = ON 1 = OFF
3-129: ID sensor pattern: Toner M/A adjustment 3-129-001 Target: K 0.3mg/cm2 3-129-002 Target: Color 0.7mg/cm2 3-129-003 Correction: K 0.000 3-129-004 Correction: Color 0.000 3-902: Selected pointer table display 3-902-001 K 3-902-002 C 3-902-003 M
0.1 to 1.5 mg/cm2 0.1 to 1.5 mg/cm2 -0.100 to 0.100 -0.100 to 0.100
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
ID sensor Pattern Target Do not touch in the field. M/Aref: K M/Aref: Color Sets the correction value for the target set in 3-129-001 M/Aref correction: K M/Aref correction: Color or 002. Adjusts the target toner M/A for the ID sensor pattern. Pointer Table No K C M
1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20
1 1 1
903 903 903
Displays the pointer table of VD, VB, VL selected during the self-check.
SM
B-17
A257/A269
SP Mode No.
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
SP7 903 903 903 903 903
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Y ID Sensor Pattern M/A Display K C M Y
3-902-004 Y 1 to 20 3-907: ID sensor pattern: Toner M/A Actual (current) data display 3-907-01 K mg/cm2 3-907-02 C mg/cm2 3-907-03 M mg/cm2 3-907-04 Y mg/cm2 3-940: Vcnt: Correction steps 3-940-001 K 3-940-002 C 3-940-003 M 3-940-004 Y 3-941: Vcnt: Lower limit 3-941-001 K 3-941-002 C 3-941-003 M 3-941-004 Y
Displays the actual (current) toner M/A.
0 0 0 0
0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
1 1 1 1
Adjusts the correction steps for the Vcnt (gain).
TS Gain Do not touch in the field. VcontShift[TN_K] VcontShift[TN_C] VcontShift[TN_M] VcontShift[TN_Y] TS Gain Do not touch in the field. VcontMin[TN_K] VcontMin[TN_C] VcontMin[TN_M] VcontMin[TN_Y]
-20 -20 -20 -20
-128 to 0 -128 to 0 -128 to 0 -128 to 0
1 1 1 1
Sets the lower limit of the shift range of Vcnt (gain).
3-942: Vcnt: Upper limit 3-942-001 K 3-942-002 C 3-942-003 M 3-942-004 Y 3-944: Vcnt: Display 3-944-001 K 3-944-002 C 3-944-003 M 3-944-004 Y 3-946: Vref: Correction steps (V) 3-946-001 K 3-946-002 C 3-946-003 M 3-946-004 Y 3-947: Vref: Lower limit 3-947-001 K 3-947-002 C 3-947-003 M 3-947-004 Y 3-948: Vref: Upper limit 3-948-001 K 3-948-002 C 3-948-003 M 3-948-004 Y
20 20 20 20
0 to 128 0 to 128 0 to 128 0 to 128
1 1 1 1
Sets the upper limit of the shift range of Vcnt (gain).
TS Gain Do not touch in the field. VcontMax[TN_K] VcontMax[TN_C] VcontMax[TN_M] VcontMax[TN_Y] TS Gain Vcont[TN_K] Vcont[TN_C] Vcont[TN_M] Vcont[TN_Y] TS Control Do not touch in the field. VtRefShift[TN_K] VtRefShift[TN_C] VtRefShift[TN_M] VtRefShift[TN_Y] TS Control Do not touch in the field. VtRefMin[TN_K] VtRefMin[TN_C] VtRefMin[TN_M] VtRefMin[TN_Y] TS Control Do not touch in the field. VtRefMax[TN_K] VtRefMax[TN_C] VtRefMax[TN_M] VtRefMax[TN_Y]
0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903
Displays the Vcnt (gain) data.
0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
903 903 903 903
Adjusts the correction steps of Vref.
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Sets the lower limit of the shift range of Vref.
3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50
0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Sets the upper limit of the shift range of Vref.
A257/A269
B-18
SM
SP Mode No.
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen TS Control VtReflnit[TN_K] VtReflnit[TN_C] VtReflnit[TN_M] VtReflnit[TN_Y] TS Control VtRef[TN_K] VtRef[TN_C] VtRef[TN_M] VtRef[TN_Y] Dev. Agitation Result bResAging
3-949: Vref: Initial data display 3-949-001 K 3-949-002 C 3-949-003 M 3-949-004 Y 3-950: Vref: Actual (current) data display 3-950-001 K 3-950-002 C 3-950-003 M 3-950-004 Y 3-964-000 Developer initialization result
0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
903 903 903 903
Displays the Vref value detected during the TD sensor initialization.
0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00 0 to 999
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1
903 903 903 903 903
Displays the actual (current) Vref value.
Displays the result of the developer initialization.
Screen - E
3-972-000
Timed process control selfcheck: Interval adjustment
6H
0 to 240H
903
Adjusts the interval of process control self-check by time. 0 = Disable the function
Timer
3-973-000
Interval process control selfcheck: Interval adjustment
150 sheets
0 to 500 sheets
903
Adjusts the interval of process control self-check by the number of copies/prints. 0 = Disable the function
P-Cntl Self Chk Interval Sheets
3-974: Toner Max. M/A target adjustment 3-974-001 K
0.7mg/cm2
0.5 to 1.5mg/cm2
0.001
Adjusts the target of the maximum toner M/A used for the potential control (normal copy process).
Toner Max M/A Target Do not touch in the field Max M/A: K
3-974-002 3-975-000
Color Self-check result
0.7mg/cm2
0.5 to 1.5mg/cm2 0 to 999
0.001 1 903 Displays the result of the self-check. 1 = success others = failure (Follow the troubleshooting.) Screen - E
Max M/A: Color P-Ctrl Self Chk Result bResSlfChk
3-977-000
Process Control Gamma: Interval setting (copies/prints)
0 to 999
903
Adjusts the interval of self-check by copies/prints. 0 = Disable the function
Do not touch in the field Procon Gamma ClntvProcGam
4. SCANNER UNIT
4-008-000 Scanner sub-scan magnification adjustment 0% -0.9 to 0.9% 0.1 903 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. Do not touch in the field. Subscan Magnification
4-010-000
Scanner leading edge registration adjustment
0 mm
-3.0 to 3.0 mm
0.1
903
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the laser exposure start timing in sub-scan direction.
Lead Edge Regist: Scanning
SM
B-19
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 4-011-000
Item Scanner side to side registration adjustment
Default Value 0 mm
Value Range -6.0 to 6.0 mm
Step 0.1
SP7 903
Description Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser exposure start timing in main-scan direction.
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Side to Side Reg: Scanning
4-012: Scanning blank margin adjustment 4-012-001 Rear 4-012-002 Front 4-012-003 Left 4-012-004 Right
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0 to 3.0 mm 0 to 3.0 mm 0 to 3.0 mm 0 to 3.0 mm
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the Screen - A original shadow caused by the gap between the original and scale.
Left Scale Rear Exposure Glass Right Original Front
Scanning Blnk Mrgn Rear Front Left Right
Left
When adjusting the blank margin in each direction, please refer to the above figure.
4-013: Scanner free run 4-013-001 Lamp ON 4-013-002 Lamp OFF
Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp ON or OFF. Press the ON or OFF key to start or stop.
Scan Free Run Lamp ON Lamp OFF
4-301-000
APS operation check: Size display IPU test pattern selection 0 0 to 14 1
Displays the original size detected by the original sensors. 0 = No pattern (normal copy operation mode) 1 = Grid pattern 2 = Slanted Grid Pattern 3 = 256 gradation (Horizontal) 4 = 256 gradation (Vertical) 5 = Color patch 6 = RGB gray scale (16 gradation steps) 7 = YMCK-RGB 16 gradation 8 = YMCK 16 gradation 9 = YMCK 128 gradation 10 = Same as 1 11 = Same as 8 12 = Same as 9 13 = YMCK 16 gradation 14 = YMCK 128 gradation
Refer to S/M page 4-3 for APS Data Confirmation the details. The data has to be set IPU Test Ptrn Selection back to 0 when going out from SP mode. (The data is not reset to the default automatically.)
4-417-000
4-426: RGB gain display 4-426-001 R: ODD 4-426-002 R: EVEN
0 to 255 0 to 255
1 1
903 903
RGB_GAIN Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the scanner Do not touch in the field. R_GAIN ODD IPU for each RGB color. R_GAIN_EVEN
A257/A269
B-20
SM
SP Mode No. 4-426-003 4-426-004 4-426-005 4-426-006 G: ODD G: EVEN B: ODD B: EVEN
Item
Default Value
Value Range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
Step 1 1 1 1
SP7 903 903 903 903
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen G_GAIN ODD G_GAIN_EVEN B_GAIN_ODD B_GAIN_EVEN
4-427: RGB reference setup 4-427-001 R: 0 4-427-002 G: 0 4-427-003 B: 0 4-427-004 R: 1 4-427-005 G: 1 4-427-006 B: 1 4-435-000 White level adjustment
133 133 133 160 (FA) 160 (FA) 160 (FA)
0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903
Sets or displays the reference voltage for the A/D converters on the scanner IPU for each RGB color.
RGB REF Do not touch in the field. R_REF 0 G_REF 0 B_REF 0 R_REF 1 G_REF 1 B_REF 1 White Level Adj.
Performs the white level adjustment. Press the ON key to perform the adjustment.
4-501: ACC target density level adjustment: Copy mode 4-501-001 Letter: K 5 4-501-002 Letter: C 5 4-501-003 Letter: M 5 4-501-004 Letter: Y 5 4-501-005 Photo: K 5 4-501-006 Photo: C 5 4-501-007 Photo: M 5 4-501-008 Photo: Y 5 4-502: ACC target density level adjustment: Print mode 4-502-001 Letter: K 5 4-502-002 Letter: C 5 4-502-003 Letter: M 5 4-502-004 Letter: Y 5 4-502-005 Photo: K 5 4-502-006 Photo: C 5 4-502-007 Photo: M 5 4-502-008 Photo: Y 5 4-503: Not used 4-502-001 Letter: K 4-502-002 Letter: C 4-502-003 Letter: M 4-502-004 Letter: Y 4-502-005 Photo: K 4-502-006 Photo: C 4-502-007 Photo: M 4-502-008 Photo: Y
0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the target density level of ACC for each mode Do not touch in the field. and color in the copy mode. (The adjustable range is 0 to 50; but, effective range is 0 to 10. Even when it is set to 50, it is the same level of 10.) The middle of printer gamma is shifted in this mode.
ACC Target Adj: Copier Copier: Text: K Copier: Text: C Copier: Text: M Copier: Text: Y Copier: Photo: K Copier: Photo: C Copier: Photo: M Copier: Photo: Y
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the target density level of ACC for each mode and color in the print mode 1. (The adjustable range is 0 to 50; but, effective range is 0 to 10. Even when it is set to 50, it is the same level of 10.) The middle of printer gamma is shifted in this mode.
ACC Target Adj: Printer 1 Do not touch in the field. Printer: Text: K Printer: Text: C Printer: Text: M Printer: Text: Y Printer: Photo: K Printer: Photo: C Printer: Photo: M Printer: Photo: Y
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ACC Target Adjustment: printer 2 Not used. (This mode will be deleted from the software.) Do not touch in the field. Printer 2: Text: K Printer 2: Text: C Printer 2: Text: M Printer 2: Text: Y Printer2: Photo: K Printer2: Photo: C Printer2: Photo: M Printer2: Photo: Y ACC Device Correct: HL High Light: K Screen - G Do not touch in the field. High Light: C
4-505: ACC target level adjustment: High light area 4-505-001 K 0 (FA) 4-505-002 C 0 (FA)
-128 to 127 -128 to 127
1 1
904 904
Adjusts the scanner gamma for high light area.
SM
B-21
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 4-505-003 4-505-004 M Y
Item
Default Value 0 (FA) 0 (FA)
Value Range -128 to 127 -128 to 127
Step 1 1
SP7 904 904
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen High Light: M High Light: Y
4-506: ACC target level adjustment: Shadow area 4-506-001 K 4-506-002 C 4-506-003 M 4-506-004 Y 4-507-000 ACC Process Control ON/OFF
0 (FA) 0 (FA) 0 (FA) 0 (FA) 3
-128 to 127 -128 to 127 -128 to 127 -128 to 127 0 to 3
1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904
Adjusts the scanner gamma for shadow area.
ACC Device Correct: Shadow Shadow: K Screen - G Do not touch in the field. Shadow: C Shadow: M Shadow: Y Change the data only when a user does not want to wait for a few minutes at ACC. ACC:Procon
Specifies whether the copy interval process control works at ACC or not. 0 = OFF 1 = ON (Printer ACC only) 2 = ON (Copy ACC only) 3 = ON (Both Copy/Printer ACC)
4-904: Scanner IPU board test 4-904-001 Scanner IPU board test 1
0 or 17 to 25
Performs the IPU board test 1. The test 1 program diagnoses problems with register Write/Read of the ASICs on the IPU board. Press the ON key to start. 0 = OK 17 to 25 = NG 25: Error due to sub scanner IPU board Others: Error due to main scanner IPU board Performs the IPU board test 2. The test 2 program diagnoses problems with patterns generated from ASICs on the IPU board. Press the ON key to start. 0 = OK 33 to 44 = NG 35: Error due to sub scanner IPU board Others: Error due to main scanner IPU board
IPU Board Test It takes about 5 minutes to Test1 complete the test. The screen switches from "Job Acting" to "End" and displays the test result.
4-904-002
Scanner IPU board test 2
0 or 33 to 44
It takes a few minutes to Test2 complete the test. The screen switches from "Job Acting" to "End" and displays the test result.
4-907-000
LD control board: Test pattern selection
0 to 5
Selects the a test pattern. The analog video ASIC makes test patterns without image data sent from CCD. 0 = No pattern 1 = Black pattern 2 = White pattern 3 = 16 gradation pattern 4 = 4 dot grid pattern 5 = 2 dot grid pattern
The data has to be set VPU Test Ptrn Selection back to 0 when going out from SP mode. (The data is not reset to the default automatically.)
A257/A269
B-22
SM
SP Mode No.
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
4-910: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: K 4-910-001 Offset - High light 4-910-02 Offset - Middle 4-910-003 Offset - Shadow 4-910-004 Offset - IDmax 4-910-005 Option - High light 4-910-006 Option - Middle 4-910-007 Option - Shadow 4-910-008 Option - IDmax 4-911: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: C 4-911-001 Offset - High light 4-911-002 Offset - Middle 4-911-003 Offset - Shadow 4-911-004 Offset - IDmax 4-911-005 Option - High light 4-911-006 Option - Middle 4-911-007 Option - Shadow 4-911-008 Option - IDmax 4-912: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: M 4-912-001 Offset - High light 4-912-002 Offset - Middle 4-912-003 Offset - Shadow 4-912-004 Offset - IDmax 4-912-005 Option - High light 4-912-006 Option - Middle 4-912-007 Option - Shadow 4-912-008 Option - IDmax 4-913: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter: Y 4-913-001 Offset - High light 4-913-002 Offset - Middle 4-913-003 Offset - Shadow 4-913-004 Offset - IDmax 4-913-005 Option - High light 4-913-006 Option - Middle 4-913-007 Option - Shadow 4-913-008 Option - IDmax
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Black in Screen - H the Letter mode (Copy Mode).
Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: K Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: C Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: M Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: Y Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Screen - H
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Cyan in Screen - H the Letter mode (Copy Mode).
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Magenta Screen - H in the Letter mode (Copy Mode).
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Yellow in the Letter mode (Copy Mode).
4-914: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Letter, single color: K 4-914-001 Offset - High light 15 4-914-002 Offset - Middle 15 4-914-003 Offset - Shadow 15 4-914-004 Offset - IDmax 15 4-914-005 Option - High light 0 4-914-006 Option - Middle 0 4-914-007 Option - Shadow 0 4-914-008 Option - IDmax 0 4-915: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: K 4-915-001 Offset - High light 4-915-002 Offset - Middle
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Black in Screen - H the Letter/Single color mode (Copy Mode).
Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: SC K Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: K Low ID (Offset) : Photo Middle ID (Offset) : Photo
15 15
0 to 30 0 to 30
1 1
904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Black in Screen - H the Photo mode (Copy Mode).
SM
B-23
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 4-915-003 4-915-004 4-915-005 4-915-006 4-915-007 4-915-008
Item Offset - Shadow Offset - IDmax Option - High light Option - Middle Option - Shadow Option - IDmax
Default Value 15 15 0 0 0 0
Value Range 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7 904 904 904 904 904 904
Description
Remarks
High ID (Offset) : Photo IDmax (Offset) : Photo Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Photo Middle ID (Option) : Photo High ID (Option) : Photo IDmax (Option) : Photo Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: C Low ID (Offset) : Photo Middle ID (Offset) : Photo High ID (Offset) : Photo IDmax (Offset) : Photo Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Photo Middle ID (Option) : Photo High ID (Option) : Photo IDmax (Option) : Photo Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: M Low ID (Offset) : Photo Middle ID (Offset) : Photo High ID (Offset) : Photo IDmax (Offset) : Photo Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Photo Middle ID (Option) : Photo High ID (Option) : Photo IDmax (Option) : Photo
4-916: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: C 4-916-001 Offset - High light 4-916-002 Offset - Middle 4-916-003 Offset - Shadow 4-916-004 Offset - IDmax 4-916-005 Option - High light 4-916-006 Option - Middle 4-916-007 Option - Shadow 4-916-008 Option - IDmax 4-917: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo: M 4-917-001 Offset - High light 4-917-002 Offset - Middle 4-917-003 Offset - Shadow 4-917-004 Offset - IDmax 4-917-005 Option - High light 4-917-006 Option - Middle 4-917-007 Option - Shadow 4-917-008 Option - IDmax
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Cyan in Screen - H the Photo mode (Copy Mode).
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Magenta Screen - H in the Photo mode (Copy Mode).
4-918: Gamma adjustment: Copy: Photo Y 4-918-001 Offset - High light 4-918-002 Offset - Middle 4-918-003 Offset - Shadow 4-918-004 Offset - IDmax 4-918-005 Option - High light 4-918-006 Option - Middle 4-918-007 Option - Shadow 4-918-008 Option - IDmax 4-919: Gamma adjustment: Printer: K 4-919-001 Offset - High light 4-919-002 Offset - Middle 4-919-003 Offset - Shadow 4-919-004 Offset - IDmax 4-919-005 Option - High light 4-919-006 Option - Middle 4-919-007 Option - Shadow 4-919-008 Option - IDmax 4-920: Gamma adjustment: Printer: C 4-920-001 Offset - High light 4-920-002 Offset - Middle 4-920-003 Offset - Shadow 4-920-004 Offset - IDmax 4-920-005 Option - High light
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Yellow in the Photo mode (Copy Mode).
Manual Gamma Adj: Copier: Y Low ID (Offset) : Photo Middle ID (Offset) : Photo High ID (Offset) : Photo IDmax (Offset) : Photo Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Photo Middle ID (Option) : Photo High ID (Option) : Photo IDmax (Option) : Photo Screen - H Manual Gamma Adj: Printer : K Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Manual Gamma Adj: Printer : C Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Black in Screen - H the Letter mode (Printer Mode).
15 15 15 15 0
0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 255
1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Cyan in Screen - H the Letter mode (Printer Mode).
A257/A269
B-24
SM
SP Mode No. 4-920-006 4-920-007 4-920-008
Item Option - Middle Option - Shadow Option - IDmax
Default Value 0 0 0
Value Range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
Step 1 1 1
SP7 904 904 904
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text
4-921: Gamma adjustment: Printer: M 4-921-001 Offset - High light 4-921-002 Offset - Middle 4-921-003 Offset - Shadow 4-921-004 Offset - IDmax 4-921-005 Option - High light 4-921-006 Option - Middle 4-921-007 Option - Shadow 4-921-008 Option - IDmax
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Magenta Screen - H in the Letter mode (Printer Mode).
Manual Gamma Adj: Printer : M Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text
4-922: Gamma adjustment: Printer: Y 4-922-001 Offset - High light 4-922-002 Offset - Middle 4-922-003 Offset - Shadow 4-922-004 Offset - IDmax 4-922-005 Option - High light 4-922-006 Option - Middle 4-922-007 Option - Shadow 4-922-008 Option - IDmax 4-932: Main scan dot position correction 4-932-001 R left 4-932-002 R right 4-932-003 B left 4-932-004 B right 4-980: FPU: Reference value adjustment 4-980-001 R: Positive 4-980-002 G: Positive 4-980-003 B: Positive 4-980-004 R: Negative 4-980-005 G: Negative 4-980-006 B: Negative 4-981: FPU: White level adjustment 4-981-001 Positive 4-981-002 Negative
15 15 15 15 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5
0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
904 904 904 904 904 904 904 904
Manual Gamma Adj: Printer : Y Low ID (Offset) : Text Middle ID (Offset) : Text High ID (Offset) : Text IDmax (Offset) : Text Do not touch in the field. Low ID (Option) : Text Middle ID (Option) : Text High ID (Option) : Text IDmax (Option) : Text Picture Element Correction Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue Screen - I Red: Left Red: Right filter line on the CCD. Blue: Left Blue: Left Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for Yellow in the Letter mode (Printer Mode). Screen - H FPU Reference Setting Do not touch in the field. Red: Positive Green: Positive Blue: Positive Red: negative Green: Negative Blue: Negative FPU White level Target Positive Negative
133 133 133 133 133 133
0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255
1 1 1 1 1 1
Adjusts or displays the reference value used at A/D converter of RGB signal for FPU.
568 568
0 to 1023 0 to 1023
1 1
Adjusts or displays the target value of white level for the type of film for FPU.
5. OPERATION MODE/SYSTEM
5-001-000 Operation panel all on Turns on all the indicators on the operation panel Press the ON or OFF key to turn on the indicators or not. ALL Indication On
5-005: Copy mode selection (default setting)
Priority Selection
SM
B-25
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 5-005-001
Item Standard mode
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 to 4
Step 1
SP7
Description Selects the default setting of the standard mode. 0 = Text/Photo 1 = Text 2 = Photo 3 = Special Original Selects the default setting of the Inside Area mode. 0 = Text 1 = Photo
Remarks
These setting can be done 1 in the User Tool.
5-005-002
Inside area
1 to 3
5-005-003
Outside area
0 to 3
Selects the default setting of the Outside Area mode. 0 = Text/Photo 1 = Text 2 = Photo 3 = Special Original
5-005-005
Photo type (Auto text/photo)
0 to 2
Selects the default setting of the Photo Type (Auto Text/Photo) mode. 0 = Press Print 1 = Glossy Photo 2 = 2nd Generation
5-005-006
Photo type (Photo)
0 to 2
Selects the default setting of the Photo Type (Photo) mode. 0 = Press Print 1 = Glossy Photo 2 = 2nd Generation
5-005-007
Special original priority
0 to 2
Selects the default setting of the Special Original priority. 0 = Highlight Pen 1 = Inkjet output 2 = Map
A257/S269
B-26
SM
SP Mode No. 5-005-008
Item Copy mode selection in B & W
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 to 1
Step 1
SP7
Description Selects the default setting of the B&W copy mode. 0 = Default setting in the User Tool 1 = Text mode
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen 8
5-009: Operation panel display 5-009-001 Language selection
0 to 15
Selects a language for the LCD. 0 = Japanese 1 = English 2 = French 3 = German 4 = Spanish 5 = Italian 6 = Portuguese 7 = Dutch 8 = Danish 9 = Swedish 10 = Norwegian 11 = Czech 12 = Polish 13 = Russian 14 = Brazilian 15 = Taiwan After a language is selected by changing the data, turn off and on the main switch.
Language/Unit Setting Selects the desired Disp Language language in this SP mode when the main software is updated for the additional languages. When selecting the number which is not available in the version of firmware, English is automatically selected.
5-009-002
Metric/inch selection
0 (others) 1 (USA)
0 or 1
Selects metric or inch. 0 = metric 1 = inch Turn off and on the main switch after the data is changed.
Display related to the sizes is changed.
mm or inch
5-104-000
A3/DLT double count
0 or 1
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT size paper. 0 = Normal count 1 = Double count
A3/DLT Double Count
SM
B-27
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 5-113-000
Item Key counter (User code) / Key card / Coin Lock Set
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 to 3
Step 1
SP7
Description Specifies whether the key counter, key card, or coin lock is installed or not. 0 = None (default) 1 = Key card (used in Japan market only) 2 = Key counter (User code) 3 = Coin lock (used in Japan market only)
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Key card / coin lock
5-114-000
Key card mode
15
1 to 15
Select the mode for the key card. See SM Section 4.1.8 for a complete description of SP5-114-000.
ColorModeSelection: KeyCard
5-120-000
Key counter (User code): Mode clear ON/OFF
0 or 1
Specified whether the current mode is cleared or not when the key counter is removed. 0 = Mode not cleared 1 = Mode cleared
Clear Md on/off: Key Counter
5-121-000
Key card count timing setup
0 or 1
Selects the update timing for the key card. 0 = Paper feed-in 1 = Paper feed-out
Used in Japan market only
Cntr Up Timing: Key Card
5-126-000
F size original setting
0 to 2
Specifies which original size the machine selects when the APS sensors detect F size. 0 = F4 (8 1/2" x 13") 1 = F (8" x 13") 2 = Folio (8 1/4" x 13")
F*size Paper 0*F4, 1:F, 2:Folio
5-127: Coin lock: Mode On/OFF 5-127-001 APS
0 or 1
Specifies whether APS is ON or not when the machine is equipped with Used in Japan market only a coin lock. 0 = ON 1 = OFF
Coin Lock Prohibition APS function
5-127-002
ACS
0 or 1
Specifies whether ACS is ON or not when the machine is equipped with Used in Japan market only a coin lock. 0 = ON 1 = OFF
ACS function
5-128-000
User code + Coin lock
0 or 1
Selects whether both User Code and Coin Lock can be used. 0 = one of them 1 = both
User Code + Coin Lock
5-410-000
Reset password
Resets the key operator access code to 000000. Press the ON key to clear.
User Code Password Clear
SM
B-28
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 5-501-000
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Set PM Counter
PM counter Set
80000
0 to 999999
Sets the PM interval. 0 = PM counter is not used.
Screen - J
5-504-000
Jam alarm level
0 to 3
Sets the jam alarm level. 0 = Not function 1 = 250 sheets 2 = 500 sheets 3 = 1,000 sheets
Jam Alarm Level
5-505-000
SC alarm level
15
0 to 30
Sets the SC alarm level.
SC Alarm Level
5-507: Supply alarm level 5-507-001 Toner End 5-507-002 Copy count by paper size 5-507-003 Staple end 5-507-131 A2 5-507-132 A3 5-507-133 A4 5-507-134 A5 5-507-140 B3 5-507-141 B4 5-507-142 B5 5-507-143 B6 5-507-160 DLT 5-507-164 LG 5-507-166 LT 5-508-000 CC auto call
0 0 0 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1
0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 250 to 10000 0 or 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Specifies whether supply alarm is ON or not. 0 = OFF 1 = ON SP 5-507-002 enables SP 5-507-131 to 166 to be ON.
Specifies whether CC auto call is On or not. 0 = OFF 1 = ON
Supply Alarm Level Toner End Count of copy Staple A2 A3 A4 A5 B3 B4 B5 B6 DLT LG LT EM Auto Call on/off
5-610: ACC Factory setting 5-610-004 Recall
Recalls the default gamma values (factory setting) to the current memory of ACC data. Press the ON key to recall it. Overwrites the current ACC data onto the default gamma values (factory setting). Press the ON key to overwrite it.
ACC Load: Factory Setting
5-610-005
Overwrite
If this is done, the factory Save as Factory Setting data is gone. To recall the factory setting, RAM clear needs to be done.
5-611: Color ratio adjustment in single color mode 5-611-001 C ratio in Blue 5-611-002 M ratio in Blue 5-611-003 C ratio in Green 5-611-004 Y ratio in Green 5-611-005 M ratio in Red
90 80 90 80 100
0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100
1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903
Sets the toner amount of a color in a single color.
Toner Amount Ratio in 2C Cyan in Blue Magenta in Blue Cyan in Green Yellow in Green Magenta in Red
SM
B-29
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 5-611-006 5-612-000 Y ratio in red
Item
Default Value 80 0
Value Range 0 to 100 0 to 2
Step 1 1
SP7 903
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Yellow in Red
Scanner gamma Copy quality selection with scanner gamma
Changes the color correction coefficient for the text/photo, text, and photo modes. 0 = OFF 1 = Not fixed 2 = Not fixed
Do not touch in the field. Scanner gamma selection
5-801-001
RAM clear
Resets the NV-RAM to the factory settings except for the machine serial No., the main counter value, counting method. Press the ON key to clear. (See the service manual for the details.)
NV RAM Clear
5-802: Free Run 5-802-001 Printer 5-802-002 System 5-803 Input check
Press the ON or OFF key to start or stop the mode.
Free Run Printer System Input check
Refer to Section4.1.6 SP5-803 INPUT CHECK for the details.
5-804
Output check
Refer to Section4.1.7 SP5-804 OUTPUT CHECK for the details.
Output check
5-810-000
Fusing SC reset
Resets a type 1 service call condition which is caused by the fusing section. Press the ON key to reset. After resetting SC code, the main switch has to be turned off and on.
SC Reset
5-811-000 5-812-000
Serial number display Service Tel. No.
903
Displays the serial number. Inputs the telephone number of the service representative. (This number is displayed when a service call condition occurs or PM counter reaches the counter set.)
Set Serial No. Service Tel. No.
5-816-000
RDS ON/OFF
0 or 1
Activates the RDS function. 0 = not activate 1 = activate
RDS ON/OFF
5-817-000
Service start/finish time
Informs the time of starting and finishing the service to the RDS center. Press the ON or OFF key to activate.
Repair time Tx
A257/A269
B-30
SM
SP Mode No. 5-824-000
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
NV-RAM upload
Uploads the data of the NV-RAM to the flash ROM on the main board. Press the ON key to upload.
IC card needs to be set in NVRAM Up Load the machine to execute these SP modes.
5-825-000
NV-RAM download
Downloads the data uploaded from NV-RAM in SP 5824 from the flash ROM to the NV-RAM. Press the ON key to download.
IC card needs to be set in NVRAM Down Load the machine to execute these SP modes.
5-827-000
Program download: Main
Downloads the main program from IC card to the flash ROM. Press the ON key to download.
IC card needs to be set in Program Down Load the machine to execute these SP modes.
5-955: Printer internal pattern 5-955-001 Dot line: LD PM setup 5-955-002 Print margin pattern 5-955-003 Print out all fonts 5-955-004 1 dot/line grid pattern 5-955-005 Belt pattern 5-955-006 16-gradation with blank 5-955-007 solid 5-955-08 1 dot patter (2x2) 5-955-009 1 dot pattern (4x4) 5-955-010 2 dot subscan line 5-955-011 1 dot main scan line 5-955-012 2 dot main scan line 5-955-013 Color patch 5-955-014 Grid : scanning image 5-955-015 2 beams pitch pattern 5-955-016 2 beams density pattern 5-955-017 16 grayscales-16: LD_PWM setup 5-955-018 Printer internal pattern type selection
128 17 34 51 68 85 102 119 136 153 170 187 204 221 238 255 128 0
0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 21
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903 903
Selects the test pattern. 5-955-018 0: No pattern 1: Print margin pattern 2: Print out all fonts 3: 1 dot/line grid pattern 4: Belt pattern 5: 16-gradation with blank 6: Solid 7: 1 dot pattern (2x2) 8: 1 dot pattern (4x4) 9: 1 dot sub scan line 10: 2 dot sub scan line 11: 1 dot main scan line 12: 2 dot main scan line 13: Color patch 14: Grid: scanner image 18: 2 beams pitch pattern 19: 2 beams density pattern No. 15 to 17, 20, and 21 are not used.
Screen - J The test pattern mode is automatically reset when you go out the SP mode.
DotLinedPwm LD-PWM Value: dot, line LD-PWM Value: 1/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 2/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 3/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 4/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 5/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 6/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 7/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 8/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 9/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 10/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 1116 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 12/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 13/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 14/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: 15/16 Gradation LD-PWM Value: Trailing Patch Pattern Selection
SM
B-31
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 5-979-002
Item SC detection OFF mode
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 or 1
Step
SP7
Description Disables the self-diagnostic function. It functions only for the following SCs. SC3XX SC4XX SC5XX except for SCs related to fusing section
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Printer SC No Check Mode
6. PERIPHERALS 6. PERIPHERALS
6-006: ADF registration adjustment 6-006-001 Scanning direction 6-006-002 Not switch-back : Front side 6-006-003 Switch-back: Front side 6-006-004 Switch-back: Back side 6-102-000 Sorter bin: maximum stack amount 0 mm 0 step 0 step 0 step 1 -3.0 to 3.0 mm -15 to 15 steps -15 to 15 steps -15 to 15 steps 0 to 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 Adjusts the original scanning position. Horizontal Thin paper Thick Paper 2 sided Sort/Stack Limit 0: No Limitation, 1: Limitation
Enables or disables the definition of the number of sheets that can be stacked in the sorter. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable
6-104-000
Stabled sheet count limit
0 to 1
Enables or disables the number of sheets that can be stapled. 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled
Staple Sheet Limit
6-107-000
Sorter free run
Sorter free run Press the ON or OFF key to start or stop.
OFF key does not Sorter Free Run function. The sorter front door needs to be opened and closed to stop it.
6-910-000
Touch panel screen setting
0 to 1
Switches the touch panel display from Standard (copy screen to Scanning screen. 0 = Standard (copy) screen 1 = Scanning screen If "1" is selected, the touch panel screen displays a message and copy is prohibited until the scanning is finished when the Print/Scan key on the controller LCD panel is pressed.
Printer/scanner key setting
7. LOGGING DATA
A257/A269
B-32
SM
SP Mode No. 7-008-000
Item Counter display setting
Default Value 1
Value Range 1 or 2
Step 1
SP7
Description Selects which counters to be displayed. 1 = counter based on developments 2 = counter based on copies/prints Development counter: Color XXXXX Black XXXXX Copies/Prints counter: Copy Printer Total Color XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Black XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX
Remarks
The data can be changed Set Counter Display only once. (The data cannot be changed any more in SP mode after it has been changed.) If the data is changed in mistake, please contact your key Pearson. This data is not cleared at NVRAM clear functioned.
7-202: Developer counter 7-202-001 Total 7-202-002 K 7-202-003 C 7-202-004 M 7-202-005 Y 7-203: PM parts counter (Image development) 7-203-001 Drum 7-203-002 Image Transfer Belt 7-203-003 Not used 7-203-004 Charge Corona Dust Filter 7-203-006 PCC Charge Wire 7-203-007 Charge Corona Wire 7-203-008 Charge Corona Grid 7-203-009 Charge Wire/Grid Cleaner 7-203-010 Development Dust Filter 7-203-011 Exhaust Dust Filter 7-203-012 Fusing Unit Filter 7-207: PM parts counter (Cleaning section) 7-207-001 Drum Cleaning Blade 7-207-002 Drum Cleaning Brush 7-207-003 Drum Lubricant Bar 7-207-004 ITB: Lubricant Brush 7-207-005 ITB: Lubricant Bar 7-207-006 PTB: Cleaning Blade: Paper 7-207-007 PTB: Cleaning Blade: Dev.. 7-207-010 Bias Roller Blade 7-207-011 Used Toner Bottle 7-207-012 ITB: Cleaning Blade 7-210: PM parts counter (Fusing section) 7-210-001 Hot Roller: Paper 7-210-002 Hot Roller: Dev. 7-210-003 Pressure Roller: Paper 7-210-004 Pressure Roller: Dev. 7-210-005 Oil Supply Pad: Paper
0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999
1 1 1 1 1
Shows the number of development unit operation for total and each color.
Screen - K
Development Counter Development Total Counter Development K Counter Development C Counter Development M Counter Development Y Counter Development counter Drum counter Transfer Belt Counter Scanner Dust Filter Counter Main CH. Filter Counter Pcc Wire Counter Main Charge Wire Counter Main Grid Counter Charge Wire/Grid Cleaner Exhaust Dust Counter Main Filter Counter Fusing Unit Filter Cleaning Counter Drum Cleaning Blade Drum Cleaning Brush Drum Lubricant Bar Transfer Belt Cleaning Brush Transfer Belt Lubricant Bar Paper Trns. Roller Blade [Print] Paper Trns. Roller Blade [Dev] Bias Roller Blade Used toner tank Belt Cleaning Blade Roller Counter Hot Roller [ Print] Hot Roller [Dev] Pressure Roller [Print] Pressure Roller [Dev] Oil Supply Pad [Print]
0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Shows the number of image developments on each component related to image production.
Screen - K
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Shows the number of usage of each unit related to cleaning depending on the sheets of paper or developments.
Screen - K
0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999
1 1 1 1 1
Shows the number of usage on each component of the fusing unit depending on the sheets of paper or developments.
Screen - K
SM
B-33
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 7-210-006 7-210-007 7-210-008 7-210-009 7-210-010 7-210-011 7-210-012 7-210-013 7-210-014 7-401-000
Item Oil Supply Pad: Dev. Hot Roller Blade: Paper Hot Roller Blade: Dev. Pressure Roller Blade: Paper Pressure Roller Blade: Dev. Hot Roller Bearing: Paper Hot Roller Bearing: Dev. Pressure Roller Bearing: Paper Pressure Roller Bearing: Dev. Total SC counter
Default Value
Value Range 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Oil Supply Pad [Dev] Hot Roller Blade [Print] Hot Roller Blade [Dev] Pressure Roller Blade [Print] Pressure Roller Blade [Dev] Hot Roller Joint [Print] Hot Roller Joint [Dev] Pressure Roller Joint [Print] Pressure Roller Joint [Dev]
Shows the total number of SCs detected.
Total SC SC History latest lates-1 lates-2 lates-3 lates-4 lates-5 lates-6 lates-7 lates-8 lates-9 Total Paper Jam Total Original Jam Jam Counter: Point Init Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 DplxEnter FeedDplx Relay Roller Regist Transfer Fusing Unit ExitMain ExitDplx Sorter Staple Proof Tray Original Jam Counter: Point Feed Exit
7-402: 10 SC history counter 7-402-001 latest 7-402-002 lates-1 7-402-003 lates-2 7-402-004 lates-3 7-402-005 lates-4 7-402-006 lates-5 7-402-007 lates-6 7-402-008 lates-7 7-402-009 lates-8 7-402-010 lates-9 7-502-001 Paper jam total counter 7-503-001 Original jam total counter
Shows the SC code most recently detected in order. SCXXX - AAAA -BBBB XXX = SC code number AAAA = Counter of CMY BBBB = Counter of K
Last 4 digits of the electrical counters are displayed.
Shows the total number of paper jams. Shows the total number of original jams.
7-504: Paper jam counter at each location 7-504-001 By-pass 7-504-002 1st paper tray 7-504-003 2nd paper tray 7-504-004 3rd paper tray 7-504-005 4th paper tray 7-504-006 Duplex: Entrance 7-504-007 Duplex: Paper feed 7-504-008 Paper transport 7-504-009 Registration 7-504-010 Paper transfer 7-504-011 Fusing unit 7-504-012 Paper feed 7-504-013 Duplex: Turn guide 7-504-014 Sorter 7-504-015 Staple jam 7-504-016 Proof 7-505: Original Jam counter at each location 7-505-001 Original feed 7-505-002 Original exit
Shows the number of paper jam at each location.
Shows the number of original jam at each location.
7-801: ROM version display 7-801-001 Main 7-801-002 Scanner IPU 7-801-003 IDU
Shows the ROM versions.
ROM version Main Scanner IDU
A257/A269
B-34
SM
SP Mode No. 7-801-004 7-801-005 7-801-006 7-801-007 7-803-001 ADF Sorter LCT FPU PM counter
Item
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen ADF Sorter Bank FPU
0 to 9999999
Shows the number of developments on the PM parts.
Screen - K
Total No. of Dev. Cycles PM Counter Clear PM Counter Clear 80KDPM 160KDPM 200KDPM 400KDPM Others SC/Jam Counter Clear
7-804: PM counter clear 7-804-003 All 7-804-004 80K PM 7-804-005 160K PM 7-804-006 200K PM 7-804-007 400K PM 7-804-008 Others 7-807-000 SC/Jam counter clear
Clears all or each PM counter. Press the ON key to clear the counter.
Screen - K
Clears the SC and Jam counters. Press the ON key to clear the counter.
7-808-000
Counter all clear
Clears all the counters except for PM, SC, and Jam counters. Press the ON key to clear the counter.
All Counter Clear
7-809: Print logging data 7-809-001 Logging data 7-809-002 SC/Jam counter 7-809-003 Copy counter 7-809-004 All logging data
Prints out each logging data Press the ON key to clear the counter. When selecting "004" (All logging data), "001" to "003" are automatically executed.
Print Logging Data Logging Counter Jam SC History Counter All Page
7-810-000
Copy counter clear: All
Clears the copy counter. Press the ON key to clear the counter.
All Copy Counter Clear
7-816-000
Copy counter clear: Paper trays
Clears the copy counter of each paper tray. Press the ON key to clear the counter.
Tray Copy Counter Clear
7-818: Developer counter clear 7-818-001 All color 7-818-002 K 7-818-003 C 7-818-004 M 7-818-005 Y 7-819-000 Copy counter clear: Paper size
Dev. Counter Clear Clears the development unit counter for all or each color. Press the ON key to clear the counter. Screen - K K C M Y Paper Size Counter Clear
Clears the copy counter counted for each paper size. Press the ON key to clear the counter.
SM
B-35
A257/A269
SP Mode No. 7-825-000
Item Total counter clear
Default Value
Value Range
Step
SP7
Description Clears the total counter to 0. This mode is available only when the number of the counter is below 0.
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Total Counter 0 Reset
7-902-000
Data print: Non-default
Prints non default value (data changed from the default value). Press the ON key to print. Prints out all SP data. Press the ON key to print.
Print Non-Default Data
7-903-000
Data print: All
Print All Data
7-904: Printer gamma data print 7-904-001 Copy mode 7-904-002 Print mode 7-905-000 PM counter print
Prints out the gamma data in the Copy or Print mode.
Copier Mode Printer Mode Screen - K Print PM Data
Prints out the PM counter data. Press the ON key to print.
7-910: PM parts counter (PTB section) 7-910-001 Paper Separation Wire: Paper 7-910-002 Paper Separation Wire: Dev. 7-910-003 PTB: Discharge Wire: Paper 7-910-004 PTB: Discharge Wire: Dev. 7-910-005 PTB: Cleaning Brush: Paper 7-910-006 PTB: Cleaning Brush: Dev. 7-910-007 Paper Transfer Belt: Paper 7-910-008 Paper Transfer Belt: Dev. 7-910-009 PTB: Back Brush: Paper 7-910-010 PTB: Back Brush: Dev.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Shows the number of usage on each component of the paper transfer belt unit depending on the sheets of paper or developments.
Screen - K
Transfer Belt Counter Paper Separate Wire [Print] Paper Separate Wire [Dev] Trns Belt Sep. Wire [Print] Trns Belt Sep. Wire [Dev] Paper Trns Brush [Print] Paper Trns Brush [Dev] Paper Trans Belt [Print] Paper Trans Belt [Dev] Trns Brush Back Side [Print] Trns Brush Back Side [Dev]
7-911: PM parts counter (Duplex unit) 7-911-001 Reverse roller: Paper 7-911-002 Reverse roller: Dev. 7-911-003 Feed roller: Paper 7-911-004 Feed roller: Dev. 7-911-005 Bottom plate pad: Paper 7-911-006 Bottom plate pad: Dev.
0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999
1 1 1 1 1 1
Shows the number of usage on the reverse and feed rollers of the duplex unit depending on the sheets of paper or developments.
Screen - K
Counter: Paper transfer Duplex Sep. Roller [Print] Duplex Sep. Roller [Dev] Duplex Feed Roller [Print] Duplex Feed Roller [Dev] Duplex Pad [Print] Duplex Pad [Dev]
8. SPECIAL MODE T.B.A.
A257/A269
B-36
SM
APPENDIX-C POP-UP DISPLAYS
POP-UP SCREEN
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-A
Lead Edge Regist Nrml Paper OHP Thk Super Thk Side to Side Reg By-ps Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Dplx LCT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 P. Feed Tmg Nrml/By-ps Tray By-ps/OHP By-ps/Thk Scanning Blnk Mrgn Rear Front Left Right 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Hot Rllr Temp Hot: Reload Hot: Idling Hot: Nrml: FC Hot: Nrml: 1C Hot: OHP/Thk: FC Hot: OHP/Thk: 1C Pressure: Idling Pressure: Nrml: FC Pressure: Nrml: 1C Pressure: OHP/Thk: FC Pressure: OHP/Thk: 1C Single 183 193 178 168 178 178 160 155 145 155 155
SCREEN-B
Dplx Hot: Idling Hot: Nrml: FC Hot: Nrml: 1C Hot: OHP/Thk: FC Hot: OHP/Thk: 1C Pressure: Idling Pressure: Nrml: FC Pressure: Nrml: 1C Pressure: OHP/Thk: FC Pressure: OHP/Thk: 1C 193 178 168 178 178 160 155 145 155 155
Back
Back
A269X50A.WMF
A269X50B.WMF
SM
C-1
A257/A269
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-C
Lead Edge/SubScn Nrml Paper Thk Super Thk OHP Main Scan Lead Edge Trail Edge 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Trail/SubScn Nrml Pap Thk Thk Super ThOHP OHP Auto Dplx: up 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Main Scn Mag Copy Mode Printer Mode 0.0 0.0
SCREEN-D
Sub Scn Mag
Printer Mode
0.0
Back
Back
A269X50C.WMF
A269X50D.WMF
A257/A269
C-2
SM
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-E
Self Chk Exe Dev. Agitation Exe: K Exe: C Exe: M Exe: Y Exe: All Exe: CMY
1C
SCREEN-F
Result Paper Transfer Bias
Nrml Paper 1C 2C 3C Thk OHP SuperThk Nrml:Back Thk:Back SpThk:Back
Result 001
TD Sensor Initialization Exe: K Exe: C Exe: M Exe: Y Exe: All
25 35 35 35
P: Nrml
14 18 18 18
P: ElseNrml
16 18 18 18
16 20 20 20
30 35 35 35
14 20 20 20
16 20 20 20
001
4C
20 30 30 30
12 14 14 14
001
2C 3C 4C
Back Back
A269X50E.WMF
A269X50F.WMF
SM
C-3
A257/A269
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-G
ACC Device Correction: HL K C M Y 000 000 000 000 ACC Deveice Correction: Shadow K C M Y 000 000 000 000
K C M Y Gamma Adj Leter: Copy H 15 15 15 15 M 15 15 15 15 Offset S 15 15 15 15
SCREEN-H
Option M S 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
IDmax 15 15 15 15
H 000 000 000 000
IDmax 000 000 000 000
Photo: Copy K C M Y H 15 15 15 15 M 15 15 15 15
Offset S 15 15 15 15 IDmax 15 15 15 15 H 000 000 000 000
Option M S 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
IDmax 000 000 000 000
Next
Single Color K: Copy 15 15 15 15 000 000 000 000 Back
Back
A269X50G.WMF
A269X5H1.WMF
A257/A269
C-4
SM
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-H
Gamma Adj Printer
SCREEN-I
Picture Element Correc R: Left
Option
Offset M 15 15 15 15 S 15 15 15 15 IDmax 15 15 15 15 H 000 000 000 000 M 000 000 000 000
R: Left
K C M Y H 15 15 15 15 S 000 000 000 000 IDmax 000 000 000 000
5 5
B: Right B: Left
5 5
R: Right
Prev Back
Back
A269X5H2.WMF
A269X50I.WMF
SM
C-5
A257/A269
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-J
Total PM Counters Total Development Cycles 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Total Count PM Counter Setting Current PM Count 0000000 P 0000000 D 0000000 D Set Reset Drum Cleaning Brush Drum Cleaning Blade Drum Lubricant Bar Bias Roller Blade Image Transfer Belt Developer/Drum Counters K C M Y Drum Reset All Developer Couters 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Charge Corona Wire Charge Corona Grid Charge Wire/Grid Cleaner PCC Charge Wire Development Dust Filter Charge Corona Dust Filter Exhaust Dust Filter Fusing Unit Filter Used Toner Bottle Hot Roller Next Back Oil Supply Pad 80KD PM Replacement Parts
SCREEN-J
Reset All 80KD PM Counters 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset 0000000 P 0000000 P Reset Reset Back Prev Next
A269X5J1.WMF
A269X5J2.WMF
A257/A269
C-6
SM
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-J
160KD PM Replacement Parts Pressure Roller Hot Roller Bearing Pressure Roller Bearing Hot Roller Blade Pressure Roller Blade Reset All 160KD PM Counters 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset 200KD PM Replacement Parts ITB: Lubricant Brush ITB: Cleaning Blade ITB: Lubricant Bar Separation Corona Wire PTB: Discharge Wire PTB: Cleaning Brush PTB: Cleaning Blade Paper Transfer Belt PTB: Back Brush Reset All 200KD PM Counters 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D Reset Reset Reset 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
Pressure Roller Cleaning Pad 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D
Prev Prev Next Next Back Back
A269X5J3.WMF
A269X5J4.WMF
SM
C-7
A257/A269
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-J
400KD PM Replacement Parts 1st Tray Pick-up Roller 1st Tray Feed Roller 1st Tray Reverse Roller 2nd Tray Pick-up Roller 2nd Tray Feed Roller 2nd Tray Reverse Roller 3rd Tray Pick-up Roller 3rd Tray Feed Roller 3rd Tray Reverse Roller Duplex Unit Feed Roller Duplex Unit Reverse Roller Reset All 400KD PM Counters 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Print PM Counters Others By-pass Table Pick-up Roller By-pass Table Feed Roller
SCREEN-J
Reset All Counters 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P 0000000 P Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
By-pass Table Reverse Roller 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D LCT Pick-up Roller LCT Feed Roller LCT Reverse Roller ADF Transport Belt ADF Separation Belt ADF Separation Roller 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D 0000000 D Print
Duplex Unit Bottom Plate Pad 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D
Prev Next Back Prev Back
A269X5J5.WMF
A269X5J6.WMF
A257/A269
C-8
SM
POP-UP SCREEN
SCREEN-K
Ptrn Selection Print Margin Pattern Printout All Fonts 1 dot/line Grid Pattern Belt Pattern 16-gradation with blank Solid 1 Dot Pattern (2 x 2) 1 Dot Pattern (4 x 4) 1 Dot Subscan Line 2 Dot Subscan Line 2 Beams Pitch Pattern 2 Beams Density Pattern 1 dotn Mainscan Line 2 Dot Mainscan Line Color Patch Grid: Scanner Image 1/15 2/15 3/15 4/15 5/15 6/15 7/15 017 034 051 068 085 102 119 LD-PWM 8/15 9/15 10/15 11/15 12/15 13/15 14/15 15/15 Color Patch Dot Line 136 153 170 187 204 221 238 255 128 128
Back
A269X50K.WMF
SM
C-9
A257/A269
APPENDIX-D TIMING CHARTS
Main Switch ON
Drum Peripheral Component Motor Drum Motor
Main Switch
8QLW PP
Quenching Lamp Charge Grid (G) Charge Corona (C)

/DVHU :ULWLQJ
Revolver Motor (power ON) Revolver Motor (rotate) Development Bias (DC) Development Bias (AC) Development Clutch
H.P. detection + 30
ID sensor
Toner Supply Clutch
ITB Bias (T1)
PCC
Drum Cleaning Brush Bias (BR)

,PDJH 7UDQVIHU
ITB Motor A base mark which is a signal detected first after the sequence is completed. 3
Belt Mark Detection Sensor
Following sequence is done after belt mark 1 is detected. * * * * Image transfer belt cleaning Toner agitation Toner cartridge set detection Revolver H.P. detection
PTB Bias (T2)

60 msec
ITB Cleaning Shift Clutch ITB Cleaning Drive Clutch ITB Lubricant Brush Bias (Q1)
ON
OFF
Registration Motor
3DSHU 7UDQVIHU
60 msec
ON OFF
PTB Shift Clutch PTB Motor Fusing Motor
Paper Separation Corona (D) PTB Discharge Corona (Q2) Paper Separation Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
Paper Exit Roller
A269X500.WMF
SM
D-1
A257/A269
A4 / LT Size : 1C Mode (1 to 2)
Start Key
8QLW PP
FG 1
FG 2
Drum Peripheral Component Motor Drum Motor Quenching Lamp Charge Grid (G) Charge Corona (C)
K-1st copy
/DVHU :ULWLQJ
K-2nd copy
Revolver Motor (power ON) Revolver Motor (rotation) Development Bias (DC) Development Bias (AC) Development Clutch ID Sensor
Rotate 30
H.P. detection + 30
Toner Supply Clutch
Supply time is controled by process control.
ITB Bias (T1)
PCC

,PDJH 7UDQVIHU
ITB Motor
1
PTB Bias (T2)
60 msec
50 msec
ITB Cleaning Shift Clutch ITB Cleanng Drive Clutch ITB Lubricant Brush Bias (Q1)
ON
OFF
Registration Motor
3DSHU 7UDQVIHU
60 msec
ON
60 msec
OFF
Paper Exit Sensor
Paper Exit Roller

1st Copy 2nd Copy
A269X501.WMF
A257/A269
D-2
SM
A4 / LT Size: FC Mode (1 to 4)
Start Key FG 1 K-1
Y&C processes are omit.

FG 2 K-2 FG 1 M - 1 FG 2 M - 2 FG 1 K-3

FG 2 K-4 FG 1 M - 3 FG 2 M - 4
8QLW PP

Quenching Lamp
Charge Grid (G) Charge Corona (C)

K-1st Copy
/DVHU :ULWLQJ
K-2nd copy
M-1st copy Rotate 90
M-2nd copy
K-3rd copy Rotate 90
K-4th copy
M-3rd copy Rotate 90
M-4th copy H.P. detection + 30
Rotate 30
ID Sensor
Toner Supply Clutch
Supply time is controlled by process control.
ITB Bias (T1)
PCC

,PDJH 7UDQVIHU
ITB Motor
PTB Bias (T2)
ON
OFF
60 msec ON
OFF
60 msec
ON
OFF
Registration Motor
3DSHU 7UDQVIHU
60 msec
60 msec
ON PTB Shift Clutch PTB Motor Fusing Motor
OFF
ON
OFF
Paper Exit Sensor

1 sec 1st Copy 2nd Copy 3rd Copy 4th Copy
Paper Exit Roller
A269X502.WMF
SM
D-3
A257/A269
A3 / DLT : FC Mode
Start Key
FG 1

FG 2
8QLW PP

K-1st copy
/DVHU :ULWLQJ
ID sensor pattern M-1st copy Rotate 90 H.P. detection + 30
Revolver Motor (power ON)

Revolver Motor (rotate)
Rotate 30
Development Bias (DC) Development Bias (AC) Development Clutch ID Sensor
Toner Supply Clutch
ITB Bias (T1)
PCC

,PDJH 7UDQVIHU
ITB Motor
PTB Bias (T2)
60 msec
60 msec
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Registration Motor
3DSHU 7UDQVIHU
60 msec
ON OFF
60 msec
Paper Exit Sensor

1 sec 1st copy
Paper Exit Roller
A269X503.WMF
A257/A269
D-4
SM
A4 / LT : 1C, Half Speed Mode (1 to 2)

Start Key FG 1
FG 2
FG 3
FG 4
8QLW PP
Half speed: 100 mm/sec
Standard speed: 200 mm/sec
Quehching Lamp Charge Grid (G) Charge Corona (C)

/DVHU :ULWLQJ
K-1st copy Rotate 30
K-2nd copy
H.P. detection + 30
ID Sensor
Toner Supply Clutch
ITB Bias (T1)
PCC
,PDJH 7UDQVIHU
ITB Motor
PTB Bias (T2)

60 msec 60 msec
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Registration Motor (Half speed: 100 mm/sec)

3DSHU 7UDQVIHU
60 msec
ON OFF
60 msec
PTB Shift Clutch PTB Motor (Half speed: 100 mm/sec) Fusing Motor (Half speed: 100 mm/sec)
Half speed: 100 mm/sec Half speed: 100 mm/sec
Paper Exit Sensor

1.2 sec
Paper Exit Roller

1st copy 2nd copy
A269X508.WMF
SM
D-5
A257/A269
A4 / LT Size : FC, Half Speed Mode (1 to 2)

Start Key

FG 1 K-1 FG 2 K-2 FG 1 M-1 FG 2 M-2
8QLW PP

K-1st copy
/DVHU :ULWLQJ
K-2nd copy
M-1st copy Rotate 90
M-2nd copy
Revolver Motor (power ON) Revolver Motor (rotation) Development Bias (DC) Development Bias (AC) Development Clutch ID Sensor
Rotate 30
H.P. detection + 30
Toner Supply Clutch
ITB Bias (T1)
PCC

,PDJH 7UDQVIHU
ITB Motor
PTB Bias (T2)

60 msec 60 msec
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Registration Motor ( H a l f s p e e d : 1 0 0 m m / s e c )
3DSHU 7UDQVIHU
60 msec
ON OFF
60 msec
PTB Shift Clutch PTB Motor ( H a l f s p e e d : 1 0 0 m m / s e c ) Fusing Motor ( H a l f s p e e d : 1 0 0 m m / s e c )
Half speed: 100 mm/sec Half speed: 100 mm/sec
Paper Exit Sensor
Paper Exit Roller

1st copy 2nd copy
A269X505.WMF
A257/A269
D-6
SM
BY-pass Feed : Normal Paper
F-Gate Signal Paper Feed Motor Paper Transport Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch
Main By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
Registration Sensor Registration Motor Current Registration Motor Start
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000 Time [ msec ]
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
7500
By-pass Feed : OHP (Half Speed)
Paper Transport Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch Main By-pass Pick-up Solenoid Sub By-pass Pick-up Solenoid By-pass Reverse Roller Solenoid
840 650
Registration Sensor
L-15 mm 280
Registration Motor Current Registration Motor Start Power Down
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000 Time [ msec ]
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
7500
A269X506.WMF
SM
D-7
A257/A269
3DSHU 7UD\ )HHG 1RUPDO 3DSHU

Paper Feed Motor Reverse Roller Solenoid Paper Transport Clutch Pick-up Solenoid Paper Feed Drive Clutch
644 L-52 mm L-52 mm 325 325
3rd Paper Feed Sensor

470 470 60 60 470 470 60 60
2nd Paper Feed Sensor

470 470 60 60 470 470 60 60
Not used
470 470 60 60 470 470 60
1st Paper Feed Sensor

560 560 90 90 660 90
Registration Sensor Registration Motor Current Registration Motor Start Paper Separation Sensor Paper Exit Sensor
1000
2000 Time [ msec ]
3000
4000
A269X507.WMF
A257/A269
D-8
SM
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %FIKf%FJM#g#NNE NLfFNfMM %440-'%&0)#13()0U ####+)78)82)6#h#'7FENf'7FEN) ####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#JNENfJEEN ####7%:-2#h#7('HENf7('HEN) SUBJECT: GENERAL:
There have been some field reports that the Drum is being damaged. When the Drum unit is set in the revolver/drum draw and the Development Unit is set at 90 degrees (Development Unit real position), the Drum may contact the lip of the Development Unit Upper Cover [A]. This may cause the Drum to be scratched or damaged.
[B]
DRUM DAMAGE AT INSTALLATION
Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.
MECHANICAL
NOTE: When rotating the revolver unit, you can see the cut-out [B] on the wheel, which locks the revolver unit at the home position.
The following procedure should be followed to prevent damage to the Drum: 1. To prevent the Drum from being damaged at installation or developer replacement, the Revolver Unit should be placed at its home position before the Drum is set in the Revolver/Drum Draw. NOTES: 1) Revolver Unit: If the gears on the main frame and Revolver Unit are not engaged firmly, the Revolver Unit might not be properly set in the machine.(this may result in a gap between the revolver unit frame and copier frame. It may cause the gears to be damaged when the revolver starts rotate. To ensure the engagement of gears, the Revolver Unit needs to be shaken slightly by holding the toner hoppers. 2) Drum Unit: To ensure the engagement of gears between the Drum and Drum Shaft, the flange of OPC Drum needs to be pushed to the rear side. (This is explained in S/M page 6-11.) The vibration generated from the image transfer belt drive section is transmitted to the drum section. If the gears are not firmly engaged, this vibration might interfere the drum rotation, causing banding image (1.7 mm interval).
CONTROL NO. 371
CONTROL NO. 371
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 002 09/07/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The difference between Silicone Oil A2579100 and A2579550 is the design of the label on the container. The label for A2579550 has no RICOH brand mark. The contents of the silicone oil container is completely the same. The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
SILICONE OIL TYPE SS !

PARTS
RICOH LABEL A2579100
PLAIN LABEL A2579550
DESCRIPTION Silicone Oil Type SS
QTY 1
INT 0
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 163 3
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
CONTROL NO. 374

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 003 09/27/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER C5210/C5210e RICOH Aficio 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/SDC410e SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
SERVICE MANUAL
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES:
3 - 18 59
Updated Information Updated Information
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
GENERAL:
The Silicone Oil for the Fusing Unit is new and its properties are different from the Old Silicon Oil. One of the features of the new Silicone Oil is its (small amount of) low molecular Siloxane. This has an effect on the volatility of the Oil. At around 150 degrees centigrade, the volatility of the new Silicone Oil is approximately 1/3 that of the previous Silicone Oil. This new feature prevents vaporized Silicone Oil from being deposited on the Charge Corona Wire. This new Silicone Oil type SS (P/N A2579100) has been used from the first development of these copiers and therefore the machine is not designed to operate using the old type Oil. Consequently, it is impossible to predict the machine performance using the old type Oil (there are no comparison tests on this available). NOTE: 1. Siloxane is the name of a chemical compound, which consists of Silicon and Oxygen. 2. The lubrication properties of a mix between the old and new oils would remain unaffected. However, the advantage of the new Silicone Oil over the older type is the low amount of volatility and the prevention of Oil deposits on the Charge Corona Wires.
CONTROL NO 378
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %FIKf%FJM##g#NNG#6)-779)# NMfFKfMM %440-'%&0)#13()0U ####+)78)82)6#h#'IFENf'IFEN' ####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#JNENfJEEN ####7%:-2#h#7('HENf7('HEN' SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT SERVICE
MANUAL
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES:
3 - 18 59
Updated Information Updated Information
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
GENERAL:
The Silicone Oil for the Fusing Unit is new and its properties are different from the Old Silicon Oil. One of the features of the new Silicone Oil is its (small amount of) low molecular Siloxane. This has an effect on the volatility of the Oil. At around 150 degrees centigrade, the volatility of the new Silicone Oil is approximately 1/3 that of the previous Silicone Oil. This new feature prevents vaporized Silicone Oil from being deposited on the Charge Corona Wire. This new Silicone Oil type SS (P/N A2579100) has been used from the first development of these copiers and therefore the machine is not designed to operate using the old type Oil. Consequently, it is impossible to predict the machine performance using the old type Oil (there are no comparison tests on this available). NOTE: 1. Siloxane is the name of a chemical compound, which consists of Silicon and Oxygen. 2. The lubrication properties of a mix between the old and new oils would remain unaffected. However, the advantage of the new Silicone Oil over the older type is the low amount of volatility and the prevention of Oil deposits on the Charge Corona Wires.
CONTROL NO 382
COPIER
3.1.5 FUSING UNIT
Rev. 08/99
[A]
A269I123.WMF
[C] [B]
A269I125.WMF
A269I124.WMF
1. Pull out the fusing/transfer drawer [A]. 2. Open the paper exit cover [B] and completely loosen (dont remove) the fusing pressure release screws [C] (2 black screws).
3. Fill the oil tank with new type Silicone Oil up to the MAX mark. NOTE: This machine uses a new Silicone Oil Type SS (P/N. A2579100). It is strongly recommended that you use the new style Silicone Oil.
CAUTION
Take care not to spill silicone oil on the floor. If silicone oil is spilled on the floor, wipe it up completely. Otherwise, the floor will get slippery and you might slip and fall.
A257/A269
3-18
SM
Rev. 08/99
PM item PTB: Back brush Paper transfer section EM 80 kD Schedule 160 200 240 320 kD kD kD kD R Block 400 kD R
REGULAR PM ITEMS
Remarks
Paper transfer unit
Wipe with a dry cloth. C C
Hot roller Hot roller Oil supply pad Pressure roller Hot roller bearing Pressure roller bearing Apply grease to heat insulating bushing Apply grease to fusing drive/fusing gears Fusing/pressure thermistors Fusing/pressure cleaning rollers Scraper Hot roller blade Pressure roller blade Pressure roller oil supply pad Oil pan
R R
R R R R R
R R
R R R R R
R R
Wipe with a dry cloth, then apply grease (Barrierta A0289300). Apply Mobile Temp 1.
L C C C C
L C C C R R R C
L C C C C
L C C C R R R C
L C C C C Clean with suitable solvent, then apply silicone oil to the contact surface. Clean with suitable solvent. -15, -17, -19 copier only Clean with suitable solvent. Clean with a dry cloth while taking care not to damage the edge. -22, -26, -27, -29 copier only -22, -26, -27, -29 copier only Clean with a dry cloth, then wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol. Any precipitates in the oil tank may be left there. Silicone Oil Type SS P/N. A2579100 should be used. Wipe with a damp cloth, then with a dry cloth.
Fusing unit
Silicone oil I Paper pick-up rollers, paper feed rollers, paper separation rollers By-pass pick-up roller, by-pass feed roller, by-pass separation roller Registration rollers Registration sensor: vertical transport Relay rollers Registration guide plate Vertical transport guide plate Vertical transport rollers L L L L L L
Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
Paper feed unit
C C
C C C C C C
C C
C C C C C C
C C
Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Clean with a blower brush, then wipe with a dry cloth. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water. Wipe with a dry cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
SM
5-9
A257/A269

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 004 11/01/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
SERVICE MANUAL
iv 4-21, 22, 23
Updated Information (Table of Contents) Updated Information (ROM HISTORY)
NOTE: Please note the following information: 1. To enable the printer function using the printer controller E-650, it is necessary to use the following ROM versions or newer. Main Control: version 1.561 Scanner IPU: version 1.19 2. The Main Control firmware containing Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, and Danish has been released. Since the version of firmware is 1.561, it is also necessary to update the Scanner IPU firmware to version 1.19 at the same time. 3. The Main Control firmware version 1.561 and the Scanner IPU firmware version 1.19 are not interchangeable with the older versions and should be replaced as a set. If version 1.561 Main Control firmware is used with Scanner firmware older then 1.19, or if Scanner firmware 1.19 is used with Main firmware older then 1.561, errors in machine operation may occur. 4. It is recommended that the firmware for machines manufactured before July, 1999 be updated to Main Control version 1.561 and Scanner version 1.19. This update should be done in combination. See Note 3.
!
PARTS
INTERCHANGEABILITY:
The part numbers of the Main Control Board and the Scanner IPU Board have been changed due to the firmware update to version 1.561 and version 1.19. The only difference between the old parts and the new parts is the firmware version. REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM A2575135 A2575137 Scanner IPU Board 1 3/S 134A A2575107 A2575105 Main Control Board (120V) 1 3/S 119 12 A2575108 A2575106 Main Control Board (230V) 1 3/S 119 12
0 1 3/S
CONTROL NO. 392
Rev. 10/99
ROM HISTORY
4.4.2 ROM HISTORY SCANNER IPU

A257/A269 Scanner IPU Firmware History Description of Modification 1. The following SP Modes have been added: SP8-(140 148)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-(240 248)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-(340 343)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 3) 2. When the setting is changed from the default (5) to 6, the ACC target density level for the printer mode (SP Mode 4-502-001 to 004) has been changed as follows: If the setting of ACC target density level fro the printer mode (SP Mode 4-502-001 to 004, adjustable range: 0 to 10, default setting: 5) is changed to 6, the level of ID max will become greater (20% up for K, 15% up for Y, M, and C). NOTE: 1. The level of ID max will not change, even if the setting is changed to 7, 8, 9 or 10. 2. If the ID max is increased, there is a greater tendency for toner scattering to occur in the text area. The following software bugs have been corrected: 1. A small non-painted area may appear in the copied image after painting inside a closed loop area. 2. SC326 may appear when making A3 copies in Auto Original Type Select and 400%. 3. APS may not function properly immediately after ACC has failed. Start of production March 99 1.15 May 99 1.16 Serial # July 99 Ver. 1.19
SM
4-23
A257/A269
Service Tables

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 005 11/08/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
RANDOM JITTER
SYMPTOM: !
MECHANICAL
Jitter bands appear at random positions on copies. For A4 (LT) paper lengthwise or A3 (DLT) paper, one jitter band may be observed. Note, only a single jitter band may occur early in the symptom but two or three may occur especially for A3 (DLT) paper for certain copy jobs.
CAUSE:
The Timing Belt that drives the Paper Transfer Belt disengages from the cogs of the Timing Pulley (jumping one cog over). It has been found, that the Tension Spring for the Timing Belt does not have sufficient strength to prevent the random jitter (jumping one cog over). See Diagram A below.
Timing Belt that drives the Paper Transfer Belt Paper Transfer Belt
PARTS
Diagram A
SOLUTION:
Replace the Tension Spring with a new style stronger one. The strength of the original Tension Spring (P/N A2573997) was 1.0 Newton and the new style Tension Spring (P/N AA060836) is 2.3 Newtons. The color of the new style Tension Spring is also different. The old style was silver and the new style is black. Also, the material of the Timing Belt that drives the Paper Transfer Belt has been changed from chloroprene rubber (P/N A2573993) to polyurethane rubber (P/N AA043285). This is to increase the resistance to ozone, thereby increasing the durability. This modification has been applied to production units from June, 1999. The new style Tension Spring has been applied from the August 4,1999 production. The following table illustrates the possibility of symptoms that are based upon combinations of old and new Timing Belts and Tension Springs. See UNITS AFFECTED for the serial number cut-ins.
Continued
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 395
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 005 Page 2 of 4
Timing Belt
Old Style (A2573993) New Style (AA043285)
Tension Spring Old Style (A2573997) Silver New Style (AA060836) Black The lifetime of the timing belt No problem may be reduced. Random jitter may occur. No problem
Checking and Replacement Procedure

Since about 20% of the objective production machines have been modified with the new Tension Spring, the following explains how to distinguish between the old and new Tension Springs, then how to replace the old Tension Spring with the new one. This procedure will take about 5 minutes.
Procedures to prevent random jitter

Check Procedure 1. Open the Front Covers and pull out the Fusing/Transfer Drawer. 2. Remove the Separation Plate (1 Shoulder Screw and 1 Screw).
Separation Plate
3. Check the color of the Tension Spring of the Paper Transfer Belt. If the color is black, reassemble the machine since this will indicate that the Tension Spring is a new one. If the color is silver, go onto the next section, Spring Replacement Procedure.
Tension Spring
Spring Replacement Procedure 1. Press the Stoppers on both sides of the Fusing/Transfer Drawer Rail and pull out the Drawer. 2. Lift and remove the Fusing Unit.
Continued
Fusing Unit
Fusing/Transfer Drawer 3. Remove the Transport Unit (2 Snap Rings and 2 Bushings, keep the connector coupled), turn it around, and place it on the Drawer as shown in the picture below.
Transport Unit
4. Remove the Paper Transfer Belt Motor Assembly (3 Screws). [ Front view ] [ Rear View ]
Transfer Belt Motor Assembly

5. Remove the Tension Spring (silver) and install a new one (black).
Screws
Continued
Tension Spring
6. Reassemble the machine.
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 73 18 73 14
OLD PART NO. A2573997 A2573993
NEW PART NO. AA060836 AA043285
DESCRIPTION Tension Spring Timing Belt 168 S2M
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
ALLOCATION:
Please be advised that automatic allocation to 100% of the affected machines will be implemented in mid November 1999. Any machines identified in our warehouse inventory will have the new spring packaged with the machine.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Tension Spring and Timing Belt installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER Tension Spring 3B69090001 3B79090001 H1190800054 H1290900001 3B69090001 3B79090001 SERIAL NUMBER Timing Belt 3B69060001 3B79060001 H11906xxxx H1290600001 3B69060001 3B79060001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 006 11/17/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The Development Receptacle has had two modifications done to it. First, the Development Receptacle has been modified to improve the contact point of the Development Bias Terminal by adding a second screw. The old style Development Receptacle (P/N A2573290) was secured by one screw. The interim style Development Receptacle (P/N A2573297) is secured to the copier frame by two screws. Second, to ensure proper contact between the Bias Terminal and the Development Input Shaft, the inner diameter of the terminal casing of the new style Development Receptacle (P/N A2573298) has been slightly increased. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 113 23
DEVELOPMENT RECEPTACLE !
PARTS
OLD PART NO. A2573290
NEW PART NO. A2573298
DESCRIPTION Development Receptacle
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Development Receptacle installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69090024 3B79090001 H1190900001 H1290900001 3B69090024 3B79090001
0 1 3/S
CONTROL NO. 001CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 007 11/19/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: DIRTY OR COLORED BACKGROUND !
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOMS:
1. A dirty or colored background appears near the leading edge of the copy. The width of this dirty or colored area varies. 2. A slightly pale image appears near the trailing edge of the copy. This symptom may also appear as a normal image at the trailing edge.
CAUSES:
The Development Bias Terminal Contact is not pushed against the Development Bias Input Shaft by the Spring to ensure proper contact as the Development Unit reaches the copying position. 1. When the Terminal does not move smoothly, poor contact with the Development Bias Terminal results during the beginning of the development process of the latent image and a dirty background occurs under these conditions. 2. When the contact between the Terminal and the Development Input Shaft is not as poor, the image becomes slightly pale or normal if the contact is good.
!
PARTS
Continued
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 002CLR
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
Pull out the Revolver/Drum Drawer and clean the Development Bias Terminal. Turn the Terminal counterclockwise 10 times and then turn the Terminal clockwise 10 times. Push the Terminal in and release it repeatedly to verify that the Terminal movement is smooth. Reassemble the machine and verify copy quality. If the above action is not successful, replace the Development Receptacle with the new style one (P/N A2573298). The new style Development Receptacle has been modified from 1 mounting screw to 2 mounting screws. NOTE: Care should be taken when mounting the 2 screw version of the Development Receptacle. If the Receptacle is mounted too tight, a slight deformation may occur in the Terminal casing. Machines produced in May through July 1999 may exhibit this symptom.
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
The inspection of the Bias Terminal has been performed in production since August, 1999. To ensure proper contact between the Bias Terminal and the Development Input Shaft, a modification of the development Bias Terminal has been applied to the production line since October, 1999. The inner diameter of the terminal casing has been slightly increased. The part number has been changed to A2573298.
GENERAL:
The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 113 23
DESCRIPTION Development Receptacle
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Development Receptacle installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69090024 3B79090001 H1190900001 H1290900001 3B69090024 3B79090001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 008 11/19/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: HORIZONTAL LINE IN THICK PAPER MODE !
SYMPTOM:
A horizontal line appears on copies 106 mm (4.17 ) from the leading edge. The line is normally black in color but the last page of a multiple copy run is colored magenta (in Full Color Mode).
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The screws that fasten the Flywheel Supporter to the Drum Shaft may become loose. This may cause the Drum to stop for a very short period, while the drum speed is slowed during Thick Paper/OHP mode.
SOLUTION:
Remove the large and small Flywheels and tighten the screws for the Flywheel Supporter. See the illustration below.
The Flywheel Supporter has four cutouts for the screws. Two of the four cutouts have flat surfaces (Starting from the May, 1999 production. The serial number cut-ins were not tracked.). Make sure that the screws are positioned on these flat surfaces, especially after reassembling this area.
CONTROL NO. 002CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 009 11/19/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SC450 !
SYMPTOM:
An SC450 is displayed when the Main Switch is turned ON or during a copy / print cycle.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The Paper Transfer Belt Shift Clutch (P/N AX210067) fails. Over time, the Paper Transfer Belt Shift Clutch may overrun the stop position. When the Clutch is energized, it rotates for 180 and stops. If it overruns the stop position, the Paper Transfer Belt Unit drops and an SC450 is displayed.
SOLUTION:
Replace the Paper Transfer Belt Shift Clutch with a new style Clutch (P/N AX210076). The clutch has been modified to prevent the possibility of overrun. The electric power of the clutch has been increased from 8W to 15W to ensure that the armature plate is properly pulled when the clutch is energized. This modification has been applied to production from the end of July, 1999.
PARTS
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 101 1
OLD PART NO. AX210067
NEW PART NO. AX210076
DESCRIPTION Spring Clutch
QTY 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
A257 and A269 Serial Number cut-ins were not available at time of publication.
CONTROL NO. 002CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 010 11/19/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: ONLY MAGENTA IMAGE IS TRANSFERRED !
SYMPTOM:
Only the magenta image is transferred to the copy paper in Full Color Mode. The last color image is transferred in 2C or 3C modes.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Shift Clutch (P/N AX210067) fails. The Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Shift Clutch may overrun its position causing the Cleaning Blade to stay in contact with the Image Transfer Belt. With the exception of the last color, the excess toner on the Image Transfer Belt is wiped off by the Cleaning Blade before the toner image is transferred to the copy paper.
SOLUTION:
Replace the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Shift Clutch with a new style clutch (P/N AX210076). The clutch has been modified to prevent the possibility of overrun. The electric power of the clutch has been increased from 8W to 15W to ensure that the armature plate is properly pulled when the clutch is energized. This modification has been applied to production from the end of July, 1999.
PARTS
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 99 13
DESCRIPTION Spring Clutch
QTY 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
A257 and A269 Serial Number cut-ins were not available at time of publication.
CONTROL NO. 002CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 011 12/03/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: MACHINE OPERATION WITHOUT THE REVOLVER COVER !
SYMPTOM:
An SC457 (Error in the setting of the Belt Cleaner) may occur after performing some operations once the Revolver Cover is removed.
MECHANICAL
PROCEDURE:
With the Revolver Cover Removed In order to ensure the correct position of the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit, there is a Rubber Plate mounted on the rear side of the Revolver Cover. The Rubber Plate presses against the lower positioning pin on the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit. See the illustration below.
Rubber Plate
Lower Positioning Pin
If performing tests (for example, machine operation) after removing the Revolver Cover, push in the Lower Positioning Pin and verify that it has been properly positioned in the unit.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 011 Page 2 of 2 If the machine does not operate normally after the installation of the Revolver Cover: Check to see if the touch and release mechanism of the Blade/Brush of the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning area is working properly. If working properly, there is a problem with the Belt Cleaning HP Sensor. If not working properly, there is a problem with the Belt Cleaning Shift Clutch. If abnormalities occur with this Sensor and/or Clutch, check to see that the Sensors are clean and that the Connectors are properly connected to the Sensors. Also, be aware that it is possible for the Belt Mark Detection Sensor to be malfunctioning as well. Summary of Causes: 1. Faulty setting of the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit. 2. Problem with the touch and release mechanism of the Blade/Brush of the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit. 3. Malfunction of the Belt Mark Detection Sensor of the Image Transfer Belt Unit.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 012 12/03/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
SERVICE MANUAL
6-15
Updated Information (Paper Transfer Unit Removal)
CONTROL NO. 003CLR
UNIT REMOVAL
Rev. 12/99
6.4.5 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT REMOVAL

[X]
[A] [D] [C]
[A] [F]
A269R416.WMF
[X] [E]
transfer NOTE: When installing the paperis set in the unit, make sure the snap ring [E] groove of the paper transport belt drive roller shaft [F]. Otherwise the following problems may occur: SC456 (paper transfer unit position error) Damage to the paper transfer belt
[B]
A269R406.WMF
!WARNING
Do not press rail release springs [X] which are just behind the rail stoppers. Pressing them may cause the fusing/transfer drawer to come off together with the rails. This is dangerous because the drawer is heavy. 1. Press the stoppers [A] on both sides of the fusing/transfer drawer rail and pull out the drawer. 2. Remove the fusing/transfer drawer cover [B] (3 screws). 3. Remove the separation plate [C] (1 shoulder screw and 1 screw). NOTE: Keep the separation plate in a safe location to prevent it from being accidentally deformed. 4. Remove the paper transfer unit [D] (bias terminal, 2 snap rings, 2 bearings).
A257/A269
6-14
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 013 12/03/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: TONER BANDS AROUND THE DRUM or SC440 !
SYMPTOM:
Toner bands form on the front side of the Drums surface. If these toner bands are located in the image area of the Drum, they will appear on copies as vertical bands. If the thickness of the built-up toner is high, the Drum locks and SC440 is generated (Drum Motor error). Toner bands around the Development Sleeve are also observed under the conditions described above. These toner bands are actually formed first and are then transferred to the Drums surface.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
If the Transfer Faceplate is fitted improperly, the Photoconductor gap at the front side may become slightly narrower than the specification. The Photoconductor gap at the rear side will not change. Under these conditions, a toner band may form around the Development Sleeve due to heat caused by the heavier load on the developer. This is likely to occur in Development Units that have a relatively wide Doctor Gap (within specification) among the four Development Units (YMCK). When the toner band reaches a certain thickness, it is transferred to the Drums surface. When this happens, the toner band on the Drum will be transferred to the other Development Sleeves.
SOLUTION:
To ensure a proper Photoconductor gap for all Color Development Units, the Knob and Screws for the Transfer Faceplate should be tightened in the specified order. Please refer to the following procedure on page 2. Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 013 Page 2 of 2 Procedure: Installing the Transfer Faceplate: 1. Install the Transfer Faceplate and tighten the Knob [1]. 2. Pushing the upper left part of the Faceplate against the Revolver/Drum Drawer, tighten the three screws in the following order: [2], [3], [4]. 3. Re-tighten the Knob. Note: Re-tighten this Knob with the Transfer Belt Tension Lever on the Tension Stud (Belt not touching Drum) until the Drum rotates along with the Knob.
[2] [1] [4]
Note: When installing the Transfer Faceplate, make sure that the Rubber Spacers (AA161134) [A] are properly attached to the positioning pins as shown.
[3]
[A]
Action for when toner bands form: If the toner bands form only on the Development Sleeve, clean the Development Sleeve completely and attach the Transfer Faceplate as described above. If the toner bands form on the Drums surface as well, replace the Drum and Development Unit(s) which show toner bands around the Development Sleeve. If the Development Sleeve can be cleaned completely, it is possible to re-use the Development Unit.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 014 12/03/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
REMOVING TONER CARTRIDGE WITHOUT TONER END
GENERAL: !
Removing the Toner Cartridge without a toner end indication: If the Toner Cartridge (which is not empty) is removed from the Toner Cartridge Removal Position, the Cartridge Lever may not turn smoothly when reinstalling the Toner Cartridge. If the Cartridge Lever is not completely turned to its lock position, toner may scatter from the Toner Hopper.
MECHANICAL
PROCEDURE:
To prevent toner scattering, follow the procedure outlined below: 1. Remove the Revolver Cover. 2. Rotate the Revolver Unit counterclockwise until the Cartridge you wish to remove is in the removal position (lower left, looking from the front). See illustration below. Note: If the Cyan Cartridge is removed in this position, it is possible to reinstall the Revolver Clamp for machine transportation. 3. Tap the Toner Cartridge near the Cartridge Lever with the handle end of a screwdriver. This will help the toner to settle in the Cartridge before removal. 4. Rotate the Cartridge clockwise. Confirm that the Shutter is completely closed. Remove the Toner Cartridge. 5. Clean the Shutter area of the Cartridge with a vacuum (as well as the silver tape on the reverse side). 6. Rotate the Revolver Unit counterclockwise to set the Toner Cartridge to its Toner End Replacement Position. 7. After cleaning the area around the Shutter on the Hopper, make sure that the Shutter can be moved easily. After closing the Shutter completely, install the cleaned Cartridge. Toner End Replacement Position
Toner Cartridge Removal Position
CONTROL NO. 003CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 015 12/14/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER NA RICOH AFICIO 6010 SAVIN NA SUBJECT: USED TONER LEAK !
SYMPTOM:
Used toner leaks into the rear of the machine.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The used toner leaks from the weld on the Collection Bottle Joint.
SOLUTION:
Follow the FIELD COUNTERMEASURE procedure outlined on pages 2 and 3. NOTE: The Sponge Seals will be shipped by the last week of December 1999 directly to the dealers that have machines with affected serial numbers. As this is a one-time shipment, no part number will be assigned. Inquiries regarding the Sponge Seals should be directed to the TSC Hotline. All machines within the serial number range shipped from the warehouse after December 12,1999 have already been updated.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 copiers manufactured within the Serial Numbers range listed below may have a tendency to leak used toner. MODEL NAME Ricoh AFICIO 6010 July Ricoh AFICIO 6010 August SERIAL NUMBER RANGE H1190700078 H1190700251 H1190800001 H1190800149
CONTROL NO. 004CLR
Continued Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 015 Page 2 of 3
Checking Procedure 1. Turn off the Main Switch and unplug the Power Cord. 2. Remove the Left Cover (6 screws). (If Sorter Stapler is installed, remove this as well.) 3. Remove the Lower Front Cover (1 screw). 4. Remove the Used Toner Tank (1 connector). 5. From the Left Lower Opening, confirm if any used toner has fallen [A] on to the Exhaust Fan Duct [B]. 6. If there is no toner on the Duct, reassemble the copier (and options if present). If there is toner on the Duct, perform the Modification Procedure described below. [B] [A]
Modification Procedure [C] 1. Remove the Filter Box [C] (1 screw).
2. Remove the Rear Cover (7 screws). (If Controller and I/F units are installed, remove them as well.)
3. Remove the Rear Stay [D] (4 screws).
4. Remove the larger Flywheel [E] (4 gold screws).
[E]
[D]
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 015 Page 3 of 3 5. Pull out the Exhaust Duct [A]. (Air inlet [a] should be disconnected from the Connection Bracket as shown.) Note: When reinstalling the Exhaust Duct, make sure the Air Inlet [a] and Outlet [d] are properly set. Push the Exhaust Duct so that the Air Inlets [b] and [c] are properly inserted in the openings of the Rear Side Plate.
Continued
[a]
[a] 6. Remove the Exhaust Fan Duct [B] (3 tapping screws). Note: When reinstalling the Exhaust-Fan Duct, make sure the edges of the side opening are properly lined up with the opening in the Rear Side Frame. [A] 7. Remove the fallen used toner in the machine with a vacuum, and clean the Exhaust-Fan Duct and Exhaust Ducts. 8. Clean the Collection Bottle Joint [C] with a dry cloth so that the Sponge Seal will adhere firmly. [d] [B] [c] [b]
9. Affix the Sponge Seal [D] to the Collection Bottle Joint so that the Seal covers the welded part.
! IMPORTANT:
(1) Affix the Seal on the bottom of the rib under the step [e] as shown. Note: Position the center of the Seal on the rib. (2) Affix the Seal around the lower part of the Collection Bottle Joint as shown. (3) Be sure to attach the Seal firmly against the Collection Bottle Joint to avoid any gaps on the adhering surface. Note: Do not press too hard, as the Seal may tear. [C] [e] [D]
10. Reassemble the copier (and options if present).

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 016 12/20/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E # SUBJECT:
IMAGE ROTATION and DOUBLE TRANSFER IMAGE
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL:
The following two items are additional information for Image Rotation and Double Transfer Image. 1. Image Rotation in combination with other functions: Image Rotation is available under the following conditions. (1) When Image Rotation ON is selected in the "General Features" section of User Tools. (2) When "Auto Paper Select" is selected on the Operation Panel. (3) When paper, the same size as the original on the Exposure Glass is set in the Paper Tray perpendicular to the original. (4) When Color Mode is selected from the Operation Panel and is set to B&W or Single Color. The "Image Rotation" cannot be performed in the following copy modes: ! Area editing mode ! Auto Reduce/Enlarge mode NOTE: Possible with Main firmware Ver. 1.572 or later. ! Poster mode ! Image Shift mode ! Combine mode ! Book mode ! Image Creation mode ! Image overlay ! Film projector ! Staple mode 2. Conditions for the Double Transfer Image Mechanism Conditions for the Double Transfer Image Mechanism are as follows: (1) Copy paper size: A4 sideways (11 x 8 1/2) or smaller (2) Copy mode: Full Color mode or 1C mode The copying speed with the Double Transfer Image Mechanism is 10 cpm for Full Color and 40 cpm for 1C mode. The Double Transfer Image Mechanism in the Full Color mode is not available with the following functions (even if the above conditions are satisfied): ! Margin adjustment ! Centering ! Cornering ! Series copy ! Duplex (2 sided " 2 sided, Book " 2 sided) ! Image overlay ! Poster mode ! Projector mode NOTE: The copying speed of Full Color mode when Double Transfer Image is not available is 5 cpm. This also applies to A4 sideways (11 x 8 1/2) or smaller.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 017 12/20/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
SERVICE MANUAL
4-21, 22 7-1, 2
Updated Information (ROM HISTORY) Updated Information (Developer Setup Results)
NOTE: When installing Main Firmware version 1.572, it is necessary to update the Scanner IPU firmware to version 1.19 or newer in machines produced before July 1999. If Main Firmware version 1.572 is used with the Scanner Firmware older than version 1.19, errors in machine operation may occur.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
Due to Firmware modifications items 3, 4 and 5 mentioned on the Service Manual insert page 4-21, the Operating Instructions for the A257 and A269 also need to be modified. This will be effective within the month of October 1999. An errata sheet included with this bulletin highlights the changes in the Operating Instructions. We recommend that copies of the errata be provided to customers updating to Firmware version 1.572 or newer (please refer to page 2 of this bulletin).
Continued
Rev. 12/99
ROM HISTORY
4.4 ROM HISTORY

4.4.1 ROM HISTORY MAIN CONTROL
A257/A269 Main Control Firmware History Description of Modification 1. Copies or Developments is displayed in the counter display (when the Counter Key is pressed). Copies is displayed for a machine with Copy counter set. Developments is displayed for a machine with Development counter set. NOTE: This change is available only when English has been selected. 2. Confirmation button on the Operation Panel is changed from OK to Confirm. 3. Full color sorting button in Duplex/ADF/Sorter mode in Copier Feature mode in User Tools is changed from On / Off to Off / On. This is because the default setting for Full Color Sorting is On. 4. Image Rotation and Auto Reduce/Enlarge can be used at the same time. 5. Area Editing and Auto Reduce/Enlarge can be used at the same time. The following SP Modes have been added: SP8-(140 148)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-(240 248)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-(340 343)-(01-08) Gamma Setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 3) July 99 1.561 Serial # Oct 99 Ver. 1.572
SM
4-21
A257/A269
Service Tables
ROM HISTORY
Rev. 12/99
1. The Drum Motor Stop Timing has been optimized to prevent the possibility of the belt surface scratching the OPC Drum. 2. On/Off timing for the ITB Cleaning Brush and Cleaning Blade has been optimized to prevent toner accumulated on the edge of the blade from falling on the Image Transfer Belt. 3. The following SP Modes have been added: SP8-115 Fusing Temperature setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-215 Fusing Temperature setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-315 Fusing Temperature setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 3) SP8-(130-138) Paper Transfer Current Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 1) SP8-(230-238) Paper Transfer Current Setting for Special Mode Program: Copy (for Special Mode 2) SP8-(330-338) Paper Transfer Current Setting for Special Mode Program: Printer (for Special Mode 1)
June 99
1.542
The following software bugs have been corrected: 1. When twin color (red and green), poster (2x2), and thick paper modes are selected, a solid image may appear on the leading edge of the copy. 2. Copies may become solid black when using ADF in ACS mode when making more than two continuous copies. 3. On units without an ADF, the operation panel may become locked when removing paper waiting for the second side to be copied in the duplex tray. 4. An abnormal image may appear when copying on 13x19 paper with an enlargement ratio of 200%. 5. The erase margin may be abnormal when using A6 paper with European models. 6. Some items may not be printed by the SP Data Printing function. The following software bug has been corrected: 1. Some text in the Systems Setting screen on the operation panel was mis-aligned. Start of production
May 99
1.514
April 99
1.502
March 99
1.501
A2457/A269
4-22
SM
Rev. 12/99
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
7.1.1 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK RESULTS (SP3-975-00)
Self Check Results 03-975-00
Displayed Value 1 Successful Item Related SP No. None Major Cause Remarks
89
Process Control Selfcheck
99 100 110
Forced termination (door opened, etc.) ID sensor offset error Vsg adjustment error
120
Coating weight calculation error
130 20! 300 31! 32! 40! 41!
Vmin error calculation error, invalid or Vk value Residual potential error Vd adjustment error Vpl adjustment error Self check process control error (unable to calculate) Self check process control error (out of range condition)
When SP3-125-000 (Process Control Method) is set to 1 3-125(fixed potential control). 000 When toner end or toner near end condition happens. Power is turned off during selfNone check. Temporary main power failure ID sensor connector disconnected Dirty ID sensor, dirty drum, 3-2-xx foreign materials or flaws on the drum ID sensor noise interference, defective development unit, None incorrect charge control unit setup, development bias error ID sensor noise interference, K toner density too low 3-121-xx Development unit error, mixed 3-122-xx colors Drum anomaly, faulty LD unit, 3-111-00 poor grounding Drum deterioration, optical None fatigue None Drum anomaly, faulty LD unit
SC385 is indicated. SC385 is indicated.
Troubleshooting
SM
7-1
A257/A269
Rev. 12/99
7.1.2 DEVELOPER SETUP RESULTS (SP3-964-00)

Displayed Item Value 1 Successful Unable to perform calculation, 20! invalid or Vk value 31! 32! 40! 41! Vd adjustment error Vpl adjustment error Self check process control error (unable to calculate) Self check process control error (out of range condition) Toner end condition, etc. (before toner is replenished) Toner supply error ( value will not go up when toner is replenished.) TD sensor initialization error Vref adjustment error Forced termination during the developer agitation. Toner end during the developer agitation. Forced termination after the developer agitation. Forced termination (before the developer agitation.) ID sensor offset error Vsg adjustment error Related SP No. Major Cause Development unit error, mixed colors Drum deterioration, optical fatigue Drum abnormally, faulty LD unit Same as process control selfcheck result. Same as process control selfcheck result. Toner end sensor actuated, toner end condition Developer/toner supply mechanism error, toner supply motor cable disconnected Toner end condition detected during developer setup. Rerun. Remarks
50!
51! 530 54! 59! 596 599 99 100 110
SC or door open. Toner end or toner end is detected during the developer agitation. SC or door open. Power turned off during selfcheck, temporary main power failure. Door open or SC. ID sensor cable disconnected Dirty ID sensor, dirty drum, foreign materials or flaws on the drum ID sensor noise interference, defective development unit, incorrect charge control unit setup, development bias error ID sensor noise interference, BK toner density too low Drum anomaly, faulty LD unit, poor grounding
120
Error of calculating the amount of toner on the drum. Vmin error Residual potential error
130 300
A257/A269
7-2
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 018 12/23/99 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES !
TRANSPORT BELT RECEPTACLE The Transport Belt Receptacle has been modified to maintain firmer contact with the Terminal. The material of the Transport Belt Receptacle has been changed from PPE (PolyPhenylen Ethyl) to PC (Poly-Carbonate). The following part update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
UPDATE 1:
PARTS
NEW PART NO. AD021134
DESCRIPTION Transport Belt Receptacle
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Transport Belt Receptacle installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69110001 3B79120001 H1191200001 H12911xxxxx 3B69110001 3B79120001
UPDATE 2:
GEAR 32Z The Development Output Gear has been changed to eliminate the possibility of the gear groove touching the bottom of the teeth of the engaged gear. This is to improve banding at 1.65 mm intervals that may appear on copies or print outs. The following parts update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
DESCRIPTION Gear 32Z
QTY 1
INT -
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 99 28 Continued
CONTROL NO. 007CLR
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Gear 32Z installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69070001 3B79070001 H1190600001 H1290600166 3B69070001 3B79070001
UPDATE 3:
DRIVE INPUT SHAFT As a countermeasure for 53 mm banding, the groove for the E-ring on the Drive Input Shaft has been eliminated and a Spacer has been added to keep the Gear in position. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
NEW PART NO. A2574740 A2574741
DESCRIPTION Drive Input Shaft Spacer
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 99 15 99 31 *
* Denotes new item.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Drive Input Shaft and Spacer installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69090001 3B79090001 H1190800001 H1290900001 3B69090001 3B79090001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 019 01/17/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
PARTS CATALOG UPDATES BANDING ISSUES

DEVELOPMENT DRIVE TIMING PULLEY- The number of cogs of the Development Drive Timing Pulley has been changed from 27 to 25 cogs to improve 3 mm interval banding in copy and print mode. The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
UPDATE 1:
!
PARTS
DESCRIPTION Development Drive Timing Pulley
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Development Drive Timing Pulley installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69090001 3B79090001 H1190800001 H1290900001 3B69090001 3B79090001 Continued
UPDATE 2:
MOTOR CONTROL BOARD - RPS- The Motor Control Board - RPS has been modified to optimize the acceleration curve of the Image Transfer Belt rotation and to further minimize the possibility of the Image Transfer Belt scratching the OPC Drum. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
DESCRIPTION Motor Control Board - RPS
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Motor Control Board - RPS installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69100001 3B7910xxxx H1191000001 H12910xxxxx 3B69100001 3B7910xxxx
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 020 01/24/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
SHARP HORIZONTAL LINE AT 106 mm !
SYMPTOM:
The Flywheel may be loose, causing a horizontal sharp line at 106 mm from the leading edge, especially when using thick paper mode.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The Flywheel Supporter was using a U shaped screw hole that would allow it to become loose.
Remove the large and small Flywheels and tighten the screws for the Flywheel Supporter. See the illustration below. . Reference TSB A257/A269 008
!
PARTS
Continued
A modification has been made to the Flywheel Supporter. The shape of the screw holes were changed from a U shape to an O shape.
GENERAL:
The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 97 12
DESCRIPTION Flywheel Supporter
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Flywheel Supporter installed during production MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69110001 3B79120001 H1191200001 H12912xxxxx 3B69110001 3B79120001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 021 02/02/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: DARK SPOTS IN SOLID IMAGE AREAS !
SYMPTOM:
Dark spots appear in solid areas as shown in the illustration.
COPY QUALITY
CAUSE:
The electrical resistance of the Image Transfer Belt has a specified range. If the resistance is at the lower end of specified range, the pre-fixed Transfer Bias becomes higher than the optimum value. In this case, toner transferred onto the belt tends to be re-attracted to the Drum. Small carriers in the Development Unit tend to be physically attracted to the Drum. The carriers transferred onto the Drum create a gap between the Drum and Image Transfer Belt. Toner on some parts of the Transfer Belt where the carriers are transferred are not re-attracted to the Drum due to this gap.
SOLUTION:
Adjust the Image Transfer Belt Bias according to the Procedure described on the next page.
Continued
PROCEDURE:
SP5-955 Select "Belt Pattern" (No. 4).
Set dot_line to "200".
Set SP2-301-010 to "800".
Make a print out in 1C mode.
How is the image quality (Do the solid areas contain sufficient toner)?
Good
Adjust the ITB Bias to the values according to Setting 1 in the SP Data Table (Page 3), and reset the SP2-301-010 to the default (2100).
Not good Set SP2-301-010- to "1200"
Make a print out in 1C mode.
How is the image quality (Do the solid areas contain sufficient toner)?
Good
Adjust the ITB Bias to the values according to Setting 2 in the SP Data Table (Page 3), and reset the SP2-301-010 to the default (2100).
Not good Make sure that dark spots do not appear. Replace the Image Transfer Belt.
Perform ACC.
Continued

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 022 02/02/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
!
SERVICE MANUAL
A-32 & 33 A-34 & 35 A-36
Updated Information (Removed gray background) Updated Information (SC726) Updated Information (Temp. Resistance Conversion Table)
CONTROL NO. 010CLR

- Timing & Condition The main control board receives no response from RDS when accessing it. Even when this error is detected, the copier does not show the SC code and this SC code is not logged. (Copier function is still working.) - Timing & Condition When the main CPU communicates with CPUs on other PCBs, main CPU does not receive response from others.
Rev. 02/2000 Possible Causes

Poor connection of harness, opticalfiber cable, or damaged Defective line adapter Defective I/F board RDS/LCT Defective main control board Scanner IPU firmware upgrade Poor connection of connectors Defective main scanner IPU board Defective main control board Defective TD sensor I/F board 1 Main board(s) of options Defective motor
Related SC
1. Check the connector of the harness and optical-fiber cable is properly set on the I/F board RDS/LCT and main control board or check if they are damaged. 2. Check and/or change the setting of the line adapter or replace it. 3. Replace the I/F board RDS/LCT. 4. Replace the scanner IPU board.
Type
SC630 RDS communication error
SC690 Application selection error
This SC code will be displayed when the scanner IPU firmware is changed. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the IC card; then, turn on the main switch. 1. Check if the connectors on the main control board, sub scanner IPU board, TD sensor I/F board 1, and the main board on each option equipped are properly connected. 2. Replace the defective board(s).
SC720 Sorter: Main motor error
SC721 Sorter: Bin motor error
- Timing & Condition When the encoder pulse does not change for 300 ms after the main motor starts. When the encoder pulse does not change for 100 ms during operation. - Timing & Condition -
1. Check if the motor works by SP 5-804-120 and replace it if necessary.
A257/A269
A-32
SM
Rev. 02/2000 SC No. Item Detection Conditions Possible Causes Related SC Troubleshooting Procedure
SC CODE TABLE Type

D
SC722 Sorter: - Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector Jogger motor The jogger H.P. sensor error does not activate within Defective jogger the timing programmed. H.P. sensor The jogger H.P. sensor Defective jogger does not deactivate motor within the timing programmed. SC724 Sorter: Grip motor error - Timing & Condition The grip shift motor H.P. sensor does not deactivate within 3200 ms when the grip assembly moves out from the home position. The grip shift motor H.P. sensor does not activate within 3200 ms after the grip when the grip assembly moves back to the home position. - Timing & Condition The staple H.P. sensor does not activates 700 ms after the staple unit drive motor turns on. Poor connection of connectors. Defective grip shift motor H.P. sensor Defective grip motor
1. Check if the jogger H.P. sensor connector is properly connected. 2. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor. (Input check: SP 5803-128) 3. Replace the jogger motor. (Output check: SP 5-804131)
1. Check if the connectors of the grip shift motor H.P. sensor and/or grip motor are properly connected. 2. Replace the grip shift motor H.P. sensor. (Input check: SP 5-803-129) 3. Replace the grip motor. (Output check: SP 5-804-127)
SC725 Sorter: Stapler unit drive motor error
Staple jam Excessive load when stapling many sheets of paper (out of limit) Poor connection of connectors Defective staple H.P. sensor Defective staple unit drive motor
1. Remove the staple(s) jammed if it causes SC. 2. Instruct user how many sheets can be stapled as maximum. 3. Check if the connectors of the staple H.P. sensor and/or staple unit drive motor are properly connected. 4. Replace the staple H.P. sensor. (Input check: SP 5803-130) 5. Replace the staple unit drive motor. (Output check: SP 5-804-129)
SM
A-33
A257/A269
Rev. 02/2000 Type

D
SC726 Sorter: End release motor error
- Timing & Condition Poor connection of connectors The bin end open or close sensor does not activate within Defective bin end the time programmed. open or close sensor When this error is detected Defective end release twice, this SC is displayed. motor Defective main board
1. Check if the connectors of the bin end open and close sensors and end release motor are properly connected. 2. Replace the bin end open or close sensor. (Input check: SP5803-126/127) 3. Replace the end release motor. (Output check: SP5-804-125) 4. Replace the main board. Motor overload: Check the mechanism, including the gears.
SC731 Sorter: Shift motor error SC732 Sorter: Bin drive motor error SC741 LCT: Main motor error
Excessive load Defective shift motor
Defective motor: Test with SP5-804-132. Replace if necessary. Defective lift motor: Test with SP5-804-124. Replace if necessary. ? Bin drive motor? Same test as SC721 Defective sorter control board: Replace.
1. Check if the connector is properly connected. 2. Replace the LCT main motor.
- Timing & Condition LCT main motor speed is out of range for more than 0.5 seconds during rotation. - Timing & Condition The upper limit sensor does not activate within 18 seconds after the lift motor turns on (in UP direction) when the main switch is turned on or close the LCT cover. The lower limit sensor does not activate within 18 seconds after the lift motor turns on (in DOWN direction) when paper runs out (paper end) or the Down key is pressed.
SC742 LCT: Tray lift error
Poor connection of connectors Defective LCT main motor Defective LCT main board Poor connection of connectors Defective lift motor Defective upper limit sensor Defective pick-up solenoid Defective LCT main board
1. Check if the connectors of the lift motor, upper limit sensor, and pick-up solenoid are properly connected. 2. Replace the lift motor. 3. Replace the upper limit sensor. 4. Replace the pick-up solenoid. 5. Replace the LCT main board.
A257/A269
A-34
SM
Rev. 02/2000
SC CODE TABLE Detection Conditions Possible Causes

Poor connection of connector Blown projector lamp Defective projector main board
SC No.
Item
Related SC
1. Check if the connector is properly connected. 2. Replace the projector lamp if it is blown. 3. Replace the projector main board. 1. Replace the projector main board. 2. Replace the sub and/or main scanner IPU board. 3. Replace the main control board.
Type
B
SC790 FPU: - Timing & Condition Projector The projector lamp does not lamp on error turn on 100msec after 5V is applied to it.
SC791 FPU: - Timing & Condition Defective projector main board Projector The projector lamp does not lamp off error turn off 100msec after it is Defective sub/main turned off. scanner IPU board Defective main control board SC792 FPU: - Timing & Condition Poor connection of connector Projector The projector lamp lamp overheats during projector Defective overheated operation. thermistor Defective projector main board SC901 Upper total - Timing & Condition Poor connection of counter error Feedback signal stays the connectors (Black) LOW when the main Defective counter switch is turned on. Feedback signal stays LOW just before the trigger signal goes ON. Feedback signal stays HIGH just before the trigger signal goes OFF. SC902 Lower total Same as SC901 counter error (Color)
1. 2. 3. 4.
Check if the connector of the fan is properly connected. Replace the fan if it is defective. Replace the thermistor if it is defective. Replace projector main board.
Check if the connectors are properly set. Replace the total counter.
[ Signal Check ] Trigger line: CN230-B8 on I/O control board Counter OK signal: TP227 on I/O control Board
Same as SC901 [ Signal Check ] Trigger line: CN230-B10 on I/O control board Counter OK signal: TP228 on I/O control board
SM
A-35
A257/A269
SC CODE TABLE
Temperature/Resistance Conversion Reference Table

Relationships between the fusing thermistor resistance and temperature
Temperature 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 Lower-limit Value 211.7 166.8 105.4 68.4 45.45 30.88 21.4 15.12 10.87 7.935 5.881 4.42 3.365 2.593 2.021 1.592 1.249 0.9849 0.7912 0.6834 0.5184 Standard Value 329.3 198.9 123.7 79.11 51.86 34.78 23.833 16.64 11.83 8.554 6.281 4.678 3.531 2.699 2.087 1.632 1.289 1.0228 0.8276 0.6719 0.5499 Upper-limit Value 398.9 236.9 145.1 91.44 59.14 39.16 26.51 18.3 12.88 9.216 6.703 4.948 3.703 2.807 2.154 1.672 1.33 1.068 0.8652 0.7067 0.5818
A257/A269
A-36
SM

Service Manual page 3-35, LCT Adapter (A840), explains where the Mylar should be attached to the Vertical Transport. If the Mylar is not properly positioned, it may cause a skew or a jam. The new page 3-35 shows the proper attachment position of the Mylar. The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
3-35
Updated Information (LCT Adapter Mylar attachment)
CONTROL NO. 010CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 024 02/02/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: VERTICAL LINES & SMEARED IMAGES
[A]
SYMPTOM:
Vertical lines [A] appear across the copy (from the lead edge to trail edge) and smeared images (short lines) [B] appear below the lower edge of solid image areas as shown in the illustration. This is particularly noticeable in Full Color (FC) mode. [B] [A] COLOR CHART C-4
COPY QUALITY
CAUSE:
The Screw [C] securing the Entrance Seal Release Lever [D] may come loose and the Entrance Seal [E] now contacts the Image Transfer Belt [F] during the copy process. This will cause the vertical lines in blank areas and the smeared images below the lower edges of solid image areas. [E] [D] [F]
[C]
SOLUTION:
Remove the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit from the machine and re-secure the Screw [C] by following the Troubleshooting Procedure explained on the next page.
Continued
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE:
1. Rotate the Gear [A] clockwise so that D-cut [B] of the Gear faces down as shown in the figure. This is to move the Entrance Seal to the release position.
2.
After loosening the Screw [C] of The Entrance Seal Release Lever [D], re-secure the Lever so that the gap between the edges of the Entrance Seal [E] and the Cleaning Blade [F] is 1.5 2.5 mm. This can be done by turning the Lever [D].
[B]
[A] 1.5 to 2.5 mm
[C] 3. Confirm the gap. If it is incorrect, finely adjust by turning the Lever while pressing down the front tab [G] of the Cleaning Blade Bracket, and firmly tighten the Screw while maintaining pressure on the tab. [F] [D] [H] 4. After securing the Screw, turn the Gear [A] clockwise 1 revolution and confirm that the gap is within the adjustment range.
[E]
[G]
NOTE: If the gap is not adjusted within the specified range (1.5 2.5 mm), the following problems may occur. If the gap is under 1.5 mm, the toner will tend to spill out. If the gap is over 2.5 mm, vertical lines will tend to appear on the copies. REMARKS: Please make note of the following remarks. When removing and reinstalling the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit during servicing, please do so while holding the Positioning Pin (H). Do not hold the Entrance Seal Release Lever. If the Lever is held, it will move and the gap will be out of the adjustment range. This will cause the problems described above. The Screw that fastens the Entrance Seal Release Lever is paint locked. Normally, Screw [C] should not be loosened during servicing.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 025 02/02/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:
Horizontal bands are located at 230 mm, 270 mm and 310 mm (center of the bands) from the lead edge of long paper such as A3, 11x17, 12x18 and 13x19. In the case of 1C mode, this location corresponds to only the first copy. The horizontal bands are caused by the memory of Image Transfer Belt curls and can be observed especially in halftone areas.
HORIZONTAL BANDS "
COPY QUALITY
CAUSE:
The Image Transfer Belt (ITB) always stops at the same position when the copy/print job finishes. The belt mark is positioned 80 mm away from the ITB Home Position (HP) Sensor. In addition, the tension applied to the Image Transfer Belt has been increased from the first mass-production in order to ensure the image alignment. These conditions may cause memory of curl on the Image Transfer Belt. The level of curl varies depending on the usage conditions. Low copy/print volume and prolonged use will cause heavier curl. The appearance of belt curl memory on the copy/print image also varies depending on the image patterns.
SOLUTION:
Change the Main Firmware to Ver. 1.592 or later. The following countermeasure has been applied to prevent the memory of ITB curl by modifying the Main firmware. NOTE: Belt stop position at the end of a copy or print job will shift by 4 mm each time. The following shows the belt stop positions in sequence where 0 is the current stop position: 0 ! +4 mm ! +8 mm ! +12 mm ! +16 mm ! +20 mm ! -20 mm ! -16 mm ! -12 mm ! -8 mm ! -4 mm ! 0 ! +4 mm ! +8 mm ! +12 mm ! . The PCB ROM revision 1.595 (file name A2571595.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.
UNITS AFFECTED:
This firmware change has been implemented from the first production of October 1999.
CONTROL NO. 010CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 026 02/22/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
PARTS CATALOG UPDATES !

GEAR 26/48Z As a countermeasure for 1.65 mm interval banding, the two Development Drive Gears (P/Ns A2573210 and A2573214) have been changed into one molded part (P/N A2573219). The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
OLD PART NO. A2573210 A2573214
DESCRIPTION Gear 48Z Gear 26/48Z
QTY 40 4
INT 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 16 61 61 15
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Gear 26/48Z installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69120021 3B7001xxxx H1191200043 H12912xxxxx 3B69120021 3B7001xxxx
UPDATE 2:
DECAL PAPER TRAY The Decal Paper Tray (P/N A5492915) should not be used on the 2nd or 3rd Paper Tray. The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
2nd or 3rd Paper Tray
Page 26 REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 27 4
NEW PART NO. -
DESCRIPTION Decal Paper Tray
QTY 10
Continued
UPDATE 3:
PAPER TRAYS The illustrations were incorrect for the 1st Paper Tray and the 2nd or 3rd Paper Tray. The Tray Cover (P/N A2571259) should not be included with the 1st Paper Tray Assy (P/N A2572970). See illustration below. The Tray Cover (P/N A2571258), Paper Size Slider (P/N AF015027) and Decal Paper Size (P/N AA002235 or AA002236) should not be included with the Paper Tray Assy Universal (P/N A2572972). See the illustration in UPDATE 2. The following illustration correction and the illustration for Update 2 are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
1st Paper Tray
Page 24
Continued
UPDATE 4:
TIGHTENER SPRING To ensure proper tension of the Timing Belt, the Tightener Spring has been changed. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
NEW PART NO. A2574651 A2574652
DESCRIPTION Tightener Spring Tightener Spring DEV
QTY 21 1
INT 1
* Denotes new item number.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Tightener Spring DEV installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69040001 3B79040001 H1190500001 H1290400001 3B69040001 3B79040001
Continued
UPDATE 5:
PULL OUT UPPER UNIT The Pull Out Upper Unit has been registered as a service part. The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
NEW PART NO. A2573040 * Denotes new item number.
DESCRIPTION Pull Out Upper Unit
QTY 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 59 27 *
0 1 3/S

Occurrences of jitter on extra thick paper have been reported and the causes for each type of jitter are different. This bulletin explains the causes and how to apply the corresponding solutions.
JITTER ON EXTRA THICK PAPER !

COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM/CAUSE/SOLUTION:
Action Required In production In the field The factory settings The current default settings of may not be suitable SP1-801-005 and 010 were for the brand of paper determined by using limited used in the field. brands of extra thick paper. If jitter occurs, these They were unsuitable for minimizing the 140 mm jitter on SP modes need to be fine-tuned. various kinds of extra thick paper. For the procedure, These SP modes will be please refer to page adjusted in the production 2 of this bulletin. process to improve this situation. See NOTE 1 on page 2. SP1-801-005: Paper feed motor speed/Half speed Adjustment range: -0.2 +/- 0.2 SP1-801-010: Registration motor speed/Standard speed Adjustment range: 0 +/- 0.1
Symptom 140 mm from the trailing edge
Cause The Paper Feed Motors speed is adjustable to make paper buckle between the Registration and Grip Rollers. If the Grip Roller speed is faster than the Registration Roller, the amount of paper buckle increases. Since extra thick paper is very stiff, the paper buckle amount affects the paper transportation speed overcoming the Registration Roller speed. When the trailing edge of paper passes the Grip Rollers, the force pushing the paper by the Grip Rollers suddenly disappears. This may change the paper transportation speed, shocking the image transfer process and causing jitter. The distance between the Grip Roller and image transfer point is approximately 140 mm.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 027 Page 2 of 5 Symptom 355 mm from the leading edge Cause The shock caused when the leading edge of paper touches the Hot Roller causes the jitter image. Action In the production The Fusing Entrance Guide will be modified. The height of the central part of The Entrance Guide will be adjustable. New P/N: A2574137 Fusing Entrance Guide
In the field Users can move up the position of the central part of the Entrance Guide by shifting the lever when using extra thick paper. For the installation procedure, please refer to page 4/4. See NOTE 2 on this page. The same as 355 mm from the leading edge.
365 mm from the leading edge
The shock caused when the leading edge of paper passes the NIP band of the Fusing Rollers causes the jitter image.
The same as 355 mm from the leading edge.
NOTE 1 In the service manual (Appendix 2, SP Mode), the columns of SP1-801-005 and 010 are highlighted. This means that these SP modes should not be touched in the field. However, please adjust these settings to correct this symptom. Jitter may appear at 76 mm from the trailing edge. This is caused by shock produced when the trailing edge of paper passes the Registration Roller. This can be improved by adjusting SP1-801-010. Please make a note that the setting of SP1-801-010 should be adjusted to achieve suitable image for both 76 and 140 mm jitter images. NOTE 2 The Fusing Entrance Guide can be shifted to two positions (Normal or High). The High position is only for the extra thick paper. The Normal position is for all other paper. If 80 g or 100 g paper is fed at the High position of the Entrance Guide, it may not cause any problems although the Normal position is recommended. However, the High position may cause a paper jam if thin paper or small size paper, such as a post card is fed.
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Step [1]: Jitter at 140mm from the trailing edge Please find the best combination of the SP1-801-005 and 010 within the following range. SP1-801-005 (Paper feed motor speed / Half speed): -0.2 +/- 0.2 SP1-801-010 (Registration motor speed / Standard speed): 0 +/- 0.1 NOTE: Before starting the following procedure, clean the registration rollers and grip rollers with a cloth moistened with alcohol or water. The following procedure is the quickest way to find the best combination of SP mode settings. Result may vary depending on machine condition and type of paper used. You can stop the procedure when you obtain on acceptable improvement. (The 140mm jitter should disappear completely or be significantly reduced after following procedure.) SP1-801-010 should be adjusted for both 140 mm and 76 mm jitter as explained above.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 027 Page 3 of 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Confirm that the setting of SP1-801-010 is 0. If not, set it to 0. Change the setting of SP1-801-005 from 0.7 to -0.2. Check the result of the above setting by making copies on extra thick paper. If there is insufficient improvement, change the setting of SP1-801-005 to -0.1 or -0.3. Then, check the result. If the improvement is not sufficient, change the setting of SP1-801-005 to -0.4 or 0.0. Then, check the result. If the improvement is not sufficient, change the setting of SP1-801-010 to -0.1. Then, check the result. Under this condition, change the setting of SP1-801-005 within the range of -0.4 to 0.0 to find the best setting. If the improvement is not satisfactory, change the setting of SP1-801-010 to +0.1. Then, check the result. Under this condition, change the setting of SP1-801-005 within the range of -0.4 to 0.0 to find the best setting.
Quick Table Follow the steps described in the table and check the result at each step. If the result is acceptable, stop the procedure. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SP1-801-005 -0.2 -0.1 or -0.3 0.0 or -0.4 -0.4 to 0.0 -0.4 to 0.0 SP1-801-010 0 -0.1 +0.1 -
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 027 Page 4 of 5 Step [2]: Jitter at 355mm and/or 365mm from the leading edge 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Fusing Unit from the copier. Remove the Fusing Entrance Guide [A]. (2 screws) Install the new Fusing Entrance Guide (P/N: A2574137) [B] at the lowest position and secure it by using the screw holes [C] located 10 mm below the original screw holes. (2 screws) Stick an Explanation Decal (P/N A2574245) on the paper transport tank as shown on the next page. Reinstall the fusing unit. Change the fusing entrance lever position [D] depending on the paper thickness: Inward position (in the direction of dotted arrow): for extra thick paper Outward position: for normal and thick paper
[C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
Continued
Decal Positioning
Fusing Entrance Lever
Transport Tank
Explanation Decal P/N A2574245
Extra Thick Paper
2 +/- 1 mm Normal & Thick Paper
2 +/- 1 mm
ALLOCATION:
Each authorized servicing location will receive an automatic allocation for a percentage of the affected population. The contents of each Kit are available as individual service parts for procurement through normal ordering procedures. NOTE: 1. For bests results, please ensure that the new style spring (P/N AA060836) has been installed as instructed in TSB A257/A269 005. 1. Please ensure that the latest Firmware has been installed and replace the Image Transfer Belt if it has become curled as instructed in TSB A257/A269 025. NOTE: The latest Firmware and Technical Service Bulletins can be downloaded from the Technical Services FTP site at http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 027 REISSUE ! 07/21/2000 07/21/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
Occurrences of jitter on extra thick paper have been reported and the causes for each type of jitter are different. This bulletin explains the causes and how to apply the corresponding solutions.
JITTER ON EXTRA THICK PAPER !

COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM/CAUSE/SOLUTION:
Action Required In production In the field The factory settings The current default settings of may not be suitable SP1-801-005 and 010 were for the brand of paper determined by using limited used in the field. brands of extra thick paper. If jitter occurs, these They were unsuitable for minimizing the 140 mm jitter on SP modes need to be fine-tuned. various kinds of extra thick paper. See NOTE 1 on page These SP modes will be 2. adjusted in the production process to improve this situation. SP1-801-005: Paper feed motor speed/Half speed Adjustment range: -5.0 to 5.0 Default Value: -2.0 SP1-801-010: Registration motor speed/Standard speed Adjustment range: -1.0 to 1.0 Default Value: 0.0 SP1-801-011: Registration motor speed / Half speed Adjustment range: -1.0 to 1.0 Default value: -0.4
Symptom or 76 mm from the trailing edge
Cause is adjustable to make paper buckle between the Registration and Grip Rollers. If the Grip Roller speed is faster than the Registration Roller, the amount of paper buckle increases. Since extra thick paper is very stiff, the paper buckle amount affects the paper transportation speed overcoming the Registration Roller speed. When the trailing edge of paper passes the Grip Rollers, the force pushing the paper by the Grip Rollers suddenly disappears. This may change the paper transportation speed, shocking the image transfer process and causing jitter. The distance between the Grip Roller and image transfer point is approximately 140 mm.
! Jitter 140 mm The Paper Feed Motors speed
Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONTROL NO. 029CLR
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 027 REISSUE ! Page 2 of 4 Symptom 355 mm from the leading edge Cause The shock caused when the leading edge of paper touches the Hot Roller causes the jitter image. Action In the production The Fusing Entrance Guide will be modified. The height of the central part of The Entrance Guide will be adjustable. New P/N: A2574137 Fusing Entrance Guide
In the field Users can move up the position of the central part of the Entrance Guide by shifting the lever when using extra thick paper. For the installation procedure, please refer to page 3/4. See NOTE 2 on this page. The same as 355 mm from the leading edge.
365 mm from the leading edge
The shock caused when the leading edge of paper passes the NIP band of the Fusing Rollers causes the jitter image.
The same as 355 mm from the leading edge.
NOTE 1 In the service manual (Appendix 2, SP Mode), the columns of SP1-801-005 and 010 are highlighted. This means that these SP modes should not be touched in the field. However, please adjust these settings to correct this symptom. Jitter may appear at 76 mm from the trailing edge. This is caused by shock produced when the trailing edge of paper passes the Registration Roller. This can be improved by adjusting SP1-801-010. Please make a note that the setting of SP1-801-010 should be adjusted to achieve suitable image for both 76 and 140 mm jitter images. ! Main Firmware level 1.612 (or higher) is required to access newly added SP Mode SP1-801-011. NOTE 2 The Fusing Entrance Guide can be shifted to two positions (Normal or High). The High position is only for the extra thick paper. The Normal position is for all other paper. If 80 g or 100 g paper is fed at the High position of the Entrance Guide, it may not cause any problems although the Normal position is recommended. However, the High position may cause a paper jam if thin paper or small size paper, such as a post card is fed.
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
NOTE: Before starting the following procedure, clean the Registration Rollers and Grip Rollers with a cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
! Step [1]: Jitter at 140 mm or 76 mm from the trailing edge

Please find the best combination of the SP1-801-005, 010 and 011 within the following range. SP1-801-005 (Paper feed motor speed / Half speed): -5.0 to 5.0 SP1-801-010 (Registration motor speed / Standard speed): -1.0 to 1.0 ! SP1-801-011 (Registration motor speed / Half speed): -1.0 to 1.0
Continued
! Page 3 of 4
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 027 REISSUE !
Step [2]: Jitter at 355mm and/or 365mm from the leading edge 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Fusing Unit from the copier. Remove the Fusing Entrance Guide [A]. (2 screws) Install the new Fusing Entrance Guide (P/N: A2574137) [B] at the lowest position and secure it by using the screw holes [C] located 10 mm below the original screw holes. (2 screws) Stick an Explanation Decal (P/N A2574245) on the paper transport tank as shown on the next page. Reinstall the fusing unit. Change the fusing entrance lever position [D] depending on the paper thickness: Inward position (in the direction of dotted arrow): for extra thick paper Outward position: for normal and thick paper
[C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
Continued
! Page 4 of 4
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 027 REISSUE !
Decal Positioning
Fusing Entrance Lever
Transport Tank
Explanation Decal P/N A2574245
Extra Thick Paper 2 +/- 1 mm Normal & Thick Paper
2 +/- 1 mm
ALLOCATION:

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 028 02/23/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: BANDING "
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOMS:
Several different banding symptoms have been reported from the field. The following table illustrates Causes and Countermeasures for machines in the field on each type of banding symptom.
Banding Interval 53 mm
Cause
The 53 mm interval corresponds to 1 rotation of the Development Drive Timing Pulley (A2574733). When the Tightener Plate (A2574640) does not move smoothly, banding at 53-mm intervals is likely to appear. The groove for the Ering was located at the middle of the Drive Input Shaft (A2574737). Thus, the diameter of the shaft is smaller at the middle, causing a little flexibility in the shaft. The 3 mm interval corresponds to the distance between each tooth of the Idle Gears in the Revolver Unit. In addition when the Idle Gear Teeth get dirty (e.g. carriers), banding at 3-mm intervals is likely to appear.
Cut-in Production Month Grease (Barrierta) was added May, 1999 on the reverse side of the Tightener Plate. Ultra Smoothing Tape June, 1999 (A2574637) has been affixed on the reverse side of the Tightener Plate instead of adding grease. Countermeasure At Production
Field Countermeasure
Action 1. Add Barrierta Grease or affix 2 pieces of Ultra Smoothing Tape (A2574637) on the reverse side of the Tightener Plate.
3 mm
The groove for the E-ring on the Drive Input Shaft has been eliminated and a Spacer (A2574741) has been added instead of the E-ring to keep the gear in position. A2574737 ! A2574740 (E-ring) ! A2574741 The number of cogs for the Timing Pulley has been changed from 27 to 25. This modification changes the line speed of the development sleeve, improving the 3 mm banding problem. A2574733 ! A2574732
August, 1999 Refer to TSB A257/A269 018
Action 2. Change the Drive Input Shaft to A2574740 and add the Spacer (A2574741).
August, 1999 Refer to TSB A257/A269 019
Action 3. Change the Timing Pulley to A2574732.
Continued
Banding Interval
1.65 mm
Cause
A 1.65 mm interval corresponds to the distance between each tooth of the Development Output Gear (A2574736). If the bottom of the gear groove is hit by the teeth of the engaged gear, banding may appear.
Countermeasure At Production
The Development Output Gear had been changed from a molded type to a cutting type to keep the bottom of the gear groove from touching the teeth of the engaged gear. (No part number change) The gear has been changed from the cutting type to the molded type after correcting the mold. A2574736 ! A2574739 The functions of these two gears are the same. A special jig has been used for coupling the two gears to ensure that the ball bearings of each gear are facing each other in parallel. Note: There is no part number for the coupled gear. The two gears will be changed from the coupled type to one molded part to eliminate the usage of a special coupling jig at the factory. A2573214+ A2573210 ! A2573219
Cut-in Production Month April, 1999
Field Countermeasure
Action 4. Change the Development Output Gear to A2574739.
Mid. June, 1999 Refer to TSB A257/A269 018.
Gear-26Z (A2573214) and Gear-48Z (A2573210) must be firmly coupled in parallel. If the ball bearings of each gear are not facing in parallel, this misalignment of the ball bearings of the gears might cause a slight error in the rotation of the gears.
July, 1999
Action 5. Change the coupled gear (A2573214 & A2573210) to A2573219. 4 Pieces per unit.
Mid. December, 1999
[Supplemental information for Troubleshooting] Action 1. (53 mm interval) (A) Adding Barrierta Grease to the Tightener Plate- See Illustration on page 3. Remove the Tightener Plate, add grease (Barrierta) on the reverse side of the Tightener, and put it back into its original position. Make sure that the Tightener moves smoothly.
Continued
Note: Barrierta is the recommended grease because it is resistant to toner dust. Although Barrierta was added to the Tightener Plate from the May production run at the factory, the amount of Barrierta may not have been sufficient.
Tightener Plate
Or (B) Using Ultra Smoothing Tape: Remove the Tightener Plate and clean it and the Drive Unit Bracket with a cloth moistened with alcohol. Affix 2 pieces of Ultra Smoothing Tape according to the following instructions.
Ultra Smoothing Tape
Fold the tape along the edge of the Tightener.
Align with the peaks.
Tightener Plate
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 028 Page 4 of 6 NOTE: When using the ultra smoothing tape, remove the spacer (0.1 mm) between the Tightener and the Stepped Screw. (The March production does not have the Spacer.)
Action 2. (53 mm interval) [Picture from an old unit]
Spacer (Added)
E-ring (Eliminated)
Spacer
[Illustration for the new unit]
Drive Input Shaft
Action 3. (3 mm interval)
Pulley: 27 Teeth ! 25 Teeth
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 028 Page 5 of 6 Action 4. (1.65 mm interval) Development Output Gear ! A2574739
Action 5. (1.65 mm interval)
Spacer (0.4 mm)
No Spacer
A2573210 (48Z)
A2573219
A2573214 (26Z)
NOTE: When installing the new Gear (A2573219), remove the Spacer (0.4 mm) on the Gear Shaft. (The March production run does not have the Spacer.)
[REMARKS] When utilizing this method, please note the following:
The banding described in this bulletin did not occur on all the machines that were produced before the
cut-in production month.
Occurrence will depend on such factors as machine conditions, paper type, original image, etc. In addition, even if the symptom appears on copies or print outs, some customers may not issue a Claims for the symptoms described in this bulletin are primarily issued by users with controllers
installed.
claim. This of course depends on the appearance of the copy / print out in relation to the customer's expectations.
The troubleshooting described in this document is effective for mechanical banding (related to
mechanical drives) which appear as horizontal bands with a certain intervals between bands.
As a characteristic of the copy process of the A257 and A269, slight uneven image density bands in the
main scan direction might appear in uniform solid / halftone areas. The appearance will vary depending on the original image. Continued
ALLOCATION:

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 029 03/10/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: DIRTY BACKGROUND IN THICK / EXTRA THICK PAPER MODE !
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOMS:
A thin band or overall dirty background appears in Thick and Extra Thick Paper Modes. This dirty background is normally colored Black but the last copy of a multiple copy run is Magenta. Magenta is the last color in Full Color Mode. The four cases listed below occur when using A3 size paper. For other paper sizes, the distance from the leading edge varies. 1. 2. 3. 4. Dirty background at the leading edge side (up to 110 to 120 mm from the leading edge). Dirty background at the trailing edge side (up to 110 to 120 mm from the trailing edge). Dirty band at 50 to 60 mm from the leading edge. Dirty band at 110 to 120 mm from the leading edge.
CAUSES:
In OHP and Thick / Extra Thick Paper modes, the line speed of the Drum and the ITB (Image Transfer Belt) is 200 mm/sec (normal speed) while the latent image is being developed and later transferred to the ITB. An extra belt rotation is used while the speed is reduced in half for toner transfer to the paper and fusing. The Developer Brush on the Development Sleeve touches the Drum during this extra ITB rotation. A separate Development Bias is applied during this rotation to prevent the toner from being attracted to the Drum. However, if the Drum or developer has deteriorated, the default value of the Development Bias may not be enough to prevent the dirty background. The four cases listed above correspond to the following causes: 1. 2. 3. 4. The Development Bias is too low while the Belt is rotating at normal line speed. The Development Bias is too low while the Belt is rotating at half line speed. The Development Bias is too low while the Drum and Belt are being slowed down from normal to half line speed. Because the Drum and Belt are slowed down, some areas of the Drum surface receive greater LD exposure which decreases the Drum Potential in those areas. When the Drum reaches minimum speed (overshoot in slowing down), the Development Bias is too low to compensate for the low potential, causing toner to be attracted to the Drum.
Note: Slight LD exposure is constantly maintained during a copy job so that it can be increased at any time for LD writing. Continued
SOLUTIONS:
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE: To prevent a dirty background from appearing in Thick or Extra Thick Paper Mode, the copier main firmware has been upgraded to version 1.615NA (North America). Explanation: In previously released versions of main firmware, the position of revolver during the extra ITB rotation was development position (Development Sleeve was aligned with the Drum). To prevent the toner from being attracted to the Drum during this cycle, a separate development bias was applied. However, if the Drum or developer was deteriorated, the default value of this development bias was not enough to prevent the dirty background. From version 1.615, the position of revolver during the extra ITB rotation has been changed to the "revolver home position" (see service manual page 2-64). In the revolver home position, the Development Sleeve is 30 degrees before the development position. This prevents the dirty background. The firmware revision 1.615NA (file name A2571615.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Please read the provided (A2571615.txt) file before downloading it to the copier. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE: The Main Firmware will be modified so that the Revolver Unit stays at its home position during the extra ITB rotation. During this time, the Developer Brush will not touch the Drum.
UNITS AFFECTED:
A257 and 269 Serial Number cut-in not available at time of publication.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 030 03/27/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES !
DEVELOPMENT SEALS The following parts are being made available. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
PART NUMBER A2573140 A2573141 A2573142 A2573143
DESCRIPTION Development Roller Seal Front Up Development Roller Seal Front Down Development Roller Seal Rear Up Development Roller Seal Rear Down
QTY 1 1 1 1
INT -
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 51 25 * 51 26 * 51 27 * 51 28 *
Continued
UPDATE 2:
PRESSURE SPRING In order to improve the nip bandwidth adjustment, the Pressure Springs of the Fusing Unit have been modified. The modification reduces the pressure required to press the Spring to the neutral position from 150N to 140N. The following part update is being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 83 2
OLD PART NO. AA063562
NEW PART NO. AA063608
DESCRIPTION Pressure Spring
QTY 2
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Pressure Springs installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69100001 3B79120001 H1190900001 H1290900001 3B69100001 3B79120001
0 1 3/S

The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
!
SERVICE MANUAL
6-38
Updated Information (Copy Image Adjustment)
CONTROL NO. 017CLR
Rev. 03/2000
6. Change the values in accordance with the following tables.
Condition The yellow line is to the left of the black line, and the cyan line is to the right of the black line. The cyan line is to the left of the black line, and the yellow line is to the right of the black line.
Sub condition The edges of the yellow and cyan lines deviate evenly from the black line. The cyan line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. The yellow line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. The edges of the yellow and cyan lines deviate evenly from the black line. The cyan line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line. The yellow line's edge is the most distant edge from the black line.
Location of new value The new value is in the middle row, to the left of the current value's column. The new value is in the top row, to the left of the current value's column. The new value is in the bottom row, to the left of the current value's column. The new value is in the middle row, to the right of the current value's column. The new value is in the top row, to the right of the current value's column. The new value is in the bottom row, to the right of the current value's column.
Top Row Middle Row Bottom Row
18 19 29 28
27 37 38
36 46 47
45 55 56
65 64 54
74 73 63
83 82 72
92 91 81
NOTE: In the above table: The first digit represents the value of the red correction (4-932-1: R left, 4-932-2: R right) The second digit represents the value of the blue correction (4-932-3: B left, 4-932-4: B right)
A257/A269
6-38
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 032 03/29/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SYMPTOMS:
An SC450 is displayed when the Main Switch is turned ON or during a copy or print cycle. Only the magenta image is transferred to the copy paper in Full Color Mode. The last color image is transferred in 2C or 3C modes.
MYLAR FOR PTB/ITB CLUTCHES !

PARTS
NOTE: Refer to Technical Service Bulletin A257/A269 009 and Technical Service Bulletin A257/A269 010 for further information on these symptoms.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
Foreign particles dropping onto the Paper Transfer Belt Shift Clutch (PTB) and Image Transfer Shift Clutch (ITB).
SOLUTION:
Two mylar covers have been added to the frame section, to shield the clutches from foreign particles.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Mylar for PTB Shift Clutch (A2576617): 1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Attach the mylar [A] to the Drive Bracket [B] so that the edges [C] of mylar and bracket are aligned as shown. NOTE: Double-sided tape is attached to area [D] of the mylar.
[A] [B] [D] [C]
ENLARGED VIEW
Continued
Mylar for ITB Cleaning Shift Clutch (A2574742): 1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Attach the mylar [E] to the Drive Unit bracket [F]. NOTE: Double-sided tape is attached to area [G] of the mylar.
[F] [E]
[E]
[G]
NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION A2574742 Mylar ITB Cleaning Shift Clutch A2576617 Mylar PTB Shift Clutch DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER *
QTY 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 99 32* 101 30*
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new mylars installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69070001 3B79070001 H1190700001 H1290700001 3B69070001 3B79070001

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
!
SERVICE MANUAL
TOC vi 4-10 and 11 B-28
Updated Information (Table of Contents) Updated Information (SP5-114-000) Updated Information (Appendix B)
CONTROL NO. 020CLR
Rev. 04/2000
3.7 LCT ADAPTER (A840) ........................................................................... 3-30 3.7.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 3-30 3.8 FILM PROJECTOR TABLE (A702-19) ................................................... 3-36 3.8.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 3-36 3.9 FILM PROJECTOR UNIT(A846) ............................................................ 3-38 3.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-38 3.9.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 3-39 3.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER .................................................................... 3-46 3.11 USER CODE SETTING ........................................................................ 3-47
SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 4-1
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES ........................................................ 4-1 4.1.1 HOW TO ENTER AN SP MODE...................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 SP MODE TYPES............................................................................ 4-3 4.1.3 SP MODE CHART ........................................................................... 4-3 4.1.4 SP4-301 APS OPERATION CHECK DETAILS ............................... 4-3 4.1.5 TEST PATTERN .............................................................................. 4-5 4.1.6 SP5-803 INPUT CHECK.................................................................. 4-6 4.1.7 SP5-804 OUTPUT CHECK.............................................................. 4-9 4.1.8 SP5-114-000 ACCOUNT COLOR MODE SETUP......................... 4-10 4.1.9 SP5-955 PRINTER INTERNAL PATTERN .................................... 4-11 4.2 USER TOOLS......................................................................................... 4-11 4.2.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS ................................................... 4-11 4.2.2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF USER TOOLS .............................. 4-12 4.3 TP/SW/LED/FUSE .................................................................................. 4-12 4.3.1 MAIN CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS .......................................... 4-12 4.3.2 LD MAIN CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS..................................... 4-13 4.3.3 I/O CONTROL BOARD TEST PINS .............................................. 4-13 4.3.4 FUSE SPECIFICATIONS............................................................... 4-19 4.3.5 LED/SW SPECIFICATIONS OF SCANNER IPU BOARD ............. 4-20 LED Specifications ............................................................................. 4-20 SW Specifications .............................................................................. 4-20 4.4 ROM HISTORY ....................................................................................... 4-21
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 5-1
5.1 PM PROCEDURES .................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 PM-RELATED COUNTERS............................................................. 5-1 SP7-803 (PM Counter Display) ............................................................ 5-1 5.1.2 REGULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW DIAGRAM ........ 5-4 5.2 REGULAR PM ITEMS .............................................................................. 5-7 5.2.1 REGULAR PM TABLE ..................................................................... 5-7 Peripherals ......................................................................................... 5-11
A257/A269
vi
SM
Rev. 04/2000
To activate the revolver motor 45 or 90 degrees, No. 26 Revolver motor current (rotation) needs to be ON. OPTIONS (FPU, SORTER, ADF)
No. 107 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 Electrical Component FPU: Lamp Sorter: Transport motor (Proof mode) Sorter: Transport motor (Sort mode) Sorter: Exit motor Sorter: Turn gate solenoid Sorter: Bin Motor Sorter: Bin rear plate motor Sorter: Grip motor Sorter: Grip shift motor Sorter: Staple unit motor Sorter: Stapler motor No. 130 131 133 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 Electrical Component Sorter: Reverse solenoid Sorter: Jogger Motor Same as 131 ADF: Feed-in motor (forward) ADF: Feed-in motor (reverse) ADF: Belt drive motor (forward) ADF: Belt drive motor (reverse) ADF: Feed-out motor ADF: Inverter solenoid ADF: Indicators ON
4.1.8 SP5-114-000 ACCOUNT COLOR MODE SETUP

When the key counter has been installed or the user code mode has been enabled, it is possible to select color mode(s) which are only accessible by using the key counter or user code. The default for this SP is 15. This means that the key counter or user code is always required when making copies.
Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Black/White Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Single Color Twin Color Full Color
Counter:
A key counter or user code is required to make copies. The number is then counted up by the key counter or the user code counter.
No Mark: Copies can be made without a key counter or user code. NOTE: 1. Before setting SP5-114-000, SP5-113-000 (Key Counter (User Code)/Key Card/Coin Lock must be selected. For example, set to 2 (= Key Counter(User Code)) when you use Key Counter. 2. When SP5-104-000 (A3/DLT Double Count) is set to 1 (Double Count), the electrical counters of the operation panel, the mechanical counters and also a key counter count up double for A3/DLT (Ver 1.612 Firmware or greater).
A257/A269 4-10 SM
Rev. 04/2000
USER TOOLS
4.1.9 SP5-955 PRINTER INTERNAL PATTERN

5-955-018: Internal Pattern Types
The default values and printer internal patterns, which are generated in the LD control board, are listed below.
0: No pattern 1: Print margin pattern 2: Print out all fonts 3: 1 dot/line grid pattern 4: Belt pattern 5: 16-gradation with blank 6: Solid 7: 1 dot pattern (2x2) 8: 1 dot pattern (4x4) 9: 1 dot sub scan line 10: 2 dot sub scan line 11: 1 dot main scan line 12: 2 dot main scan line 13: Color patch 14: Grid scanner image 18: 2 beams pitch pattern 19: 2 beams density pattern
5-955-002 to 5-955-016 LD_PWM (16 gradations): Specifies the LD output level (determines the output levels (gradations) of 16 grayscales in SP5-955-5, -16, and -17). 002: 1/15: 2nd level setting 016: 15/15: 16th level setting 5-955-17 LD_PWM (trailing edge color patch half tone): Specifies the LD output level (determines the half-tone gradations of the trailing edge color patch in SP5-955-13).
4.2 USER TOOLS

4.2.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS
Press the User Tools key to enter user tools mode
SM
4-11
A257/A269
Service Tables
5-955-001 LOAD_PWM (dot, line): Specifies the LD output level (determines the test pattern gradations for SP5-955-1 through -4, -6 through -14, and -18 through -19).
SP Mode No. 5-113-000
Item Key counter (User code) / Key card / Coin Lock Set
Default Value 0
Value Range 0 to 3
Step 1
SP7
Description Specifies whether the key counter, key card, or coin lock is installed or not. 0 = None (default) 1 = Key card (used in Japan market only) 2 = Key counter (User code) 3 = Coin lock (used in Japan market only)
Remarks
Description displayed on the screen Key card / coin lock
5-114-000
Key card mode
15
1 to 15
Select the mode for the key card. See SM Section 4.1.8 for a complete description of SP5-114-000.
ColorModeSelection: KeyCard
5-120-000
Key counter (User code): Mode clear ON/OFF
0 or 1
Specified whether the current mode is cleared or not when the key counter is removed. 0 = Mode not cleared 1 = Mode cleared
Clear Md on/off: Key Counter
5-121-000
Key card count timing setup
0 or 1
Selects the update timing for the key card. 0 = Paper feed-in 1 = Paper feed-out
Cntr Up Timing: Key Card
5-126-000
F size original setting
0 to 2
Specifies which original size the machine selects when the APS sensors detect F size. 0 = F4 (8 1/2" x 13") 1 = F (8" x 13") 2 = Folio (8 1/4" x 13")
F*size Paper 0*F4, 1:F, 2:Folio
5-127: Coin lock: Mode On/OFF 5-127-001 APS
0 or 1
Specifies whether APS is ON or not when the machine is equipped with Used in Japan market only a coin lock. 0 = ON 1 = OFF
Coin Lock Prohibition APS function
5-127-002
ACS
0 or 1
Specifies whether ACS is ON or not when the machine is equipped with Used in Japan market only a coin lock. 0 = ON 1 = OFF
ACS function
5-128-000
User code + Coin lock
0 or 1
Selects whether both User Code and Coin Lock can be used. 0 = one of them 1 = both
User Code + Coin Lock
5-410-000
Reset password
Resets the key operator access code to 000000. Press the ON key to clear.
User Code Password Clear
SM
B-28
A257/A269

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 034 04/03/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SC452 / SC326 / IMAGE SHIFT !
SYMPTOMS:
SC452 SC326 Image shift Belt mark detection error FGATE1 error Colors are not properly aligned on an output.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The Belt Mark Sensor located in the Image Transfer Belt Unit becomes dirty with toner dust and the belt mark cannot be detected properly. This leads to the Image Shift problem, SC452, or SC326.
!
PARTS
SOLUTIONS:
[In production] The Belt Mark Sensor [A] has been moved from the front [B] to the rear [C] as shown. This was done because less toner dust flows into the rear side. A Positioning Sensor Holder Ass'y (P/N A2576119) has been added to fasten the Sensor in the new position. Please refer to the UNITS AFFECTED section for the cut-in serial numbers. After this modification, Belt Mark Sensor Mylar (P/N A2576137) has been eliminated [A] [B] [C] [A]
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 034 Page 2 of 4 [In the field] When this symptom occurs in the field, please move the Sensor from the front to the rear of the unit. The procedure is outlined below: - Procedure 1. 2. 3. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit from the machine. Remove the Transfer Belt from the unit. Place the Transfer Belt Unit onto a clean sheet of paper. This is to prevent the Drive Rollers from getting dirty with dust or other particles. Remove the Belt Mark Sensor [A] (1 screw and 1 connector [B]) and attach it to the Sensor Bracket [C]. Remove the Screw [D] securing the Belt Motor Bracket [E]. Install the Sensor Bracket by placing the projection [F] in the bracket hole [G]. Then, secure the Sensor Bracket together with the Motor Bracket.
[A]
[J]
4.
[B]
5. 6.
[K] [A] [C]
NOTE: The L-shaped section [H] of the Bracket should be positioned in the cutout [I] as shown. Make sure that the Sensor Harness does not get caught on the Lshaped section. 7. 8. Reroute the Sensor Harness [J] as shown. Reassemble the Transfer Unit.
[I] [H] [E] [F]
[G] REMARKS:
[D]
When installing the Image Transfer Belt on the Unit, be careful that the Belt is not caught on or damaged by the Bracket [K] where the Fiber Brush is attached.
Continued
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
Call outs #11 and #40 have been moved to rear side.
Newly added part (A2576119).
This part (A2576135) has been eliminated.
Illustration on page 64 of the Parts Catalog
This Mylar (A2576137) has been eliminated.
Continued
OLD PART NO. A2576135 A2576137
NEW PART NO. A2576119 -
DESCRIPTION Positioning Sensor Holder Assy Belt Mark Sensor Mylar
QTY 1 10
INT 1 -
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Positioning Sensor Holder Assembly installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60020001 3B70020001 H1100200001 H1200200001 3B60020001 3B70020001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 035 04/03/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: WINDING JAM AT FUSING ROLLER !
SYMPTOM:
Winding jam at the Fusing Roller.
MECHANICAL
CAUSES:
1. In the Fusing Unit: If the paper is not stiff enough and back-curled, it does not pass smoothly through the area at the Exhaust Sensor Feeler of the Lower Exit Guide Plate. 2. In the Exit Unit: If the paper is not stiff enough and face-curled, it is fed above the nip of the Exit Rollers.
!
PARTS
SOLUTIONS:
[In production] 1. In the Fusing Unit, a Mylar Strip has been attached to the Lower Exit Guide Plate. 2. In the Exit Unit, 2 Mylars have been attached to the Exit Guide Plate. [In the field] Installation Procedure: The Mylar for the Lower Exit Guide Plate in the Fusing Unit (P/N A2574247): 1. Pull out the Fusing/Transfer Drawer. 2. Remove the Fusing Exit Assembly from the Fusing Unit (1 clip). 3. Remove the Lower Exit Guide Plate [A] (3 screws). (See illustration below and page 2.)
[A]
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 035 Page 2 of 3 4. Clean the center of the Guide Plate with alcohol where the Mylar is attached. 5. Attach the Mylar [B] firmly to the Plate as shown in the illustration to the right. 6. Confirm that the Exhaust Sensor Feeler [C] moves smoothly by the tension of the Spring.
Note: This Mylar is similar to the Mylar for the Exit Guide Plate of the Paper Exit Section, but is shorter.
Installation Procedure:
The Mylars for the Exit Guide Plate of the Paper Exit Section (P/N A2574462): 1. Remove the Left Cover. 2. Pull out the Fusing/Transfer Drawer. 3. Remove the Exit Guide Plate Assembly [A] from the Main Unit (2 screws [102]). (see Item #86 of p.13 in the parts catalog.) 4. Clean the areas with alcohol where the Mylars are attached. 5. Attach 2 Mylars [B] firmly to the Plate as shown below. [A]
Continued
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information. Illustration on Page 82 of the Parts Catalog
Illustration on page 86 of the Parts Catalog
PART NUMBER A2574247 A2574462
DESCRIPTION Mylar - Lower Exit Guide Plate Mylar Exit Guide Plate
QTY 1 2
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 83 31 * 87 24 *
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Mylar Lower Exit Guide and Mylar Exit Guide Plate installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60020001 3B70020001 H1100200001 H1200200001 3B60020001 3B70020001

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 036 04/03/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210e RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES !
FUSING CLEANING ROLLER The Fusing Cleaning Roller has been modified to prevent the shaft of the Roller from loosening or coming off when a heavy load is applied. The following part update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
OLD PART NO. AE042034
NEW PART NO. AE042044
DESCRIPTION Fusing Cleaning Roller
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Fusing Cleaning Roller installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69120001 3B79120001 H1191200001 H1200200001 3B69120001 3B79120001 Continued
UPDATE 2:
LOWER FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE The Lower Fusing Entrance Guide Plate has been modified to prevent jitter at 355mm and 365mm from the leading edge in thick or extra thick paper mode. Along with this modification, a Decal (Fusing Entrance Guide) has been added onto the Transport Tank. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
NEW PART NO. A2574245 A2574137
DESCRIPTION Decal Fusing Entrance Guide Lower Entrance Guide Plate
QTY 1 1
INT 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 73 26 * 81 9
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Lower Entrance Guide Plate and Decal Fusing Entrance Guide installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60020001 3B70020001 H1100200001 H1200200001 3B60020001 3B70020001
Continued
UPDATE 3:
HOT ROLLER & PRESSURE ROLLER To improve reliability, the Hot Roller and the Pressure Roller have been modified. The modification prevents the paper wrinkling symptom caused by shrinkage of the rubber on the roller. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
OLD PART NO. AE010022 AE020083
NEW PART NO. AE010027 AE020097
DESCRIPTION Hot Roller Pressure Roller
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Hot Roller and Pressure Roller installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60020001 3B70020001 H1100200001 Hot Roller H1100200112 Pressure Roller H1200200001 3B60020001 3B70020001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 037 04/20/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICI6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
!
SERVICE MANUAL
6-52
Updated Information
CONTROL NO. 018ALL
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
A269R310.WMF
Rev. 04/2000
3. Hold the development unit inside a collection bag, rotate the unit until the opening faces downward, and shake the unit slightly to dump the developer. 4. When the agitator section gets almost empty, orient the development sleeve face up and rotate the sleeve in the reverse direction. 5. When no more developer falls down, rotate the sleeve in the forward direction several turns while maintaining the sleeves orientation. 6. Tilt the developer assembly so that its bottom faces upward to dump the remaining developer out of the agitator section. 7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until no more developer is collected. (A small amount of developer will remain in the development unitabout 10 grams. This is all right.)
NOTE: Please make note of the following during developer replacement in order to prevent over-toning, which may cause SC452 (Belt mark detection error) or SC385 (ID sensor VSG adjustment error).
REMARKS TECHNICAL BACKGROUND If toner recovery is performed before TD sensor initialization, the toner density target will be set to a higher value. If the initial process control self-check is done before the TD sensor initialization, the toner density may change. The toner density target will be set to an improper value. If the TD sensor initialization is performed for the developer that was already in the machine (i.e. not replaced), the toner density target will be set to the actual toner density of that developer.
If the machine is in the Toner Near End or Toner End condition when replacing developer, please replenish toner first to clear the condition. The front doors should be left open when the main switch is turned on following developer replacement. After the power is on, close the doors and perform the TD sensor initialization (SP3-5-00X). TD sensor initialization should only be done for the color(s) of developer replaced. SP3-5-001: SP3-5-002: SP3-5-003: SP3-5-004: SP3-5-005: When replacing Black developer When replacing Cyan developer When replacing Magenta developer When replacing Yellow developer When replacing all developers
A257/A269
6-52
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 038 05/15/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
TIMING PULLEY HOLDER !

PARTS
GENERAL:
The Timing Pulley Holder has been modified to prevent the Timing Pulley from becoming loose, which leads to a compressed image. The modification changed the shape of the screw supporting area of the Holder. The following part update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
DESCRIPTION Timing Pulley Holder
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Timing Pulley Holder installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh 6010 Ricoh 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69090001 3B79090001 H1190900001 H1290900001 3B69090001 3B79090001
CONTROL NO. 026CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 039 05/15/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL: !
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
OPERATION PANEL COVER
REFERENCE INCORRECT PART NO. A2571461 ----OLD PART NO. --A2571490 A2591552 NEW PART NO. --A2571498 A2591551 DESCRIPTION Upper Cover Operation Panel Cover NA Touch Panel QTY 1-0 1-1 1-1 INT -3/S 3/S PAGE 17 17 17 ITEM 4 4 15

CONTROL NO. 026CLR
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Operation Panel Cover and Touch Panel installed during production MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin 410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69110001 3B79120001 H1191000066 H1200200001 3B69110001 3B79120001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 040 08/14/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: LINES ACROSS THE MAIN SCAN DIRECTION AT INSTALLATION !
COPY QUALITY Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.
SYMPTOM:
Sharp lines are visible across the main scan direction at installation. The lines appear at approximately 283mm interval.
CAUSE:
Memory of the contact pressure of the Cleaning Blade on the OPC Drum surface. This may happen when the machine is kept in the warehouse for a relatively long time.
SOLUTION:
Make copies until the lines disappear. It is not necessary to replace the OPC Drum.
CONTROL NO. 030CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 041 08/14/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: MIS-ALIGNMENT AND COMPRESSED IMAGE IN THE AREA OF THE LEADING EDGE
!
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
In Full Color Mode (copier), black images are mis-aligned and compressed in the area of the leading edge. Images toward the trailing edge show improved alignment. With the printer function, yellow images exhibit the same symptom because this is the first color to be used for development in printer mode.
CAUSE:
The screw that fastens the Timing Pulley Holder (A2574663) to the Drum Shaft was loose, causing the initial rotation of the Drum to be slow. This occurs with both copy and print jobs. FIELD COUNTERMEASURE: Remove the large and small flywheels, the flywheel supporter and the TIMING PULLEY 112Z. Pull the drum shaft toward you while pushing the Timing Pulley Holder against the ball bearing of the Drum Shaft Supporter. Then fully tighten the screw for the Timing Pulley Holder.
Timing Pulley Holder Screw that Fastens the Timing Pulley Holder
!
COPY QUALITY
Drum Drive Belt
NOTE: The tension of the Drum Drive Belt can Tightener be adjusted with the tightener spring. Bracket Loosen the screw for the tightener bracket so that the spring can apply the Timing Pulley 112Z proper tension to the belt. Then retighten the screw. When assembling Flywheel the flywheel supporter, make sure to Supporter tighten the screws firmly in the 0 shape holds. This will prevent horizontal, black or magenta lines at 106 mm from the leading edge. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin A257/A269 008 Dated 11/19/99 for more details. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin A257/A269 020 Dated 01/24/2000 for more details. PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE: The Timing Pulley Holder has been modified in order to minimize the image misalignment. This change was applied to the production line from September 1999. In addition, the part number has been changed from A2574663 to A2574680. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin A257/A269 038 Dated 05/15/2000 for more details. 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 030CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 042 08/14/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:
Thin white lines in the sub scan direction due to the fine scratches on the drum, even after upgrading the main firmware to Version 1.542 or newer.
THIN WHITE LINES DUE TO SCRATCHES ON THE DRUM !
COPY QUALITY
CAUSE:
The image Transfer Belt surface may scratch the OPC Drum surface when the speed of the Image Transfer Belt and the OPC Drum do not match completely. The main firmware has been updated to version 1.542 to precisely match the speed of the Drum and the Image Transfer Belt when they are about to stop. However, discrepancy of the speed may also exist when the machine operation speed is lowered to half in OHP or Thick Paper Mode or when it is returned to normal speed. Therefore, if customers application is mainly thick paper or OHP, drum scratch may appear even with the main firmware version 1.542 or newer.
!
FIRMWARE
SOLUTION:
Replace the Motor Control Board RPS with the new type part number A2575503. The new board controls the speed of the Image Transfer Belt to match with the OPC Drum when the machine operation speed is shifted in the thick paper or OHP mode. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin A257/A269 019 Dated 01/17/2000 for more details.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Motor Control Board - RPS installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69100001 3B7910xxxx H1191000001 H12910xxxxx 3B69100001 3B7910xxxx
CONTROL NO. 030CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 043 08/14/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
INFORMATION OF THE NEW FIRMWARE: The latest versions for the main control and scanner IPU firmware are as follows: Main Control: Ver. 1.616 Scanner IPU: Ver. 1.24 For detailed information, please refer to the ReadMe File included with the Firmware download file. IMPORTANT NOTES AT INSTALLATION OF E-800A: Approved Firmware for the A257/A269 connected to the Fiery E-800A To enable the printer and scanner function using the controller E-800A, it is necessary to use the following version of A257/A269 firmware. Main Control: Ver. 1.616 or newer Scanner IPU: Ver. 1.24 or newer If the version is older, please make sure to update the firmware. Notes about SP Mode No. 6-910 (Printer/Scanner Key Setting) When the SP6-910 (Printer/Scanner Key Setting) feature is enabled (set to 1), the copier and E-800A may hang up after scanning. SP6-910 is useful only for the internal controller products such as E-650. When installing the E-800A, make sure that the SP6-910 is disabled (set to 0). (The default factory setting is 0) Printer ACC and Autocal When installing the E-800A, make sure to perform the Printer ACC at the copier, then the Autocal at the controller. DOWNLOAD INFORMATION: The Main Control and Scanner software (file name A2571616.EXEMain Control) / (file name A257124.EXEScanner) can be downloaded through the Technology Solution Center FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.
FIRMWARE & E-800A RELATED INFORMATION
!
FIRMWARE
CONTROL NO. 030CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 044 08/22/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Fusing Unit Bearing and Gears The Bearings and Gears listed below have been changed to a new type that uses grease which has no odor. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
OLD PART NO. AE030015 AE030019 A2574109 A2574227
NEW PART NO. AE030039 AE030040 A2574237 A2574238
DESCRIPTION Ball Bearing: 35x47x7 Ball Bearing: 20x32x7 Gear - 62z Hot Roller Gear - 60z
QTY 2 2 1 1
INT 1 1 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 81 5 83 19 81 8 81 6
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Ball Bearings and Gears installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60050001 3B70050001 H1100500001 H1200500001 3B60050001 3B70050001

CONTROL NO. 031CLR
UPDATE 2:
Paper End Sensor Assy To improve the reliability, the Paper End Sensor Assy for the By-Pass Table has been changed. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
OLD PART NO. AW010050
NEW PART NO. AW010083
DESCRIPTION Paper End Sensor Assy
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Paper End Sensor Assy installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69100001 3B79120001 H1190900001 H1290900001 3B69100001 3B79120001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 045 08/29/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E ! SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The following information is the User Code Programming Instructions: 1. Press the User Tool key on the Operation Panel. 2. Select Copier Features. 3. Press Next until Key Operator Tools is displayed and selected. 4. At the top of the screen, select the Accessible Modes Setting for Full Color, Black and White, Single Color and Twin Color. NOTE: If the Accessible Modes are not darkened or highlighted, User Code Mode will not be enabled. 5. Select Program and create a User Code, then press the # key. 6. Select the Accessible Modes for the User Code then press OK. 7. Select OK, Cancel or Next User Code, then OK to exit User Tools.
USER CODE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
GENERAL INFORMATION
If a Key Operator Code is needed (required for security) perform the following: 1. Press the User Tool key on the Operation Panel. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Press Next until Key Operator Tools is displayed and selected. 4. Select ON and register a Key Operator Access Code, then press # and OK. If ON is not available, a Key Operator Code has already been registered, enter the Key Operator Access Code, press Confirm then OK. NOTE: If the Key Operator Access Code is unknown, it can be reset with SP 5-410-000.
CONTROL NO. 032CLR

The Fusing Unit for the A257/A269 has been registered as a service part. The following part update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information.
FUSING UNIT !
PARTS
PART NUMBER A2574017 A2574027
DESCRIPTION Fusing Unit NA (120V) Fusing Unit EU (230V)
QTY 1 1
CONTROL NO. 032CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 047 09/11/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Duplex Guide Plate To improve the reliability for paper jams at the Mylar Seal in the Duplex Tray, the following three parts have been changed. This is to change the shape of Duplex Driven Roller and Duplex Guide Plate and the length of Mylar Seal. Please update your parts catalogs with the following information.
OLD PART NO. A2574954 A1544625 AF031039
NEW PART NO. A2574960 A2574959 AF031044
DESCRIPTION Duplex Guide Plate Mylar Seal Driven Roller Duplex Tray
QTY 1 2 2
INT 1 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 93 25 93 50 93 51
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Duplex Guide Plate, Mylar and Driven Roller installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60030001 3B70030001 H1100300001 H1200400001 3B60030001 3B70030001 Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 033CLR
UPDATE 2:
Transport Belt The vendor for the Transport Belt has been changed. Please update your parts catalogs with the following information.
DESCRIPTION Transport Belt
QTY 2
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Transport Belt installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60030001 3B70030001 H1100300001 H1200300001 3B60030001 3B70030001
Continued
UPDATE 3:
Development Unit Gears Please make the following updates to the Development Unit Gears in your parts catalogs. Also, correct the illustration on page 50 as indicated in the drawing below. Please update your parts catalogs with the following information.
PART NUMBER A2573158 A2573124 A2573123 A2573112
DESCRIPTION Idle Gear-26Z Gear-21Z Gear Idle Gear
QTY 21 21 12 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 50 13 50 15 50 23 50 29 *
* Denotes new item number. NOTE: When installing the Idle Gear (P/N A2573112), verify that the ball bearing in the Gear faces toward the Development Unit.
0 1 3/S

The Development Unit changed from Part Number A2573055 to A2579710. The new Development Unit with the modified Doctor Gap (DG) narrowed from 0.8-0.9mm to 0.75-0.83mm. The Photoconductor Gap (PG) also narrowed from 0.55-0.7mm to 0.5-0.6mm. The mainframe PG modification was applied to minimize the grainy/sandy level of highlight tone areas in both copies and printouts. The Development Unit DG modification was applied to prevent compressed toner bands on the Development Roller and OPC Drum, which would tend to occur on the modified mainframes. The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs.
DEVELOPMENT UNIT REPLACEMENT
MECHANICAL
!
PARTS
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A2573055 A2579710 -----------A2573224 A2573152 A2573153 A2573040 A2573041 ! DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION Development Unit PG Seal (Qty 1 per P/N) TD Sensor Harness Clamp Pull Out Upper Unit
QTY 1 I 1 1
INT 3 1 3
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 51 * 61 21! 51 24 59 27
!
COPY QUALITY
NOTE: Interchangeability of Development Units: The interchangeability of Development Unit itself is "3". However, by affixing PG Seal (A2573224) on the Development Unit Supporter and adjusting Vref at the same time, the interchangeability will be "1". This procedure is on the following pages of this bulletin. NOTE: Interchangeability of Pull Out Upper Unit: Interchangeability of Puff Out Upper Unit itself is "3". However, by replacing the four Pull Out Upper Development Units as a set, the interchangeability will be "1" In this case, no PG Seals are required.
0 1 3/S

CONTROL CO. 037CLR
Please add the PG Seals (A2573224) Index number "21" to the Illustration on page 60 of your Parts Catalog. FIELD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE: The purpose of the following two procedures is to make the modified Development Units compatible with the unmodified copiers in the field (which does not contain a narrowed PC). It is not to minimize the grainy/sandy level in highlight tone areas. This can only be done through precise PG measuring and adjustment procedures performed at the factory, Combination and procedure to be performed: . Affixinq the PG Seal Case 1: Necessary Only for the Development Units Installing New Development that have been replaced Unit To Old Mainframe. Case 2: NOT Necessary Installing New Development Unit To New Mainframe. Affixing the PG Seals: 1. Pull out the Revolver/Drum Drawer [A] and open the Development Unit Lock [B] at both ends of the revolver. 2. Remove the old Development Unit. 3. Clean the surface of the Development Unit if necessary. 4. Using a small screwdriver, attach one (1) PG Seal (A2573224), to the front and Rear Development Unit Supporters [D]. As shown in the illustration. 5. Using one of the front door hinge pins [E], smooth out the seal so that there are no air bubbles. NOTES: 1. Be sure to affix the seals in the center of the Development Unit Supporter as shown. 2. Do not affix more than one seal to each supporter. If two or more seals are attached, the PG will be too narrow. This will cause compressed toner bands on the development roller and OPC drum, leading to drum damage.
Vref Adjustment Necessary Only for the Development Units that have been replaced NOT Necessary
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 048 Page 3 of 3 Vref Adjustment: Change the following SP settings only for the Development Units that have been replaced: SP3-947-001 (Lower limit of the shift range of Vref: K): from 1.0 to 1.3 SP3-947-002 (Lower limit of the shift range of Vref: Y): from 1.0 to 1.3 SP3-947-003 (Lower limit of the shift range of Vref: C): from 1.0 to 1.3 SP3-947-004 (Lower limit of the shift range of Vref: M): from 1.0 to 1.3 The reasons for these setting changes are as follows: The new Development Unit has a narrower doctor gap (DG) than that of the old unit. The Narrower DG reduces development capability which results in a low density Vsp Pattern. The low density Vsp Pattern will eventually lead to an oversupply of Toner which will cause toner scatter. Increasing the lower limits of the Vref shift ranges from 1.0 to 1.3 will prevent this. An increased Vref will mean a narrower control range for the toner concentration in the developer. Please refer to page 2-14 of the Service Manual for detail regarding Vref.
Serial Number Notes:

Development Unit replacement in machines produced after the cut-in serial numbers: For these machines, it is not necessary to attach PG Seals. The PG is already adjusted at the factory so that it compatible with the new Development Unit. Depending on the amount of adjustment necessary to the Development Units, the PG Seals may or may not be present on the Development Unit Supporters. For these machines, never peel off or add the PG seals. This will cause the PG to be too wide or too narrow in relation to the DG, leading to grainy images, compressed toner bands, damage to the drum or Development Unit. How to distinguish between the new and old Development Units To easily distinguish the Development Units, the new unit (A2573056) has one of the following characteristics. However, these changes are not implemented from the first new development units. Please refer to the part number or the machine serial number to be exact. 1. The bar-code label [A] is highlighted in magenta. 2. The color of the harness hook [B] is gray The harness hook in the old Development Unit is black.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 and A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new Development Units installed during Production. MODEL NAME Gestetner SDC410 Gestetner SDC410E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin CS210 Savin CS210E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60020001 3B70020001 H1100200001 H1200200001 3B60020001 3B70020001

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 049 11/20/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Operation Panel Stay In order to use the Operation Panel in both the A257/A269 and its successor, the shape of the Stay has been changed but the interchangeability for the new style Operation Panel Stay is 0. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information.
DESCRIPTION Operation Panel Stay
QTY 1
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Operation Panel Stay installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60060001 3B70060001 H1100600001 H1200600001 3B60060001 3B70060001 Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 039CLR
UPDATE 2:
Development Idle Gear & Development Bearing Seal To prevent the Development Idle Gear from wearing out prematurely, the material of the Gear has been changed from plastic to metal. A Development Bearing Seal has been added to prevent developer leakage. Add the Spacer that was omitted from the parts list. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information.
29
NEW PART NO. A2573158 A2573079 AA132174 * Denotes new item number.
DESCRIPTION Idle Gear 26Z Development Bearing Seal Spacer
QTY 1 1 2
INT 1 -
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 51 13 51 30 * 51 31 *
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Idle Gear 26Z and Development Bearing Seal installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60060001 3B70060001 H1100600001 H1200600001 3B60060001 3B70060001
Continued
UPDATE 3:
Development Unit & Gears To minimize hue changes, three gears have been modified. The Gears are now shaped with more precision. Also, the part number for the Development Unit has changed. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information.
29
OLD PART NO. A2573056 A2573111 A2573114 A2573157
NEW PART NO. A2579710 A2573115 A2573123 A2573124
DESCRIPTION Development Unit Development Gear Gear Gear 21Z
QTY 4 1 2 1
INT 1 1 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 51 51 12 51 23 51 15
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Gears installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B6007xxxx 3B70060001 H11007xxxxx H1200600001 3B6007xxxx 3B70060001
Continued
UPDATE 4:
Fusing Entrance Guide As a countermeasure for preventing cracked or broken Fusing Entrance Guides, the Fusing Entrance Guide has been changed. There were previously two openings (gates) on the plastic mold to inject plastic material. To prevent creating a mold line, only one gate is now used. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information.
DESCRIPTION Fusing Entrance Guide
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Fusing Entrance Guide installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60060001 3B70060001 H1100600001 H1200600001 3B60060001 3B70060001
Continued
UPDATE 5:
Oil Pan Interlock Switch An Interlock Switch (Main Switch) Oil Pan has been added to prevent any oil that may drip down from the Fusing Unit from getting on to the Main Switch. The Oil Pan has been attached to the bracket located above the Main Switch. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information. Newly added Oil Pan for the Interlock Switch (Main Switch)
27
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A2571295 * Denotes new item number.
DESCRIPTION Oil Pan Interlock Switch
QTY 1
INT -
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Oil Pan Interlock Switch installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60080001 3B70070001 H1100700001 H1200700001 3B60080001 3B70070001
Continued
UPDATE 6:
Thermistors The Thermistors for the Hot Roller and Pressure Roller have been changed as a countermeasure for preventing SC54X and SC55X (Fusing Unit temperature related Service Codes) caused by the Thermistor cover peeling off. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following information. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 79 27 81 24
OLD PART NO. AW100047 AW100048
NEW PART NO. AW100062 AW100063
DESCRIPTION Fusing Thermistor Thermistor
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Thermistors installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60070001 3B70070001 H1100700001 H1200700001 3B60070001 3B70070001
0 1 3/S

EXIT ROLLER HOLDER !
GENERAL:
It was founding during testing that the Exit Rollers can sometimes cause vertical white lines to appear on some OHP sheets. To ensure proper image quality, the thickness of the plate in the Exit Roller Holder has been decreased from 0.2 mm to 0.12 mm, decreasing the Exit Roller pressure. The following part update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
DESCRIPTION Exit Roller Holder
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Exit Roller Holder installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B69070001 3B79070001 H1190700001 H1290600643 3B69070001 3B79070001
0 1 3/S
CONTROL NO. 040CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 051 11/27/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:
One or more of the colors (C, M, Y, or K) is missing on the copy image. Sometimes the copy image is totally blank.
ONE OR MORE MISSING COLORS !

COPY QUALITY
CAUSE:
Premature wearing out of the Development Idle Gear (P/N A2573155), especially in high copy volume machines. When developer carrier sticks to the Development Gears, this can accelerate the wearing process. This symptom is particularly noticeable with the Development Idle Gear.
1. The material of the Development Idle Gear has been changed from plastic to metal (old style P/N A2573155 (plastic) to new style P/N A2573158 (metal)). 2. A strip of Mylar, the Development Bearing Seal (P/N A2573079: item #30, fig.1) has been added between the Bearings and the Development Gears to protect the Gears from developer carrier.
PARTS
If this problem occurs in the field, replace the old style Development Idle Gear (P/N A2573155) with the new style (P/N A2573158). See Replacement Procedure on page 2. NOTE: 1. It is recommended to replace the "Gear 26/48Z" (P/N A2573219) when replacing the Development Idle Gear. This is because if the Development Idle Gear (P/N A2573155) has prematurely worn out, the Coupled Gear (P/N A2573219) may also be damaged. 2. For the machines in the field, it is not necessary to add the Development Bearing Seal Mylar (P/N A2573079). Replacement of the Development Idle Gear (P/N A2573155) is sufficient to ensure that the symptom will not occur.
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 51 13 51 30 * 51 31 * Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 040CLR
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A2573155 A2573158 A2573079 AA132174 * Denotes new item number.
DESCRIPTION Idle Gear 26Z Development Bearing Seal (Mylar) Spacer
QTY 1 1 2
INT 1 -
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Idle Gear 26Z and Development Bearing Seal installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60060001 3B70060001 H1100600001 H1200600001 3B60060001 3B70060001
PROCEDURE:
1. With your hand, firmly support the side of the end of the shafts (in circle [A]) which holds the Development Gear. NOTE: If the shaft slides, developer carrier can get inside the Shaft Bearing area. 2. Replace the Development Idle Gear [B] (P/N A2573155) with the new type (P/N A2573158). [B]
29
[A]
Fig-1.
Development Unit
Old: P/N A2573155 (plastic). New: P/N A2573158 (metal)
Fig-2. Continued
3. Replace the Gear 26/48Z (P/N A2573219) [C] with a new one (same P/N). [C]
0 1 3/S

OIL STREAKS ON COPIES !

COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
Oil streaks appear on copies.
CAUSE:
Fusing oil leaks from a crack in the middle of the Fusing Entrance Guide (P/N A2574135). The crack occurs at the molding line, possibly due to the repetitive heating and cooling of the Entrance Guide. The molding line is formed at the middle of the Entrance Guide, where the two flows of plastic meet inside the plastic mold during the molding process. Oil Sump
!
PARTS

CONTROL NO. 040CLR
SOLUTION:
The plastic mold used for the Fusing Entrance Guide has been improved to remove the molding line. One of the two openings (gates) in the plastic mold for injecting the plastic has been removed, creating one flow of plastic inside the mold The following illustration shows how to distinguish between the old and new style Fusing Entrance Guides: Modified Guides are marked with a "1" here.
>PET-GF 40< 1
[B]
[A]
Older (pre-modification) Guides have 2 burrs created by molding gates, which are located in positions [A] and [B]. Modified Guides only have 1 burr, which is located at position [A].
If you receive any customer complaints about oil streaks on copies, check the bottom surface of the Fusing Entrance Guide for an oil leak. If any oil is found, replace the Fusing Entrance Guide with the new style. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 81 21
DESCRIPTION Fusing Entrance Guide
QTY 1
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Fusing Entrance Guide installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60060001 3B70060001 H1100600001 H1200600001 3B60060001 3B70060001
0 1 3/S

The resistance of the Main Switch terminals are generating heat in this area. In the worst case, this heat may cause the terminals to partially melt.
MAIN SWITCH PROBLEM !

ELECTRICAL
CAUSE:
If Fusing Oil should leak from the Fusing Unit, it may run down the Harness and drip onto the Main Switch. If this happens, the resulting electrical sparks may cause some chemical compounds to form on the terminals (SiO2 or carbonized compounds). These compounds increase the resistance of the Main Switch terminals.
!
PARTS
A Main Switch Cover (Oil Pan Interlock Switch P/N A2571295) has been added.
GENERAL:
PART NUMBER A2571295
DESCRIPTION Oil Pan Interlock Switch
QTY 1
INT -

NOTE: The Oil Pan Interlock Switch described in the Parts Description field is the Main Switch Cover referred to in this bulletin.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Oil Pan Interlock Switch installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60080001 3B70070001 H1100700001 H1200700001 3B60080001 3B70070001 Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 040CLR
It is recommended to install the Main Switch Cover on all existing units. Follow the Procedure outlined below. NOTE: To prevent oil spillage, whenever transporting the machine following installation, always be sure to drain the Fusing Oil completely before moving the machine.
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the Inner Cover [A]. 2. Attach the Main Switch Cover (P/N A2571295) [B] above the Safety Switch Cover [C]. NOTE: No screws are required, simply lay it on top of the Safety Switch Cover [C].
[B] [A]
[C]
27
Fusing Unit
[B]
[C]

"Toner Cartridge set error" is displayed after a new Toner Cartridge is installed.
TONER CARTRIDGE SET ERROR
!
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The Toner Cartridge Set Sensor [A] is not activated because the Toner Cartridge Lever [B] is not rotated all the way.
[A]
[B]
Continued
CONTROL NO. 040CLR
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURES:
The following modifications have been developed to make it easier for the Toner Cartridge Lever to rotate: 1. To decrease the friction between the Toner Cartridge and the Cartridge Lever, three ribs have been added to the Toner Cartridge surface, on which the Toner Cartridge Lever normally slides. This will help to ensure proper Lever rotation, since the Lever will not directly contact the Cartridge surface.
3 ribs The cut-in lot numbers for the modified Toner Cartridges are as follows: Black: 0716401 Yellow: 0 7 1 4 6 0 1 Cyan: 0715001 Magenta: 0 9 1 5 3 0 1 NOTE: The underlined numbers indicate the day of production after the first production of the year. For example, a yellow Toner Cartridge with lot number 0 7 1 4 7 0 1 was produced after the modification was implemented, whereas 0 7 1 4 5 0 1 was produced before.
Continued
2. The shapes of the Toner Hopper Shutter and Toner Hopper Ribs have been modified. Before the modification, excessive torque was applied to the Shutter during Cartridge Lever rotation, causing the edge of the Shutter to catch on the Toner Hopper Ribs. After the modification, the Shutter does not catch on the Toner Hopper Ribs. Old type New type
Corners of the Shutter are cut
Rib size reduced and shape changed
Shutter for K: A2573340 (old) A2573370 (new) Shutter for Y: A2573341 (old) A2573371 (new) Shutter for C: A2573342 (old) A2573372 (new) Shutter for M: A2573343 (old) A2573373 (new) Toner Hopper Assy for K: A2573303 (old) A2573362 (new) Toner Hopper Assy for Y: A2573304 (old) A2573363 (new) Toner Hopper Assy for C: A2573305 (old) A2573364 (new) Toner Hopper Assy for M: A2573306 (old) A2573365 (new)
FIELD COUNTERMEASURES:
1. Replace the Toner Hopper Shutter with the new style. In almost all cases, this will correct the symptom. 2. If this replacement does not improve Toner Cartridge installation to the customers satisfaction, replace the entire Toner Hopper Assembly. NOTE: See PROCEDURES on the following pages for replacing the Toner Hopper Shutter and replacing the entire Toner Hopper Assembly.
Continued
PROCEDURES:
Replacing the Toner Hopper Shutter: 1. Pull out the Revolver/Drum Drawer (see Service Manual pp. 3-9). 2. Remove the Toner Cartridges for each color at the Toner Cartridge replacement position [A] (lower left, when looking from the front). See illustration below. NOTE: Please refer to TSB A257/A269 014 for instructions on how to remove the Toner Cartridge without a toner end condition. 3. After removing all four Toner Cartridges, rotate the Revolver Unit to the Development Unit replacement position [B]. [B] [A]
4. Remove the Cartridge Plate [A] (2 screws). 5. Remove the old Toner Hopper Shutter [B] with a small screwdriver as shown below. 6. Install the new Toner Hopper Shutter [C] with a small screwdriver as shown below. [C]
[B] [A] Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 054 Page 5 of 5 Replacing the Toner Hopper Assembly: 1. Remove the Cartridge Plate [A] (2 screws). 2. Remove the Toner Hopper Assembly [B] (2 screws). 3. Install the new Toner Hopper Assembly. NOTE: When installing the new Toner Hopper Assembly, please note the following: 1. Be sure to align the rib [C] with the groove [D]. 2. Be sure to align the end of Hopper Shaft [E] with the indent [F].
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[A]
[B]

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 055 11/27/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E ! SUBJECT:
UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY (HUE BANDS)
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
Hue bands occur, causing uneven image density across the face of the copy (particularly with printouts). The bands occur every 59 mm or 73 mm (approx.), and the borders between each are not clearly defined. The hue bands appear perpendicular to the feed direction in middle and shadow tone areas, which is due to variations in the Development Sleeve line speed (peripheral velocity). If more than 1 color toner is used, it causes uneven hue bands. For example, when printing a solid blue (cyan + magenta) image, bands with relatively dark magenta tend to appear. In addition, on printouts the bands appear in different phases for each toner color.
!
PARTS
CAUSE:
The precision of the Development Unit Gears is not sufficient to limit the unevenness of the Development Sleeve line speed (peripheral velocity) to completely eliminate the uneven image density.
The precision of following Development Unit Gears have been improved. See General below for new part numbers. In addition, the play between the D shaped holes of these gears and their shafts are reduced. Please note that these improvements do not completely eliminate the unevenness of the Development Sleeve line speed, and the resulting copy quality may not be satisfactory to all customers.
GENERAL:
OLD PART NO. A2573056 A2573111 A2573114 A2573157 NEW PART NO. A2579710 A2573115 A2573123 A2573124 DESCRIPTION Development Unit Development Gear Gear Gear 21Z QTY 4 1 1 1 INT 1 1 1 1 REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 51 51 12 51 23 51 15
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Gears installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B6007xxxx 3B70060001 H11007xxxxx H1200600001 3B6007xxxx 3B70060001 Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 040CLR
Please install the new Gears mentioned on page 1, if the copy quality (hue banding) appears. Since these cases will mainly depend on customer requirements and the dimension precision of the Gears already installed, it is possible that some customers will not be satisfied even after parts replacement. Follow the Procedure below for installing the new Gears.
PROCEDURE:
1. With your hand, firmly support the end of the Shafts (in circle [A]) which hold the Development Gear. NOTE: If these shafts slide, Developer Carrier can get inside the Shaft Bearing area. [A]
[B] 2. Remove the Gear [B]. [C]
3. Replace the Gear [C] with the new type (P/N A2573115). 4. Replace the Gear [D] with the new type (P/N A2573124). 5. Replace the Gear [E] with the new type (P/N A2573123). 6. Reinstall the Gear [B]. [D] NOTE: 1. When reinstalling Gear [B], make sure that the side containing the ball bearings is facing the Development Unit. 2. Gear [F] is the same as Gear [E]. However, you do NOT need to replace Gear [F]. This Gear is not related at all to the hue change problem.
[E]
0 1 3/S
[F]

The following parts updates are being issued for all A257 and A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Torque Limiter For By-Pass Feed Unit The Torque Limiter was omitted from the Parts Catalog. Please add the following to your Parts Catalog.
34
NEW PART NUMBER A1342885
DESCRIPTION Torque Limiter
QTY 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 23 34*
*DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

CONTROL NO. 041CLR
UPDATE 2:
DUPLEX UNIT ASSEMBLY The Duplex Unit Assembly has been registered as a Service Part. Please add the following to your Parts Catalog.
NEW PART NUMBER A2574900
DESCRIPTION Duplex Unit Assembly
QTY 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM * 91
*DENOTES NEW ITEM

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 057 02/06/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: TONER END NOT INDICATED !
COPY QUALITY Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.
SYMPTOM:
Light copy quality, and the Toner Cartridge is empty but the machine does not display Add Toner.
CAUSE:
. Toner end detection is not enabled.
SOLUTION:
Ensure that SP2-951-000 Toner End Detection setting is set to 0. This will enable Toner End for all colors.
CONTROL NO. 045CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 058 02/06/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SYMPTOMS:
Toner spots on the printed copies An excess amount of toner dusting in the Drum / Development area NOTE: The countermeasures described below have been implemented to the main firmware version 1.622 and higher. The main firmware revision 1.622 (file name A2571622.EXE) can be downloaded through the Technology Solution Center FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM / Flash Card Exchange program.
TONER SCATTERING !
COPY QUALITY
!
FIRMWARE
POSSIBLE CAUSE NO.1:

A small amount of toner may leak into the Development Unit during revolver rotation. If toner usage is less than the toner concentration in the Development Unit, toner may gradually increase and this may result in toner scattering. This condition may exist if the customers application is mainly full color copies with a low coverage original.
COUNTERMEASURE NO.1:
Forced toner consumption mode has been added to remove the excess toner in the Development Unit. This mode is automatically performed during the process control self checks and it operates as follows. If the TD sensor output detected during self-check is more than 0.2V lower than the Vref lower limit stored in SP3-947, the machine determines that there is too much toner inside the Development Unit and makes a pattern across the whole width of the Drum to forcibly consume some toner. This mode continues until the TD sensor output is less than 0.2V lower than the Vref lower limit. The default value of SP3-947 has been optimized as shown in the below table. The values in these SP modes can be adjusted manually, however it is not recommended to change the setting in the field. SP3-947 Vref lower limit SP Mode No. Item SP3-947-001 Vref lower limit (K) SP3-947-002 Vref lower limit (C) SP3-947-003 Vref lower limit (M) SP3-947-004 Vref lower limit (Y) Default Value 1.00(old) 1.30(new) 1.00(old) 1.30(new) 1.00(old) 1.30(new) 1.00(old) 1.30(new) Value Range 0.00-5.00 0.00-5.00 0.00-5.00 0.00-5.00 Continued 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 045CLR
The following SP modes have been added to show the number of times that forced toner consumption mode is operated. The first two counters are provided for forced toner supply mode and forced toner consumption mode. These modes are performed based on development gamma calculated during the process control self check. The three counters will be automatically reset when TD sensor initialization is performed.
SP3-131 Toner density up: (counter for forced toner supply mode) SP Mode No. Item SP3-131-001 Toner density up: (K) SP3-131-002 Toner density up: (C) SP3-131-003 Toner density up: (M) SP3-131-004 Toner density up: (Y)
Default 0 0 0 0
Range 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999
SP3-132 Toner density down 1: (counter for forced toner consumption mode 1) SP Mode No. Item Default SP3-132-001 Toner density down 1: (K) 0 SP3-132-002 Toner density down 1: (C) 0 SP3-132-003 Toner density down 1: (M) 0 SP3-132-004 Toner density down 1: (Y) 0 SP3-133 Toner density down 2: (counter for forced toner consumption mode 2) SP Mode No. Item Default SP3-133-001 Toner density down 2: (K) 0 SP3-133-002 Toner density down 2: (C) 0 SP3-133-003 Toner density down 2: (M) 0 SP3-133-004 Toner density down 2: (Y) 0
Range 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999
Range 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999
To enable forced toner consumption mode, the function of SP3-128-00 has been changed. The following tables describe the combination of selectable functions for each type of self checks. With SP3-128-00, one of the three combinations can be selected. However, it is recommended to keep the default value in the field. SP3-128-00 Toner density down auto control: Value 0=ON (default not to be changed in the field) Forced toner Forced toner Forced toner Limit for shifting supply by consumption by consumption by pointer table development development TD sensor output gamma gamma Forced process control Yes Yes Yes None self check Initial process control Yes Yes Yes None self check Timed initial process Yes Yes Yes None control self check Interval process control No No Yes Within 2 steps self check Timed process control No No Yes Within 2 steps self check ACC-run-time process No No Yes Within 2 steps control self check
Continued
SP3-128-00 value 1 Forced toner supply by development gamma No No No No No No Forced toner consumption by development gamma No No No No No No Forced toner consumption by TD sensor output No No No No No No Limit for shifting pointer table
Forced process control self check Initial process control self check Timed initial process control self check Interval process control self check Timed process control self check ACC-run-time process control self check
None None None Within 2 steps Within 2 steps Within 2 steps
SP3-128-00 value 2 Forced toner supply by development gamma Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Forced toner consumption by development gamma Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Forced toner consumption by TD sensor output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Limit for shifting pointer table
Forced process control self check Initial process control self check Timed initial process control self check Interval process control self check Timed process control self check ACC-run-time process control self check
None None None None None None
Action In The Field: In case toner scattering is found and the above possible cause is suspected, upgrade the firmware to version 1.622 or newer and perform forced process control self check. After the self check, check the SP3-133 counter for forced toner consumption mode 2 and confirm if the forced toner consumption mode has been performed or not.
Continued
POSSIBLE CAUSE NO.2:

If TD sensor initialization is performed under one of the following conditions, Vref will not be adjusted properly. This may result in the toner supply control operating at a higher level and eventually causing toner scattering. This is because under any of the conditions below, the toner concentration of the developer is already shifted from that of the fresh developer. This is factory controlled at 5% wt and using such developer for TD sensor initialization results in wrong Vref setting. 1. Toner end or toner near end condition. 2. After developer replacement, main switch is turned on without opening the front cover, so process control self check is performed. 3. TD sensor initialization is performed for color(s) that the developer is not replaced.
COUNTERMEASURE NO.2:
During the TD sensor initialization, the TD sensor output is automatically adjusted to 2.5v by changing the TD sensor gain value stored in SP3-944. If the TD sensor initialization is performed under conditions such as mentioned above, the gain value will become abnormal. If the gain value is lower than the lower limit stored in SP 3-941, the new gain value will be canceled, and the previous gain value will be maintained. Also, value 3 (1:K, 2:Y, 3:C, 4:M, for ) will be displayed for TD sensor initialization results (SP5-005-006). If the gain value is higher than the higher limit stored in SP 3-942, the new gain value will be canceled, and the previous gain value will be maintained. Also, value 4 (1:K, 2:Y, 3:C, 4:M, for ) will be displayed for TD sensor initialization results (SP5-005-006). If the previous gain value is also out of the range, default gain value stored in SP3-006 is used. These two errors will not result in error code 530 (TD sensor initialization error) for developer set up results displayed by SP3-964-00. The default gain value is optimized with this modification as follows. SP3-006 TD sensor gain setting SP Mode No. Item SP3-006-001 TD sensor gain setting (K) SP3-006-002 TD sensor gain setting (C) SP3-006-003 TD sensor gain setting (M) SP3-006-004 TD sensor gain setting (Y)
Default Value 128(old) 165(new) 128(old) 175(new) 128(old) 175(new) 128(old) 175(new)
Value Range 0-225 0-225 0-225 0-225
The upper and lower limit for the gain values are stored in the following SP modes. The values in these SP modes can be adjusted manually, however it is not recommended to change the setting in the field.
SP3-941, 942 TD sensor initial gain lower and upper limits SP Mode No. Item SP3-941-001 TD sensor initial gain lower limit (K) SP3-941-002 TD sensor initial gain lower limit (C) SP3-941-003 TD sensor initial gain lower limit (M) SP3-941-004 TD sensor initial gain lower limit (Y) SP3-942-001 TD sensor initial gain upper limit (K) SP3-942-002 TD sensor initial gain upper limit (C) SP3-942-003 TD sensor initial gain upper limit (M) SP3-942-004 TD sensor initial gain upper limit (Y)
Default 150 160 160 160 180 190 190 190
Range 100-300 100-300 100-300 100-300 100-300 100-300 100-300 100-300
Continued
Action In The Field: When performing TD sensor initialization, always be careful that abnormal conditions such as mentioned above do not exist. If 3 or 4 is displayed in SP3-005-006 TD sensor initialization results, do not repeat the initialization as this will result in another error. The toner density will be controlled within normal range even if TD sensor initialization results in 3 or 4 since previous or default value will be used for TD sensor gain value. If toner density seems abnormal due to TD sensor initialization result, 3 or 4, perform the TD sensor initialization using fresh developer.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 A257/A269 - 059 02/22/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: DISCHARGE CORONA RAIL
GENERAL:
During the assembly process, the Discharge Corona Unit can inhibit the installation of other machine parts. Therefore to facilitate parts assembly, the shape of the Discharge Corona Rail has been changed as shown on page two.
!
PARTS
DESCRIPTION Discharge Corona Rail
QTY 1
INT 1
CONTROL NO. 079ABW
NOTE: The area detailed above 6x6x1.5 mm has been removed from the Discharge Corona Rail.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Discharge Corona Rail installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E
SERIAL NUMBER 3B60080001 3B70080001 H1100700051 H1200700051 3B60080001 3B70080001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 060 02/22/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH Aficio 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The new Magnetic Clutch has a more reliable harness, which was modified for better electrical contact. If the harness is not connected properly, SC37X or blank copy may occur.
DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH !
PARTS
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257 Parts Catalogs.
DESCRIPTION Magnetic Clutch
QTY 1-1
INT 1
CONTROL NO. 079ABW
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Magnetic Clutch installed during production.
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 061 02/22/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH Aficio 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT: GENERAL:
DRUM CLEANING COVER !

PARTS
When the thickness of the Drum Lubricant Bar reduces to 2mm, a noise may be generated from the Cleaning Blade. To ensure that the Lubricant Bar is properly pressed against the Cleaning Brush, the stop position of the Drum Cleaning Cover has been lowered by 2mm. This will allow for a constant lubricant application to the brush, even if the height of the Lubricant Bar is less than 2mm.
Drum Lubricant Bar

CONTROL NO. 079ABW
Drum Cleaning Cover
Lubricant Bar Initial condition
2mm
Cleaning Brush
Old
New
Stop position lowered by 2mm: Height: 13.7 " 15.7 mm DRUM CLEANING COVER
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 55 * 55 27
OLD PART NO. A2573570 A2573630
NEW PART NO. A2573575 A2573628
DESCRIPTION Cleaner Assy Drum Cleaning Cover
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Drum Cleaning Cover installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Colo 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E
0 1 3/S

PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Exit Sensor Feeler To ensure correct exit sensor detection, the length of the feeler has been decreased from 18.3mm to 17.8mm.
NEW PART NO. B0234152
DESCRIPTION Exhaust Sensor Feeler Exit Sensor Feeler
QTY 0-1 0-1
INT 1 1

CONTROL NO. 050CLR
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style exit sensor feeler installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60110001 3B70110001 H1101000077 H1201100001 3B60110001 3B70110001
UPDATE 2:
Thermistor Stopper The hot roller thermistor may lift up during the copy process, which may cause a paper jam in the fusing unit section. To ensure proper paper transportability, a thermistor stopper (index #42) has been added to the fusing unit. Due to this modification, the length of the tapping screw used to secure the thermistor has been changed from 8mm to 10mm.
OLD PART NO. A2574017 A2574031 04513008B
NEW PART NO. A2574022 A2574033 A2574260 04513010B
DESCRIPTION Fusing Unit NA (120V) Fusing Unit EU (230V) Thermistor Stopper Tapping Screw - M3X8 Tapping Screw - M3X10
QTY 1 1 1 n - n-1 0-1
INT 1 1 3/S 1 3/S
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 79 * 79 * 79 42* 79 104 79 109*
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new thermistor stopper and M3x10mm tapping screw installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60090001 3B70080001 H1100800092 H1200900001 3B60090001 3B70080001
UPDATE 3:
Exit Roller Holder & Guide Spring Plate To ensure proper paper transportability, four guide spring plates are attached by four pieces of dual side tape to the exit guide plate during assembly. In addition, it was found that the exit rollers could sometimes cause vertical white lines to appear on some OHP sheets. To ensure proper image quality, the material of the driven roller has been changed. To facilitate installation of the new driven roller in the exit guide plate, the width of the exit roller holder has been changed from 12 to 10.6mm. NOTE: If either the old driven roller or old exit roller holder needs to be replaced, be sure to replace both as a set.
Exit Guide Plate
12mm
Guide Dual Side Tape
10.6mm Exit Roller Holder Driven Roller Guide Spring Plate
Continued
OLD PART NO.
AF040564 A2574159
NEW PART NO. B0234242 B0234243 A1664017 B0234244
DESCRIPTION Guide Spring Plate Guide Dual Side Tape Exit Driven Roller Exit Roller Holder
QTY 0-4 0-4 4 4
INT --3/S 3/S
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 83 32* 83 33* 83 12 83 11
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new exit roller holder & guide spring plates installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60110001 3B70110001 H1101000077 H1201100001 3B60110001 3B70110001
Continued
UPDATE 4:
Fusing Blade It was found that oil lines could sometimes appear on the front and rear edges of the copy. To ensure proper image quality, the specifications have been improved as shown below.
A 00.1 00.5 24.4:+ 0.4,0
NEW PART NO. AE043012
DESCRIPTION Fusing blade Assy
QTY 1
INT 1
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new fusing blade installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60040001 3B70040001 H1100400001 H1200400001 3B60040001 3B70040001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 063 07/16/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER Sorter Stapler (ST33) for CS210/CS210e RICOH Sorter Stapler (ST33) for AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN Sorter Stapler (ST33) for SDC410/SDC410E SUBJECT: GENERAL: !
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
HEIGHT ADJUSTER
NEW PART NO. A8311552 A8314521 A6816122 A8316522 08049050 DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION Base Plate - Lower Adjusting Shaft Stand Adjuster Cushion 10 x 18 NUT M8
QTY 1 2 2 2 2
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 29 23 29 24 29 25 29 26 29 27
CONTROL NO 052CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 064 07/16/2001 07/1 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO Color 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/SDC410E
SUBJECT:
DRUM FRAME ASSEMBLY !

PARTS
GENERAL:
During laboratory tests, it was found that small amounts of toner could sometimes leak out of the development unit and stick to the toner shield glass. To ensure good copy quality, 11 seals have been added to cover the holes of the upper development duct.
1.5mm 2.5 3mm Seal 20x9
The following parts additions are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
NEW PART NO. A2573553 A2573565
DESCRIPTION Drum Frame Assy Seal - 20X9
QTY 1 11
INT 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 53 15 53 *18

CONTROL NO 052CLR
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Drum Frame Assy and SEAL 20X9 installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 065 07/16/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
To reduce the possibility of static electricity causing misfeeds around the hot roller, a new style hot roller (P/N AE010034) is being issued. The new style hot roller will be available as an individual part and in the fusing unit assembly. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 79 * 79 * 81 7
!
PARTS
HOT ROLLER
OLD PART NO. A2574022 A2574033 AE010027
NEW PART NO. A2574023 A2574034 AE010034
DESCRIPTION Fusing Unit 120V Fusing Unit 230V Hot Roller
QTY 1 1 1
INT 1 1 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style hot roller and fusing unit installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60090001 3B70080004 H1100900001 H1200900001 3B60090001 3B70080004
0 1 3/S
CONTROL NO. 051CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 066 07/25/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: TONER SCATTERING / SC452 / SC385 ! SYMPTOM:
Toner scattering SC452 (Belt mark detection error) SC385 (ID sensor Vsg adjustment error)
COPY QUALITY
CAUSE:
If Initial Process Control or Toner End Recovery Process is performed with new developer before TD Sensor Initialization, the actual toner WT% (In developer toner density- See A257/A269 Service Manual TD Sensor Output) will be greater than the calculated value by the TD sensor output. This may lead to toner scattering, SC452 or SC385.
SOLUTION:
Perform the following field actions.
ACTION IN THE FIELD

The table on page 2 is a series of Check Items that may sometimes be overlooked in the field. If these items are not confirmed, this can lead to toner scattering. The center column explains what happens if the Check Item has been overlooked. If your answer is No to any of Check Items, please refer to the corrective action that needs to be taken (right column).

CONTROL NO. 053CLR
No. 1
Check Items At machine installation or after replacing the developer, did you open the front cover before turning on the main switch? Yes
Corrective Action if your answer is No. AT INSTALLATION: Replace the developer for all colors. Then, perform TD sensor initialization again according to the correct procedure. AFTER DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT: Replace the developer color(s) that you just replaced, again. Then perform TD sensor initialization according to the correct procedure. First, replace the toner cartridge with a new one and wait until the completion of the toner end recovery. Then replace the developer color again for the toner that was at the end or near end condition. Then perform the TD sensor initialization again, using the correct procedure. Replace the developer color(s) that you have not replaced. Then perform TD sensor initialization only for those colors that you replaced just now.
Technical Background Without opening the front cover, the machine starts the initial process control self-check automatically after the main switch is turned on. If the initial process control self-check is performed before the TD sensor initialization, the actual toner WT% will be greater than the calculated value by the TD sensor output. This may lead to toner scattering (SC452, SC385). If the toner end recovery process is performed with new developer before the TD sensor initialization, the actual toner WT% for the Vref value will be greater than estimated. This will cause incorrect Vref values to be used for toner supply control. This may lead to toner scattering (SC452, SC385). If the TD sensor initialization is performed for the color(s) that the developer has NOT replaced, Vref will be an incorrect value. If an incorrect Vref value is used for toner supply control, a toner scattering problem may occur. Vref and Vcnt (TD sensor gain) are used for the TD sensor initialization and the toner supply control. If these are changed manually, incorrect values will be used for the toner supply control.
Did you replace the toner cartridge, which was at toner end or toner near end condition, before replacing the color developer? Yes
Did you perform the TD sensor initialization only for the color(s) that the developer replaced? Yes
Are the following values at their default setting? Vref (SP3-950, SP3949) Vref lower limit (SP3947) Vref upper limit (SP3948) Vcnt (SP3-944) Vcnt lower limit (SP3941) Vcnt upper limit (SP3942)
Reset the values to the default value. If Vcnt (SP3-944) has been changed, replace the developer and perform the TD sensor initialization.

The following symptoms may appear after performing a NV-RAM clear function (SP5-801). See page 6-102 in the A257/A269 Service Manual for the procedure to perform a RAM Clear. Low image density Self check process control error 20 Developer setup error 20 NOTE: 1: K, 2: Y, 3: C and 4: M are displayed for their respective colors for items identified by .
!
GENERAL INFORMATION
NV-RAM CLEAR
!
SERVICE MANUAL
CAUSE:
If a NV-RAM clear is performed, SP data will be reset to the factory set default values. However, the inner parameters, which are used to control the machine, will not be reset to the factory set values until the main power switch has been turned OFF and ON. NOTE: "Inner parameters" mean the machine control values used by the main control board, but are not seen by SP mode.
SOLUTION:
The following action should be taken when performing the NV-RAM clear (SP5-801), please turn the main switch OFF and ON before performing any machine operations. See new Service Manual page 6-102, RAM Clear attached to this bulletin.
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
6-102
Updated Information (RAM Clear)
Copyright 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 055CLR
Rev. 07/2001
6.14.2 RAM CLEAR

RAM Clear Procedure
NOTE: Clearing the RAM resets all SP and UP values, except the serial number and main counter value, to the defaults. It is, therefore, important to perform this step using the procedure shown below. 1. Before clearing the RAM, either: execute SP7-902 to output the SP mode values that have been changed from their default values; or Upload the settings from the NV-RAM onto the flash ROM on main control board using the SP5-824 mode. (See NV-RAM uploading and downloading.)
3.
2. Use the SP5-801 mode to clear the NV-RAM. After the RAM is cleared, turn the unit OFF then ON. 4. Perform the touch panel calibration. NOTE: After the NV-RAM clearing, the touch panel is not effective. Therefore, the Touch Panel Calibration is required (See 6.14.5 Touch Panel Calibration). 5. Run the forced process control self-check (SP3-126). (Potential table optimization is required since RAM clearing also initializes the process control data.) 6. Enter the SP mode changes that were output in step (1), or download the NVRAM values from the flash ROM on main control board. (See NV-RAM Uploading and Downloading.) 7. Perform the ACC procedure. 8. If the color balance after the ACC is not correct, adjust the ACC target using SP4-502 (for copier mode) and SP4-503 (for printer mode). NOTE: To clear (zero) the counter log data, run the SP7-808 (Clear All Counters).
A257/A269
6-102
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 068 09/05/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: LOWER GUIDE PLATE
GENERAL:
To increase the adhesion of the lower guide plate to the lower guide, the following parts have been changed. The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
Continued
CONTROL NO 059CLR
OLD PART NO. A2576210 A2576273 A2576275
NEW PART NO. A2576209 A2576272 A2576279
DESCRIPTION Transfer Belt Unit Lower Guide Plate Lower Guide
QTY 1 1 1
INT 1 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 71 * 71 29 71 30
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style transfer belt unit, lower guide plate lower guide installed during production.
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 069 09/05/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: BRUSH ROLLER RECEPTACLE
GENERAL:
A noise may be generated from the spacer press-fitted in the brush roller receptacle. It was found that the spacer may contact the bearing in the brush roller receptacle. To correct this, the inner diameter of the spacer has been changed from 5.8 to 6.8 mm. The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs .
MECHANICAL
Contact area
Brush Roller Receptacle
PARTS
Spacer 5.8 to 6.8 mm
Continued
CONTROL NO 059CLR
OLD PART NO. A2576450 A2576458
NEW PART NO. A2576305 A2576471
DESCRIPTION Cleaning Unit Brush Roller Receptacle
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 67 67 * 10
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style cleaning unit and brush roller receptacle installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO 6010 Ricoh AFICIO 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/269 070 09/05/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT: GENERAL:
SCANNER DRIVER BOARD !

PARTS
It was found that vertical lines in images near the leading edge may appear slightly wavy when using 50% Reduction Mode. This is due to the resonance of the scanner drive board oscillator. To ensure proper copy quality, the capacitors on the scanner drive board have been changed from a 47pF to 68pF type. The following parts corrections are being issued for all A257/269 Parts Catalogs.
!
ELECTRICAL
DESCRIPTION Scanner Drive Board
QTY 1
INT 1
Continued
Copyright 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 059CLR
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/269 - 070 Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All 257/269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style scanner drive board installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner SC210E Ricoh Aficio 6010 Ricoh Aficio 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 071 10/16/2001 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:
All four of the following symptoms/conditions occur together: 1. 2. 3. 4. TD sensor gain value upper limit error: Value 4 (SP3-005 1:K, 2:Y, 3:C, 4:M, for ) is displayed for TD sensor initialization results (See NOTE 2 below). The copy/print image density is too light. Actual Vref value (SP3-950-, 001:K, 002:C, 003:M, 004:Y, for ) is 1.35 or lower. Selected pointer table (SP3-902-, 001:K, 002:C, 003:M, 004:Y, for ) is 16 or greater.
TD SENSOR ERRORS
!
COPY QUALITY
NOTE: . Using the latest firmware, SP3-960-000 displays the TD sensor initialization results. If this SP mode is not available, please try SP3-005-006. 1. The troubleshooting procedure below is only for cases where all 4 of the above conditions happen together. If the procedure is performed without all 4 conditions satisfied, unexpected errors can occur. 2. As an example, if only #1 above occurs, (value 4 (1:K, 2:Y, 3:C, 4:M, for ) displayed for TD sensor initialization results [SP3-005]), the new gain value will be canceled, and the previous gain value will be maintained. There is usually no need to take action in this case, as the machine can still be used normally. Important: Do not repeat the initialization without replacing the developer for that color. Otherwise, another error may occur (see related TSB# A257/A269-058 for more details).
CAUSE:
For some reason, the developer Q/M is slightly higher than usual but within specification.
SOLUTION: Action in the field

1. Change the TD sensor initial gain upper limits (SP3-942-, 005:K, 006:C, 007:M, 008:Y, for ) for all colors, according to the following table:
Continued
Copyright 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved d CONTROL NO 107ABW
SP3-942 TD sensor initial gain upper limits SP Mode No. SP3-942-005 SP3-942-006 SP3-942-007 SP3-942-008 Item TD sensor initial gain upper limit (K) TD sensor initial gain upper limit (C) TD sensor initial gain upper limit (M) TD sensor initial gain upper limit (Y) Current value 180 190 190 190 Upper limit New Value 200 210 210 210 Range Range 100-300 100-300 100-300 100-300
2. Replace the developer for the color(s) that displayed 4 (1:K, 2:Y, 3:C, 4:M, for ). 3. Perform TD sensor initialization for the color(s) that you just replaced. NOTE: Do not perform TD sensor initialization for a toner color without replacing the developer for that color.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 072 03/19/2002 03/19/2002 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT:
SOLENOID BRACKET !
GENERAL:
Under high-temperature conditions, the cushion for the Solenoid Bracket may detach, which can cause duplex paper jams. To ensure that the cushion remains fixed to the bracket even under high-temperature conditions, the adhesive tape and material of the cushion have been changed to heat-resistant types.
PARTS
39. Paper Inverter Section (A257/A269)
Cushion
25 The following part correction is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. NOTE The cushion is part of the solenoid bracket.
DESCRIPTION Solenoid Bracket
QTY 1
INT 1
Continued
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 074CLR
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269072 Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Solenoid Bracket installed during production.
MODEL NAME Ricoh 6010 Ricoh 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E
SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 073 06/24/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The Blade Holder has been changed due to parts standardization with other models. The new style Blade Holder contains 2 small holder seals. (See illustration below.) The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
BLADE HOLDER !
PARTS
Item 30 - Holder Seal * Item 14 - Blade Holder
NEW PART NO. B0234231 B0234232 * Denotes new item number.
DESCRIPTION BLADE HOLDER HOLDER SEAL - 6X10
QTY 1 2
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Blade Holder and Seals installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B6103xxxx 3B7103xxxx H11103xxxx H12103xxxx 3B6103xxxx 3B7103xxxx
CONTROL NO. 083CLR

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 074 07/15/2002 07/15/2002 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT:
PART CATALOG CORRECTIONS !
GENERAL:
The following parts have been modified for parts standardization with the B023, and the corrections are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A2572632 A2692632 A2572642 A2692642 A2574111 B0234101 A2574098 A2574099 A2574197 A2574196 *DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION Upper Guide Plate Upper Stay Upper Side Plate Oil Supply Unit Oil Supply Bracket
QTY 3 3 1 1 1
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 075 09/19/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all 257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Bracket Paper Feed Lock A portion of the bracket below (shaded area) has been removed to ensure that it does not contact the Toner Collection Pipe, which can sometimes result in noise.
Frame section 3 (A257/A269)
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A1342926 B0232509 *DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION Bracket Paper Feed Lock
QTY 1
INT 1
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin NoA257/A269 075 Page 2 of 5
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Bracket Paper Feed Lock installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 2:
New type D- 2 handle To increase the ease of opening the Paper Exit Unit, a D-type handle has been added. 34
36. Fusing Unit 3 (A257/A269)
35
NEW PART NO. B0234080 B0234157 *DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
OLD PART NO. B0234079
DESCRIPTION Paper Exit Unit Exit Unit Handle
QTY 1-1 0-1
INT 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 83 34 83 35*
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style type D- 2 handle installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 3:
Fusing unit Thermostat To increase the reliability of SC542/547 detection, the fusing unit Thermofuse has been changed to a Thermostat. In accordance with this change, the related harnesses and screws have also been changed. 34. FUSING UNIT1 (A257/A269)
37. FUSING UNIT 4 (A257/A269)
109 109
2323
23
109
28
OLD PART NO. A2574163 AA000206 A2575311
NEW PART NO. B0234170 09503005B A2575394 08010149
DESCRIPTION Thermostat Hot Roller Philips Screw With Spring Washer Fusing Thermofuse Decal Fusing Unit Harness Philips Pan Head Screw M4X6
QTY 1-1 1 1-0 1-1 1
INT 1 1 -
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 79 28 79 109* 79 85 85 29 23 109*

Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Fusing Thermostat installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 4:
Magnet Catch Stay This part has been changed due to parts standardization with the model B023.
34. Fusing Unit 1 (A257/A269)
34
DESCRIPTION Magnet Catch Stay
QTY 1-1
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Fusing Thermostat installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER 3B60090001 3B70090001 H1100900001 H1200900001 3B70090001 3B60090001 Continued
ech Service Bulletin No A257/A269 075 Page 5 of 5
UPDATE 5:
Spring Clutch The material of the holding hook for the PTR Lift Clutch on the B023 has been changed to ensure the clutch does not slip, causing SC456. This change has also been applied to the A257 as shown below, since the same clutch is used on both machines.
OLD PART NO. AX210076 AX210076
NEW PART NO. AX210084 AX210084
DESCRIPTION Spring Clutch Spring Clutch
QTY 1-1 1-1
INT 1 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Spring Clutch installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 076 09/19/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT: GENERAL:
PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

PARTS
UPDATE 1:
Rear Lower Side Plate Due to parts standardization with new models, the Rear Lower Side Plate has been changed. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 85 5
DESCRIPTION Rear Lower Side Plate
QTY 1
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Rear Lower Side Plate installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 2:
Paper Exit Unit Frame The Paper Exit Unit Frame has been changed due to parts standardization with the B023.
DESCRIPTION Paper Exit Unit Frame
QTY 1
INT 0
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Rear Lower Side Plate installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410
SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 3:
IC IC17 on the Video Board has been changed.
DESCRIPTION IC MSM27C401CZ-NGS-K
QTY 1
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style IC installed during production.
Continued
UPDATE 4:
Drum Cleaning Brush The Drive Shaft for the Drum Cleaning Brush can sometimes get scraped by the e-ring causing insufficient drive to be transferred to the brush. To continually ensure proper drive, the Drive Shaft has been made part of the Drum Cleaning Brush.
22. DRUM CLEANING UNIT (A257/269) 1 2
OLD PART NO. A2573576 AD042037 A2573594
NEW PART NO. B0233577 AD042045
DESCRIPTION Drum Cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Brush Drive Shaft
QTY 1-1 1-1 1-0
INT 1 3
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Drum Cleaning Brush installed during production.
Continued
UPDATE 5:
Transport Belt - As informed in A257/A269-047, the P/N for the Transport Belt was changed to AA040029 due to a vendor change. However, there was a tendency for paper jams to occur because of an improper amount of friction between the belt and copy paper. Therefore, the part has been changed as shown below. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 73 5
DESCRIPTION Transport Belt
QTY 2-2
INT 1
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Transport Belt installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
Continued
UPDATE 6:
Cleaner Toner End Stopper - The following parts have been changed due to parts standardization with the B023.
OLD PART NO. AA040029 A2573318 07200030B
NEW PART NO. AA040032 B0233318 07200025B
DESCRIPTION Transport Belt Cleaner Toner End Stopper Retaining Ring M2.5
QTY 2-2 44 88
INT 1 3 3
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Transport Belt installed during production.
SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Continued
UPDATE 7:
Timing Pulley 84T - To prevent the timing belt from riding up on the collar, the tolerance of the gear has been reduced.
DESCRIPTION Timing Pulley 84T
QTY 1
INT 1
27. Transfer Belt Unit (A257/A269)
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Timing Pulley 84T installed during production.
Continued
UPDATE 8:
Fixing Plate Magnetic Catch: To ensure that the Fixing Plate stays properly mounted in place, it will be attached with 2 screws instead of being welded. (P/N for the Front Cover is unchanged).
31 30
OLD PART NO.
NEW PART NO. B0231275 B0231276
DESCRIPTION Fixing Plate Magnetic Catch Screw M5x30
QTY 1 2
INT
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 30* 13 13 31*

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Fixing Plate Magnetic Catch installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410E Savin SDC410 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 077 11/11/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT: CHARGE CORONA ASSEMBLY
GENERAL:
To ensure that the drum is not accidentally scratched when the charge corona unit is removed or inserted, the allowable margin of error for the height of the charge corona case has been minimized. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
OLD PART NO. AD004096 A2572315 A2572310
NEW PART NO. AD004098 A2572316 A2572311
DESCRIPTION Charge Corona Assy Left Case - Charge Corona Right Case - Charge Corona
QTY 1 1 1
INT 1 1 1
* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style charge corona assembly installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B60100001 3B70100001 H1101000001 H1201000001 3B60100001 3B70100001
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 078 11/13/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:
PARTS Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.
UPDATE 1:
Fusing Cleaning Roller To increase the reliability of the Fusing Cleaning Roller, a spacer has been added between the bushing and the retaining ring. In addition, the retaining ring has been changed from an M5 to an M4 type. Please update your A257/A269 Parts Catalog with the following information.
43
103
NEW PART NO. AE042053 AA132219 07200040B
07200050B DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION Fusing Cleaning Roller Spacer Retaining Ring M4 Retaining Ring M5
QTY 1 1 1 0
INT 3/S 3/S 3/S -
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 79 7 79 43 * 79 103 79 107
UNITS AFFECTED:
The new style Fusing Cleaning Roller is available as a service part only. Continued
UPDATE 2:
By-Pass Feed Unit The By-Pass Feed Unit part number has been updated due to a vendor change. Please update your A257/A269 Parts Catalog with the following information.
DESCRIPTION By-pass Feed Unit
QTY 1
INT 0
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 23 *
UNITS AFFECTED:
The new style By-Pass Feed Unit is available as a service part only.
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 079 11/15/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: IMAGE TRANSFER BELT PEELING SYMPTOM:
Following ITB (Image Transfer Belt) replacement, the rubber positioning seals around the inside edge of the belt may peel off at approximately 1-2 kD (1,000 to 2,000 Development Cycles), causing either an SC326 or an SC452.
MECHANICAL Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.
CAUSE:
An insufficient amount of setting powder was applied to the ITB, causing the belt to catch the blade and bend it backwards. The blade then pushes against the area of the belt with no roller underneath, causing the belt to bend inward and the positioning seals to contact the Grounding Plate. The seals are then peeled off at their joint areas.
SOLUTION:
Please be sure to apply a sufficient amount of setting powder to the entire surface of the belt during replacement. As a reference, the picture below shows the belt after a sufficient amount has been applied. NOTE: When in doubt, it is better to apply slightly more powder than less.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 079 REISSUE 03/25/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT:
ITB RUBBER BANDS PEELING OFF

MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
Following ITB replacement, the rubber positioning seals around the inside edge of the belt peel off at approximately 1-2k developments, causing SC326 or SC452.
CAUSE:
An insufficient amount of setting powder is applied to the ITB, causing the belt to catch the blade and bend it backwards. The blade then pushes against a different area of the belt (one with no roller underneath), causing the belt to bend inward and the positioning seals to contact the Grounding Plate. The seals are then peeled off at their joint areas.
PARTS
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 079 REISSUE Page 2 of 2
SOLUTION:
Please be sure to apply a sufficient amount of setting powder to the entire surface of the belt at replacement. As a reference, the picture on the previous page shows the belt after a sufficient amount has been applied. Note: When in doubt, it is better to apply slightly more powder than less. In addition to the above, replace the Brush Roller Ground Plate with the new type.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Brush Roller Ground Plate installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh AFICIO COLOR 6010 Ricoh AFICIO COLOR 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin 410E
DESCRIPTION Brush Roller Ground Plate
QTY 1
INT 1
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 080 11/15/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The Drum Cleaning Brush has been changed to include the Drive Shaft (illustration below). This bulletin details the PM replacement procedure for the Drum Cleaning Brush.
NEW DRUM CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
MECHANICAL
Drive Shaft New Cleaning Brush
Old Cleaning Brush
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION AD042045 Drum Cleaning Brush *DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
QTY 1
Drum Cleaning Brush replacement procedure (PM visit):

1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Bush Holder [A] (1 screw). Remove the Brush Gear [B] (1 E-ring). Remove the Drive Shaft [C]. Remove the old Drum Cleaning Brush [D].
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D] 5. Attach the new Cleaning Brush [E]. 6. Re-install the Cleaning Brush Gear [F] (1 e-ring). 7. Re-install the Brush Holder [G] (1 screw). NOTE: The Drive Shaft [C] is no longer required.
[F]
[E] [G]

SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:
THICK MODE, 2ND COPY, TRAIL EDGE BAND

FIRMWARE
A light band appears at the trailing edge (last 6 to 10mm) of the 2nd copy when using Thick / Extra Thick / OHP mode. This light band is NOT always visible. It depends on the paper size, paper feeding direction and the type of image. It usually appears when the following settings are selected at the same time. 1. 2. 3. 4. Paper Size: Letter size (11 X 8.5) Paper feed direction: Sideways Copying mode: Multi copy mode (more than two copies) Thick, Extra Thick, or OHP mode
In other conditions, this symptom rarely occurs.
CAUSE:
The PTB shift clutch ON timing is not proper. With the above settings, this improper timing leads to the light band at the trailing edge.
SOLUTION:
Action in the field: Upgrade the main firmware to ver.1.627 or newer. In the new firmware, the PTB shift clutch ON timing has been modified. The PCB ROM revision X (file name XXXXXXXX.EXE) can be downloaded through the Technology Solution Center FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM / Flash Card Exchange program.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 082 11/19/2002 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:
UPDATE 1:
Brush Roller Holder & Arm As part of parts standardization with the B023, extra screw holes have been added to the brush roller holder and arm. In addition, a tapping screw has been added for installing the new holder and arm. NOTE: When installing either of these two parts in place of the old holder or arm, the tapping screw is not necessary.
OLD PART NO. A2576364 A2576368 -----
NEW PART NO. B0236364 B0236368 04513006B
DESCRIPTION Brush Roller Holder Brush Roller Arm Tapping Screw - M3X6
QTY 1 1 1
INT 1 1 --
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new brush roller holder & arm installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B6012XXXX 3B7012XXXX H11012XXXX H12012XXXX 3B6012XXXX 3B7012XXXX Continued
UPDATE 2:
Paper Exit Unit Frame & Upper Exit Guide Plate To ensure proper paper transport through the fusing unit, the production machines have been modified as follows: 1. The shapes of the paper exit unit frame and upper exit guide plate have been changed. 2. In accordance with these changes, the guide spring plates and guide dual-sided tape previously added to production machines have been deleted.
OLD PART NO. A2574143 A2574155 B0234242 B0234243
NEW PART NO. B0234143 B0234155 -------
DESCRIPTION Paper Exit Unit Frame Upper Exit Guide Plate Guide Spring Plate (DELETE) Guide Dual Sided Tape (DELETE)
QTY 1 1 4-0 4-0
INT 3/S 3/S ---
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 83 7 83 10 83 32 83 33
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new type paper exit unit frame and upper exit guide plate installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER 3B6101XXXX 3B7101XXXX H11101XXXX H12101XXXX 3B6101XXXX 3B7101XXXX
Continued...
UPDATE 3:
Clamp Please add the description and illustration for the clamp to your parts catalogs:
NEW PART NUMBER 11050329
DESCRIPTION Clamp ES-0510
QTY 1
0 1 3/S

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 083 03/04/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
UPDATE 1:
Brush Roller Ground Plate The shape of the brush roller ground plate has been changed to ensure that the ITB rubber bands do not peel off.
DESCRIPTION Grounding Plate Brush Roller Grounding Plate
QTY 1-0 01
INT -1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 65 35 65 35 Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Brush Roller Grounding Plate installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Aficio Color 6010 Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 2:
Upper Side Plate The shape of the following part has been changed due to parts standardization with other models.
DESCRIPTION Upper Side Plate
QTY 1
INT 0
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Upper Side Plate installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Aficio Color 6010 Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 3:
Fuser Cover To increase the ease of opening the paper exit unit, a new type handle for the D2 area has been added. In addition, a sheet has been added to the fusing unit cover. 44 46 45 9
38 37
36
NEW PART NO. B0234108 B0234160 A2574235 A2574234
DESCRIPTION Fusing Cover Sheet - 20X95 Sheet - 60X40 Sheet 90X50
QTY 1-1 0-1 0-1 0-1
INT 2 ----
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 79 9 79 44* 79 45* 79 46*
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style cover and sheet installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Aficio Color 6010 Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 4:
Gear 35Z/35Z The following drive section gear has been changed due to a vender change.
OLD PART NO. AB017492
NEW PART NO. AB017639
DESCRIPTION Gear 35Z/35Z
QTY 1
INT 0
Continued
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new gear 35Z/35Z installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Gestetner CS210e Aficio Color 6010 Aficio Color 6110 Savin SDC410 Savin SDC410E SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
0 1 3/S

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:

The following part update is being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
UPDATE:
ITB unit assembly Please replace the illustration on page 64 with the new one below. Correction: A dotted line around the ITB unit assembly excluding the Transfer Belt has been added. This is because the ITB unit assembly does not include the belt.

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 085 10/02/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E LANIER 5710/5710E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: NV-RAM ZERO COUNTER GENERAL:
The initial value of the NV-RAM has been changed from a negative value to 0. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
PARTS
DESCRIPTION NV-RAM - Zero Counter
QTY 1
INT 0
UNITS AFFECTED:
The serial number cut-in information was not available at time of this publication.
0 1 3/S
Page 1 of 1

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 086 10/07/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E LANIER 5710/5710E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION
PARTS
GENERAL:
The following parts have been modified for parts standardization with the B023, and the updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO. A2572632 A2572642 A2574111 A2574098 A2574197
NEW PART NO. A2692632 A2692642 B0234101 A2574099 A2574196
DESCRIPTION Upper Guide Plate 3 29 34 Upper Stay Upper Side Plate Oil Supply Unit Oil Supply Bracket
QTY 3 3 1 1 1
0 1 3/S
Page 1 of 1

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 087 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E LANIER 5710/5710E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E 10/24/2003
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

PARTS
GENERAL:
UPDATE 1:
Development Unit Kit The development unit kit and its components have been modified to further improve mechanical reliability.
OLD PART NO. A2579710 AD037059 AD037058
NEW PART NO. A2579711 AD037080 AD037081
DESCRIPTION Development Unit Kit Transport screw - Left Transport screw - Right
QTY 1 1 1
INT 1 1 1

Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 087
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Development Unit Kit installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Savin SDC410 Gestetner CS210e Savin SDC410E Lanier5710 Lanier5710E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110 SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only
UPDATE 2:
Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit The following have been changed to increase the performance of the transfer belt cleaning mechanism.
31
31
Page 2 of 3
Tech Service Bulletin No. A257/A269 087
OLD PART NO. A2576305 54132279
NEW PART NO. A2576306 AA080299
DESCRIPTION Cleaning Unit Bushing 8mm Bushing W-802: 8mm
QTY 1-1 6-4 0-2
INT 1
REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 67 * 67 3 67 31*
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A257/A269 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit installed during production.
MODEL NAME Gestetner CS210 Savin SDC410 Gestetner CS210e Savin SDC410E Lanier5710 Lanier5710E Ricoh Aficio Color 6010 Ricoh Aficio Color 6110
0 1 3/S
Page 3 of 3

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 - 088 11/07/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E LANIER 5710/5710E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
!
SERVICE MANUAL
PAGES:
6 - 105
Updated Information (NV-RAM Replacement)
Rev. 10/2003
NV-RAM Replacement Procedure

Make sure you have the factory settings that come with the copier before beginning the following procedure: 1. Use the SP7-902 mode to output the SP mode values that have been modified from their default value. 2. Set the main power switch to OFF and unplug the power cord. 3. Replace the NV-RAM (IC115) on the main board. (Refer to Main Control Board Replacement Procedure. 4. Reassemble the machine. 5. Open the front cover, and then turn ON the machine main power. NOTE a) Be sure to leave the front cover open until Step 13 has been completed. This is to prevent the machine from initiating initial process control self-check. b) A four-digit SC may appear at this time (SC4xxx) and remain displayed until the RAM clear is performed in Step 8 below, however please ignore this SC and continue with the procedure. 6. Perform Touch Panel Calibration (see pg. 6-106). 7. SC195 (Serial number error) appears on the display. Then, enter the machine serial number in the factory set mode (Performed by a Regional Representative). NOTE: Sometimes SC195 does not appear during the 4 digits SC remains displayed. Even though in this case, enter the machine serial numbers in the factory set mode. 8. Perform SP5-801 (RAM clear) to reset SP and UP values to their defaults. 9. Turn the main power OFF/ON and confirm that no SC is displayed. 10. Perform Touch Panel Calibration again. 11. Set SP7-008-000 (Counter display setting) to the appropriate value: a) Developments counter value b) Copies/Prints counter value NOTE: If this SP is not set to a value of 1 or 2, the abnormal value in the SP (e.g. 102, 65) will prevent the electrical counter panel button from functioning. 12. Perform SP7-808 (Counter all clear). NOTE: If this is not performed, the counters will take on abnormal values. See logging data sheet (SP7-809-003) to confirm. 13. Perform SP7-825 to reset the electrical counter values to 0, unless you are using P/N A2579590 or newer (NV-RAM Zero Counter), in which case this step is unnecessary. NOTE: If this step is not performed for previous NV-RAMs (negative counters), the mechanical counter will not increment. 14. Use the electrical counter panel button to confirm that all electrical counters have been successfully set to 0. 15. Enter SP mode changes you output in step (1). 16. Perform the auto color calibration procedure. 17. If the image needs adjustment after being subject to auto color calibration, calibrate the target using the SP4-501/502/503 modes.
SM
6-105
A257/A269

BULLETIN NUMBER: A257/A269 089 01/08/2004 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER CS210/CS210E LANIER 5710/5710E RICOH AFICIO COLOR 6010/6110 SAVIN SDC410/410E SUBJECT: SPRING CLUTCH GENERAL:
The PTR Lift Clutch has been changed on the B023 to further ensure the clutch does not slip, causing an SC456. Since the same clutch is used on both models, this modification applies to A257/A269 service parts as well. 1. Grease changed to a more reliable type. 2. Metal washer changed to plastic washer to reduce friction between the input and output hubs. The following parts updates are being issued for all A257/A269 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 99 13 101 1
PARTS
OLD PART NO. AX210084 AX210084
NEW PART NO. AX210087 AX210087
DESCRIPTION Spring Clutch Spring Clutch
QTY 1 1
INT 1 1
NOTE:
As shown by the two item numbers above, this clutch is also used in the disposed toner collection area, and has been changed accordingly.
UNITS AFFECTED:
The new style Spring Clutch is available as a service part only.
0 1 3/S
Page 1 of 1

A257 SM

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

A257 SM

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

A257/A269 SERVICE MANUAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

A257/A269 SERVICE MANUAL

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER A663

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION................................... 8-4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................. 8-5

TIMING CHARTS............................................................................. 8-13

SERVICE TABLES .......................................................................... 8-16

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 8-18

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................. 9-6

SERVICE TABLES ............................................................................ 9-9

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 9-10

SORTER STAPLER A831

1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................. 10-4

DETAILED DESCRIPTION.............................................................. 10-5

REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS..................................... 10-23

3.11 MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT ....................................... 10-40

SP MODE AND STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ................... 10-41

FILM PROJECTOR UNIT A846

CONTROLLER INTERFACE A839

 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683

SORTER STAPLER A831

FILM PROJECTOR UNIT A846

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER A663

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

Other options Platen cover (A749-01) Controller interface (A839)

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1.2 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS

Copying speed (cpm):

Normal paper/ normal mode OHP/thick paper ARDF 1 to 1 Duplex feed

Warm-up time: First copy time (A4/81/2" x 11")

Paper feed capacity:

Paper feed system:

1.1.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

1.1.4 COPY PAPER SIZES

1.1.5 NOISE EMISSION

1.1.6 POWER CONSUMPTION

1.2.1 IMAGE GENERATION PROCESS

1.2 MECHANISM OVERVIEW

1.2.2 MAJOR UNITS AND PAPER PATH

1.3.1 MAJOR UNIT LAYOUT DIAGRAM

1.3 PARTS LAYOUT

1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

Fusing transport drive Revolver drive Drum drive Scanner drive

1.5.1 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 1

5. Transport fan (rear) 6. Transport fan (front) 7. Development cooling fan

1.5 AIR FLOW

1.5.2 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 2

1. Optics cooling fan (front) 2. Optics cooling fan (rear)

3. IPU cooling fan 4. Exhaust fan

ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT

1.6.1 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT 1

1.6 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT

ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES